Home

Model 2400 Series SourceMeter User's Manual

1. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 35 Table 1 12 continued Sweep digits speed and output configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG ON OFF OUTPUT Configure output CONFIGURE OUTPUT INTERLOCK Enable disable interlock DISABLE Disable interlock ENABLE Enable interlock OFF STATE Set up output off state HIGH IMPEDANCE High impedance off state NORMAL Normal off state ZERO Zero off state GUARD Guard mode off state AUTO OFF Enable disable auto off mode DISABLE Keep output on ENABLE Turn output off after each measurement 1 36 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections Connection overview Discusses front rear terminal selection and using a test fixture interlock Connections to DUT Covers various methods for making connections to the DUT including 4 wire remote sensing 2 wire local sensing cable and ohms guard as well as sense and guard selections 2 2 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connection overview WARNING To prevent electric shock test connections must be configured such that the user cannot come in contact with conductors or any DUT that is in contact with the conductors Safe installation requires proper shields barriers and grounding to prevent contact with conductors Operator protection and safety are the responsibility of the person installing the product During power up
2. Idle Arm Arm Counter Layer 1 Trigger Layer Trigger Counter 1 MEASURE Action CONV CONV Filter amp Process e Repeat CONV CONV Reading Conversion Soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after initial sweep trigger if the unit is in the MULTIPLE mode See Section 7 Autorange change mode 11 4 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Arm layer Event Detector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 1 there is a bypass for the Arm Event Detector This bypass can only be used if TLINK or STEST is the selected Arm In Event The bypass serves to jump start operation With the event detector bypass set to ONCE operation will loop around the Arm Event Detector when the output is turned ON The programmable arm in events for the Arm Layer are described as follows IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to continue GPIB Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMER With the Timer selected event detection occurs immediately when the output is turned ON On repeated passes via Another Arm Yes event detection occurs when the programmed timer interval expires If operation takes the Another Arm No route the Timer resets allowing event detection to again occur immediately MANUAL Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is pressed TLINK Event detection oc
3. gt Delay Pulse width delay 80us Minimum pulse width overhead Meas Sig Signal measurement 1 4ms Minimum output off time overhead PD Pulse delay setting With auto zero disabled zero drift will eventually corrupt the accuracy of the pulse mea surement To re establish an accurate pulse measurement enable auto zero or change the speed setting NOTE From the front panel auto zero is controlled from the A D CONTROLS item of the Main Menu For remote operation the SYSTem AZERo command controls auto zero See Auto output off page 5 19 for details 5 8 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse only The fastest pulses are achieved by disabling measurements altogether With the signal not measured as shown in Figure 5 4 the pulse width can be as short as the 150p1sec over head With reference and zero not measured the output off time can be as short as the 1 1msec overhead NOTE Measurements cannot be disabled from the front panel For remote operation measurements can be disabled by sending the SENSe FUNCtion OFF ALL command See Section 18 for details Figure 5 4 Pulse only timing k Delay gt f 1501s Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time gt OV or OA J 1 1 ms gt PD gt Delay Pulse width delay 150us Minimum pulse width overhead 1 1ms Minimum output off time overhead PD
4. Swp Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Idle Arm Trig Swp Cal B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Operation Event Register Idle Arm Trig Swp Cal Operation Event B15 B11 B10 B9 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Enable Register Idle In idle state Logical AND Arm Waiting for arm event F Logical OR Trg Waiting for trigger event Swp Sweeping Cal Calibrating Measurement Event Register The used bits of the Measurement Event Register shown in Figure 15 6 are described as follows Bit BO Limit 1 Fail L1 Set bit indicates that the Limit 1 test has failed Bit B1 Low Limit 2 Fail LL2 Set bit indicates that the Low Limit 2 test has failed Bit B2 High Limit 2 Fail HL2 Set bit indicates that the High Limit 2 test has failed e Bit B3 Low Limit 3 Fail LL3 Set bit indicates that the Low Limit 3 test has failed Bit B4 High Limit 3 Fail HL3 Set bit indicates that the High Limit 3 test has failed e Bit B5 Limits Pass LP Set bit indicates that all limit tests passed Bit B6 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a reading was taken and processed 15 14 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual e Bit B7 Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that th
5. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 7 Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 811 Not an operator or number EE Standard Event 4 812 Mismatched parenthesis EE Standard Event 4 813 Not a number of data handle EE Standard Event 4 814 Mismatched brackets EE Standard Event 4 815 Too many parenthesis EE Standard Event 4 816 Entire expression not parsed EE Standard Event 4 817 Unknown token EE Standard Event 4 818 Error parsing mantissa EE Standard Event 4 819 Error parsing exponent EE Standard Event 4 820 Error parsing value EE Standard Event 4 821 Invalid data handle index EE Standard Event 4 822 Too small for sense range EE Standard Event 4 823 Invalid with source read back on EE Standard Event 4 824 Cannot exceed compliance range EE Standard Event 4 825 Invalid with auto ohms on EE Standard Event 4 826 Attempt to exceed power limit EE Standard Event 4 827 Invalid with ohms guard on EE Standard Event 4 828 Invalid on 1 amp range EE Standard Event 4 829 Invalid on 1kV range EE Standard Event 4 830 Invalid with INF ARM COUNT EE Standard Event 4 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode EE Standard Event 4 900 Internal System Error EE Standard Event 3 1 EE Error Event SE Status Event SYS System Error Event 2 Use following queries to read status registers Standard Event ESR Operation Event STAT OPER Measur
6. If enabled Figure 6 2 shows how the SDM cycle fits into the trigger model See Section 11 for com plete details on the trigger model When the source is turned on triggered an approxi mate 100usec trigger latency occurs before the programmed source level is output As long as the source output stays on trigger latency will not be included in subsequent SDM cycles Trigger latency only occurs when the output makes the transition from off to on See the specifications in Appendix A for definitions of trigger latency as well as other trigger specifications The delay phase of the SDM cycle allows the source to settle before the measurement is performed The delay period depends on how the source delay is configured The source delay can be manually set from 0000 00000 seconds to 9999 9990 seconds If using auto delay the delay depends on which source range is presently selected as summarized in Table 3 4 see Section 3 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 11 The manually set delay up to 9999 999 sec is available to compensate for longer settling required by external circuitry The more capacitance seen at the output the more settling time is required for the source The actual delay period needed can be calculated or deter mined by trial and error For purely resistive loads and at higher current levels the pro grammable delay can be set to Omsec The measure time depends on the
7. RES 10kQ PER_DEV 10kO 100 Where RES is the actual measured resistance of the DUT 10kQ is the reference value RST SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC ON or RES gt CALC MATH UNIT gt CALC MATH EXPR NAME PER_DEV CALC MATH EXPR RES 10e3 10e3 100 gt CALC MATH EXPR NAME PER_DEV CALC STAT ON OUTPUT ON INIT CALC DATA NOTE Parameter lt n gt referenced in the SOUR VOLT and SOUR CURR commands above represent the actual numbers that the user would program All other com mands should be entered as shown 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 29 DELete SELected lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DELete SELected lt name gt Delete user defined math expression Parameters lt name gt user name Name of user defined math expression Description This command is used to remove delete the specified user defined math expression from the catalog Once removed that math expression can no longer be selected You can use the CATalog command to ver ify that the math expression is gone For example if you wish to delete a user defined math expression that is named math1 you would send the following command DELete math1 You cannot delete built in math expressions This will result in error 808 Expression cannot be deleted DELete ALL CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DELete ALL Delete all user define
8. 214 213 212 21 219 28 B Bits 8 through 15 15 6 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The lt NDN gt non decimal numeric parameter type is used to send non decimal values These values require a header B H or Q to identify the data format being sent The letter in the header can be upper or lower case The lt NRf gt numeric representation for mat parameter type is used to send decimal values and does not use a header The follow ing examples show the proper parameter syntax for setting Bits B5 B3 and B2 b101100 Binary format lt NDN gt parameter type h2C Hexadecimal format lt NDN gt parameter type q54 Octal format lt NDN gt parameter type 44 Decimal format lt NRf gt parameter type Valid characters for the non decimal parameter values are shown as follows lt NDN gt format Valid characters Binary Is and Os Hexadecimal 0 through 9 and A through F Octal O through 7 Reading registers Any register in the status structure can be read by using the appropriate query com mand The following explains how to interpret the returned value response message The actual query commands are covered later in this section See Table 15 3 and Table 15 4 through Table 15 7 The response message will be a value that indicates which bits in the register are set That value if not already binary will have to be converted to its binary equivalent For e
9. OUTPut INTerlock STATe lt state gt Description Enable disable interlock state ON or OFF OUTPut INTerlock TRIPped OUTPut SMODe lt name gt SOURce CLEar SOURce CLEar AUTO lt state gt SOURce CLEar AUTO MODE lt name gt Query interlock tripped state 1 tripped Select output off mode state HIMPedance NORMal ZERO or GUARd Turn output source off when in idle state Enable disable auto output off State ON output off after measurement or ON output stays on Auto clear mode Name ALWays every reading default or TCOunt ON when trigger layer entered OFF when leaving trigger layer 831 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off mode is always NORMal Selecting one of the other output off states causes error 2 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled You can set auto output to be off but it will not disable until the DC Mode of operation is selected 13 12 Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMete User s Manual Output configuration programming example Table 13 3 lists the command sequence for output configuration These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows e Interlock enabled e Output off mode hi impedance e Auto off mode on NOTE Connect pins 8 and 9 of the digital I O port together to simulate a closed inter lock switch Otherwise the unit will not turn on its output w
10. STATus MEASurement EVENt 2 STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation EVENt Read Measurement Event Register Read Questionable Event Register Read Operation Event Register Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the status event registers After sending one of these commands and addressing the SourceMeter to talk a value is sent to the computer This value indicates which bits in the appropriate register are set Program event enable registers ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt STATus MEASurement ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Measurement Event Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Questionable Event Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Operation Event Enable Register Description These commands are used to set the contents of the event enable registers Read condition registers CONDition STATus MEASurement CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus OPERation CONDition Read Measurement Condition Read Questionable Register Read Operation Condition Description These query commands are used to read the contents of the condition registers 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 105 Select default conditions PRESet STATus PRESet Return registers to default conditions Description When this command is sent the following SCPI event registers are
11. Select input jacks TERMinals lt name gt ROUTe TERMinals lt name gt Select front or rear panel in out jacks Parameters lt name gt FRONt Front panel in out jacks REAR Rear panel in out jacks Query TERMinals Query state of front rear switch setting Description This command is used to select which set of input output terminals to enable front panel or rear panel 18 60 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SENSe1 subsystem The Sensel subsystem is used to configure and control the measurement functions of the SourceMeter Many of the commands are global where a single command affects all func tions Some commands are unique to a specific function For example you can program a unique range setting for each basic function amps volts and ohms A function does not have to be selected before you can program its various configurations Whenever a programmed function is selected it assumes the programmed states The commands for this subsystem are summarized in Table 18 6 Select measurement functions CONCurrent lt b gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion CONCurrent lt b gt Control concurrent measurements Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable concurrent measurements 1 or ON Enable concurrent measurements Query CONCurrent Query state of concurrent measurements Description This command is used to enable or disable the ability of the instrument to measure more than one function simultaneously When en
12. Description This command is used to determine if the source is in compliance If a 1 is returned then the source is in compliance A 0 indicates that the source is not in compliance The CURRent PROTection TRIPped command is used to check the compliance state of the V Source and the VOLTage PROTection TRIPped command is used to check the compliance state of the I Source Set measurement speed NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 VOLTage DC NPLCycles lt n gt SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Set speed PLC Set speed PLC Set speed PLC Parameters lt n gt 0 01 to 10 Power line cycles per integration DEFault 1 MINimum 0 01 MAXimum 10 Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 01 to 0 1 Power line cycles per integration DEFault 0 1 MINimum 0 01 MAXimum 0 1 Query NPLCycles Query programmed PLC value NPLCycles DEFault Query RST default PLC NPLCycles MINimum Query minimum PLC NPLCycles MAXimum Query maximum PLC Description This command is used to set the integration period speed for measure ments NPLC Number of Power Line Cycles expresses the integration period by basing it on the power line frequency For example for a PLC of 1 the integration period would be 1 60 for 60Hz line power which is 16 67 msec Note that this is a global command Thus if you set the speed for volt age measurements to 10 PLC then current and resistance will also set
13. Figure 6 12C shows the output characteristics for the Model 2420 V Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 21V at 3 15A or 63V at 1 05A Note that when sourcing more than 21V current is limited to 1 05A 2425 and 2430 Figure 6 12D shows the output characteristics of the Models 2425 and 2430 V Source with the 2425 and 2430 DC Mode solid line the SourceMeter can output up to 105V at 1 05A or 21V at 3 15A Note that when sourcing more than 21V current is limited to 1 05A The dotted line in Figure 6 12D shows the extended output for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode which is 105V at 10 5A 2440 Figure 6 12E shows Model 2440 V Source characteristics The Model 2440 can output up to 10 5V at 5 25A or 42V at 1 05A When sourcing more than 10 5V current is limited to 1 05A 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 27 Figure 6 12 V Source output characteristics Limit Limit 1 05A 1 05A 105mA 21mA Source V Source V 21V 210V 21V 1100V A Model 2400 B Model 2410 Limit Limit Model 2430 3 15A Pulse Mode 1 05A Source V Source V 21V 63V 21V 105V C Model 2420 D Models 2425 and 2430 Limit 5 25A 1 05A Source V 10 5V 42V E Model 2440 6 28 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 13 shows the limit lines for the V Source The voltage source limit line represents the maximum source value possible for the presently selected voltage source r
14. NOTE Buffer statistics for V I Q and MATH are calculated and displayed separately For example if ohms readings are displayed all buffer statistics displayed are based on ohms readings Minimum and maximum This mode displays the minimum and maximum readings stored in the buffer The buffer location number and timestamp are also provided for these readings If desired you can go to those buffer locations to obtain more data about the readings Peak to peak This mode displays the peak to peak reading peak to peak Maximum Minimum 9 4 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Average The average mode displays the mean average of all measured readings stored in the buffer The following equation is used to calculate mean where y is the average X is a stored reading nis the number of stored readings Standard deviation This mode displays the standard deviation of buffered readings The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation n r I n 2 pe f 2 x i n 1 i 1 n 1 where y is the standard deviation X is a stored reading nis the number of stored readings Timestamp format Buffer readings can be recalled using the absolute timestamp format or the delta format For the absolute format readings are referenced to zero seconds For the delta format the timestamp indicates the time between the displayed reading and the previous reading Perform the following steps
15. Select trigger layer input line NRf input line Select trigger layer output line NRf output line Select trigger input layer events Event list SOURce DELay SENSe or NONE Select trigger layer output events Event list SOURce DELay SENSe or NONE Trigger SourceMeter if BUS source selected 1 Invalid ignored for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 19 Trigger link Input and output triggers are received and sent via the rear panel TRIGGER LINK connec tor The trigger link has four lines At the factory line 2 is selected for output triggers and line 1 is selected for input triggers These input output line assignments can be changed from the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Configuring triggering page 11 8 The connector pinout is shown in Figure 11 5 Input trigger requirements An input trigger is used to satisfy event detection for a trigger model layer that is config ured for the TRIGGER LINK event See Trigger models page 11 30 The input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 11 6 Figure 11 5 Rear panel pinout Rear Panel Pinout Pin Number Description 1 Trigger Link 1 2 Trigger Link 2 OD 3 Trigger Link 3 6198 4 Trigger Link 4 Q 5 Trigger Link 5 6 Trigger Link 6 7 Ground 8 Ground Figure 11 6 Trigger link input pulse specifications Triggers on Leading Edge TTL Hi
16. cccsssccceecesssneeceeeessseeeceeeesssneeees D 9 Common commands ssoosenesssooreeeessereerssserrerssssreresssereee D 10 SCPI commands cccccccsessssecceesssnecceceessneeeceeessnneeeeeees D 10 Command CODES siessen ER D 10 Typical command Sequences ssssseeseseeeerereereeresesreerere D 12 TEEE command groups sssssssseeseereresreresrrsreresreserreerrseeresrs D 13 Interface function codes ccccccceesssceceeesssnteeecesssnseecceesssteeees D 14 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information TnitrO duction sssusa eiae iia iE E 2 Contact Check Function TintPOCUCH OM eann A N F 2 OVEIVIEW seee ea A E F 2 DOSCHIPHON 25 ccscareeccseeesceasscesasceds eres a a F 2 Blockdi gfam csc ccecslecessaiess saedeseudbncdsesrecsnaiteasesaaacivaneasetanes F 3 Operatioune ieai ra ATEA A N aiai F 4 DUT COMMECTIONS ssierseiieirisiirirrrar neina iris riai F 4 Contact check threshold resistances cccsscccceeessseeeeeees F 5 Contact check failure indications ccccccssseecceeeesseeeeees F 5 Auto and manual ohms ccccccceessssececcessssseeeeeeseseeeeeees F 5 Trigger model Operation 0 eee eseseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaes F 6 Sweep and binning considerations ces eeeeseeseeereeseeeeeeeeees F 6 Sweep limitations 2 cccis cece cases eidessaetisasesiesecesseneveeeeuia F 6 Staircase and custom SWEEPS eee eeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeees F 6 Source Memory SWEEPS cece eeeeseeeeeteeeee
17. lt NDN gt seeen 18 41 FAIL SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT eee 18 42 PASS SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT seee 18 42 BCONtrol lt name gt sssssriiriiiriiiciiiiirisiriirisu 18 43 MODE lt name gt sinisira 18 43 Clear t st result oricine 18 44 sIM Mediate tcc iccseieisectsiiceteseececeiceaceseeseletpssouptbeeatascs 18 44 AUTO lt 0 gt 40 dnd bal be eee ed as 18 44 CAL Cul ate igeceucstedeessesieecsersssasinue veces gadene Genie REA E 18 44 Select Stat StS ssc ccisecvcenassesuceseansesevane devtavvedesbentereeucieenees 18 44 FORMat lt name gt ssnstinin eroii a 18 44 Acquire statistic swecisiisissasiinerieiiiiii ia 18 45 DATAT sospires E ETER RSE 18 45 DISPlay subSyStem sirri sisieriiisiiisnovaeiniiyei eiei 18 46 Control display sic cceccsscessasssdicesessecascdscaesconsstensecnascdeanseaes 18 46 DIGI AIS yehn dink balsa eed ii 18 46 ENA Ble lt b gt ivonne ods ceusetsteervuescediaics 18 46 AL TRIDUCS oricine 18 47 CNDISplay ssscsscesatansheciensbacteveasers eara 18 47 Read display vcs cesngi dain aetieneeiiigerncean 18 47 PATA eir E ENOR 18 47 Define TEXT messages cceseeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeeees 18 48 DATA Sa hinain E e 18 48 STATE DS an ssareccdeasdosanebuemusneanevin 18 48 FORM t SuDSYStOmn seccssrsirsroro nirso isai 18 49 Data formaties tiniest tics Sativa oni 18 49 DATA lt type gt length eee eeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeneees 18 49 Data Cl ment gesinner He oie eee oan 18 51 ELEMents lt it
18. 1kQ 0 05 500 Q 200 000 MQ 1 kQ 100 nA 0 66 10 kQ 0 66 24kQ Source lacc Meas Vace 0 35 5kQ gt 200 000 MQ Source Ingo Meas Vace Source Ing Meas Vac Source Iygc Meas Vace Source Ipce Meas Vice TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 0 15 x accuracy 1 Speed Normal 1 PLC For 0 1 PLC add 0 005 of range to offset specifications except 200mV 1A 10A specification C ranges add 0 05 For 0 01 PLC add 0 05 of range to offset specifications except 200mV 1A 10A SOURCE I MODE MANUAL OHMS Total uncertainty I source accuracy SW 8 S add ae pats eal eee V measure accuracy 4 wire remote sense ccuracies app Ly to 2 or 4 wire mode when proper ly Zeroe i MAN 3 4 wire mode SOURCEV MODE UAL OHMS Total uncertainty V source accuracy 4 Manual ohms only except 2420 2425 2430 2440 for 2Q range and 2410 or 2400 for 200MQ range I measure accuracy 4 wire remote sense p x 2 5 Source readback enabled offset compensation ON Also available on 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 6 WIRE OHMS MODE Available using active ohms guard and guard with similar accuracy enhancement sense Max Guard Output Current 50mA except 1A range Accuracy is load dependent Refer to White Paper no 2033 for calculation pulse mode limited to 0 1 PLC measurement formula 8 Except 2440 default test current is 5pA GUARD OUTPUT IMPEDANCE lt 0 1Q in ohms mode 9 Except 2440 default test cu
19. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 11 Typical NPLC cache test times Typically NPLC caching will decrease source memory sweep times by a factor of three The table below shows typical averaged times for a test consisting of 10 sweeps of four source memory locations with NPLC values for successive memory locations set to 10 1 0 1 and 0 01 respectively NPLC cache conditions Time Auto Zero OFF Caching OFF 5 89s Auto Zero ON Caching OFF 5 89s Auto Zero OFF Caching ON 2 05s Auto Zero ON Caching ON 5 89s Auto Zero OFF Caching ON Cache empty 2 58 V source protection Use V source protection to select the maximum voltage level the SourceMeter can output Available settings are listed as follows SourceMeter 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 V Source protection limit settings 20V 40V 60V 80V 100V 120V 160V NONE gt 160V 20V 40V 100V 200V 300V 400V 500V NONE gt 500V 6V 12V 18V 24V 30V 36V 48V NONE gt 48V 10V 20V 30V 40V 50V 60V 80V NONE gt 80V AV 8V 12V 16V 20V 24V 32V NONE gt 40V These are absolute values with 5 tolerance The power on default is NONE 3 12 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING Even with the voltage protection limit set to the lowest value NEVER touch anything connected to the terminals of the SourceMeter when the OUTPUT is ON Always assume t
20. Basic source measure commands Table 3 5 summarizes basic source measure commands See Section 18 for more informa tion on using these commands NOTE The first command in Table 3 5 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC applies only to the Model 2430 It is not valid for Models 2400 2410 2420 2425 and 2440 Table 3 5 Basic source measure commands Command Description SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC SOURce FUNCtion MODE lt name gt SOURce CURRent MODE FIXed SOURce VOLTage MODE FIXed SOURce CURRent RANGe lt n gt SOURce VOLTage RANGe lt n gt SOURce CURRent LEVel lt n gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt n gt SENSe FUNCtion lt function gt SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt SENSe CURRent RANGe lt n gt SENSe VOLTage RANGe lt n gt OUTPut lt state gt READ Select DC Mode of operation Model 2430 only Select source function name VOLTage or CURRent Select fixed sourcing mode for I source Select fixed sourcing mode for V source Select I source range n range Select V source range n range Set I source amplitude n amplitude in amps Set V source amplitude n amplitude in volts Select measure function function VOLTage or CURRent Set current compliance n compliance Set voltage compliance n compliance Set current measure range n range Set voltage measure range n range Select output state state ON or
21. Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB e 0118 929 7500 Fax 0118 929 7519 Flat 2B Willocrissa 14 Rest House Crescent Bangalore 560 001 91 80 509 1320 21 Fax 91 80 509 1322 Viale San Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 635333 Fax 0183 630821 c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr 169 70 Solna 08 509 04 679 Fax 08 655 26 10 Kriesbachstrasse 4 8600 D bendorf 01 821 94 44 Fax 01 820 30 81 1FL 85 Po Ai Street Hsinchu Taiwan R O C e 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 Copyright 2001 Keithley Instruments Inc Printed in the U S A 4 02
22. NEVER touch anything connected to the terminals of the SourceMeter when the OUTPUT is ON Always assume that a hazardous voltage gt 30V rms is present when the OUTPUT is ON To prevent damage to DUT devices under test or external circuitry DO NOT program the V Source to levels that exceed the voltage pro tection limit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 83 Set delay NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used Therefore the follow ing commands for source delay are ignored DELay lt n gt SOURce 1 DELay lt n gt Manually set source delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 999 9999 Specify delay in seconds MINimum 0 seconds MAXimum 999 9999 seconds DEFault 0 seconds Query DELay Query delay DELay DEFault Query RST default delay DELay MINimum Query lowest allowable delay DELay MAXimum Query highest allowable delay Description This command is used to manually set a delay settling time for the source After the programmed source is turned on this delay occurs to allow the source level to settle before a measurement is taken Note that this delay is the same for both the I Source and V Source Do not confuse this source delay with the trigger delay The source delay is part of the device action SDM cycle while the trigger delay occurs before the device action See Section 11 Trigger models for more information Auto delay can instead be used to automatically
23. Select sweep type Staircase sweep program START STOP STEP Log sweep program START STOP POINTS Custom sweep program parameters Program number of sweep points Set individual point values Set first point value Source memory sweep set parameters Set first point value Set number of points Set sweep count Program sweep count value Never ending sweep Set sweep ranging mode Best fixed range based on maximum value Auto range during sweep Set fixed source range Set display number of digits Select 3 5 4 5 5 5 or 6 5 Set measurement speed Fast speed Medium speed Normal Maximum accuracy Program NPLCs number power line cycles Configure data store timestamp Absolute timestamp Delta timestamp 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 33 Table 1 11 Output and display configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG ON OFF OUTPUT CONFIGURE OUTPUT INTERLOCK DISABLE ENABLE OFF STATE HIGH IMPEDANCE NORMAL ZERO GUARD AUTO OFF DISABLE ENABLE CONFIG EDIT or TOGGLE DISABLE DISPLAY NOW NEVER SWEEP STORE Configure output Enable disable interlock Disable interlock Enable interlock Set up output off state High impedance off state Normal off state Zero off state Guard mode off state Enable disable auto off mode Keep output on Turn output off after each measurement Enable disable displa
24. Source delay to set these delays Additional delay for a sweep is available by using the trigger delay This user specified delay 0000 0000 to 9999 99990 seconds occurs before each SDM cycle device action of the sweep Thus the trigger delay is executed before each new source point in the sweep See Section 11 Trigger models and Configuring triggering to set trigger delay NOTE For linear staircase log staircase and custom sweeps source delay trigger delay and NPLC settings are global and affect all sweep points simultaneously For source memory sweep only both the source delay and NPLC settings can be set to different values for each point in the sweep Trigger count and sweep points The trigger count and number of sweep points should be the same or multiples of one another For example with five sweep points and a trigger count of 10 the sweep will run twice See Section 11 for details on trigger count Performing sweeps Procedures for the various sweep types are covered below NOTE For the Model 2430 the following procedure assumes that the DC mode of oper ation is selected Vsrc or Isrc displayed in source field If in the Pulse Mode Vpls or Ipls displayed you can return to the DC Mode by pressing CONFIG V or I selecting the SHAPE menu item and then selecting PULSE Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is alread
25. Used to enable or disable an instrument operation 0 or OFF disables the operation and or ON enables the operation Example CALCulatel STATe ON Enable Calc 1 math expression 14 12 Remote Operations lt name gt lt NRf gt lt n gt lt numlist gt lt NDN gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Name parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group Example lt name gt NEVer NEXt TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXt Numeric representation format This parameter is a number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an expo nent 2 3E6 Example SYSTem KEY 11 Press EXIT key from over the bus Numeric value A numeric value parameter can consist of an NRf num ber or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum MAXimum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is pro grammed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the lowest allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value Examples ARM TIMer 0 1 Sets timer to 100 msec ARM TIMer DEFault Sets timer to 0 1 sec ARM TIMer MINimum Sets timer to 1 msec ARM TIMer MAXimum Sets timer to 99999 99 sec Numlist Specify one or more numbers for a list Example STATus QUEue ENABIle 110 222 Enable errors 110 through 222 Non decimal numeric This parameter
26. User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Mode 2430 only 5 17 Filter Filtering cannot be used while the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode You can configure the filter but you cannot enable it Pressing the FILTER key displays the Invalid in Pulse Mode message For remote operation the SENSe AVERage STATe lt b gt command which is used to enable the filter causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Auto range Measurement auto range cannot be used enabled while in the Pulse Mode Pressing the AUTO range key displays the Invalid in Pulse Mode message For remote operation the SENSe RANGe AUTO lt b gt commands which are used to enable disable auto range cause error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Concurrent measurements For remote operation more than one function can be measured simultaneously while in the DC Mode However in the Pulse Mode only one function can be measured for each pulse The SENSe FUNCtion CONCurrent lt b gt command which enables disables concurrent measurements causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode The SENSe FUNCtion ON ALL command will select the ohms function See Section 18 SENSel subsystem Select measurement functions for details on concurrent measurements Ohms source readback For DC Mode operation ohms source readback can be enabled The instrument measures the actual source value for ohms measurement and then uses that measured value for the re
27. 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 10A 5A 5 25A 3 15A 2425 and 2430 DC mode 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only 6 4 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Compliance examples When the SourceMeter goes into real compliance the Cmpl label for the compliance dis play will flash When the SourceMeter goes into range compliance the units label mA will flash instead For the following examples labels in boldface type indicate that they are flashing Measurement Range 100mA Compliance Setting Cmpl 075 000 mA Flashing Cmpl indicates that real compliance has occurred The output is clamped at 75mA Measurement Range 10uA Compliance Setting Cmpl 075 000 pA Flashing mA indicates that range compliance has occurred The output is clamped at 10 5pA Compliance principles Compliance acts as a clamp If the output reaches the compliance value the SourceMeter will attempt to prevent the output from exceeding that value This action implies that the source will switch from a V source to an I source or from an I source to a V source when in compliance The clamping value is determined either by a user defined value compli ance setting or the measurement range range compliance since the unit will not output more than it is configured to measure Passive loa
28. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 23 External trigger example In a simple test system you may want to close a switching channel and then measure the resistance of the DUT connected to that channel This test system is shown in Figure 11 9 which uses a SourceMeter to measure 10 DUTs switched by a Model 7011 multiplexer card in a Model 7001 7002 Switch System Figure 11 9 DUT test system DUT i 1 Ey ame DUT 7 O KEITHLEY WIRE F euT 2 O e Si DUT O gt Een ORG ee 10 10 Giaits sPeeD onec GONGL MENU O 7011 MUX Card SourceMeter 11 24 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Trigger link connections The Trigger link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 11 10 Trigger link of the SourceMeter is connected to Trigger link IN or OUT of the switching mainframe Note that with the default trigger settings of the switching mainframe line 1 is an input and line 2 is an output Figure 11 10 Trigger link connections 7001 or 7002 Switch System WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY MADE IN USA I h CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WIT SAME TYME AND RATING j Trigger Link SourceMeter WARNING NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY B Trigger an Link Cable LINE FUSE 8501
29. 5 00000 A 50 uA 0 10 5 4 mA 500 pA TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 0 15 x accuracy specification C MAX OUTPUT POWER 22W 66W for Model 2420 110W for Model 2425 and 2430 55W for Model 2440 four quadrant source or sink operation SOURCE SINK LIMITS Model 2400 1 05A 21V 105 mA 210V Model 2410 1 05A 21V 21 mA 1100V Model 2420 3 15A 21V 1 05A 63V Model 2425 3 15A 21V 1 05A 105V Model 2430 1 05A 105V 10 5A 105V pulse mode only Model 2440 5 25A 10 5V 1 05A 42V CURRENT REGULATION Line 0 01 of range Load 0 01 of range except Model 2440 5A range 0 05 100pA VOLTAGE LIMIT Bipolar voltage limit compliance set with single value Min 0 1 of range OVERSHOOT lt 0 1 typical IMA step RL 10kQ 20V range for Model 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 10V range for Model 2440 ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSIENT RESPONSE TIME 30us minimum for the output to recover to its spec following a step change in load COMMAND PROCESSING TIME Maximum time required for the output to begin to change following the receipt of SOURce VOLTagelCURRent lt nrf gt command Autorange On 10ms Autorange Off 7ms OUTPUT SETTLING TIME Time required to reach 0 1 of final value after command is processed 100us typical Resistive load 10pA to 100mA range OUTPUT SLEW RATE 30 Model 2400 0 5V us 200V range 100mA compliance
30. 75mA mA 10mA 10 5mA_ Range Cmpl 075 000 mA 75mA MA ImA 1 05mA Range Over the bus use the appropriate SCPI commands to determine the measurement range and the compliance setting Once those parameters are known compare them as previ ously explained to determine the compliance in effect 6 6 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual When sourcing current use the following commands to acquire the measurement range and the compliance setting VOLTage RANGe Query voltage measurement range VOLTage PROTection Query voltage compliance limit When sourcing voltage use the following commands to acquire the measurement range and the compliance setting CURRent RANGe Query current measurement range CURRent PROTection Query current compliance limit Overheating protection Proper ventilation is required to keep the SourceMeter from overheating See WARNING CAUTION located at the beginning of Section 3 for details on maintain ing proper ventilation The SourceMeter has an over temperature protection circuit that will turn the output off in the event that the SourceMeter overheats If the output trips due to overheating a message indicating this condition will be displayed You will not be able to turn the output back on until the SourceMeter cools down NOTE Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 The cooling fan will run at high speed while in the overheated
31. EDIT or TOGGLE Table 1 11 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 1 27 Getting Started These various configuration menus are covered in detail in the pertinent sections of this manual Table 1 6 Measurement configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG MEAS V SENSE MODE 2 WIRE 4 WIRE CMPL RANGE SYNC CONFIG MEAS I CMPL RANGE S YNC CONFIG MEAS Q CONFIG OHMS SOURCE MANUAL AUTO SENSE MODE 2 WIRE 4 WIRE GUARD OHMS CABLE OFFSET COMPENSATION DISABLE ENABLE SRC RDBK DISABLE ENABLE CONFIG FCTN CONFIGURE FUNCTION POWER OFF COMP OHMS VOLT COEFF VAR ALPHA DEV Configure V measure 2 wire mode local sensing 4 wire mode remote sensing Enable ON or disable OFF measure and compli ance range synchronization Configure I measure Enable ON or disable OFF measure and compli ance range synchronization Configure ohms measure Select manual or auto source for ohms Select 2 wire or 4 wire mode Select ohms or cable guard Enable disable offset compensation Enable disable source readback Configure functions Enable power function Enable offset compensated ohms program parameters Enable voltage coefficient program parameters Enable varistor alpha program parameters Enable percent deviation program parameters 1 28 Getting Started Table 1 7 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source and range con
32. Front rear terminals ROUTe TERMinals Enable disable CALC1 CALCulate1 STATe CALC1 math expression CALCulate1 MATH EXPRession NAME CALC2 input path CALCulate2 FEED REL value CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet REL on off CALCulate2 NULL STATe Limit 1 on off CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe Limit 1 fail conditions CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL 10 10 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 10 2 continued Source memory saved configurations Mode Remote command Limit 1 bit pattern CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 Enable disable Limit X CALCulate2 LIMitX STATe Limit X upper limit CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer DATA Limit X upper bit pattern CALCulate2 LIMitXx UPPer SOURce2 Limit X lower limit CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer DATA Limit X lower bit pattern CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer SOURce2 Composite limits bit pattern CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 Next pass memory location CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation Trigger delay TRIGger DELay X CURRent or VOLTage Limit X Limit 2 3 5 12 Not available when the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode Sweep branching When using a Source Memory Sweep while performing limit tests the normal sequence of sweep memory points can be changed This is useful when based on the results of an ini tial test a different set of tests are needed The sweep can branch to a specified memory location point or proceed to the next mem ory location in the list Wh
33. Limit 2 test Min max limits for current reading Summary The current measurement and the result of the test pass or fail is stored in the buffer SML 005 Forward Voltage Test e Source I Measure V e Limit 2 test Min max limits for voltage reading e Summary This test is the same as the test at memory location 002 except the source current is reversed to properly bias the diode that was installed backwards SML 006 Reverse Breakdown Test e Source I Measure V Limit 2 test Min max limits for voltage reading e Summary This test is the same as the test at memory location 003 except the source current is reversed to properly bias the diode that was installed backwards 10 14 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SML 007 Leakage Current Test e Source V Measure I e Limit 2 test Min max limits for current reading e Summary This test is the same as the test at memory location 004 except the source voltage is reversed to properly bias the diode that was installed backwards Test results The test results for the 4 point source memory sweep are stored in the buffer Stored readings are accessed by pressing the RECALL key Each of the four read ing numbers are preceded by a P or an F to indicate the Pass or Fail result of the corresponding test See Section 9 for details on the data store Configuring and running a sweep Front
34. Measuring resistance With remote sensing enabled 4 wire resis tance measurements can be made NOTE See Section 2 for details on sensing 18 108 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select guard mode GUARd lt name gt SYSTem GUARd lt name gt Select guard mode Parameters lt name gt OHMS Ohms guard mode CABLe Cable guard mode Query GUARd Query guard mode Description This command is used to select the guard mode OHMS guard is a low impedance guard drive used for in circuit resistance measurements Ohms guard is not available for SourceMeters that have 1A 3A and or 10A ranges source or measure CABLE guard provides a high impedance guard drive that is used to eliminate leakage currents in cabling and test fixtures When performing 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD out put state The OUTPut 1 SMODe GUARd command is used to select the GUARD output off state NOTE See Section 2 for details on guarding Initialize memory INITialize SYSTem MEMory INITialize Initializes battery backed RAM Description When this command is used the following actions to initialize battery backed RAM occur e TRACe data store data is lost buffer size is reset to 100 and timestamp is set to the absolute format e SOURce1 LIST CURR and VOLT are reset to OA and OV respectively Deletes all user defined math expressions See CALCulate 1 subsystem e All 100 memory locations
35. Provides detailed information on com mands to configure the measurement function e Acquiring readings Describes commands to acquire post processed readings both trigger and acquire readings and to perform a single measurement 17 2 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command summary The signal oriented measurement commands are used to acquire readings You can use these high level instructions to control the measurement process These commands are summarized in Table 17 1 Table 17 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary Command Description CONFigure lt function gt Configures SourceMeter for measurements on specified function Output turns on CONFigure Returns active function s FETCh Requests latest readings READ Performs an INITiate and a FETCh MEASure lt function gt One shot measurement mode Performs a CONFigure and a READ Configuring measurement function NOTE For the Model 2430 the CONFigure commands are not valid while in the Pulse Mode They result in error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode COMFigure lt function gt Parameters lt function gt CURRent DC Amps function VOLTage DC Volts function RESistance Ohms function Query CONFigure Returns active function s Description This command configures the instrument to a specific setup for mea surements on the specified function The READ command is then typ i
36. Query FAIL Query when Limit 1 test failure occurs Description This command is used to specify the condition that will cause Limit 1 test to fail With IN specified the test will fail when the SourceMeter goes into compliance With OUT specified the test will fail when the SourceMeter comes out of compliance DATA lt n gt CALCulate2 LIMitx LOWer DATA lt n gt Specify lower LIMIT x x 2 3 5 12 CALCulate2 LIMitx UPPer DATA lt n gt Specify upper LIMIT x x 2 3 5 12 Parameters lt n gt 9 999999e20 to Specify limit value 9 999999e20 DEFault Set specified lower limit to 1 Set specified upper limit to 1 MINimum Set specified limit to 9 999999e20 MAXimum Set specified limit to 9 999999e20 Query UPPer Query specified upper limit UPPer DEFault Query RST default upper limit UPPer MINimum Query lowest allowable upper limit UPPer MAXimum Query largest allowable upper limit LOWer Query specified lower limit LOWer DEFault Query RST default lower limit LOWer MINimum Query lowest allowable lower limit LOWer MAXimum Query largest allowable lower limit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Description SCPI Command Reference 18 37 These commands are used to set the upper and lower limits for LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 through LIMIT 12 tests The actual limit depends on which measurement function is currently selected For example a limit value of 1p is 1pA for the amps function and 1V for th
37. SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual FAIL SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT PASS SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT Specify fail source memory location CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation lt NRf gt NEXT Specify pass source memory location Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location point NEXT Next memory location point in list Query Description present location 1 SMLocation Query pass or fail source memory location While using a Source Memory Sweep when performing limit tests the sweep can branch to a specified memory location point or proceed to the next memory location in the list When a memory location is specified with PASS the sweep will branch to that memory location if the test is successful PASS condition If not successful FAIL condition the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep pro ceeds to the next memory location present location 1 in the list regardless of the outcome of the test PASS or FAIL condition When a memory location is specified with FAIL the sweep will branch to that location on a failure If not PASS condition the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep proceeds to the next memory location present loca tion 1 in the list regardless of the o
38. SYSTem PRESet default is ASCII 6 When brackets are left out of an expression it is assumed that it is referencing the first vector point in the array i e VOLT is the same as VOLT O 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 33 Enable and read math expression result STATe lt b gt CALCulate 1 STATe lt b gt Control CALC1 Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable CALC1 calculation 1 or ON Enable CALC1 calculation Query STATe Query state on or off of CALC1 Description This command is used to enable or disable the CALC1 calculation When enabled the selected math expression will be performed when the SourceMeter is triggered to perform the programmed source measure operations After the SourceMeter returns to idle you can read the result of the selected math expression using the CALC1 DATA command See next command When disabled the CALC1 DATA command will return the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 DATA CALCulate 1 DATA2 Read CALC1 result Description This query command is used to read the result of the CALC1 calcula tion The largest valid calculation result can be 9 9e37 which defined by SCPI is infinity For scalar math non vectored math this command is used to return calculation results for all the programmed source measure points For example if 20 source measure operations were performed this com mand will return 20 calculation results For v
39. Select COUNT then press ENTER Choose FINITE then press ENTER Using the cursor and RANGE keys change the displayed ARM COUNT to 2 then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu Select TRIG LAYER then press ENTER Select TRIGGER OUT then press ENTER Choose LINE then press ENTER Select Line 1 then press ENTER Select EVENTS then press ENTER Using cursor and RANGE keys set the SOURCE and MEAS events to ON then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to the CONFIGURE TRIG LAYER menu Select DELAY then press ENTER Using the cursor and RANGE keys set the delay to 0 1s then press ENTER Select COUNT then press ENTER Use the cursor and RANGE keys to set the count to 10 then press ENTER Press EXIT twice to return to normal display After configuring the various trigger parameters press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn on the output Press TRIG to trigger the unit after which it cycles 10 times through the trigger layer A second TRIG press is required to trigger the unit the second time and it then completes the second cycle through the trigger layer 11 22 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 8 Trigger model for front panel trigger example Yes Arm Event Detector Trigger Arm Layer Count 10 Trigger Layer 0 1 sec Trigger Delay SOURCE Action TLink Trigger Out DELAY Action MEASURE Action TLink Trigger Out
40. Select source memory start location n location SOURce MEMory RECall lt n gt Return to specified setup n memory location SOURce SAVE lt n gt Save setup in memory n memory location 10 26 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source memory sweep programming example As an example of source memory sweep operation assume a three point sweep with the following operating modes Source Memory Location 1 source voltage measure current 10V source value Source Memory Location 2 source current measure voltage 100mA source value Source Memory Location 3 source current measure current 100mA source value Table 10 8 summarizes the basic remote command sequence for performing the basic source memory sweep described above Table 10 8 Source memory sweep programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SENS FUNC CONC OFF Turn off concurrent functions SOUR FUNC MEM Source memory sweep mode SOUR MEM POIN 3 Number memory points 3 SOUR MEM STAR 1 Start at memory location 1 SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function SENS FUNC CURR DC SOUR VOLT 10 SOUR MEM SAVE 1 SOUR FUNC CURR SENS FUNC VOLT DC SOUR CURR 100E 3 SOUR MEM SAVE 2 SENS FUNC CURR DC SOUR MEM SAVE 3 TRIG COUN 3 OUTP ON READ Current sense function 10V source voltage Save in source memory location 1 Current source function Vo
41. Source 0 20 msec 11 32 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 14 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model remote operation O See Note Note The following commands place the SourceMeter into idle DCL SDC ABORt RST SYSTem PREset and RCL idle Arm ARM Layer ARM SOURce DIRection No IMMediate 7 BUS ARM COUNt TIMer ACCeptor Another lt n gt lNF MANual 1 TLINk Arm Event NSTest Detector Relat a ARM QUTPut f gt NONEITEXIt es ARM OUTPut NONE TENTer Trigger Layer ACCeptor TRIGger COUNt lt n gt 1 TRIGger SOURce Trigger In IMMediate Source TLINk TRIGger INPut_ Source Event SOURce Detector SOURce PULSe DELay Pulse Delay lt n gt 0 0 sec TRIGger OUTPut gt SOURce TRIGger INPut_ Delay Event DELay Detector TRIGger OUTPut gt DELay TRIGger INPut_ Sense Event SENSe Detector SOURCE Action SOURce PULSe WIDTh GPIB Default lt n gt Pulse Width 0 0002 lt gt Output Trigger MEASURE GPIB default parameter for Action TRIGger OUTPut is NONE TRIGger OUTPut H gt SENSe Trigger In Source 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 33 Idle As with DC Mode front panel operation the SourceMeter is taken out of idle by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key For DC Mode remote operation the output must be on and then an initiate command must be sent to take the instrument out of idle For
42. Sweep types Sweeps allow you to program the instrument to step through specific voltage and current values and perform measurements at each source value The four basic sweep types which are described in the following paragraphs include e Linear staircase Logarithmic staircase e Custom e Source memory NOTE Only voltage or current sweeps can be performed Sweep readings are automat ically stored in the buffer See Section 9 for details on the data store buffer Linear staircase sweep As shown in Figure 10 1 this sweep steps from a start source value to an ending stop source value Programmable parameters include the start stop and step source levels When this sweep is triggered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start source level The output will then change in equal steps until the stop source level is reached With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting Note that the delay cannot change once a sweep is configured and running and is the same for all steps 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 3 Figure 10 1 Linear staircase sweep lt Delay gt i Stop Step lt Delay gt lt Delay gt Start gt o Measure Measure Measure Measure X Measurement point 10 4 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manua
43. TIME and STATus SENSe 1 Query data format elements CALCulate lt item list gt Specify CALC data elements CALC TIME or CALC STATus CALCulate Query CALC data elements SOURce2 lt name gt Specify SOURce 2 data format ASCii ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BIN SOURce2 Query SOURce data format Note Byte order RST default is NORMal SYSTem PRESet default is SWAPped Table 18 4 OUTPut command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory OUTPut 1 v STATe lt b gt Turn source on or off OFF v STATe Query state of source v INTerlock Path to control interlock STATe lt b gt Enable or disable interlock OFF STATe Query state of interlock TRIPped Interlock tripped 1 no or 0 yes SMODe lt name gt Select output off mode HIMPedance NORMal NOR Mal v ZERO or GUARd SMODe Query output off mode 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off mode is always NORMal This command is invalid error 831 2 For the Model 2410 default is GUARd 18 10 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 5 ROUTe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory ROUTe TERMinals lt name gt Select in out terminals FRONt or REAR FRONt v TERMinals Query in out terminals Table 18 6 SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI
44. The programmable trigger in sources for the Trigger Layer are described as follows IMMEDIATE With Immediate selected event detection for the three detectors is satis fied immediately Operation proceeds through the Trigger Layer to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions TRIGGER LINK With Trigger Link selected event detection at each enabled detector occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link page 11 19 For example if the Trigger In Event for the Source Event Detector is ON operation will hold up at that detector until an input trigger is received If however the Source Event Detector is disabled OFF operation will not hold up Operation will continue and perform the Source action With the Trigger Link Trigger In Source selected operation will go around the Source Event Detector as shown in Figure 11 1 by setting the event detector bypass to ONCE Trigger delay A programmable delay is available before the Source Action The Trigger Delay can be manually set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 seconds Note that this delay is separate from the Delay Action of the SDM cycle The Delay Action is discussed next Source delay and measure actions The SDM cycle of the SourceMeter consists of three actions Source Delay and Measure SOURCE Action Any programmed output voltage or current level changes are performed DELAY Action This programmable delay is us
45. When sourcing current the RANGE keys are inoperative 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 17 NOTE 2400 With the 200V V Source range selected the highest current measure ment range is 100mA With the 1A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2410 With the 1kV V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 20mA With the 1A or 100mA I Source range selected the highest volt age measurement range is 20V 2420 With the 60V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 3A I Source range selected the highest voltage measure ment range is 20V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode With the 100V V Source range selected the high est current measurement range is 1A With the 3A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2440 With the 40V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1 05A With the 5A I Source range selected the highest voltage mea surement range is 10 5V Measurement range is also limited by the compliance setting For example if voltage compliance is 1V 2V compliance range the highest voltage measure ment range that can be selected is 2V Step 4 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will turn on to indicate the output is on Step 5 Observe readings on the display The SourceMet
46. a switch to ground as shown in Figure 13 4A If the lid of the test fixture opens Figure 13 4B the switch opens and the interlock line goes high turning the OUTPUT of the SourceMeter OFF high impedance The output can only be turned back on by first clos ing the lid of the test fixture and then pressing the OUTPUT ON OFF key Figure 13 4 Using test fixture interlock SourceMeter Test Fixture Zae ee ee e acai I Interlock I Pin 8 l I Interlock l I ii l i Safety Interlock Digital VO i l Switch Lid Closed GND i i Pin 5 or 9 i i I A SourceMeter OUTPUT can be turned on SourceMeter Test Fixture 22 aa ee ee e I Interlock I Pin 8 l I Interlock l l ws l Safety Interlock I Digital VO i l Switch Lid Open GND i i Pin 5 or 9 i i I B SourceMeter OUTPUT turns off NOTE Safety interlock can be driven by Digital I O Allow 100us settling and response time The Digital I O lines are edge sensitive open collector and signals should be debounced to avoid erratic operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 13 7 Front panel output configuration The output is configured from the CONFIGURE OUTPUT menu and is structured as fol lows Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the sweep menu while dashes indi cate options Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change operate options Configure OUTPUT menu P
47. filter and limit configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG REL Program REL value CONFIG FILTER Configure filter CONFIGURE FILTERING AVERAGE MODE Select filter average mode MOVING Moving average filter REPEAT Repeat average filter AVERAGE COUNT Program filter average count 1 30 Getting Started Table 1 8 continued 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Rel filter and limit configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG LIMIT CONFIGURE LIMITS MENU DIGOUT SIZE 3 BIT 4 BIT MODE GRADING IMMEDIATE END SORTING AUTO CLEAR DISABLE ENABLE H W LIMITS CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE FAIL MODE IN OUT S W LIMITS CONTROL DISABLE ENABLE LOLIM HILIM PASS PASS DIGIO PATTERN SRC MEM LOC NEXT LOCATION EOT MODE BUSY BUSY EOT EOT Configure limit tests Program Digital I O bit patterns for pass fail Select I O number of bits 3 bit size 4 bit size Select Digital I O mode Pass if within HI LO limits Stop test after first failure Stop test at end of sweep Fail if outside limits program fail pattern Enable disable auto clear Disable auto clear Enable auto clear program pass fail pattern Control and set fail mode for Limit 1 compliance test Control Limit 1 test Disable Limit test Enable Limit 1 test Select Limit 1 fail mode Fail when in compliance program bit pattern Fail when out of co
48. intG intG OutputCmd intGPIB OutputCmd intGPIB OutputCmd intGPIB OutputCmd intGPIB OutputCmd intGPIB up Source Memory CALC2 LIM2 STAT ON CALC2 LIM2 UPP 3E 2 CALC2 LIM2 LOW 2E 2 CALC2 LIM2 UPP SOUR2 4 CALC2 LIM2 LOW SOUR2 5 CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 14 CALC2 CLIM MODE GRAD CALC2 CLIM BCON END Sweep Operation 10 29 Limit2 on Upper Limit to Set Set 30mA Set 20mA Set Pattern for Upper Limit 2 Failure Set Pattern for Lower Limit 2 Failure Set Digital Output Pattern for Limit 2 Passing Lower Limit to Digital Output Digital Output Set Limit Results to Grading Set Binning Control to End CALC2 CLIM PASS SML NEXT Set SML Pass Location CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML 100 Set SOUR MEM SAVE 2 Location 3 Call Call Call Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG PIB PIB PIB S RST SOUR FUNC VOLT SEN S FUNC CURR DC SENS CURR PROT SENS CURR RANGE 105 li SOUR DEL 1 SOUR VOLT 10 CALC2 FEED CURR CALC2 LIM1 STAT ON SML Fail Location Save in Source Memory Locat
49. is sent to the computer The key press code number for the last key pressed either physically or with key is sent to the computer 12 19 16 31 3014 13 28 2711 10 Parameters lt NRf gt 1 RANGE up arrow key 17 2 SOURCE down arrow key 18 3 Left arrow key 19 4 MENU key 20 5 FCTN key 21 6 FILTER key 22 7 SPEED key 23 8 EDIT key 24 9 AUTO key 25 10 Right arrow key 26 11 EXIT key 27 12 V SOURCE key 28 13 LIMITS key 29 14 STORE key 30 15 V MEAS key 31 16 TOGGLE key 32 4 WIRE SENSE INPUT OUTPUT A nov sv noo PEAK PEAK _ PEAK l Ho 250v A i TERMINALS ON OFF RANGE down arrow key ENTER key SOURCE key TRIG key RECALL key MEAS key LOCAL key ON OFF key not used SOURCE up arrow key SWEEP key COMFIG key Q key REL key DIGITS key FRONT REAR key 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 115 Read version of SCPI standard VERSion SYSTem VERSion Read SCPI version Description This query command is used to read the version of the SCPI standard being used by the SourceMeter Example code 1996 0 The above response message indicates the version of the SCPI standard RS 232 interface LOCal SYSTem LOCal Take SourceMeter out of remote Description Normally during RS 232 communications front panel keys are opera tional However the user may wish to lock out front panel keys during RS 232 communic
50. is subtracted from itself As a result a zero reading is displayed Pressing REL a second time disables rel Defining a rel value A unique rel value can be established for the selected measurement function from the front panel as follows 1 Press CONFIG and then REL The present rel value will be displayed 2 Set the desired rel value See Section 1 Rules to navigate menus for details 3 With the desired rel value displayed press ENTER The SourceMeter will return to the normal source measure display with rel enabled The reading will reflect the defined rel value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative and Math 8 3 Remote rel programming Rel commands Table 8 1 summarizes rel commands See Section 18 CALCulate2 subsystem for addi tional information Table 8 1 Rel commands Command Description CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet lt n gt Define null rel value n rel value CALCulate2 NULL STATe lt state gt Enable disable rel state ON or OFF CALCulate2 NULL ACQuire Automatically acquire rel value must have non overflowed reading Rel programming example Table 8 2 lists commands for setting up and enabling rel These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows e Rel value 5 e Rel state enabled Table 8 2 Rel programming example Command Description gt CALC2 NULL OFFS 5 Rel value 5 gt CALC2 NULL STAT ON Enable rel 8 4 Relative and M
51. lt q and gt keys control cursor position A displayed arrow on the bottom line indicates there are one or more additional items or messages to select from Use the appropriate cursor key to display them A source or parameter value range is changed by placing the cursor on the range designator i e k M G etc and using the SOURCE A or Y or RANGE A or V keys Note that when the next higher or lower source range is selected the reading increases or decreases by a decade A parameter value is keyed in by placing the cursor on the digit to be changed and using one of the following methods NOTE You can clear a parameter value by pressing the MENU key Use the SOURCE A or y or RANGE A or y keys to increment or decrement the digit Use the number keys 0 through 9 to key in the value at the selected digit Use the key to change source value polarity regardless of cursor position Boolean selections such as ON OFF and HIGH LOW are toggled by placing the cursor on the selection and pressing a SOURCE or RANGE up or down arrow key A change is only executed when ENTER is pressed Entering an invalid parameter generates an error and the entry is ignored However entering an out of range value too small or too large selects the lower or upper limit respectively The EXIT key is used to back out of the menu structure Any change that is not entered is cancelled when EXIT is pressed Editing source and compliance va
52. sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 7B 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 19 Figure 6 7 Model 2425 2430 operating boundaries T mp S30 C 1 Source IV HI Source 100 Duty Cycle A Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode lt 60 Duty Cycle l 1 Source V III Source 8 Duty Cycle B Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt 5 Duty Cycle 6 20 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 2440 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2440 are shown in Figure 6 8 In this drawing the 5A 10V and 1A 40V magnitudes are nominal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 5 25A 10 5V and 1 05A 42V These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 and Power equa tions to avoid shutdown page 6 7 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output operation Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 5A and 1A ranges are derated as follows 5A Range Limits linearly derated from 5A OV to 2 5A 10V 5A OV to 2 5
53. sweep Start Current ImA Stop Current 10mA Step Current ImA Voltage Compliance 1V Source Delay 100ms Figure 10 8 shows typical test connections for this test and Figure 10 9 shows a typical diode curve Note that the diode anode is connected to INPUT OUTPUT HI and the cath ode is connected to INPUT OUTPUT LO These connections are required to properly for ward bias the diode for the purposes of the test The test connections could also be reversed by using negative sweep voltage parameters Figure 10 8 Connections for diode I V tests c KEITHLEY awiRe INPUT SENSE H MEAS eor DISPLAY TOGGLE POWER ja os Figure 10 9 Diode I V curve Vreverse l l leakage Vforward 10 24 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 10 4 lists the command sequence for the diode programming example Table 10 4 Staircase sweep programming example diode test Command Description RST SOUR FUNC CURR SENS VOLT PROT 1 TRIG COUN 10 SOUR DEL 0 1 OUTP ON READ SENS FUNC CONC OFF SENS FUNC VOLT DC SOUR CURR START 1E 3 SOUR CURR STOP 10E 3 SOUR CURR STEP 1E 3 SOUR CURR MODE SWE SOUR SWE RANG AUTO SOUR SWE SPAC LIN Restore GPIB default conditions Turn off concurrent functions Current source function Volts sense function 1V voltage compliance ImA start current 10mA stop current ImA step cu
54. tests the second element of the net work and last test cycle 3 3V tests the third element After the three test cycles are fin ished the resistor network is placed in the appropriate bin Figure 12 4 End binning Test1 Test2 Test3 Digital I O Pass Fail Pass Notification Fail 12 8 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pass condition For this discussion assume that all grading mode limit tests pass After the three limit tests pass the PASS message is displayed and operation drops down to the Binning Control decision block Note that the pass condition can also be determined with the CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL query via remote Immediate binning For immediate binning the testing process stops The SourceMe ter outputs the pass pattern via the Digital I O port to the component handler to perform the binning operation End binning For end binning operation drops down to Another Test Cycle decision block If programmed to perform additional tests i e sweep on the DUT package oper ation loops back up to perform the next source measure action After all programmed test cycles are successfully completed the SourceMeter outputs the pass pattern to the compo nent handler to perform the binning operation If configured to test another DUT package the operation loops back to the top of the flow chart and waits for the start of test SOT pulse from the component handler Fail conditio
55. the oldest message is read and then removed from the queue If the queue becomes full the message 350 Queue Overflow will occupy the last memory location On power up the Error Queue is empty When empty the message 0 No Error is placed in the queue Messages in the Error Queue are preceded by a code number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The messages are listed in Appendix B As shown in Table 15 7 there are com mands to read the entire message code and message or the code only On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue As listed in Table 15 9 there are commands to enable and or disable messages For these commands the lt list gt parameter is used to specify which messages to enable or disable The messages are specified by their codes The following examples show various forms for using the lt list gt parameter lt list gt 110 Single message 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 220 Range entry and single entry separated by a comma When you enable messages messages not specified in the list are disabled When you dis able messages each listed message is removed from the enabled list NOTE To prevent all messages from entering the Error Queue send the enable co
56. the A D reference and zero values will be saved for up to the 10 most recent SENSe 1 VOLTage DC NPLCycles SENSe 1 CURRent DC NPLCycles or SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles settings Whenever the integration rate is changed via an NPLC command user setup recall RCL or a source memory recall SSOUR MEM com mand or during a source memory sweep NPLC caching will occur If the integration rate is already stored in the cache the stored reference and zero values are recalled and used Otherwise a reference and zero value are acquired and stored in the cache If there are already 10 NPLC values stored the oldest one will be overwritten by the newest one 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 111 Follow these general steps to program and use NPLC caching 1 Send this command to disable auto zero SYST AZER OFF 2 Enable NPLC caching by sending SYST AZER CACH ON 3 Setup and run your source memory sweep with the SOUR MEM commands along with the various other commands required to pro gram additional operating modes See Configure memory sweep as well as other pertinent command descriptions in this section for details NOTE Auto zero should be disabled with the SYST AZER OFF command for maximum source memory sweep speed otherwise the cache is of little use With auto zero enabled new A D reference and zero values are taken for every reading and saved into the cache slowing d
57. will result in 20 zeroes as follows 00000000000000000000 The response message for DISP WIND2 ATTR bottom display will display ones at the character positions for SAVESETUP as follows 11111111100000000000000000000000 Return to source measure display state This action command is used to return the instrument to the source measure display state source measure and compliance readings displayed For example if a menu structure is presently being displayed this command will exit the menu and return to the source measure display state DISPlay WINDow 1 DATA Read top display DISPlay WINDow 2 Description DATA Read bottom display These query commands are used to read what is currently being dis played on the top and bottom displays After sending one of these com mands and addressing the SourceMeter to talk the displayed data message or reading will be sent to the computer 18 48 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Define TEXT messages DATA lt a gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message top display DISPlay WINDow 2 TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message bottom display Parameters lt a gt ASCII characters for message Types String aa a or aa a Indefinite Block 0aa a Definite Block XYaa a where Y number of characters in message Up to 20 for top display Up to 32 for bottom display X number of digits that make up Y 1 or 2 Quer
58. 0 SOUR SWE POIN returns 10 TRIG COUN 10 SOUR VOLT MODE SWE OUTP ON INIT Voltage list The previous Linear Voltage Sweep can instead be performed using a Voltage List as follows RST SOUR FUNC MODE VOLT SOUR LIST VOLT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SOUR LIST VOLT POIN returns 10 TRIG COUN 10 SOUR VOLT MODE LIST OUTP ON INIT Logarithmic current sweep Logarithmic current sweep from 1mA to 270mA in 20 points RST SOUR FUNC MODE CURR SOUR SWE SPAC LOG SOUR CURR STAR 001 SOUR CURR STOP 27 SOUR SWE POIN 20 TRIG COUN 20 SOUR CURR MODE SWE OUTP ON INIT To determine the source values that will be generated Start 0 001 Log o Start 3 Stop 0 270 Logjo Stop 0 568636 LogStep Log 9 Stop Log Start SWE POIN 1 0 568636 3 20 1 2 431364 19 0 127967 18 98 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Now add the LogStep value to Log Start and to each subsequent result This will create a list of Log g Values Next take the anti log of each Log Value to get the actual sweep values Value Log Value Sweep Value 1 3 000000 0 001000 2 2 872033 0 001343 3 2 744067 0 001803 4 2 616100 0 002420 5 2 488134 0 003250 6 2 360167 0 004363 7 2 232201 0 005859 8 2 104234 0 007866 9 1 976268 0 010562 10 1 848301 0 014181 11 1 720335 0 019040 12 1 592368 0 025564 13 1 464402 0 034324 14 1 336435 0 046086 15 1 208469 0 061877 16
59. 0 055 6 pA 2400 2410 1 00000 A 10 pA lt ImV 0 22 570 pA 2420 2425 2430 2440 00000 A 10 pA lt ImV 0 060 570 pA 2420 2425 3 00000 A 10 pA lt 1lmV 0 052 1 71 mA 2430 3 00000 A 10 pA lt ImV 0 052 1 71 mA 0 0000 A6 2440 5 00000 A 10 pA lt 1mV 0 10 3 42 mA TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 0 10 x accuracy specification C RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY Local or Remote Sense DEFAULT DEFAULT NORMAL ENHANCED TEST TEST CURRENT ACCURACY 23 C 5 C ACCURACY 23 C 5 C 5 DEFAULT CURRENT 2420 2425 1 YEAR rdg ohms 1 YEAR rdg ohms RANGE RESOLUTION 2400 2410 2430 2440 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 2400 lt 0 20000 Q4 Source Ingo Meas Vace Source Ipcc Meas Vace Source Ingo Meas Vace Source Ipce Meas Vice 2 00000 Q4 10 pQ WA Source Ingo Meas Vace Source Inco Meas Vacc 0 17 0 0003 Q Source Iycc Meas Vacc 20 0000 Q 100 pQ 100 mA 100 mA 0 10 0 003 Q 0 11 0 006 Q 0 10 0 003 Q 0 07 0 001 Q 200 000 Q 1 mQ 10 mA 10 mA 0 08 0 03 Q 0 09 0 1 Q 0 08 0 03 Q 0 05 0 01 Q 2 00000 KQ 10 mQ 1 mA l mA 0 07 0 3 Q 0 08 0 6 Q 0 07 0 3 Q 0 05 0 1 Q 20 0000 KQ 100 mQ 100 pA 100 pA 0 06 3 Q 0 07 6 Q 0 06 3 Q 0 04 1Q 200 000 KQ 1 Q 10 pA 10 pA 0 07 30 Q 0 07 60 Q 0 07 30 Q 0 05 10 Q 2 00000 MQ 10 Q 1 pA 1 pA 0 11 300 Q 0 12 600 Q 0 11 300 Q 0 05 100 Q 20 0000 MQ 100 Q 1 pA pA 0 11 1kQ 0 12 2 4kQ 0 11
60. 0 08V ts 20V range 100mA compliance Model 2410 0 5V us 1000V range 20mA compliance 0 08V ts 20V range 100mA compliance Model 2420 0 14V ts 60V range 100mA compliance 0 08V s 20V range 100mA compliance Model 2425 2430 0 25V ps 100V range 100mA compliance 0 08V ts 20V range 100mA compliance 0 25V ps 40V range 100mA compliance 0 08V ts 10V range 100mA compliance DC FLOATING VOLTAGE Output can be floated up to 250VDC Model 2440 40VDC from chassis ground REMOTE SENSE Up to 1V drop per load lead COMPLIANCE ACCURACY Add 0 3 of range and 0 02 of reading to base specification OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT Overshoot into a fully resistive 100kQ load 10Hz to 1MHz BW adjacent ranges 100mV typical except 20V 200V 20V 60V on Model 2420 20V 100V on Model 2425 and 2430 range boundary and Model 2440 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE VALUE 0 1 of range Model 2440 ADDITIONAL PULSE MODE SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE 8 hardware limited 10A range only All other ranges 100 MAXIMUM PULSE WIDTH 5ms from 90 rising to 90 falling edge 2 5ms 10A range MINIMUM PULSE WIDTH 150s MINIMUM PULSE RESOLUTION 501s typical 70us max limited by sys tem jitter SOURCE ACCURACY Determined by settling time and source range specifications OUTPUT SETTLING TIME 0 1 800us typ source I 10A into 10
61. 0 7 x DC Tams lt 100 and 30 our X 125 x DC x 0 35 Tame lt 85 Model 2440 SourceMeter There are two equations for each of the high power voltage ranges 10V and 40V Both of the equations for the selected voltage range must be true to ensure that the SourceMeter will not overheat The result of the first equation must be lt 100 and the result of the sec ond equation must be lt 85 10V range power equations 21 x our Vour X Iour x 0 7 x DC Tap lt 100 and 30 lour X 24 x DC x 0 35 Tame lt 85 40V range power equations 58 x Hour Vour X Iour x 0 7 x DC Tap lt 100 and 30 our X 120 x DC x 0 35 Tame lt 85 6 10 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source delay measure cycle In addition to static source and or measure operation SourceMeter operation can consist of a series of source delay measure SDM cycles Figure 6 1 During each SDM cycle the following occurs 1 Set the source output level 2 Wait for the source delay 3 Make the measurement NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The delays used for Pulse Mode are covered in Section 5 See Section 11 for details on how the SDM cycle relates to the trigger model Figure 6 1 Source delay measure SDM cycle Start of A D Conversion End of A D Conversion ource f Value Trigger Trigger Measure Latency A a 100us e 1msec
62. 1 080502 0 083080 17 0 952536 0 111549 18 0 824569 0 149772 19 0 696603 0 201093 20 0 568636 0 270000 Current list The Previous Log Current Sweep can instead be performed by using the sweep values in a Current List as follows RST SOUR FUNC MODE CURR SOUR LIST CURR 0 001 0 001343 0 001803 0 002420 0 003250 0 004363 0 005859 SOUR LIST CURR APP 0 007866 0 010562 0 01418 0 019040 0 025564 0 03424 SOUR LIST CURR APP 0 046086 0 061877 0 083080 0 111549 0 149772 0 201093 0 27 SOUR LIST CURR POIN returns 20 TRIG COUN 20 SOUR CURR MODE LIST OUTP ON INIT 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 99 Soak time SOAK lt NRf gt SOURce 1 SOAK lt NRf gt Set multiple mode soak time Parameters lt NRf gt soak time s 0 000 to 9999 999s Query SOAK Query multiple mode soak time Description With SYST RCMode set to MULTiple SOUR SOAK specifies the amount of time after the first point of a sweep that the unit will sit ina loop actively autoranging up and down to allow a multiple SourceMeter configuration to settle See SYSTem subsystem page 18 106 This process will be done only once per INIT READ or MEAS command The soak time is especially useful for low current measurements when multiple down range changes from the higher ranges are required NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode soak time is not used for sweeps Pulse Mode delays Model 2430 only WIDth lt n gt
63. 103 Low limit 3 failed SE Measurement Event 3 104 High limit 3 failed SE Measurement Event 4 105 Active limit tests passed SE Measurement Event 5 106 Reading available SE Measurement Event 6 107 Reading overflow SE Measurement Event 7 108 Buffer available SE Measurement Event 8 109 Buffer full SE Measurement Event 9 110 Limit 4 failed SE Measurement Event 10 111 OUTPUT interlock asserted SE Measurement Event 11 112 Temperature limit exceeded SE Measurement Event 12 113 Voltage limit exceeded SE Measurement Event 13 114 Source in compliance SE Measurement Event 14 Standard events 200 Operation complete SE Standard Event 0 Operation events 300 Device calibrating SE Operation Event 0 303 Device sweeping SE Operation Event 3 305 Waiting in trigger layer SE Operation Event 5 306 Waiting in arm layer SE Operation Event 6 310 Entering idle layer SE Operation Event 10 Questionable events 408 Questionable Calibration SE Questionable Event 8 414 Command Warning SE Questionable Event 14 Contact check option only B 6 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit Calibration errors 500 Date of calibration not set EE Standard Event 3 501 Next date of calibration not set EE Standard Event 3 502 Calibration data invalid EE Standard Event 3 503 DAC calibration ov
64. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 25 Custom sweep programming example As an example of custom sweep operation assume a five point sweep with the following parameters Source Function volts Sense Function current Voltage Sweep Mode list custom sweep Sweep Voltage Points 7V 1V 3V 8V 2V Current Compliance 100mA Source Delay 100ms Table 10 6 summarizes the basic remote command sequence for performing the custom sweep described above Table 10 6 Custom sweep programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SENS FUNC CONC OFF Turn off concurrent functions SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function SENS FUNC CURR DC Current sense function SENS CURR PROT 0 1 100mA current compliance SOUR VOLT MODE LIST List volts sweep mode SOUR LIST VOLT 7 1 3 8 2 TV 1V 3V 8V 2V sweep points TRIG COUN 5 Trigger count sweep points SOUR DEL 0 1 100ms source delay OUTP ON Turn on source output READ Trigger sweep request data Source memory sweep commands Table 10 7 summarizes remote commands used for custom sweep operation See Section 18 Configure memory sweep for more details on these commands Table 10 7 Source memory sweep commands Command Description SOURce FUNCtion MEM Select memory sweep mode SOURce MEMory POINts lt n gt Specify number of sweep points n points SOURce MEMory STARt lt n gt
65. 2400 SourceMeter ssessseseeesseesesrerrsreressrsreees 6 15 Model 2410 SourceMeter ssessssseseeeseeeresrerrsreressrsesees 6 16 Model 2420 SourceMeter oo eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 17 Models 2425 and 2430 SourceMeters eee 6 18 Model 2440 SourceMeter ccccccccssccscccccccseeeeeseseeens 6 20 I Source operating boundaries 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 21 Voltage compliance boundaries 0 0 0 0 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 24 V Source operating boundaries 20 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeees 6 26 Current compliance boundaries 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 28 Source I measure I and source V measure V n se 6 30 Source readback accuracy eeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaees 6 30 Basic circuit configurations 0 ee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeneeeaes 6 31 Loi ire ea S E peazcndaaesessndsrsienageceaoecnaseci 6 31 SOULCE Vea ieveuds ied clibariieset hen cis EAEAN 6 32 Measure only CV Or TY ssscsscsasccossecsccesentevessesesenssseceasezsceeseee 6 33 GAL esses se veceteBeecestseashet cevteteas vest bhevsedbessoneste lt dveasetendstesntetvsaes 6 34 Cable Sard occceescesiecsessasieeastensssat aodsuts deesessesenadesagecepssenayeed 6 34 Ohms UAT ameni cinne nai e eda ai 6 35 Guard sense siririrka N E RN 6 38 Data TOW sonnerie aaa EN a 6 40 Buffer considerations sesesseeseeeeeeeeeesresreresrerrereerrsrerrsreee 6 42 Changing V I or Q measurement function 6 42 Changing MATH function ssessseseeeesee
66. 3 Custom pulse sweep PO P2 P4 1V Delay gt Bias OV Bias Measure Measure Measure Measure Measure Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 10 4 shows a custom sweep example with different pulse widths In this example the first two points are configured with the same source value so that the duration of the first pulse is effectively doubled Figure 10 4 Custom sweep with different pulse durations ov fe Delay ote Delay ote Delay te Delay of Delay gt te Delay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 All have same delay but pulse widths differ 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 7 Source memory sweep For a source memory sweep up to 100 setup configurations can be saved in memory When the sweep is performed the setup at each memory point is recalled This allows multiple functions and math expressions to be used in a sweep For example the first point in a source memory sweep may source voltage and measure current the next point may source current and measure voltage the third point may source voltage and measure volt age and the last point may use a math expression This feature allows you to customize each sweep point with specific instrument settings instead of being tied to one set of set tings for all sweep points Once source memory setups are saved and the sweep is initiated the SourceMeter then sequences through the setups very rapidly This feature allows you to use the instrument as a fast aut
67. 4 wire remote sensing selected the sense leads must be connected or incorrect operation will result Over voltage protection OVP can be used if the potential for sense lead disconnection exists see Section 3 V source protection Figure 6 15 Source I o GUARD o GUARD SENSE o IN OUT HI SENSE HI SENSE LO o IN OUT LO 6 32 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source V When configured to source voltage V Source as shown in Figure 6 16 the SourceMeter functions as a low impedance voltage source with current limit capability and can measure current I Meter or voltage V Meter Sense circuitry is used to continuously monitor the output voltage and make adjustments to the V Source as needed The V Meter senses the voltage at the Input Output terminals 2 wire local sense or at the DUT 4 wire remote sense using the sense terminals and compares it to the programmed voltage level If the sensed level and the programmed value are not the same the V Source is adjusted accordingly Remote sense eliminates the effect of voltage drops in the test leads ensuring that the exact programmed voltage appears at the DUT NOTE The voltage error feedback to the V Source is an analog function The source error amplifier is used to compensate for IR drop in the test leads Figure 6 16 Source V o GUARD o GUARD SENSE IN OUT HI o Remote SENSE HI Sense Output Adjust V Source
68. 42 DEFault MINimum MAXimum CURRent DEFault CURRent MINimum CURRent MAXimum VOLTage VOLTage DEFault VOLTage MINimum VOLTage MAXimum This command is used to immediately update the amplitude of a fixed source This command is not valid if the list or sweep mode is selected sourcing mode page 18 74 If a manual source range is presently selected then the specified ampli tude cannot exceed that range For example if the V Source is on the 2V range auto range disabled you will not be able to set the V Source amplitude to 3V In auto range the amplitude can be set to any level that 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 63V 3 15A or 63V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 105V 3 15A or 105V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 10 5A or 105V 10 5A or 105V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 5 25A or 42V 5 25A or 42V Query programmed amplitude of I Source Query RST default amplitude Query lowest allowable amplitude Query highest allowable amplitude Query programmed amplitude of V Source Query RST default amplitude Query lowest allowable amplitude Query highest allowable amplitude is within the capabilities of the source 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual S
69. 5 20 Source Measure Concepts Compliance limit senecon senserce a ni e eae e NEE 6 2 Types of compliance sssssesesesesesessesresesrrsrrsreresresesresesseses 6 2 Maximum compliance values ssssssessseessseseesreresreseesesreeeses 6 3 Compliance examples 0 ceeecceseeesseeeeeeeteeeeseeeseeeeneeeeeees 6 4 Compliance principles sesesessessesesessrsteseseesrsrrsesresresrrseses 6 4 Passive load compliance example ssssessereseereseereeeee 6 4 Active load compliance example ssseseseeeeseeereeeeereee 6 4 Determining compliance limit 0 eee ee eeeeseeereeeeeeees 6 5 Overheating protection 2 0 0 eecceseecececeseeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 6 6 Overheating Conditions 0 eee eeeeseceseeseceeeeseeeeeeaeenees 6 6 Power equations to avoid shutdown eee eee eeeeseeeeeeees 6 7 Model 2400 SourceMeter oo eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeereeeeees 6 7 Model 2410 SourceMeter oo eee eee eeeeeseeeeeereeeeees 6 8 Model 2420 SourceMeter oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 Models 2425 and 2430 SourceMeters 0 eee 6 9 Model 2440 SourceMeter oo eee eeeeeeeeseeseeereeeeees 6 9 Source delay measure cycle oo eee eeseeseeseeeseeseeeseeeeeeaeeneeeaes 6 10 Sweep waveforms ou eesceseesecesecsecesesseeeseeseesaeeseseaeeseeens 6 12 Operating boundaries eee ceeeeseceeeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeseeens 6 14 MOUECE OF SINK s ccse siesesseessoscssedessocencosestesnvearsevdeestesaseeannases 6 14 Duty CY CI srren aan e E E iss 6 14 Model
70. 54321 W 987 6 Rear Panel Connector Table 14 2 RS 232 connector pinout Pin number Description 1 Not used 2 TXD transmit data 3 RXD receive data 4 Not used 5 GND signal ground 6 Not used 7 RTS ready to send 8 CTS clear to send 9 Not used NOTE CTA and RTS are tied together 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 14 3 provides pinout identification for the 9 pin DB 9 or 25 pin DB 25 serial port connector on the computer PC Table 14 3 PC serial port pinout DB 9 pin DB 25 pin Signal number number DCD data carrier detect 1 8 RXD receive data 2 3 TXD transmit data 3 2 DTR data terminal ready 4 20 GND signal ground 5 7 DSR data set ready 6 6 RTS request to send 7 4 CTS clear to send 8 5 RI ring indicator 9 22 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 21 Error messages See Appendix B for RS 232 error messages Programming example The following QuickBasic 4 5 programming example will control the SourceMeter via the RS 232 COM2 port Place the SourceMeter into the RS 232 mode from the front panel main menu press MENU select COMMUNICATION select RS 232 When the com munication setting is changed the SourceMeter will reset into that mode RDS SPACES 1500 Set string space CLS Clear screen PRINT Set COM2 baud rate to 9600 PRINT Set no flow control and CR as terminator Configure serial port
71. 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit HILIM Use to set the high limit and for the grading mode specify the fail bit pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit e PASS Use this menu item to dictate actions upon a PASS condition DIG I O PATTERN Use this option item to define the digital output bit pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit For the grading mode it is the pass pattern for the all tests pass condition For the sorting mode it is the pass pattern for Limit 1 compliance when all other software limit tests are disabled 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SRC MEM LOC Use this option with a Source Memory Sweep to select the next memory location point in the sweep when the PASS condition occurs If NEXT is selected the next point in the sweep list will be selected You can also branch to a different point in the sweep by specifying the memory LOCATION 1 to 100 EOT MODE Use this menu item to control the operation of Digital I O line 4 to act as an end of test EOT or BUSY signal BUSY Set Digital I O line 4 HI while unit is busy With BUSY selected the unit behaves as if it is in 3 bit mode BUSY Set Digital I O line 4 LO while unit is busy With BUSY selected the unit behaves as if it is in 3 bit mode EOT In 3 bit mode automatically output a HI pulse on Digital I O line 4 at end of test In 4 bit mode EOT is not automatically controlled EOT In 3 bit mode automatically output a LO pulse on Dig
72. 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Getting Started SourceMeter front panel 0 eee eeeeeseesceceneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeee 1 7 SourceMeter rear panel 0 ceeeeeeeeesceeneeesaeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 Main menu tree ienee e E 1 23 Connections Terminal voltage differentials rear panel 0 ee eects 2 4 Two wire connections local sense ccsssecsesteeessteeesseeees 2 5 Four wire connections remote sense ccccesseeeesseeesseees 2 6 High impedance guarding cable guard oseere 2 8 Guarded ohms measurements ohms guard eseeeeeeee 2 10 Basic Source Measure Operation Fundamental source measure configuration eee 3 8 Ohms Measurements Ohms configuration menu tree eee eeeeesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 4 2 2 WITE resistance sensing eeeeececeseceeceteeceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeteeees 4 7 A wire resistance sensing eeeeeesceesncceseeeeeeceteeeeeeceneeeteeeeaees 4 8 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only Pulse period i ccc cies caceeenscbia geenlenucestessteaedoaestinenreyensteals 5 2 P lse meas re timing secsesssssasccssesasccccnaveoesstpasecoaseasssseeaceaatenes 5 3 Pulse measure timing auto zero off sseeseesseeeeesssesrseseseee 5 7 P lse only timing as sscscciessscsasecseeesceccasseeaseupassenaseasessozetsaeestins 5 8 Source Measure Concepts Source delay measure SDM cycle sssseseseeseseereseeeerreereees 6 10 Simplified trigger model s
73. 9 113 9 62 81 Normal 1 00 internal 35 0 41 7 19 33 Notes 1 Pass Fail test performed using one high limit and one low math limit 2 Includes time to reprogram source to a new level before making measurement Numerics 2 wire local sensing 2 7 4 wire remote sensing 2 6 6 wire ohms measurements 4 11 Accessories 1 3 Acquiring readings 17 3 Adapters 1 4 Auto ohms measurements 4 4 Auto ranging 7 3 Auto zero 3 9 Disable enable 5 11 Front panel 3 9 Remote command 3 9 Auto clear 12 17 Basic circuit configurations 3 8 Measure only V or I 6 33 Source I 6 31 Source V 6 32 Battery charging discharging 3 22 Binning 12 11 Basic systems 12 14 Contact check function F 6 Digital output clear pattern 12 17 Handler interface 12 11 Handler types 12 12 Multiple element device 12 15 Single element device 12 14 Buffer considerations 6 42 Bus commands General 14 7 Cable guard 2 8 Cables 1 4 Calculate subsystems 18 24 Capabilities Source measure 3 3 Carrying case 1 5 Case sensitivity 14 13 Circuit configurations Basic 3 8 Measure only 6 33 Source I 6 31 Source V 6 32 Clearing registers and queues 15 4 Command reference CALCulate 1 18 24 CALCulate2 18 34 CALCulate3 18 44 Common 16 3 DISPlay subsystem 18 46 FORMat subsystem 18 49 OUTPut subsystem 18 57 ROUTe subsystem 18 59 SCPI 18 1 SENSe1 subsystem 18 60 SOURCce subsystem 18 72 STATus subsystem 18 104 SYSTem subsystem 18 106 Tables 18 2
74. A 6 32 Measure only V of ID encnreisiiisirorisesiier eisiea 6 33 High impedance measurements seeseeeeeseeeeeereeseeeaeees 6 36 In circuit ohms measurements ssessseesseeeseereereresreresrererreeee 6 37 In circuit ohms measurements using guard sense 6 39 Data flow front panel oo eile cece eeeeeeeseesseeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeaeens 6 41 Range Digits Speed and Filters Speed configuration Menu tree eee eeeeeseeeeeereeeeeenees 7 8 Moving average and repeating filters oe eeeereeee 7 11 Filter configuration menu tree oo eee eee ese eeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 12 Relative and Math Math configuration menu tree oo eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeaes 8 7 Connections for voltage coefficient tests 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 8 9 Sweep Operation Linear staircase sweep eesccesceceseceseeeeeeesaeeeseeeseeesteeeneeeees 10 3 Logarithmic staircase sweep example 5 point sweep from 1 to 10 volts ow 10 4 Custom pulse SWeeDp sonreir sinui oien iiss 10 6 Custom sweep with different pulse durations 0 0 10 6 Six point test branching example eee eeeeeseeereeeees 10 10 Typical diode I V curve and test points not to scale 10 12 Sweep configuration Menu tree oo eee eects eeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 15 Connections for diode I V tests eee eeeeseeseereeeeeeseeeee 10 23 Diode FV CUIVG is eistss covceisis nnn ananasi 10 23 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep esceeeceeseeeeeeteeeteees 10 32 Triggering
75. AUTO annunciator turns on when auto ranging is selected With auto ranging selected the instrument automatically chooses the best range to measure the applied signal Note that the highest available range is dependent on the corresponding compliance setting See Ranging limitations page 7 2 Auto range considerations Auto ranging can adversely affect overall measurement speed The amount of speed reduction will depend on the number of range changes required See system speed specifi cations in Appendix A for more information 7 4 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Note that source settling time can affect the time it takes the instrument to auto range When the instrument auto ranges both the source and sense circuits monitor each other so if one takes longer to settle the other will as well Auto range change mode The auto range change mode determines how the instrument performs auto ranging In the SINGLE mode the SourceMeter will auto range only after first taking a reading In the MULTIPLE mode the SourceMeter will auto range up on compliance in the Delay phase of the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle thereby minimizing the possibility that a SourceMeter will be in compliance in a multiple SourceMeter system The SourceMeter can downrange only once a reading has been taken NOTE See Section 6 Source delay measure cycle for more SDM information With the auto range change
76. Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 and Power equa tions to avoid shutdown page 6 7 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output operation Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 1A range are derated as follows 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 5 The 40 off time allows a sufficient cooling period Figure 6 5 Model 2410 operating boundaries T mp 30 C I Source III Source 100 Duty Cycle _ lt 60 Duty Cycle 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 17 Model 2420 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2420 are shown in Figure 6 6 In this drawing the 3A 20V and 1A 60V magnitudes are nominal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 3 15A 21V and 1 05A 63V These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 and Powe
77. CXaMples ceecceescesceeeteceseeeeaeceseeeeaeeeteessaeeeaeees 11 20 Front panel trigger example eeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeneees 11 20 External trigger example o0 eee eeseeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeneees 11 23 Trigger link connections 0 0 eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeneeeeeees 11 24 Instrument configurations cesses eeeeeseeeeeeeees 11 25 Operation is svete ivcessatecsencasisarsatesectoesiiszeeast CARERE Ea 11 26 Remote trigger example ceseeeeceeeceeseeeeneeeseeeeaeeeeees 11 28 Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 sesers 11 30 MMS SSK IMOMSS casoria ein socbcanseceas 11 30 dle sich space iiae a a 11 33 Source event detector issiceriiresrossessssivessisessrerisrssss 11 33 Pulse delay cisccssciecncsss tiie nied 11 33 NOUICE ACH ON etsin aser ia re ae ais 11 33 Pulse Width sissonsrnireriyiotie niini 11 33 Meas fe Action sicisssiivsreriresnsineectesessssresiteeerosa tinse 11 33 O tp t triggers inie 11 34 Invalid trigger Settings eee eee eeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeees 11 34 Front panel operation ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeneeeees 11 34 Remote Operation ce ee eeceseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseeeaeeaees 11 34 12 Limit Testing Ty pes Or limits maneneo n E e E AERE 12 2 Pass fail information sssseseseseeeeseseeessersrersssesrsrerrsrersereeee 12 3 Data HOW kiise estas aain E E E Ee a 12 3 Limit 1 test compliance sessssesseessessssesessssssererssrssessese 12 3 Limit 2 limit 3 and limit 5 12
78. Clear IFC must be performed to reset the query When sending a command or query do not attempt to read data from the SourceMeter until the terminator has been sent usually Line Feed with EOI Otherwise a DCL or IFC must be sent to reset the input parser When receiving data all data up to and including the terminator LF with EOD must be accepted Otherwise a DCL or IFC must be sent to reset the output task Empty command strings terminator only should not be sent Using SCPI based programs In general an existing SCPI based program will run properly and faster in the 488 1 pro tocol as long as it meets the above guidelines and limitations G 4 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NRFD hold off OPC OPC and WAI are still functional but are not needed for the 488 1 protocol When sending commands the GPIB is automatically held off when it detects a terminator The hold off is released when all the commands have finished executing or if there is some parser or command error An exception is an initiate command which releases the hold off immediately and does not wait for all of the readings to be acquired This imme diate release of bus hold off is done to support GET SDC IFC TRG RCL RST SYSTem PRESet and ABORt during data acquisition NDAC hold off NDAC hold off is included with the GPIB 488 1 protocol mode to allow a single instru ment to hold off all others on the bus until it
79. Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual OUTPut lt event list gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure OUTPut lt event list gt Arm layer events TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure OUTPut lt event list gt Trigger layer events Parameters Arm Layer Triggers lt event list gt TENTer Trigger on entering trigger layer TEXit Trigger on exiting trigger layer NONE Disable arm layer output trigger Trigger Layer Triggers lt event list gt SOURce Output trigger after source level is set DELay Output trigger after delay period SENSe Output Trigger after measurement NONE Disable trigger layer triggers NOTE Each event in the list must be separated by a comma i e arm output source delay sense Query OUTPut Query output trigger event s Description This command is used to specify when trigger pulses occur on the spec ified output trigger line of the Trigger Link see OLINe lt NRf page 18 125 Arm Layer Triggers With TEXit selected an output trigger will occur when exiting the trigger layer With TENTer selected an output trigger will occur when entering the trigger layer With NONE selected the arm layer output trigger is disabled Trigger Layer Triggers You can specify from one to all three events Each event in the list must be separated by a comma The SOURce DELay and MEASure events refer to the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle This is the Device Action in the Trigger Mo
80. Considerations 3 9 Contact check function F 4 Front panel GPIB 14 9 GPIB 14 4 Limit testing 12 5 Math 8 4 Overview 3 3 Pulse Mode 5 1 Remote vs local 14 2 RS 232 interface 14 18 Sink 3 22 Sweep 10 1 Options 1 3 Output configuration Commands 13 11 Front panel operation 13 7 Programming example 13 12 Remote operation 13 11 Output off states 13 8 Overheating Conditions 6 6 Power equations to avoid shutdown 6 7 Protection 6 6 Overview 1 5 Percent deviation math function 8 6 Power math function 8 4 Power up sequence 1 11 Primary address 14 6 Probes General purpose 1 3 Low thermal 1 4 Program messages 14 15 Programming syntax 14 11 Pulse characteristics 5 3 Fast pulse output 5 6 Output off time 5 5 Pulse duty cycle 5 6 Pulse jitter 5 8 Pulse width 5 4 Pulse energy limitations 5 9 Pulse Mode Basic operation 5 12 Overview 5 2 Sweeps 10 32 Triggering 11 30 Pulse Mode configuration Front panel operation 5 10 Remote operation 5 11 PULSE SPEED NPLC Model 2430 Pulse Mode 7 8 Pulse measure considerations 5 16 Pulse measure operation Remote command 5 15 Pulse measure procedure Front panel 5 12 Pulse measure programming example 5 16 Pulse ohms measurements 5 14 Query commands 14 13 Queues 15 2 15 18 Clearing 15 4 Error 15 19 Output 15 18 Rack mount kits 1 5 Range 7 2 Auto 7 3 Limitations 7 2 Manual 7 3 Range and digits 7 2 Remote programming 7 5 Rear panel summary 1 9 Registers Bit descriptions
81. DCL command it clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue cancels deferred commands and clears any command that prevents the processing of any other device command A DCL does not affect instrument settings and stored data SDC selective device clear The SDC command is an addressed command that performs essentially the same function as the DCL command However since each device must be individually addressed the SDC command provides a method to clear only selected instruments instead of clearing all instruments simultaneously as is the case with DCL GET group execute trigger GET is a GPIB trigger that is used as an arm event to control operation The SourceMeter reacts to this trigger if it is the programmed arm control source The following command selects the GPIB arm control source ARM SOURce BUS 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 9 NOTE With ARM SOURce BUS selected and an INITiate command sent do not send any commands except GET DCL SDC IFC TRG and ABORt while per forming source measure operations ARM annunciator on If you do erratic operation will occur SPE SPD serial polling Use the serial polling sequence to obtain the SourceMeter serial poll byte The serial poll byte contains important information about internal functions See Section 15 Status Structure Generally the serial polling sequence is used by the controller to determine which of several instrument
82. Description This command is used to control the byte order for the IEEE 754 binary formats For normal byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Single precision For reverse byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte4 Byte3 Byte2 Byte1 Single precision The 0 Header is not affected by this command The Header is always sent at the beginning of the data string for each measurement conversion The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is simply ignored when the ASCII format is selected NOTE The SWAPped byte order must be used when transmitting binary data to any IBM PC compatible computer Status register format SREGister lt name gt FORMat SREGister lt name gt Set data format for reading status registers Parameters lt name gt ASCii Decimal format Hexadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format Query SREGister Query format for reading status registers Description Query commands are used to read the contents of the status event regis ters This command is used to set the response message format for those query commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 57 When a status register is queried the response message is a value that indicates which bits in the register are set For example if bits B5 B4 B2 B1 and BO of a register are s
83. Event Summary Bit Mav Message Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit EAV Error Available MSB Measurement Summary Bit amp Logical AND OR Logical OR 15 8 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status byte register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the appropriate bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register These summary bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely dependent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the Standard Event Register is read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will reset the ESB bit in the Sta tus Byte Register The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows Bit BO Measurement Summary Bit MSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Error Available EAV Set summary bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the Error Queue Bit B3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled questionable event has occurred Bit B4 Message Available MAV Set summary bit indicates that a response message is present in the Output Queue Bit BS Event Summary Bit ESB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred Bit B6 Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Set
84. Feedback 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 33 Measure only V or I Figure 6 17 shows the configurations for using the SourceMeter exclusively as a voltmeter or ammeter As shown in Figure 6 17A the SourceMeter is configured to measure voltage only by setting it to source OA and measure voltage CAUTION V Compliance must be set to a level that is higher than the measured voltage Otherwise excessive current will flow into the SourceMeter This current could damage the SourceMeter Also when connecting an external voltage to the I Source set the output off state to the high impedance mode See Section 13 Output off states In Figure 6 17B the SourceMeter is configured to measure current only by setting it to source OV and measure current Note that in order to obtain positive readings conven tional current must flow from IN OUT HI to LO Figure 6 17 Measure only V or 1 IN OUT HI l Source DUT V Source 0 00000uA IN OUT LO A Measure Voltage Only Positive Current IN OUT HI V Source DUT l Source 000 000mV IN OUT LO Note Positive current flowing out of IN OUT HI results in positive measurements B Measure Current Only Note Use 2 wire local sensing 6 34 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guard WARNING GUARD is at the same potential as output HI Thus if hazardou
85. Getting Started General information snin es crisissen tiesin ki aiii 1 2 Warranty information ssssssssseseesessseessesssssssstsstessessrssseseess 1 2 Contact information 00 ceeeeeceeseeeseeeneeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeees 1 2 Manual addenda 0000 eee eeeeeseeseeseeseeeseceeeeaeceeeeseseaeeaeenaes 1 2 Safety symbols and terms cc eeseeeccceseeeeeeeeeeeseeceneeeeeeees 1 2 TPS PECtl OF EAEE E A 1 3 Options and accessories 0 eee eeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaes 1 3 General purpose probes oct eeeeeeseeeseseeeeseeseeeseeeeees 1 3 Low thermal probes 0 ceeceescceeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeneeees 1 4 Cables and adapters 0 ceceescccesceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Rack mount Kits meinion 1 5 Carrying Case oo eeeeecesscceseceesceceeeeeeesseceeseeeteeeteeeeeees 1 5 Product OVERVIEW siccis igaara is i r 1 5 Front and rear panel familiarization 200 0 eeeeseeeseeeeteeeneeeeeeees 1 7 Front panel SUMMATY 20 0 ceeeeeecceseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeseesseeeeeees 1 7 Rear panel summary ee eeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeteeeeseeeseeseeeeeeees 1 9 PowerUp eienen aes ease can avons ac E easter 1 10 Line power connection 000 ee cceeceeesecesceeeeeeteeseaeeesneeeaeeees 1 10 POWET UP seguente ooo eeeceeeecceseeeeeeeeteeceaeeeeeceaeeetaeeeaeenses 1 11 System identification 0 0 eeeeesceeseeeseeceteeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeees 1 11 Line frequency Setting cee eeeeeseeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeees 1 12 Front panel line fr
86. IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU OUTPUT TRIGGER l i OUTEUT Co ome CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING Input output connectors INPUT OUTPUT HI and LO Use to source measure volts amps and ohms 4 WIRE SENSE HI and LO Use for 4 wire remote sensing V Q GUARD Driven guard for guarded measurements GUARD SENSE Use to correct for IR drops in Guard Output lead Earth chassis ground screw WARNING INPUT OUTPUT LO is not internally connected to the chassis and can float up to 250V peak above chassis ground Interlock and digital input output port INTERLOCK DIGITAL I O Connector for digital output lines interlock and component handler signals Output enable on Model 2400 only Power module Contains the AC line receptacle and the power line fuse Trigger link connector TRIGGER LINK 8 pin micro DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses Use a trigger link cable or adapter such as Models 8501 1 8501 2 8502 8504 1 10 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual RS 232 connector RS 232 GPIB connector IEEE 488 INTERFACE Power up WARNING Connector for RS 232 remote operation Use a straight through not null modem DB 9 cable Connector for GPIB remote operation Use a shielded cable Model 7007 1 or 7007 2 During the power up voltage spikes may appear on the terminals of the SourceMeter The
87. IMMediate lt freq time gt oo eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 18 109 STATE D gt ngeraos enan a oE RENER 18 109 Control alto Zero serieei 18 110 STATe lt name gt pesiin hern orsina reep ra taraia ETER 18 110 Control NPLC caching ceceeceesseceseeeseeeseeseneeeeeeeees 18 110 CACHING seirer raaire e e a EE RE 18 110 Select power line frequency setting s ssseeseeseeseeereeee 18 111 LFRequency lt freq gt pererin aro eerie n R 18 111 AUTO lt 0 gt isin ae be bei ee 18 111 Error queUe 5 coiveesssvcesnvesandsiatsvenseevanens EA EEES 18 112 ENEXTIY soiree iseiti o ea 18 112 PRL ALF E E EE 18 112 COUN ierices i a ie 18 112 CODE NEXT gies stares gi ce araa niire 18 112 CODE ALE soiien esar eaire si 18 112 D eT EEE AE EE 18 112 Simulate key presses seeeeeseeseeseeerreesrrseeresrrerseseeses 18 113 KEY manaig E 18 113 Read version of SCPI standard ssseoseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeee 18 115 VERSION sioneer naaa AES 18 115 RS2232 interface naiwsir 18 115 LOC all E A 18 115 RWLock lt b gt niiina 18 115 Query TIMESTAMP sensigni irisito seresa eriti a E e 18 116 TIME ineei eniai E Ea 18 116 Reset TIMESTAMP csvisssneessdvinksvenseevadevsstedsaceuseseigereessenertes 18 116 RESET ssc segtietis atin ete E E 18 116 Auto reset timestamp ee ceeceesseeeseeeeseeeeeeetaeeeteeeeaeeee 18 116 RESeti AUTO K gt siia 18 116 Auto range change mode eee eeceeeeceeeeseeeseteeeeeeeeees 18 117 ROMode lt name gt ereraa 1
88. In GRADING mode a reading passes if it is within all of the HI LO limit tol erances enabled assuming that it has passed the Contact Check contact check option only and Compliance tests first The Digital I O will be driven with the first pattern of the first Contact Check Compliance HI or LO failure Other wise the pass pattern will be output In GRADING mode you will also choose bin control modes With IMMEDIATE the testing process will stop after the first failure and place the fail pattern on the digital output If none of the limit tests fail the pass pattern will be placed on the output and the testing process will stop With END the testing process will continue until the pro grammed sweep is completed regardless of how many failures occur This allows multi element devices i e resistor networks to be tested After testing is finished the bit pattern for the first failure is placed on the output If all tests pass the pass pattern will instead be placed on the output In SORTING mode a reading will fail if it fails the optional Contact Check Test the Compliance Test or is not within any of the Digital I O Bands If the tests pass and only Limit 1 or 4 optional contact check test is enabled the associated pass pattern will be output Otherwise the first limit test band that passes will output its lower limit pattern upper limit patterns will be ignored If Limit 1 or 4 fails their failure patterns will be output If no
89. J Hi Limit test 6 fail 1 JO 1 1 JO Lo Limit test 6 fail O JO 1 1 JO J Hi Limit test 7 fail 1 JO 1 1 Jl l Lo Limit test 7 fail O JO 1 1 1 J Hi Limit test 8 fail 1 1 10 JO JO J Lo Limit test 8 fail O 1 JO JO JO J Hi Limit test 9 fail 1 1 JO JO JI l Lo Limit test 9 fail O 1 JO JO JI J Hi Limit test 10 fail 1 1 JO 1 JO l Lo Limit test 10 fail O 1 JO J1 JO J Hi Limit test 11 fail 1 1 JO 1 Jl l Lo Limit test 11 fail O 1 JO I J1 J Hi Limit test 12 fail 1 1 1 JO JO l Lo Limit test 12 fail O 1 1 JO JO J 1 Limit 4 test available only with contact check option Appendix F 2 See Section 15 Measurement Event Register and Figure 15 6 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 55 Example reading string The example ASCII reading string shown in Figure 18 1 shows a mea surement of a 10kQ resistor with the SourceMeter configured to Source I Measure V The voltage reading is the voltage measurement 1 000236V the current reading is the current source value 100Q and the operation was performed 72 826 seconds after the SourceMeter was turned on or after timestamp was reset The status reading of 48 132 indicates that bits 2 10 11 12 13 and 15 of the status word are set SOURce2 lt name gt FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt Set SOUR2 and TTL response formats Parameters lt name gt ASCii ASCII format HEXadecimal Hexad
90. Limit 2 3 or 5 12 passes their failure pattern will be output When SORTING is selected the Digital I O bit pattern can also be set 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit AUTO CLEAR Use this menu item to ENABLE or DISABLE auto clear for the digital output After enabling auto clear you will be prompted to set the pass fail pattern pulse width delay 0 to 60 00000sec You will then be prompted to set the digital output clear pattern 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit 12 20 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual H W LIMITS Use this menu item to control and set the fail mode for the Limit 1 Compliance test CONTROL Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the test FAIL MODE Use to select the fail mode for Limit 1 test With IN selected the test will fail when the SourceMeter is in compliance With OUT selected the test will fail when not in compliance Also use to specify the digital output bit pattern for Limit 1 IN or OUT test failure 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit NOTE Ifthe contact option is installed the H W LIMITS selection will also set options for the Contact Check Test Limit 4 See Appendix F for contact check details S W LIMITS Use this menu item to control set limits for and define output bit patterns for LIM2 LIM3 and LIM5 through LIM 12 tests CONTROL Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the test LOLIM Use to set the low limit and for the grading mode specify the fail bit pattern 0
91. O port has four lines for output signals Out 1 through Out 4 as well as input lines for start of test SOT and INT safety interlock signals The output lines are used to send the limit test pass fail signal s to the handler to perform the binning operation Figure 12 6 Handler interface connections SourceMeter Handler O Line 4 EOT or BUSY O SOT Strobe Line Digital 1 O connector These digital I O lines are available at the DB 9 Digital I O connector on the rear panel of the SourceMeter A custom cable using a standard female DB 9 connector is required for connection to the SourceMeter See Section 13 Digital I O port for more information 12 12 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital output lines The four output lines output a specific bit pattern based on the pass fail results of the vari ous limit tests See Types of limits page 12 2 In the 3 bit output mode Line 4 can also be used either as an end of test EOT or BUSY signal depending on the END OF TEST mode See Configuring limit tests page 12 19 SOT line The input line SOT of the Digital I O is used to control the start of the testing process For remote operation with LSTEST selected as the arm event of the trigger model the test ing process will start when the SOT line is pulsed low When TSTEST is the selected arm event the testing process will start when the SOT line is pulsed high When T STEST is sel
92. OFF Trigger and acquire reading 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 19 Source measure programming example Table 3 6 summarizes the command sequence for a basic source measure procedure Note that the steps correspond to those listed previously in Front panel source measure proce dure These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows Source function and range volts 20V Source mode fixed Source output level 10V Current compliance 10mA Measure function and range current 10mA Table 3 6 Basic source measure programming example Step Action Commands Comments RST Restore GPIB defaults 1 Select source function mode SOUR FUNC VOLT Select voltage source SOUR VOLT MODE FIXED Fixed voltage source mode 2 Set source range level compliance SOUR VOLT RANG 20 Select 20V source range SOUR VOLT LEV 10 Source output 10V SENS CURR PROT 10E 3 10mA compliance 3 Set measure function range SENS FUNC CURR Current measure function SSENS CURR RANG 10E 3 10mA measure range FORM ELEM CURR Current reading only 4 Turn on output OUTP ON Output on before measuring 5 Read data READ Trigger acquire reading 6 Turn off output OUTP OFF 1 Steps correspond to front panel steps listed previously in Front panel source measure procedure 2 Commands must be sent in order given 3 Instrument must be addressed to talk after READ to acquire data
93. OUTPUT PEAK ay Model 2420 52V SENSE PEAK PI at a o 4 WIRE INPUT OUTPUT PEAK WARNING NO INTERNAL OPERAT OOo 1100V 1100V PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK GUARD SENSE Ce 4 WIRE INPUT 250V SENSE OUTPUT PEAK up Model 2410 WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT 125V i eas PEAK PEAK x PEAK PEAK GUARD SENSE a L 4 WIRE INPUT 250v SENSE OUTPUT PEAK Models 2425 and 2430 WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT TO or 42V PEAK PEAK GUARD SENSE 40V Model 2440 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 5 NOTE To avoid redundancy generic SourceMeter drawings will be used in this section A generic drawing excludes the labeling for the terminal voltage differentials Sensing methods Basic source measure operations are performed using either 2 wire local sense connec tions Figure 2 2 or 4 wire remote sense connections Figure 2 3 The factory default sense selection is local See Sense selection page 2 11 to check and or change the sense selection Also see Section 4 for Ohms sensing issues WARNING There is no internal connection between earth ground and the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal of the SourceMeter Therefore hazard ous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on that LO terminal Typically this can occur when the SourceMeter is operating in any mode where the output changes rapidly such as quick pulsed waveforms that can be generated
94. Offset compensated ohms eceescesceceneceneeeseeeeseeeeeeceeeeteeees 4 9 Enabling disabling offset compensated ohms 0 4 9 Offset compensated ohms procedure ceeceeeeeeeseeeeees 4 10 Ohms source readback oo eects ceeseeseesessesseeseeseseeseens 4 11 Ohms source readback selection 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesees 4 11 6 wire ohms measurements 0 0 ee eeeeseceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeaes 4 11 Remote ohms programming eescesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeaeeeees 4 12 Remote ohms commands cee eseeeeeseceeeseeeseeneeeeeeseeeaes 4 12 Ohms programming example 0 eee eeeeeeeseeseeereeeeeeeees 4 13 5 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only CQVEIVIEW mienim arri iensen a R sted snbestisscseccweneag ations deste 5 2 Pulse characteristics smisao anai 5 3 P ls Width vess cs oecscies scecessnts astcctyntsecscipsstbueeezesstbsoevectestsues 5 4 Signal measurement 00 0 ee eeeeesceceteceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeetaeees 5 4 Overhead time esiescseessessseuseerosesecesverseseseessaedenessess 5 4 Pulse width delay ii isss ccssedsscesscesssesianesesatestvsvecedensevtecs 5 5 Output off time ooo ee eeeeceseeceeeeseeeeaeesteeeeaeeeeeceaeeeteeeeaees 5 5 Reference and zero measurements ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 5 5 Overhead time oo eee esceseeeeeeseceeceeeceeeeseeeeeeseeeaees 5 5 Pulse delay neissenco nena cxthevesstveestreteennia viens 5 6 Pulse duty CY Cle sccssseessccescees
95. PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Event Status ESE B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Enable Register PON Power On DDE Device Dependent Error URQ User Request QYE Query Error CME Command Error OPC Operation Complete EXE Execution Error amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Operation Event Register The used bits of the Operation Event Register shown in Figure 15 5 are described as follows Bit BO Calibrating Cal Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter is calibrating Bits B1 and B2 Not used Bit B3 Sweeping Swp Set bit indicates the instrument is performing a sweep operation Bit B4 Not used Bit B5 Waiting for Trigger Event Trig Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter is in the trigger layer waiting for a TLINK trigger event to occur Bit B6 Waiting for Arm Event Arm Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter is in the arm layer waiting for an arm event to occur Bits B7 through B9 Not used Bit B10 Idle State Idle Set bit indicates the SourceMeter is in the idle state Bits B11 through B15 Not used 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 13 Figure 15 5 Operation event status stat oper cond stat oper To Operation Summary Bit OSB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab Operation Condition Register Idle Arm Trig
96. REN GTL See local and remote transition in Section 14 Differences remote vs local operation SYSTem MEMory INITialize See command description in Section 18 SYSTem subsystem Valid function command words i e WOLT DC VOLT AC etc F Contact Check Function F 2 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction This appendix contains information on the contact check function available with the Mod els 2400 C 2410 C 2420 C 2425 C 2430 C and 2440 C SourceMeters Overview Description The contact check function detects measurements that may be in error due to excessive resistance in the force or sense leads when making remotely sensed Kelvin measure ments There are many potential sources for this resistance including poor contact at the DUT failing relay contacts on a switching card and wires that are too long or thin This is shown schematically in Figure F 1 where Rc is the resistance of the mechanical contact at the DUT and Rg is the series resistance of relays and cables Figure F 1 Source of Kelvin resistance errors Rs Rc DUT WARNING no NAL OPERATOR SERVICA 0 9 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT d s CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 3 Block diagram A block diagram of the contact check circuitry is shown in Figure F 2 The microproces sor sends a
97. SCPI programming language and two remote interface ports IEEE 488 GPIB and RS 232C Trigger Link interface to Keithley Series 7000 switching hardware 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 7 e Math expressions Five built in up to five user defined bus only e Reading and setup storage Up to 2500 readings and seven setups five user defaults factory default RST default can be stored and recalled e Closed cover calibration The instrument can be calibrated either from the front panel or remote interface Front and rear panel familiarization NOTE The SourceMeter models covered in this manual are very similar in appearance Therefore to avoid redundancy a generic Mondel 2400 is used for illustration purposes Front panel summary The front panel of the SourceMeter is shown in Figure 1 1 The following abbreviated information should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 1 1 SourceMeter front panel KEITHLEY 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT MEAS ot 6 DISPLAY a n 0 TOSGLE LOCAL REL FILTER LIMIT TRIG SWEEP TERON a FRONT 6 z 8 9 L REAR DIGITS SPEED STORE RECALI CONFIG MENU EXIT ENTER Measurement MEAS function keys Vv Measure volts l Measure amps Q Measure ohms FCTN Perform math functions SOURCE function keys vV Source voltage V Source l Source current l Source Aandy Increase decrease source or compliance
98. SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh lt n gt Specify pulse width Parameters lt n gt 0 00015 to 0 00500 Specify pulse width in seconds MINimum 0 00015 seconds MAXimum 0 00500 seconds DEFault 0 00015 seconds Query WIDTh Query pulse width WIDTh DEFault Query RST default pulse width WIDTh MINimum Query lowest allowable pulse width WIDTh MAXimum Query highest allowable pulse width Description This command is used to set the pulse width for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode The pulse width is the time that the output remains on including the signal measurement The valid range of pulse width periods is from 0 15ms to 5ms The pulse width can be set to lt 0 15ms however 0 15ms is the minimum pulse width that will occur On the 10A range source or measure the pulse width can be set up to Sms however it will be limited to 2 5ms NOTE See Section 5 for details on Model 2430 Pulse Mode 18 100 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual DELay lt n gt SOURce 1 PULSe DELay lt n gt Specify pulse delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 9999 99900 Specify pulse delay in seconds MINimum 0 seconds MAXimum 9999 999 seconds DEFault 0 seconds Query DELay Query pulse width DELay DEFault Query RST default pulse width DELay MINimum Query lowest allowable pulse width DELay MAXimum Query highest allowable pulse width Description This command is used to set the pulse delay for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode The pulse delay occurs du
99. SOURce command to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern The SourceMeter can be configured to place the defined pass bit pattern on the digital output immediately when the pass condition occurs or it can wait until all testing on a device package is completed operation leaves trigger layer See Composite testing page 18 40 and BCONtrol lt name gt page 18 43 for details For the sorting mode this command defines the 3 bit or 4 bit output pass pattern for the Limit 1 test compliance when Limits 2 3 5 12 are disabled FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify fail pattern Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value Query Description lt NDN gt Oto b111 3 bit Binary value Oto b1111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value SOURce2 Query programmed source value For the sorting mode this command is used to define the 3 bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when there are failures Note that the output value can be specified using binary octal decimal or hexa decimal format Use the table provided in the Description for the SOURce command to determine the decimal parameter value for the desired digital output pattern 18 42
100. Select fixed V Source range Enable or disable autoranging Query state of autoranging Query V Source range setting SSN SSSS s2 s2 21 ON ON 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2 If source V is active 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 15 Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt AMPLitude TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt AMPLitude SFACtor lt n gt STATe lt b gt STATe SFACtor PROTection LEVel lt NRf gt LEVel TRIPped STARt lt n gt STARt STOP lt n gt STOP STEP lt n gt STEP SPAN lt n gt SPAN CENTer lt n gt CENTer SOAK lt NRf gt SOAK Set V Source level in volts Set specified level immediately Specify voltage level 0 Query voltage level Set specified level when triggered Specify voltage level 0 Query voltage level Set voltage scaling factor 0 999 9999e 18 to 999 9999e 18 Enable disable voltage scaling factor OFF Query voltage scaling factor state Query voltage scaling factor Path to limit output voltage Specify voltage limit level Note 2 Query volt
101. Select measurement range eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 18 64 PUI Per Sin inene E EEE 18 65 Select aUtO TAN Be concorri a 18 67 AUTO SDS sirrien tE EE EREET 18 67 LEIME SI gt oirne A EER 18 67 ULIMIT KNS aaia eE 18 68 Set compliance parameters 0 0 eee eeeeseeeseeseeseeeseeeeeaees 18 68 ECB VEL SAS pcccee beers shakes vcctacieadenesd bea sennetniseroapeseediaics 18 68 RSYNh ronize lt b gt oo esc ccseseseteeeenseeecseteesseneseevevenens 18 69 PRIPPGd erine anie ecitieeisiiauwtenni keds 18 70 Set measurement speed oo eee eee eseeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeaees 18 70 NPILCYCleS SIS soetrissie 18 70 Configure and control filter essseeseeeeeeeeereeresrerrsreresreeee 18 71 TCONtrol lt name gt 0 eee ceeeseceeeeeeeeeessereseeseeeaees 18 71 COUNtS0 gt hand be ee din 18 71 STATS SDS iisen ae 18 72 SOURCE SUDSYSIEM 32 25kceecdeascseessdescseacivsresdaaeesegvenseetedveceuess 18 72 SOURCE I aaier eaea eean e o erR tines 18 72 Control source output off sesesseeeeseereseereerrsrerrsreresreeee 18 72 SIM Mediate aasan en cvestecvetptdecoateetastaess 18 72 AUTO osoin eieaa oeiee 18 73 Select function modes 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeaees 18 73 SHAPe lt name gt Model 2430 only eeeeeeeeeeeeee 18 73 MODE lt name gt acina 18 74 Select sourcing mode oo eee eee ceeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeaees 18 74 MODE lt name gt 23s jcibesesnestonseessisecstsentsenneneratnevedeares 18
102. Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 LIMit 1 Path to control LIMIT 1 test v COMPliance Configure Limit 1 test FAIL lt name gt Specify fail condition IN or OUT of IN compliance FAIL Query fail condition SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 15 lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit test OFF v STATe Query state of Limit 1 test v FAIL Returns result of Limit 1 test 0 pass or y 1 fail LIMit2 Path to control LIMIT 2 test v UPPer Configure upper limit Jv DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit v SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 2 test OFF v STATe Query st
103. Source amplitude volts OA or OV 10 5A or 105V 10 5A or 105V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 5 25A or 42V 5 25A or 42V 18 80 SCPI Command Reference Query Description Set voltage limit LEVel lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage PROTection LEVel lt n gt Parameters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TRIGgered Query triggered amplitude for fixed source TRIGgered DEFault Query RST default amplitude TRIGgered MINimum Query lowest allowable amplitude TRIGgered MAXimum Query highest allowable amplitude This command performs the same as the MMediate AMPLitude command except that the amplitude is not updated immediately With this command the amplitude is updated when the SourceMeter is triggered to perform a source measure operation For example if the instrument is waiting in the trigger layer for an external trigger the amplitude of the source will not update until that external trigger is received by the SourceMeter See Section 11 Trigger models for details on trigger model operation The MINimum and MAXimum parameters are only valid if the highest source range is presently selected Sending the MINimum or MAXimum parameters on a lower source range will generate error 221 Setting Conflict Set voltage limit for V Source 2400 lt n gt 210 to 210 Specify V Source limit 20 Set limit to 20V 40 Set limit to 40V 60 Set limi
104. TRACe FEED cannot be changed while buffer storage is active See Section 9 Data Store for more information CONTrol lt name gt TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt Start or stop buffer Parameters lt name gt NEXT Fills buffer and stops NEVer Disables buffer storage Query CONTrol Query buffer control Description This command is used to select the buffer control When NEXT is selected the asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate that the buffer is enabled The storage process starts when SourceMeter is taken out of idle to perform source measure operations After the buffer stores the specified number of reading arrays as set by the POINTs command the asterisk annuciator turns off to indicate that storage is done With NEVer selected storage into the buffer is disabled Select timestamp format FORMat lt name gt TRACe TSTamp FORMat lt name gt Select timestamp format Parameters lt name gt ABSolute Reference to first buffer reading DELTa Time between buffer readings Query FORMat Query timestamp format Description This command is used to select the timestamp format for buffer read ings With ABSolute selected each timestamp is referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer With DELTa selected timestamps provide the time between each buffer reading 18 120 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TRIGger subsystem The Trigger subsystem is made up of a series of com
105. TRACe subsystem 18 117 TRIGger subsystem 18 120 Command summary CALCulate 18 3 Common 16 2 DISPlay 18 8 FORMat 18 9 OUTPut 18 9 ROUTe 18 10 SCPI 17 2 SENSe 18 10 SOURce 18 13 STATus 18 18 TRACe 18 21 TRIGger 18 22 Command words 14 11 Commands TEEE 4888 bus D 7 Common commands IDN 16 3 OPC 16 3 OPC 16 3 RCL 16 4 RST 16 5 SAV 16 4 TRG 16 5 TST 16 6 WAI 16 7 Compliance Determining limit 6 5 Examples 6 4 Maximum values 6 3 Principles 6 4 Setting front panel compliance limit 3 7 Setting remote compliance limit 3 7 Types 6 2 Compliance limit 6 2 Setting 3 7 Configuration measurement function 17 2 Configure OUTPUT menu 13 7 Conformance information TEEE 488 and SCPI E 1 Connections 2 1 Connections to DUT 2 3 Contact check function F 1 Command reference F 17 Defaults F 20 Front panel operation F 11 Operation F 4 Programming example F 16 Remote operation F 14 Sweep and binning considerations F 6 Cooling fan 1 13 Current measure 3 20 Custom sweep 10 5 10 19 Data flow 6 40 C 1 Data store 9 1 Buffer considerations 9 5 Buffer statistics 9 3 Front panel operation 9 2 Programming example 9 7 Recalling readings 9 2 Remote operation 9 6 Storing readings 9 2 Timestamp accuracy 9 5 Timestamp format 9 4 DCL device clear 14 8 Digital I O port 13 2 Configuration 13 2 Controlling output lines 13 4 Output configuration 13 3 Digital output clear pattern 12 17 Digits 7 5 Display Disab
106. Testing 12 13 Category pulse component handler When using this type of handler the SourceMeter pulses one of the four handler lines when a pass or fail condition occurs The handler then places the DUT in the bin assigned to that pulsed line When interfacing to this type of handler a maximum of four compo nent handler bins are supported If the handler requires low going pulses then the four digital output lines of the Source Meter must be initially set to high This initial HI HI HI HI clear pattern on the output lines represents a no action condition for the handler since it is waiting for one of the lines to go low A line goes low when the defined fail or pass pattern sets it low For example if you want a particular test failure to pulse line 4 of the handler the defined fail pattern has to be HI HI HI LO When the failure occurs line 4 will be pulled low and the DUT will be placed in the bin assigned to that pulsed line If the handler requires a high going pulse the four digital output lines of the SourceMeter must initially be set low The LO LO LO LO clear pattern represents the no action condi tion for the handler When one of those lines are pulled high by a defined pass or fail bit pattern i e LO LO LO HI the DUT will be placed in the bit assigned to that pulsed line Category register component handler When using this type of handler the SourceMeter sends a bit pattern to three handler lines when a
107. Testing polarized devices Branching can simplify the testing of polarized devices such as diodes Because a diode is polarity sensitive you normally have to be careful when installing it in the component handler Installing the diode one way forward biases it and installing it the other way reverse biases it Memory sweep branching can eliminate this installation problem If for example your test requires that the diode be forward biased you can configure the compliance limit test LIMIT 1 to fail if out of compliance This fail condition would indicate that the diode is forward biased and the memory sweep will proceed to the next source memory location to perform the source measure operation If however the diode is installed backwards the compliance limit test will PASS in compliance The pass condi tion will cause the sweep to branch to a memory location where the polarity of the source is reversed again forward biasing the diode for the source measure operation This branching technique simplifies installation of the diode in the component handler because polarity is no longer a concern If the diode is installed backwards the sweep will branch to a memory location that reverses source polarity 10 12 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Diode test example Limit testing and a source memory sweep can be used to test a diode Three tests that are typically performed on a diode include the Forward Voltage T
108. The following example shows the response message for a program message that contains four single item query commands 0 1 1 0 Response message terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The follow ing example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 You must always tell the SourceMeter what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instru ment to the computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the SourceMeter to talk Rule 2 The complete response message must be received by the computer before another program message can be sent to the SourceMeter 14 18 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual RS 232 interface operation NOTE The programmable aspects of RS 232 operation baud rate data bits parity and terminator are configured from the COMMUNICATION option of the Main Menu See Section 1 Main menu Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Make sure the device you connect to the SourceMeter also uses these settings You can break data transmissions by sending a C decimal 3 or X decimal 18 charac ter string to the instrument This clears any p
109. X 2 3 and 5 through 12 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation TRIGger DELay Model 2430 in DC Mode Contact check commands Appendix F After saving the desired setups in consecutive memory locations unless branching see CALC2 CLIM PASS SML use the POINts command to specify how many sweep points to perform and the STARt command to specify where to start from POINts lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory POINts lt NRf gt Specify number of sweep points to execute Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Number of sweep points Description This command is used to specify the number of points for the sweep For example if you saved setups in memory locations 1 through 12 for a sweep specify a 12 point sweep using this command STARt lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory STARt lt NRf gt Select Source Memory Sweep start location Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command is used to set the starting location of a Source Memory Sweep For example for setups saved in memory locations 98 through 5 specify a starting location of 98 18 96 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual RECall lt NRf gt SOURCe MEMory RECall lt NRf gt Return to specified setup Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command is used to return the SourceMeter to the setup stored at the specified memory location Set scaling factor TRIG
110. annunciator off when it is not operating within the trigger model layers While in the idle state the instrument cannot perform any measurements An initiate command is required to take the instrument out of idle The following commands perform an initiate operation e INITiate e READ e MEASure Conversely if the unit is taking readings most commands except DCL SDC IFC and ABORt are queued up and will not be executed until the unit returns to idle When auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF you must first turn the source output on before sending the INITiate or READ command The MEASure command will automatically turn the output on Note that after the instrument returns to the idle state the output will remain on When auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON any of the above three commands can be used to initiate operation The source output will automatically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each mea surement is completed 11 12 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 3 Remote trigger model See Note Note The following commands place the SourceMeter into idle DCL SDC ABORt RST SYSTem PREset and RCL Idle Arm Layer ARM SOURce Nie DIRection ARM SOURce IMMediate ACCeptor Another N ARM COUNt BUS Arm lt n gt lINF TIMer Ti MANual Arm Event TLINk D
111. be invalid with source readback disabled 6 wire ohms measurements The 6 wire ohms measurement configuration allows you to make accurate resistance mea surements on resistor networks and hybrid devices in cases where internal resistance con nection nodes are not accessible The combination of 4 wire Kelvin connections and guarded ohms features eliminates the effects of internal parallel resistances that could degrade measurement accuracy and reduce measurement speed The basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for 6 wire ohms measurements is covered below NOTE See Figure 2 5C for 6 wire ohms connections See also Section 2 Ohms guard and Section 6 Guard Press CONFIG then Q to display the CONFIG OHMS menu Select SENSE MODE then press ENTER Select 4 WIRE then press ENTER From the CONFIG OHMS menu select GUARD then press ENTER Select OHMS then press ENTER get eto aa 4 12 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Press EXIT to return to normal display 6 7 Press MEAS then Q to select the ohms measurement function 8 Select the appropriate measurement range or use autoranging if desired 9 Turn on the output by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key 10 Take readings from the display 11 Turn the output off when done by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Remote ohms programming The following paragraphs summarize those basic commands necessary for remote ohms programming and als
112. be the source value and the voltage reading will be the voltage measurement Measure readings take priority over source readings Thus if configured to Source V Measure V the voltage reading for the calculation will be the voltage measurement not the programmed V Source value Con versely if configured to Source I Measure I the current reading for the calculation will be the current measurement The result of a calculation using a reading that is not sourced or mea sured will be the invalid NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 For example using a current reading in a calculation for Source V Measure V will cause a NAN result Example using Source I Measure V configuration calc math volt curr Calculate power using voltage measurement and I Source value After a calculation is configured and enabled the results are displayed when source measure operations are performed See STATe lt b gt page 18 33 Use the data command to send the results to the computer Vectored math By incorporating vectors you select which readings to use for the math calculation After all programmed source measure operations are com pleted the math calculation s are performed using readings indicated by the specified vectors Vector numbers are enclosed in brackets and start at 0 Thus vector O is the first reading in the array vector 1 is the second reading in the array and so on The largest vector number in the exp
113. bit Binary value Oto b1111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value Query SOURce2 Query programmed source value Description This command is used to define the 3 bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when a test limit 2 3 5 12 for the sorting mode passes Note that the output value can be specified in binary octal deci mal or hexadecimal format Use the table provided in the Description for the SOURce command to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe lt b gt Control LIMIT 1 test CALCulate2 LIMitx STATe lt b gt Control LIMIT x test x 2 3 5 12 Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable specified limit test 0 or OFF Disable specified limit test Query STATe Query state of specified limit test Description These commands are used to enable or disable LIMIT 1 LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests Any limit test not enabled is simply not performed When a limit test is enabled the Digital I O port comes under control of limit tests That is the result of the testing process updates the output pattern on the I O port 18 40 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual FAIL CALCulate2 LIMit 1 FAIL2 Read LIMIT 1 test result CALCulate2 LIMitx FAIL 2 Read LIMIT x test result
114. bit indi cates that an enabled summary bit of the Status Byte Register is set Bit B7 Operation Summary OSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred Depending on how it is used Bit B6 of the Status Byte Register is either the Request for Service RQS bit or the Master Summary Status MSS bit When using the serial poll sequence of the SourceMeter to obtain the status byte a k a serial poll byte B6 is the RQS bit See Serial polling and SRQ for details on using the serial poll sequence When using the STB command Table 15 3 to read the status byte B6 is the MSS bit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 9 Service request enable register The generation of a service request is controlled by the Service Request Enable Register This register is programmed by you and is used to enable or disable the setting of bit B6 RQS MSS by the Status Summary Message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register As shown in Figure 15 3 the summary bits are logically ANDed amp with the corresponding enable bits of the Service Request Enable Register When a set 1 summary bit is ANDed with an enabled 1 bit of the enable register the logic 1 output is applied to the input of the OR gate and therefore sets the MSS RQS bit in the Status Byte Register The individual bits of the Service Request Enable Register can be set or cleared by using the S
115. cannot be toler ated use the BEST FIXED source range FIXED With this option the source remains on the range presently on when the sweep is started For sweep points that exceed the source range capability the source will output the maximum level for that range For example if the source is on the 2V range when the sweep is started it will remain on the 2V range for the entire sweep If the configured sweep points are 1V 2V 3V 4V and 5V the sweep will be 1V 2V 2 1V 2 1V and 2 1V Figure 10 7 Sweep configuration menu tree CONFIG 10 16 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Setting delay Generally the time duration spent at each step or point of a sweep consists of the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used Instead pulse width for the on time and pulse delay for the off time are the delays that are set by the user Pulse Mode sweeps are covered later in this section The source delay is part of the SDM cycle and is used to allow the source to settle before the measurement is made See Section 6 Source delay measure cycle for details The total time period of the source delay could include an auto delay and or a user pro grammed delay With auto delay enabled 1ms of delay is used The user programmable source delay adds 0000 0000 to 9999 9990 seconds of delay See Section 3
116. cc eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeceeeteeeeneeeaeers 15 11 Standard Event Register ce eeeceeseeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeee 15 11 Operation Event Register ceeceeseeseeeeseeeneeeneees 15 12 Measurement Event Register eeceeseesreesneeeneees 15 13 Questionable Event Register ceeeesceeseeeneeeneees 15 15 Condition registers 0 eeeeceesseeeeeceseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 15 16 EVent reQisters saiisine nerne oiiae roa AEn 15 16 Event enable registers s sesseesseessesseeseessessetssesseeseeseess 15 17 Programming example program and read r gister SCE sisrisinnor rnern 15 18 16 17 18 QUEUES a is sec eee Ae Se eco eke 15 18 Output GUC spsg naseer sR N ER 15 18 Error QUEUE sosirerunsiriconan a 15 19 Programming example read error queue 15 20 Common Commands Command SUMIMALY ceeeccesceeseeceeceeseeetaceeseeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeees 16 2 Command reference 0 eee eeseeseeeceseeseeeseesseeaeceeecaeenseeseenaeeaes 16 3 IDN identification query eeeeeceeseeseeeetreeteeeeeees 16 3 OPC operation complete 0 eee eee eeeeseeereeseeeseeees 16 3 OPC operation complete query ceeeeeeteeeneeeteees 16 3 OPC programming example eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 4 SAV lt NR gt SAVE eirio iiiaae eisi 16 4 RCL lt NRf gt recall eeeseeseseeeesessesersesereersrserseereseesese 16 4 SAV RCL programming example eee 16 5 RST TOSS ece
117. circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with impedance limited sourc es NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective de vices to limit fault current and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the con necting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separate main input pow er disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting ca 5 02 bles or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Al ways make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessor
118. clear Press CONFIG then LIMIT Select DIGOUT then press ENTER Choose AUTO CLEAR then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER At the prompts set the auto clear pulse width Os to 60s and clear bit pattern 0 to 15 4 bit 0 to 7 3 bit size Use EXIT to return to normal display i aN 12 18 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Auto clear timing The following timing diagram example Figure 12 9 and discussion explain the relation ship between the digital output lines for auto clear Figure 12 9 Digital output auto clear timing example SOT OO BUSY Line 1 i i 1 Meas gt i Line 2 Line 4 1 10 Del 10 EOT us elay us With the SOT line being pulsed low as shown 4STEST must be the selected event for the trigger model If the SOT line is instead pulsed high by the handler TSTEST must be the selected arm event For high or low pulses select TLSTEST Initially the four digital output lines are cleared in this case they are all set high Limit tests start when the start of test SOT pulse is received from the component handler When the testing process is finished the pass or fail pattern is applied to the digital output As shown in the diagram lines 2 3 and 4 go low while line remains high The pulse width delay of the pass fail pattern can be set from 0 to 60sec 10nsec resolu tion as required by the component handler Note that the dela
119. contact check pulse that is amplified to drive the primaries of four transform ers The secondaries of transformers T1 through T3 drive a force sense contact pair for HI LO and GUARD HI Force and LO Force are switched through S1 and S2 The trans formers provide isolation among the inputs Capacitors C1 through C3 in the secondaries provide a high resistance DC path but low resistance AC path between the force and sense leads Transformer T4 drives the trip point resistor s Rsgr If the resistance in any of the DUT connections exceeds the value of Rspnr it is considered an OPEN LEAD condition and the microprocessor is notified Note that the trip point resistance Rsgr can be changed by closing either switch S3 or S4 resulting in 2Q 15Q or 50Q threshold resis tance values Figure F 2 Contact check block diagram To C1 HI Force Microprocessor a HI Sense 52 4 0 0 C2 LO Force Pulse Amplifier Signal Comparitors Timing Generator Computer Interface LO Sense mam c3 Guard Force Guard Sense F 4 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Operation DUT connections The contact check function can be used to verify satisfactory contact resistance to the DUT at both the front and rear panels If you do not wish to perform contact check using the GUARD GUARD SENSE jacks on the rear panel they must be connected for proper operation The SourceMeter must be placed into remot
120. converter phase In general there are three A D phases required to generate a voltage or current reading These phases are often referred to as the signal reference and reference zero phases The signal phase measures the input signal The reference and reference zero phases are associated with a precision voltage reference inside the SourceMeter By measuring all three phases zero drift for the reading is reduced A D conversion time is programmable with 0 01 power line cycle resolution When Auto Zero is enabled all three phases are measured each time the SourceMeter is triggered With Auto Zero disabled only the signal is measured Hence speed is increased at the expense of long term drift Firmware overhead This is the time associated with A D communication reading calibration and other opera tions necessary to perform the SDM cycle This time is not illustrated in the following tim ing diagrams Timing diagrams Case l Auto Zero enabled and measuring a single function Figure A 1 Case timing diagram A D Trigger Trigger Source Conversion A D A D Conversion Conversion ref phase ref zero phase Latency Delay Configuration current signal phase Source On Time gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 5Ousec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185 Firmware Overhead 1 8msec for Source V 2 15msec for Source I A 8 Spe
121. desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values Press MEAS V or MEAS I to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows Press CONFIG then SWEEP Select TYPE then press ENTER Select LOG then press ENTER At the prompts enter the desired START STOP and NO OF POINTS values From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired Se a aa 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 19 6 Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate 7 Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 3 Set delay Set the source delay as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or SOURCE I depending on the selected source function 2 Select DELAY then press ENTER Set the delay to the desired value then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display PLP Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The SourceMeter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 6 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the
122. flows into the HI terminal of the SourceMeter resulting in negative current measurements As the battery discharges current will gradually decrease until it reaches zero battery discharged NOTE When using the V Source to charge and discharge batteries use the HIGH IMPEDANCE output off state Section 13 This output off state opens the out put relay when the OUTPUT is turned off This open circuit condition keeps the external battery from discharging while the output is off 3 24 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CAUTION If using the I Source to charge and or discharge batteries the following precautions must be observed Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the SourceMeter that is not covered by the warranty Make sure the external voltage NEVER exceeds the voltage compli ance setting of the I Source This will cause excessive current to be drawn from the external battery or source Make sure the output off state of the I Source is set for HIGH IMPEDANCE This setting opens the output relay when the OUTPUT is turned OFF With the NORMAL output off state selected turning the output off sets voltage compliance to zero This 0V compliance condition will cause excessive current to be drawn from the external battery or source See Section 13 Front panel output configuration to select the high impedance output off state Sink programming example Table 3 8
123. for a memory sweep are initialized to the present setup configuration of the SourceMeter with CALC 1 dis abled User defined math expressions are replaced with the Power math expression The four standard save setups SAVO SAV4 are initialized to the present setup configuration of the SourceMeter e All CALCulate1l user defined math expressions are deleted 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 109 Control beeper IMMediate lt freq time gt SYSTem BEEPer IMMediate lt freq time gt Parameters freq 65 to 2e6 Specify frequency in Hz time 0 to 7 9 Specify time duration NOTE The frequency and time values must be separated by a comma i e syst beep 100 3 Description The beeper of the SourceMeter can be used to provide an audible signal at a specified frequency and time duration up to 7 9 seconds 65Hz This beeper can for example be used to signal the end of a lengthy sweep Example SYSTem BEEPer500 1 Beep at 500Hz for 1 second The correlation between the duration and frequency of the beep is expressed as follows Maximum Time 512 Frequency For example at a frequency of 512Hz the maximum beep time is one second You can set the time greater than one 1 second but it will only beep for one second Note that in order to use this command the beeper must be enabled See next command STATe lt b gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt Enable or dis
124. for a total of 30 source delay measure actions Refer to the examples at the end of this section The maximum buffer size for the SourceMeter is 2500 readings The product of the two counter values cannot exceed 2500 For example if you set an arm count of two the max imum trigger count will be 1250 2500 2 1250 However you can set the arm count to INFINITE With an infinite arm count the maximum trigger count is 2500 NOTE When a sweep is configured the trigger model settings will not change until the sweep is started After the sweep is finished the trigger model will reset to the previous settings Output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger via rear panel Trigger Link connector after various trigger model operations An output trigger is used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation See Trigger link page 11 19 for more information Trigger Layer Output Triggers After each action Source Delay and Measure the SourceMeter can be programmed to send out an output trigger if Trigger Link is the selected Trigger In Source For example if the Trigger Out Event for Measure is ON an output trigger will be sent after the Measure action When used with a scanner an output trigger after each measurement can signal the scanner to select the next channel in the scan NOTE When using SourceMeter autoranging it is recommended that you use measure output triggers to avoid erroneous
125. gt Specify control source IMMediate or TLINk IMMediate Jv SOURce Query control source v 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used This command is ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 23 Table 18 11 continued TRIGger command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure v DIRection lt name gt Enable SOURce or disable ACCeptor v bypass DIRection Query state of bypass v ASYNchronous Configure output triggers v ILINe lt n gt Select input trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 1 ILINe Query input trigger line INPut lt event list gt Enable input event detectors SOURce NONE DELay SENSe or NONE INPut Query enabled input event detectors OLINe lt n gt Select output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 2 OLINe Query output trigger line OUTPut lt event list gt Output trigger after SOURce DELay SENSe NONE or not NONE at all OUTPut Query when output trigger is going to occur 18 24 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Calculate subsystems There are three Calculate Subsystems The CALC1 Subsystem is used for math expres sions CALC2 is used for limit tests and CALC3 provides statistical data on readings stored in the buffer The commands in these subsystems are summarized in Table 18 1 CALCu late 1 Configure and control math exp
126. i VR Actual resistance a Rs 4 8 Ohms Measurements Figure 4 3 4 wire resistance sensing SourceMeter Sense selection Input Output HI 4 wire Sense HI 4 wire Sense LO Input Output LO 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Test Current I Rica Reap Lead V Resistance Resistances Under Test Sense Current pA Reap I Current sourced by SourceMeter Vu Voltage measured by SourceMeter Veg Voltage across resistor Because sense current is negligible Vy Vp Vu Ve and measured resistance I I Use the following procedure to select 2 wire or 4 wire sense operation 1 Press CONFIG then Q to display the ohms configuration menu 2 Select SENSE MODE then press ENTER 3 Select 2 WIRE or 4 WIRE as desired then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 9 Offset compensated ohms NOTE For the Model 2430 the following offset compensated ohms method is not valid in the Pulse Mode However offset compensated ohms is available as a math function Section 8 Math operations The presence of thermal EMFs Vgyp can adversely affect low resistance measurement accuracy To overcome these unwanted offset voltages use the offset compensated ohms measurement method In general this method measures resistance V I at a specific source level and then sub tracts a resistance measurement ma
127. in Appendix A for more information Table 4 1 Auto ohms default test currents Auto ohms 2400 and 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 range default test current default test current 2Q 1A 20Q 100mA 100mA 2000 10mA 10mA 2kQ ImA ImA 20kQ 100A 100A 200kQ 104A 104A 2MQ pA 104A 20MQ pA 1A 200MQ 100nA 4 4 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Selecting ohms measurement method On power up auto ohms is the default method for the ohms function Perform the follow ing steps to check and or change the ohms measurement method 1 Press CONFIG and then Q to display the ohms configuration menu 2 Using the EDIT keys place the cursor flashing menu item on SOURCE and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the presently selected ohms measurement method To retain this selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the measurement method place the cursor on the alternate selection AUTO or MANUAL and press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to exit from the menu structure Auto ohms measurements Perform the following steps to perform auto ohms measurements NOTE The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 Connections WARNING To prevent electric shock do not make or break connections to the SourceMeter with the output on If on press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn t
128. in Section 2 Connections Step 1 Select source Press SOURCE V to select the V Source or press SOURCE I to select the I Source The presently programmed source value Vspc or Igpc and compliance level Cmpl are dis played Note that the OFF message is displayed to indicate that the source is off ON OFF indicator off Step 2 Set source level and compliance limit The source level is the voltage or current setting of the selected source V Source or I Source A compliance limit acts as a power limiter to the DUT and is set to protect the DUT from damaging currents or voltages When using the V Source a current compliance is set When using the I Source a voltage compliance is set Compliance defines the max imum absolute value the SourceMeter can output 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 15 Note that compliance can also be determined by the measurement range Depending on which value is lower compliance occurs at the programmed value real compliance or at the maximum compliance value for the present fixed measurement range range compli ance For example with compliance set to 2V and the 200mV measurement range selected compliance will occur at 210mV On the 20V measurement range compliance will occur at 2V See Section 6 Compliance limit for details on real and range compliance NOTE The SourceMeter must be in the edit mode EDIT annunciator ON to set source
129. in Table D 5 Common com mands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table D 5 IEEE command groups LISTEN TALK HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUEST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END D 14 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part of the IEEE 488 standards define an instru ment s ability to support various interface functions and should not be confused with pro gramming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the SourceMeter are listed in Table D 6 The codes define SourceMeter capabilities as follows Table D 6 SourceMeter interface function codes Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AHI Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker serial poll unaddressed
130. in the trigger layer After the pro grammed trigger event occurs the instrument waits until the delay period expires before performing the Device Action NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used The Pulse Mode uses pulse width and pulse delay for pulse timing See Section 5 for details on Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 123 SOURce lt name gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 SOURce lt name gt Specify arm event control source TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce lt name gt Specify trigger event control source Parameters lt name gt IMMediate Pass operation through immediately TLINk Select Trigger Link trigger as event TIMer Select timer as event MANual Select manual event BUS Select bus trigger as event NSTest Select low SOT pulse as event PSTest Select high SOT pulse as event BSTest Select high or low SOT pulse as event NOTE Only IMMediate and TLINK are available as trigger layer control sources Query Description SOURce Query programmed control source These commands are used to select the event control source With IMMediate selected operation immediately continues A specific event can be used to control operation With TLINK selected operation continues when a trigger pulse is received via the Trigger Link NOTE The following control sources are not available for the trigger layer With TIMer selected the event occurs at the beginning of the
131. is lt 250usec This does not include the response time of autorang ing or the second order effects on loads that are not purely resistive Load regulation The voltage specification for V source mode load changes is 0 01 ImvV This means that on the 200mV range the load current can be changed from zero to full scale with less than 1 02mV of error Calculation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual error 0 01 x 0 2V ImV 1 02mV Assuming a 0 to 1A change in current the output impedance equates to 1 02mQ 1 02mV IA 1 02mQ This level can only be achieved using 4 wire remote sensing Table 3 1 Source measure capabilities 2400 2410 Range Source Measure Range Source Measure 200mV 210mV 21lmV 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 2V 42 1V 2 11V 20V 21V 21 1V 20V 21V 21 1V 200V 210V 211V 1000V_ 1 1kV 1 1kV 1pA 1 05pA 1 055pA 1pA 1 05pA 1 055pA 10pA 10 5uA 10 55uA 10pA 10 5uA 10 55pA 100pA 105uA 105 5uA 100pA 105uA 105 5uA ImA 1 05mA 1 055mA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 20mA 21mA 21 1mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A 1A 1 05A 1 055A Max Power 22W Max Power 22W Table 3 1 continued 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source measure capabilities Basic Source Measure Operation 2420 2425 2430 Range Source Measure Range Source M
132. is made up of a condition register an event register and an event enable register A condition register is a read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset When an event register bit is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register Queues The SourceMeter uses an Output Queue and an Error Queue The response messages to query commands are placed in the Output Queue As various programming errors and sta tus messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue When a queue contains data it sets the appropriate summary bit of the Status Byte Register 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 3 Figure 15 1 SourceMeter status register structure Questionable Questionable Questionable Event Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Logical Calibration Summary OR Error Queue Command Warning Always Zero Output Queue Service Status Request Byte Enable Register Register Standard Standard Event Event Status Status Enable Register Register Logical Operation Complete gt OR
133. is used to send values in the bi nary octal or hexadecimal format The prefix designates the format type BXxX X B specifies the binary format Xx X is the binary number using Os and 1s OQXxX X Q specifies the octal format XxX X is the octal number values 0 through 7 HXx x H specifies the hexadecimal format Xx X is the hexadecimal number values 0 through 9 and A through F Examples to send the decimal value 36 in the non decimal formats ESE b100100 Binary format ESE q44 Octal format ESE h24 Hexadecimal format 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 13 Angle brackets lt gt Angle brackets lt gt are used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the program message For example OUTPut lt b gt The lt b gt indicates a Boolean type parameter is required Therefore to enable the selected source you must send the command with the ON or 1 parameter as follows OUTPut ON OUTPut 1 Query commands This type of command requests queries the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the command Most com mands have a query form ARM TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value
134. layer IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately GPIB Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMER Initially event detection is satisfied immediately Subsequent event detection occurs after the timer interval elapses After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to specify the timer interval in seconds MANUAL Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is pressed TLINK After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the input line for the Trigger Link and the state of the event detection bypass With ONCE selected operation will loop around the arm event detector on each new pass through the trigger model With NEVER selected operation always waits for the input trigger JSTEST Event detection occurs when the SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detection bypass With ONCE selected opera tion will loop around the arm event detector on each new pass through the trigger model With NEVER selected operation always waits for the input trigger TSTEST Event detection occurs when the SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed high After selecting this arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detection bypass TUSTEST Event detection occurs when the SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed either high or low After selecting th
135. limits assessorina 3 6 Compliance commands ssssssssssiosisicessescsrsissssesrususrissssesissescsse 3 7 AUto source delay ccceicecccesesstedseeceeteee tectervenstreyscbiesutvees 3 13 Basic source measure commands es eeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Basic source measure programming example sesse 3 19 Measure only programming example ceeeeeeeseereees 3 21 Sink programming example 0 0 00 cee eseeceeeeceeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeaes 3 24 Ohms Measurements Auto ohms default test currents oe ee le eee eeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 Remote commands for basic ohms measurements 4 12 Auto ohms programming example eeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeees 4 13 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only Basic pulse measure commands 1 0 00 eee seeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 15 Basic pulse programming example eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 16 Source Measure Concepts Compliance MitS sisseoste traa 6 3 Compliance examples s sssosissorcsisecssiessessesseiesriseirisesivssesesess 6 5 Buffer considerations 00 0 eeeeeeseseceeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeas 6 42 7 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 8 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 9 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 10 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 10 4 Table 10 5 Table 10 6 Table 10 7 Table 10 8 Table 10 9 11 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 12 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table 12 3 Table 12 4 Range Digits S
136. line cycles NPLC where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16 67msec 1 60 and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec 1 50 In general the fastest integration time FAST 0 01 PLC results in increased reading noise and fewer usable digits The slowest integration time HI ACCURACY 10 PLC provides the best noise rejection In between settings are a compromise between speed and noise The default power on speed setting is NORMAL 1 PLC NOTE For the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 the valid NPLC range is 0 01 to 0 1 PLC The speed setting affects both the NMRR normal mode rejection ratio and CMRR common mode rejection ratio Normal mode noise is the noise signal between the HI and LO input terminals while common mode noise is the noise signal between LO and chassis ground See Appendix A for NURR and CMRR specifications Setting speed Speed is set from the Speed Accuracy menu and is structured as follows Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change the speed setting NOTE For the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 speed is set from Pulse Speed menu This menu structure is located after the Speed Accuracy menu Use the Rules to nav igate menus in Section I to check and or change the speed setting Front panel speed control Press SPEED or CONFIG SPEED to display the menu See Figure 7 1 FAST Sets speed to 0 01 PLC and sets display resolution to 3 digits e MED Sets speed to 0 10 PLC and sets display resolut
137. lower limit Description Auto range lower limits are intended primarily for SYST RCM MULT support See SYSTem subsystem page 18 106 The lower limit for all three functions is programmable and must be less than or equal to the upper limit If the lower limit is equal to the upper limit auto ranging is effectively disabled See below When autoranging is disabled you can manually program the unit for any range below the lower limit Note also that the maximum volts lower limit depends on the compliance set ting see below 18 68 SCPI Command Reference ULIMit lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO ULIMit SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ULIMit SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO ULIMit lt n gt Parameters Query Description Set compliance parameters LEVel lt n gt lt n gt ULIMit 2 1e8 to 2 1e8 2 1e7 to 2 1e7 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query auto ranging upper limit for amps Query auto ranging upper limit for volts Set auto ranging upper limit for ohms Ohms upper limit 2400 and 2410 Ohms upper limit 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Query auto range upper limit Auto range upper limits are intended primarily for SYST RCM MULT support See SYSTem subsystem page 18 106 For voltage and cur rent the upper limit is controlled by the compliance range and there fore is available only as a query When autoranging is disabled you can manually program t
138. memory SENSe 1 Sense Subsystem y DATA Path to SENSe 1 data y LATest Return only most recent reading FUNCtion Select measurement function s v CONCurrent lt b gt Enable or disable ability to measure more ON v v than one function simultaneously When disabled volts function is enabled CONCurrent Query concurrent state v ON lt function list gt Specify functions to enable CURRent v y VOLTage DC CURRent DC or RESistance ALL Enable all functions concurrent v enabled or enable ohms function concurrent disabled COUNt Query number of functions that are v enabled ON Returns list of functions that are enabled A OFF lt function list gt Specify functions to disable VOLTage v v VOLTage DC CURRent DC or RESistance RESistance ALL Disable all measurement functions y COUNt Query number of functions that are v disabled OFF Returns list of functions that are disabled y STATe lt name gt Query state of specified function 1 on v or 0 off 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode concurrent measurements are always disabled This command is invalid error 831 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 11 Table 18 6 continued SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 CURRent DC Path to configure current y RANGe Configure measurement range v UPPer Select range by specifying
139. ment See AUTO lt b gt page 18 44 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 67 Select auto range AUTO lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control auto ranging for ohms Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto range 1 or ON Enable auto range Query AUTO Query state of auto range Description This command is used to control auto ranging With auto ranging enabled the instrument automatically goes to the most sensitive range to perform the measurement When this command is used to disable auto range the instrument remains at the automatically selected range When a range is manually selected auto range is disabled See previous command NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range cannot be enabled error 831 LLIMit lt n gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe AUTO LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit for ohms Parameters lt n gt 105e 6 to 105e 6 Amps lower limit 21 to 21 Volts lower limit 2 1e8 to 2 1e8 Ohms lower limit 2400 and 2410 2 1e7 to 2 1le7 Ohms lower limit 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Query LLIMit Query auto range
140. n gt 42 to 42 Specify V Source limit 4 Set limit to 4V 8 Set limit to 8V 12 Set limit to 12V 16 Set limit to 16V 20 Set limit to 20V 24 Set limit to 24V 32 Set limit to 32V 33 to 42 Set limit to NONE NONE Set limit to 42V DEFault Set limit to 42V NONE MINimum Set limit to 4V MAXimum Set limit to 42V NONE LIMit Query limit level LIMit DEFault Query RST default limit LIMit MINimum Query lowest allowable limit LIMit MAXimum Query highest allowable limit This command is used to set the Over Voltage Protection OVP limit for the V Source The V Source output will not exceed the selected limit An exception to this is a parameter value that exceeds 160V for the Model 2400 500V for the Model 2410 48V for the Model 2420 80V for the Models 2425 and 2430 or 32V for the Model 2440 Exceeding those values allows the V Source to output its maximum voltage The OVP limit is also enforced when in the I Source Mode The limit parameter values are magnitudes and are in effect for both positive and negative output voltage You can express the limit as a posi tive or negative value If you specify a value that is less than the lowest limit the lowest limit will be selected If you specify a value that is between limits the lower limit will be selected For example if you specify a value of 110 for the Model 2400 the 100V limit will be selected WARNING Even with the voltage protection limit set to the lowest value 20V
141. nector is designed so it will fit only one way Figure 14 3 shows the location of the TEEE 488 connector Tighten the screws securely making sure not to overtighten them 3 Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application 4 Make sure the other end of the cable is properly connected to the controller Most controllers are equipped with an IEEE 488 style connector but a few may require a different type of connecting cable See your controller s instruction manual for information about properly connecting to the IEEE 488 bus NOTE You can only have 15 devices connected to an IEEE 488 bus including the con troller The maximum cable length is either 20 meters or two meters multiplied by the number of devices whichever is less Not observing these limits may cause erratic bus operation Figure 14 3 IEEE 488 connector location WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA QO oy 250V 250V PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK Ko COM SENSE SENSE 4 WIRE INPUT 50V SENSE OUTPUT rea IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU RS232 owe ON For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FII Primary address The SourceMeter ships from the factory with a GPIB primary address of 24 When the unit powers up it momentarily displays the primary address You can set the address to a value from 0 to 30 but do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the sam
142. oiiaii narar s Aena i siete hoes F 20 Contact check defaults sssroriiisirosiircsiisrsiicieriiiiinsii F 20 GPIB 488 1 Protocol TIMEOGUCHION ses ciccssesacendenterecseesstessisncessutesseesodcdveudesesebeonsoesoceosenss G 2 Selecting the 488 1 protocol eee eecessecesseceseeceeeeneessaeeeseeeeees G 2 Protocol differences cccseseecsecssesssseseesvensectesersensebessaesoeesers G 3 Message exchange protocol MEP 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeereees G 3 Using SCPI based programs 0 eeceescessceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaes G 3 NRED hold Off ii issiecods scoes tee sadessedesgeerdsesssstevissccteaosiartse G 4 NDAC hold off sasierennimnienesinsen G 4 Wrigger On talk ccecesctiseiiescisslessecdeedestvescevsdhevecs ccvtnivstee il G 5 Message available 200 ceesccesceceseceseeeeeeeeseeceseeesaeeeaeeeneeeeaes G 5 General operation notes eee ceeeeseceeeeseeeseeseeeseeneees G 5 GPIB reading speed Comparisons 0 0 00 ee eeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees G 6 SWEEP OPELallOM 3 iecescscssiicsaeds coi rien Cee E EEN O TRES dei G 6 Single shot operation ssssssssesssssssssserssssressessesssrssesseesees G 8 List of Illustrations 1 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 3 Figure 3 1 4 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 5 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6
143. on limit tests DELay lt n gt SOURce2 CLEar AUTO DELay lt n gt Set delay for auto clear Parameters lt n gt 0 to 60 Specify delay in seconds DEFault 100psec delay MINimum 0 sec MAXimum 60 sec Query DELay Query delay DELay DEFault Query RST default delay DELay MINimum Query lowest allowable delay DELay MAXimum Query maximum allowable delay Description This command is used to set the delay for digital output auto clear This delay determines the pulse width of the limit test output pattern as required by the handler After the delay the output returns clears to the pattern programmed by the TTL LEVel command The delay actually defines the pulse width for line 4 which is used by category register component handlers as the end of test EOT strobe The pulse width of the other three lines are 20usec longer 10psec before line 4 is toggled and 10usec after line 4 is cleared Skewing the timing on line 4 provides setup and hold time for category register com ponent handlers See Section 12 Limit Testing for details on timing 18 104 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual STATus subsystem The STATus subsystem is used to control the status registers of the SourceMeter The com mands in this subsystem are summarized in Table 18 8 NOTE These registers and the overall status structure are fully explained in Section 15 Status Structure Read event registers EVENt
144. on source output Trigger reading and limits test Turn off output Query Limit 2 test results 1 discard diode Query Limit 3 test results 1 send diode to QA Table 12 4 Limit test results summary Digital I O port Handler bin Diode voltage range Test result binary value number 0 78 to 0 82V Pass 0001 1 0 75 to 0 78V or Send to QA 0010 0 82 to 0 85V lt 0 75 gt 0 85V Discard 0011 3 13 Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration Digital I O port Discusses the various input output lines on the Digital I O Port as well as the 5V line that can be used to power external logic circuits Safety interlock Describes how to use the Digital I O Port as a safety interlock Front panel output configuration Details configuration of the Digital I O Port as a safety interlock as well as configuring main output off states Remote output configuration Summarizes the remote commands used to con trol the Digital I O Port interlock and main output off states A simple program ming example is also provided 13 2 Digital O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O port The SourceMeter has a digital input output port that can be used to control external digital circuitry such as a handler that is used to perform binning operations when testing limits NOTE For the Model 2400 only the Digital
145. osseseeeseesseessesessssssrsseseessrssssssesse 6 11 Three basic sweep waveform types sssssssssessssssesssessessse 6 13 Model 2400 operating boundaries Tamb lt 30 C 00 6 15 Model 2410 operating boundaries Tamb lt 30 C 0 6 16 Model 2420 operating boundaries Tamb lt 30 C 0 0 6 17 Model 2425 2430 operating boundaries Tamb lt 30 C 6 19 Model 2440 operating boundaries Tamb lt 30 C 0 0 6 20 T Source output characteristics ccceesceeseeeeseceneeeeeeeneeesees 6 22 T Source limit LIne ee sete ceseseeeecscecssesesseseessessessenees 6 23 I Source operating examples ese eeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeneeeaeees 6 25 V Source output characteristics ceeesceeseeeseceneeeeteeeneeeeees 6 27 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 7 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 8 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 10 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 11 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 11 9 Figure 11 10 V Source imit Nes sirsie 6 28 V Source operating examples sssseeesseeessesresesreersrrerrsrsresreee 6 29 SOULCEL cscs seietes eomeptendsebeeeavesedeesdecvauscessddseioeouseseevaysed dueneey 6 31 SOUEN sprei aeia EESE aea TE E E
146. output buffer as with the SCPI protocol For the 488 1 protocol output data will not be formatted until the first request for data is received This delay may cause unexpected time outs when using SRQ on MAV for queries that take a long time to execute General operation notes The TALK LSTN and SRQ annunciators are not functional in the 488 1 protocol This speeds up data throughput greatly The REM annunciator still operates since it is critical to fundamental GPIB operation If the unit is in REMote the GTL command may not put the SourceMeter into the local mode Only the front panel LOCAL key is guaranteed to operate if not in local lockout LLO GTL will still disable LLO e JEEE 488 bus commands and features GET IFC SDC DCL LLO Serial Poll and SRQ are still fully supported e Multiple TALKs on the same query are supported as in the SCPI protocol This fea ture is useful when reading back long ASCII strings G 6 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB reading speed comparisons The tables that follow compare the differences in reading speed for the SCPI and 488 1 protocols Included in all tables is the percentage improvement achieved with the 488 1 protocol compared to the SCPI protocol The most significant speed improvements are shown in the shaded areas of the tables Sweep operation Table G 1 through Table G 4 show bus reading rates for measure only source measure source measu
147. overhead There fore if the pulse width setting is shorter than what is achievable the setting is ignored The maximum pulse width for the 10A range source or measure is 2 5msec If the setting is gt 2 5msec the SourceMeter will limit the pulse width to 2 5msec Signal measurement A pulse reading consists of three measurement conversions The signal pulse is mea sured a precise internal reference is measured and finally zero common is measured The reading is calculated from these measurements As shown in Figure 5 2 the signal measurement Meas Sig is a component of the pulse width while the reference and zero measurements Meas Ref amp Zero are components of the off time The measurement process is split up this way to allow the shortest possible pulse width The time to perform the signal measurement depends on the speed setting NPLC of the SourceMeter and the power line frequency Meas Sig NPLC Line Frequency Where Meas Sig is the time it takes to measure the signal NPLC is the present speed setting 0 004 to 0 100 PLC Line Frequency is the frequency of the power line 50 or 60 Hz NOTE For front panel operation the menu to set speed is displayed by pressing the SPEED key For remote operation speed is set using an NPLCycles command See Section 7 Speed for details Overhead time As shown in Figure 5 2 there is some pulse width overhead time that is inherent to the measurement process T
148. panel sweep operation Sweep configuration menu The sweep configuration menu is structured as follows and is shown in Figure 10 7 Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the sweep menu and dashes indicate the options of each menu item Using Section 1 Rules to navigate menus go through the following menu to select and configure the desired sweep CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu Press CONFIG then SWEEP to display the sweep configuration menu e TYPE Use this menu item to select the type of sweep STAIR When the linear staircase sweep is selected you will be prompted to enter the START STOP and STEP levels LOG When the logarithmic staircase sweep is selected you will be prompted to enter the START and STOP levels and specify the number of measurement points CUSTOM With the custom sweep selected you specify the number of measurement points POINTS in the sweep and the source level at each point ADJUST POINTS With the INIT option you can set a consecutive range of measurement points in the sweep to a specific level For example assume that for a 20 point custom voltage sweep POINTS 20 you want points 10 through 15 to be set for 1V After selecting the INIT option set the VALUE to 1 000000V set the START PT to 10 and set the STOP PT to 15 SRC MEMORY With the Source Memory Sweep selected you specify the memory location START point to start the sweep 1 is the default and the
149. pattern size MODE Select GRADING or SORTING mode H W LIMITS Control and set mode for Limit 1 and Limit 4 tests LIMIT1 CMPL Select Limit 1 compliance test LIMIT4 CCHK Select Limit 4 contact check test CONTROL Enable disable Limit 4 test DISABLE Disable contact check limit test ENABLE Enable contact check limit test DIGIO PATTERN Set contact check Digital I O pattern 0 7 3 bit 0 15 4 bit F 12 Contact Check Function Table F 2 continued Contact check menu selections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Menu item Description MENU Main menu MAIN MENU A D CTRL A D control selection AUTO ZERO LINE FREQ NPLC CACHE Control NPLC caching CONT CHK Enable disable contact check DISABLE Disable contact check ENABLE Enable contact check select 2Q 15Q or 50Q resistance CONFIG TRIG Configure triggering CONFIGURE TRIGGER ARM LAYER Configure arm layer TRIG LAYER Configure trigger layer HALT Return to idle CONTACT CHECK Configure contact check event detection DISABLE Disable contact check event detection ENABLE Enable contact check event detection program contact CONFIG SOURCE V or CONFIG MEAS Q SENSE MODE 2 WIRE 4 WIRE check timeout 0 00000 to 999 99990 Configure 4 wire sense mode for contact check Select sense mode 2 wire sensing 4 wire sensing use for contact check See Section for complete menu listings and Section 11 and Section 12 for trigger
150. results Arm Layer Output Trigger The SourceMeter can also be programmed to output a trig ger when operation enters the Trigger Layer or after operation leaves the Trigger Layer and enters back into the Arm Layer This output trigger is typically sent to another instru ment to signal the end of a scan or sweep 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 7 Bench defaults The bench defaults are listed as follows They are also denoted in Figure 11 1 by the symbol Arm In Event Immediate Trigger In Source Immediate e Arm Count 1 Trigger Count 1 e Trigger Delay 0 0 sec e Delay Action 0 001 sec Source Trigger In Event On Delay Trigger In Event Off e Measure Trigger In Event Off Trigger Out Events All Trigger Out Events are disabled off e Arm Out Event Off Event Detection Bypasses Never both layers When the output is turned ON the SourceMeter will run in a continuous loop around the trigger model After each Measure Action operation will continue at the top of the trigger model The SourceMeter can be returned to idle by turning the output OFF Operation summary The trigger model is designed to offer versatility for the various source measure applica tions Typically it allows you to perform a specified number of measurements at various source levels For example assume you want to perform three measurements each at two different V source leve
151. s Manual Relative and Math 8 9 Figure 8 2 Connections for voltage coefficient tests KEITHLEY 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT A Resistor Under Test MEAS SOURCE PEAK ma ean D ea TRIG ran Ga gt I Q EED Ge D arg MENU Exit JENER FRONT RE User defined math functions In addition to the pre defined math functions you can also define your own functions by using appropriate remote commands user defined math functions are not available from the front panel The following paragraphs summarize the basic commands for user defined functions and also list a basic programming example See Section 18 Calculate subsystems for more details on user defined math functions Commands for user defined math functions Table 8 5 summarizes the commands for user defined math functions To define a math function 1 Tf desired assign units to the calculation result using CALC MATH UNIT Units is stored for the calculation 2 Assign a name to the expression using up to 10 ASCII characters using the CALC MATH NAME user name command 3 Define the expression using the CALC MATH DEFine or CALC MATH EXPRession command The new expression is the one that will be presently selected Enable the math function by sending CALC STATE ON 5 Turn on the output by sending OUTP ON then send INIT to trigger the unit 6 Request the data with the CALC DATA query 8 10 Relative a
152. seessessesstsessersssesseeesnnsenanes 3 14 Step 2 Set source level and compliance limit 3 14 Step 3 Select measurement function and range 3 16 Step 4 Turn output ON oo eee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 Step 5 Observe readings on the display 0 0 3 17 Step 6 Turn output off oo ee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeneeeaees 3 18 Remote command source measure procedure n s 3 18 Basic source measure commands ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 3 18 Source measure programming example 0 3 19 Measure Only assire oren eeri e E AEAEE 3 20 Front panel measure only sssesssseesseeeseeresresrsreresrrseeresrrseses 3 20 Remote command measure only eeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeees 3 21 SINK OPELAtlOM ose ic cd seek rines eetis S EAEE ANES EKE eoa 3 22 Battery charging discharging eeeseeeeseeeereerrsrerrererrereereees 3 22 Sink programming example ceecceeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 24 Ohms Measurements Ohms configuration Menu sssseseseeseesesessesesesresesssrssrsrereerereseset 4 2 Ohms measurement methods sessesssssesesessessesesresreresresesresreseses 4 3 Selecting ohms measurement method ee eeeeeeeeeees 4 4 Auto ohms measurements 2 0 eee eeeeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeenees 4 4 Manual ohms measurements 000 0 ceeeeeseeseceeeeseeeseeseeeees 4 5 COMMS SENSING senesi iaa e e E E e EE iE 4 7 Sense SCLECHON 4 0siesecescessensescsievscsezencnss vonveasvevavestoss seraveoseons 4 8
153. set specific bits in various status registers as sum marized in Table B 1 Section 15 has detailed information on registers and queues Briefly you can use the fol lowing queries to obtain error and status information e SYST ERR reads Error Queue e ESR reads Standard Event Status Register e STAT OPER reads Operation Event Register e STAT MEAS reads Measurement Event Register STAT QUES reads Questionable Event Register NOTE SCPI confirmed messages are described in volume 2 Command Reference of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Refer to the SYSTem ERRor command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 3 Table B 1 Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 440 Query UNTERMINATED after EE Standard Event 2 indefinite response 430 Query DEADLOCKED EE Standard Event 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED EE Standard Event 2 410 Query INTERRUPTED EE Standard Event 2 363 Input buffer overrun EE Standard Event 3 362 Framing error in program message EE Standard Event 3 361 Parity error in program message EE Standard Event 3 360 Communications error EE Standard Event 3 350 Queue overflow SYS Standard Event 3 330 Self test failed EE Standard Event 3 314 Save recall memory lost EE Standard Event 3 315 Configuration memory lost EE Standard Event 3 285 Program syntax error EE Standard Event 4 284 Program curre
154. source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information Performing a custom sweep Step 1 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows Select the desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I 2 Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values 3 Press MEAS V or MEAS I to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SWEEP 2 Select TYPE then press ENTER 3 Select CUSTOM then press ENTER 10 20 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 4 Use the displayed menu selections to enter the desired POINTS individual point values ADJUST POINTS and INIT initial value 5 From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired 6 Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate 7 Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 3 Set delay Set the source delay as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or SOURCE I depending on the selected source function Select DELAY then press ENTER Set the delay to the desired value then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display AYN Step 4 Turn output on Pre
155. state CAUTION Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 If after 90 seconds the SourceMeter is still overheated the OVER TEMP FAILURE mes sage may appear In that event turn off the SourceMeter immediately and allow it to cool for 30 minutes With the SourceMeter off check all the cooling vents to make sure they are not blocked DO NOT touch the heat sink as it may be hot enough to cause burns After turning the SourceMeter back on verify that the cooling fan is running If the failure message persists contact Keithley to facilitate repairs Leaving the SourceMeter on with the failure message dis played may result in damage to the unit Overheating conditions Assuming proper ventilation is maintained the SourceMeter will not overheat and subse quently turn off the output when the SourceMeter is operating as a source not sink and the ambient temperature is lt 30 C 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 7 Above 30 C for both source and sink operation the SourceMeter will not overheat if the high power range s is not used For the Models 2400 and 2410 the high power range is 1A For the Model 2420 the high power ranges are 20V 3A and 60V 1A For the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode the high power ranges are 20V 3A and 100V 1A For the Model 2440 the high power ranges are 10V 5A and 40V 1A NOTE See Operating boundaries for details on source and sink operation Powe
156. steps to test 1kQ 1 resistors 1 Select the Q function select the 1kQ measurement range or use AUTO range and connect the resistor to be tested to the SourceMeter 2 Configure the percent deviation math function a Press CONFIG press FCTN then select DEV b Set the reference REF value to 1 000000 k then press ENTER c Set the high tolerance HI TOL to 01 00 then press ENTER d Set the low tolerance LO TOL to 01 00 then press ENTER 3 Turn the output on The measured reading of the resistor is displayed Press FCTN to select the percent deviation math function The actual tolerance of the resistor will be displayed along with the result of the limit test If the resistor reading is within 1 of 1kQ the PASS test message is displayed If outside the 1 tolerance the FAIL message is displayed 5 When finished turn the output off NOTE The reading format is fixed at XXX XXX Limit testing can be disabled by pressing the LIMIT key Front panel math operations Perform the steps below to select and enable a math expression Figure 8 1 shows the math configuration menu tree 1 Select the appropriate source V or I for the math expression 2 Press CONFIG and then FCTN to display the math expression selections Place the cursor on the desired math expression and press ENTER For 2 point math expressions you will be prompted to enter the two source values Press ENTER after entering each source val
157. sv FX PK SLOWBLOW 1A 250V LINE RATING 85 264VAC SENSE 50 80 HZ TOVA NMAX WIRE INPUT sov SENSE OUTPUT ee i IEEEADDRESS H FRONT PANEL MENU TRIGGER INTERLOCK Ee RS232 LINK DIGITAL I O i CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIR fAZAI REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING j Trigger Link 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 25 Instrument configurations For this example the SourceMeter and Switching Mainframe are configured as shown below SourceMeter setup Le Restore bench defaults Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press the ENTER key From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select RESET then press ENTER Select BENCH then press ENTER Set up trigger parameters Press the CONFIG key and then the TRIG key to access the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu Select TRIG LAYER and then press ENTER to access the CONFIGURE TRIG LAYER menu Set trigger in event to TRIGGER LINK Select TRIGGER IN then press ENTER Select TRIGGER LINK then press ENTER Set trigger input line to 2 Select 2 then press ENTER three times to return to CONFIGURE TRIG LAYER menu Set trigger output line to 1 Select TRIGGER OUT then press ENTER Select LINE then press ENTER Select 1 then press ENTER Set trigger out events to MEAS ON all others to OFF Select EVENTS then press ENTER Select MEAS OFF and toggle the v
158. system can be further automated by adding a scanner With the use of a scanner the tests can be repeated cycled to test individual elements of a single package i e resistor network See Binning systems page 12 11 for more infor mation on using component handlers and scanners to perform binning operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 5 Operation overview Grading mode Grading mode limits operation is detailed by the flowchart in Figure 12 2 A test is only performed if it is enabled If disabled operation proceeds to the next test The following assumes the first three limit tests are enabled and the digital output of the SourceMeter is connected to a component handler for DUT binning See Binning systems page 12 11 If a handler is not used ignore digital input output handler interface actions With the limit tests properly configured turn the SourceMeter output on and press the LIMIT key In this example the testing process will start when the component handler sends the start of test SOT strobe pulse to the SourceMeter Note that if a handler is not used testing will start when LIMIT is pressed Pressing LIMIT a second time terminates the testing process As shown in the flowchart limit tests are performed after a measurement conversion Binning control The binning control selection determines when the testing process stops and the appropri ate binning operation occurs Th
159. tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted Command codes Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summarized in Fig ure D 3 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various commands are listed in Table D 2 Table D 2 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Command Hex value Decimal value GTL 01 SDC 04 GET 08 LLO 11 DCL 14 SPE 18 SPD 19 LAG 20 3F TAG 40 5F SCG 60 7F UNL 3F UNT SF D 11 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 3 Figure D Command codes are 1 U0q X 801d 40 LOLG 0q 90N 00rz pow Aq payuaw jdu Jou TOYLNOD INVL LOL pue GANDIANODNN 110d TATIVYVd Add UNDISNOD 110d TATIWYVd Ddd Oas 99d dNOAD dNOAD ANVWWOD ANVWWOD AYNVGNODAS AUVWIad m J OVI OV1 N 59y dNOND dNOYD dNOND dNOND ss3JAAY ss34JAAY GNVWWOD ANYWWOD IVE NALS TWSasAINN AassJAAAV a yo QO Nmt eee ee oe Oe lt nmnoOwn ScCCOrFKF He HP OOOORF Fe eH aOXnrD gt SxX gt N ooo Roo Ronee na z x M A n s J b d OrFNMTNON DDH OK NMTNON OrKHNMTNON A Moy uwnjoy d a gt Z w ssalppy AJL IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Typical command sequ
160. test input path name CALCu late 1 VOLTage CURRent or RESistance Acquire limit test data Set Limit 1 fail condition Name IN fail into compliance or OUT fail out of compliance Specify lower Limit X X 2 3 5 12 n limit Specify upper Limit X X 2 3 5 12 n limit Specify limit 1 fail bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Specify lower Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf NDN bit pat tern Specify upper Limit X fail bit pattern for grading mode X 2 3 5 12 NRf bit pattern Specify pass pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN bit pattern Enable disable Limit 1 test state ON or OFF Enable disable Limit X test X 2 3 5 12 state ON or OFF Query Limit 1 test result 0 pass 1 fail Query Limit X test result X 2 3 5 12 0 pass 1 fail Specify pass bit pattern NRf NDN pattern Sorting mode only if limits 2 3 and 5 12 dis abled Specify fail bit pattern for sorting mode NRf NDN pattern Specify pass source memory location Location NRf memory or NEXT next location 12 24 Limit Testing Table 12 1 continued Limit commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command Description CALCulate2 CLIMitis FAIL SMLocation lt location gt CALCulate2 CLIMits BCONtrol lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar AUTO lt state gt CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE lt name
161. tests s es 12 4 Limit test modes ssessessseeseseeesreresrrsesrsreresteerresresreresresese 12 4 BUMS seeno iee o E A E E S 12 4 Operation OVervieW e ssssssssssssessssrssesssrssessteseesstsssesressessreseesett 12 5 Grading MODES nenesinin sre A a a AAEE 12 5 Binning control ssssessssssssessreseereresreresresrssesesresesrrersee 12 5 Pass condition isicsies avs cesar ed annaa 12 8 Fail CONGIUMON o1 0 sccscvsiescsseescsrseotensossesseessenesnceseeseseaent 12 8 Sorting MODE sisses eiri cess aE ER ARESE 12 9 PB VMTN Gh 22s Sota cusS te cvceeesslavtiteass2eceusedeseseseuasticsseioea tess 12 9 Binning SYStOMS ssi cis scseas cess nr ei oei a a iess 12 11 Handler interface sssini deste ci sestevessesveredeessseatevscteses 12 11 Digital I O connector oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeaeeeeeees 12 11 Digital output lines wo cece ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 12 12 SOT Ne ua a eucits da iid ele daesaten icine 12 12 INT NE ee nna aa ee Ee S Eneee radeti 12 12 Handler types nresnain ein eat oe 12 12 Category pulse component handler 12 13 Category register component handler 12 13 Basic binning systems s ssesssessseesesereerrsesresessesreeresrsreers 12 14 Single element device binning seseseeseeeereeeeerreeee 12 14 Multiple element device binning oe 12 15 Digital output clear pattern eee eee eseereeeeeeneeees 12 17 Enabling auto clear oo cies eeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeneesees 12 17 Auto clear timing oo eee eeeceeseee
162. the 50mA limit Notice that as resistance decreases the slope of the DUT load line increases As resistance approaches infinity open output the SourceMeter will source virtually 50V at OmA Conversely as resistance increases the slope of the DUT load line decreases At zero resistance shorted output the SourceMeter will source virtually OV at 50mA Regardless of the load current will never exceed the programmed compliance of 50mA 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 29 Figure 6 14 V Source operating examples Current Limit Load Line 50mA l Meter la Operating Point 25mA Voltage Source Load Line V Source Vs 50V Im V R 50V 2kQ 25mA A Normal V source operation Current Limit Operatin Load Line y 2 Point 50mA Voltage Source Load Line 40V 50V V Source Vs Vs ly R 50mA 800Q 40V B V Source in compliance 6 30 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source I measure I and source V measure V The SourceMeter can measure the function it is sourcing When sourcing a voltage you can measure voltage Conversely if you are sourcing current you can measure the output current For these measure source operations the measure range is the same as the source range This feature is valuable when operating with the source in compliance When in compli ance the programmed source value is not reached Thus measur
163. the Model 8501 2 is 2m long Model 8502 trigger link adapter Lets you connect any of the six Trigger Link lines of the SourceMeter to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 DIN to BNC trigger cable Lets you connect Trigger Link lines one Volt meter Complete and two External Trigger of the SourceMeter to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors The Model 8503 is 1m long Model 8505 trigger link cable The Model 8505 is a male to dual female trigger link cable 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 5 Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 single fixed rack mount kit Mounts a single SourceMeter in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 side by side rack mount kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 2015 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 6430 6517 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 3 side by side rack mount kit Mounts a SourceMeter and a Model 199 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 4 side by side rack mount kit Mounts a SourceMeter and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 196 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775 etc side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 5 dual fixed rack mounting kit Mounts a SourceMeter and another 3 inch high instrument Model 182 428 486 487 2000 2010 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 6430 or 7001 side by side in a stan
164. the SourceMeter can output up to 1 05A at 105V or 3 15A at 21V Note that when sourcing more than 1 05A voltage is limited to 21V The dotted line in Figure 6 9D shows the extended output for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode which is 10 5A at LOSV 2440 Figure 6 9E shows Model 2440 I Source characteristics The Model 2440 can output up to 1 05A at 42V or 5 25A at 10 5V When sourcing more than 1 05A voltage is limited to 10 5V 6 22 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 9 I Source output characteristics Limit Limit V 210V 1100V 21V 21V Source Source l l 105mA 1 05A 21mA 1 05A A Model 2400 B Model 2410 Limit Limit V V Model 2430 Pulse Mode 63V 105V 4 y I 21V 21V I I DC Mode I Source Source l I I I I 1 05A 3 15A 1 05A 3 15A 10 5A C Model 2420 D Models 2425 and 2430 Limit V 42V 10 5V Source l 1 05A 5 25A E Model 2440 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 23 Figure 6 10 shows the limit lines for the I Source The current source limit line represents the maximum source value possible for the presently selected current source range For example if on the 100mA current source range the current source limit line is at 105mA The voltage compliance limit line represents the actual compliance that is in effect Remember that compliance can be real or range see Compliance limit page 6 2 These limit lines are boundaries that represent
165. the command word is a vowel including y delete it and all the letters after it Example e immediate imm Ifthe fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it Example e format form Ifthe command contains a question mark query or a non optional number included in the command word you must include it in the short form version Example e delay del Command words or characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message NOTE For fastest response to commands always use short forms 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 15 Program messages A program message is made up of one or more command words sent by the computer to the instrument Each common command is a three letter acronym preceded by an asterisk SCPI commands are categorized in the STATus subsystem and are used to explain how command words are structured to formulate program messages STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABle lt NRf gt Command and parameter ENABle Query command PRESet Command Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root com mand STATus and serves as a path The second level is made up of another path OPERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three
166. the expected 1 05e 4 v Vai lt n gt lUPIDOWN current reading UPPer Query range v AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON v v i AUTO Query auto range v ULIMit Returns I compliance range v LLIMit lt n gt Set auto ranging lower limit 105e 6 le 6 Jv to 105e 6 LLIMit Query auto ranging lower limit v NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 v v i 0 01 to 10 NPLCycles Query integration rate y PROTection Path to configure current compliance v LEVel lt n gt Specify current limit for V Source 1 05e 4 v v i LEVel Query current compliance limit y TRIPped In current compliance yes 0 no v RS YNchronize lt b gt Enable or disable measure and OFF compliance range synchronization RS YNchronize Query range synchronization VOLTage DC Path to configure volts v RANGe Configure measurement range y UPPer Select range by specifying the expected 21 v s5 lt n gt lUPIDOWN voltage reading UPPer Query range v AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON v s5 AUTO Query auto range v ULIMit Returns V compliance range y LLIMit lt n gt Set auto range lower limit 0 21 y LLIMit Query auto range lower limit v NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 v s5 0 01 to 10 NPLCycles Query integration rate v PROTection Path to configure voltage compliance v LEVel lt n gt Specify voltage limit for I Source
167. the menu structure Press EXIT key to cancel test Nn WwW Only VIEW DATES is accessible when calibration is locked Password is required to unlock calibration Disabling auto zero will reduce measurement accuracy 0 65535 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started Figure 1 3 Main menu tree Press MENU key Use lt and gt to select item then press ENTER pandas aa PAVE RESTORE POWERON e Cris USER SETUP NUMBER RESET SOURCE MEMORY SAVE COMMUNICATION GPIB RS 232 BAUD BITS PARITY TERMINATOR FLOW CTRL CAL UNLOCK EXECUTE VIEW DATES SAVE LOCK CHANGE PASSWORD TEST U DISPLAY TESTS KEYS DISPLAY PATTERNS CHAR SET A D CTRL AUTO ZERO LINE FREQ NPLC CACHE GENERAL DIGOUT SERIAL TIMESTAMP FAN 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 only NUMBERS BEEPER 1 23 1 24 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Rules to navigate menus Many source measure functions and operations are configured from the front panel menus Use the following rules to navigate through these configuration menus NOTE Complete rules to edit source and compliance values are found in the Basic source measure procedure in Section 3 See Editing source and compliance values below for an overview A menu item is selected by placing the cursor on it and pressing ENTER Cursor position is denoted by the blinking menu item or option The EDIT
168. the specified layer of the trigger model 18 122 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual For example assume the arm count is set to 2 and the trigger counter is set to 10 the SourceMeter is configured to perform 10 source measure operations twice for a total of 20 source measure operations The product of the arm count and trigger count cannot exceed 2500 If for example the arm count is 2 then the maximum trigger count is 1250 NOTE _ INFinite can be used only with ARM COUMt and FETCh READ MEAS CALC1 DATA or CALC2 DATA cannot be used with infinite arm count Only INIT will start measurements and only interlock over temperature SDC DCL or ABORt should be used to stop the sweep ARM COUNt INFinite can be used for repetitive source waveforms or for long tests where only the last reading is important For example the limits could be used to drive the interlock to abort a test when some con dition is met DATA would then give the answer to the test DELay lt n gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 DELay lt n gt Set trigger layer delay Parameters lt n gt 0 to 999 9999 Specify delay in seconds DEFault 0 second delay MINimum 0 second delay MAXimum 999 9999 second delay Query DELay Query the programmed delay DELay DEFault Query the RST default delay DELay MINimum Query the lowest allowable delay DELay MAXimum Query the largest allowable delay Description The delay is used to delay operation
169. the user saved setup RST Reset command Returns the SourceMeter to the RST default conditions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup as the user saved setup SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable command Programs the Service Request Enable Register SRE Service request enable query Reads the Service Request Enable Register STB Status byte query Reads the Status Byte Register TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to the SourceMeter TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns the result WAI Wait to continue command Wait until all previous commands are executed Status commands are covered in Section 15 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common Commands 16 3 Command reference IDN identification query Reads identification code The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number and firm ware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC MODEL nnnn xxxxxxx yyyyy zzzzz a d Where nnnn is the model number XXXXXXxX is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision level of the digital board ROM and display board ROM including date and time of build a is the analog board revision level d is the digital board revision level OPC operation complete Sets OPC bit OPC operation complete query Places a 1 in output queue When OPC is sent the OPC bit in th
170. this delay is separate from the Delay Action of the SDM cycle The Delay Action is discussed next Source delay and measure actions The SDM cycle of the SourceMeter consists of three actions Source Delay and Measure SOURCE Action Any programmed output voltage or current level changes are performed DELAY Action This programmable delay is used to allow the source to settle before a measurement is performed It can be manually set from 0 00000 to 9999 99900 seconds or Auto Delay can be enabled With Auto Delay enabled the SourceMeter automatically selects a nominal delay period based on the selected function and range NOTE Inthe SYSTem RCMode MULTiple mode the soak time programmed with sSOURce 1 SOAK takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 18 MEASURE Action During this phase of the SDM cycle the measurement process takes place If the repeat filter is enabled as shown in Figure 11 4 the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield a single filtered reading measure ment If using the moving filter or if the filter is disabled only a single reading conversion will yield a reading Figure 11 4 Measure action MEASURE Action Filter Process Offsest Comp Ohms Autorange CALC1 CALC2 Repeat CONV Reading Conversion 11 16 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Counters Programmable c
171. timer interval and every time it times out For example if the timer is pro grammed for a 30 second interval the first pass through the control source occurs immediately Subsequent arm events will then occur every 30 seconds The interval for the timer is set using the TIMer command With MANual selected the event occurs when the TRIG key is pressed With BUS selected the event occurs when a GET or TRG command is sent over the bus With NSTESt selected the event occurs when the start of test SOT low pulse is received from a component handler via the Digital I O port This is used for limit testing With PSTest selected the event occurs when start of test SOT high pulse is received from a component handler via the Digital I O port This is used for limit testing 18 124 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TiMer lt n gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TIMer lt n gt Set interval for arm layer timer Parameters lt n gt 0 001 to 9999 999 Specify timer interval in seconds 10000 00 to 99999 99 Specify timer interval in seconds Query TIMer Query programmed timer interval Description These commands are used to set the interval for the timer Note that the timer is in effect only if the timer is the selected control source DIRection lt name gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure DIRection lt name gt Control arm bypass TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure DIRection lt name gt C
172. to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value Query SOURce2 Query source value for specified limit Description This command is used to define the digital output fail patterns for the Limit 4 test 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 19 Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern For non decimal parameters convert the decimal value to its binary octal or hexadecimal equivalent Decimal OUT 4 OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V OUT 4 not used in 3 bit mode values 0 to 7 Configure and control contact check event detection SOURce lt name gt TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce lt name gt Enable disable event detection Parameters lt name gt IMMediate Disable contact check event detection CCHeck Enable contact check event detection Query SOURce Query state of contact check event detection Description This command enables or disables the contact check event detection When event detection is enabled the unit will wait the specified timeout period TOUT lt NRf gt page F 20 before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to t
173. to complete the process To enter the source or compliance value directly simply key in the desired value with the numeric keys while the cursor is blinking Again the source or compliance value will be updated immediately Toggling the source and measure display fields Normally the measured reading value will appear in the upper main display line while the source and compliance values appear in the left and right fields respectively of the lower display line You can toggle the source and measure display fields by pressing the TOGGLE key to place the source and measure values in the desired positions Disabling front panel display Front panel display circuitry can be disabled to allow the instrument to operate at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen with the following message FRONT PANEL DISABLED Press LOCAL to resume As reported by the message all front panel controls except LOCAL TRIG and OUT PUT ON OFF are disabled 1 26 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel control Front panel display circuitry is controlled from the DISABLE DISPLAY configuration menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then EDIT or TOGGLE To select an option NOW NEVER SWEEP or STORE use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cursor on the desired option then press ENTER The options for DISABLE DISPLAY are explained as follows NOW Select this option to disable the display now NEV
174. to talk on LAG L4 Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen on TAG SR1 Service Request capability RL1 Remote Local capability PPO No Parallel Poll capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability CO No Controller capability El Open collector bus drivers TEO No Extended Talker capability LEO No Extended Listener capability SH Source Handshake Function SH1 defines the ability of the instrument to initiate the transfer of message data over the data bus AH Acceptor Handshake Function AH1 defines the ability of the instrument to guarantee proper reception of message data transmitted over the data bus T Talker Function The ability of the instrument to send data over the bus to other devices is provided by the T function Instrument talker capabilities T5 exist only after the instrument has been addressed to talk L Listener Function The ability for the instrument to receive device dependent data over the bus from other devices is provided by the L function Listener capabilities L4 of the instrument exist only after it has been addressed to listen SR Service Request Function SR1 defines the ability of the instrument to request service from the controller RL Remote Local Function RL1 defines the ability of the instrument to be placed in the remote or local modes 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 15 PP Parallel
175. up the SourceMeter as follows e Reading source raw readings e Number of points 10 e Acquired data buffer readings mean average and standard deviation NOTE You can determine when the buffer is full by reading the appropriate status reg ister bit See Section 15 for details on the status structure Table 9 2 Data store example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR VOLT 10 Source 10V TRAC FEED SENS Store raw readings in buffer TRAC POIN 10 Store 10 readings in buffer TRAC FEED CONT NEXT _ Enable buffer TRIG COUN 10 Trigger count 10 OUTP ON Turn on output INIT Trigger readings TRACE DATA Request raw buffer readings gt CALC3 FORM MEAN Select mean buffer statistic gt CALC3 DATA Request buffer mean data gt CALC3 FORM SDEV Select standard deviation statistic gt CALC3 DATA Request standard deviation data 9 8 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 10 Sweep Operation e Sweep types Describes the four basic sweep types Linear staircase logarithmic staircase custom and source memory sweep Configuring and running a sweep Discusses the procedure for setting up and performing sweeps including selecting and configuring a sweep setting the delay and performing a sweep e Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only Covers sweep operation for the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 10 2 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual
176. upper limit auto ranging is effectively disabled When auto ranging is disabled you can manually change to any range below the lower limit V I or Ohms or any range above the upper limit Ohms only Setting auto range limits To set the upper or lower auto range limit press CONFIG A or CONFIG respectively then use the lt and keys to set the limit at the ULIMIT or LLIMIT prompt Remember that you cannot set the upper limit in the V and I modes but the unit will display the upper limit with those two functions 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 5 Limits evaluation Neither the high limit nor the low limit are evaluated until the unit has switched to the autorange mode This means that if the unit is already on a range higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower limit when the limit is set no range change will occur The upper limit is only evaluated if the unit has to upgrade In other words if you are on a range higher than the present upper limit and the unit autoranges down it can still end up on a range higher than the upper limit The converse is true for the lower limit The upper and lower limits have no meaning until autoranging is turned on but the limit will not be evaluated unless the unit has to go through an autorange If you are already on the right range when you turn on autoranging limits will not be evaluated Digits The display resolution of the measure
177. using the ZERO AUTO OFF output state or fast pulse sweep operations To prevent this from occurring if your application allows it connect the INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal to earth ground You can connect the LO terminal to the chassis ground screw terminal on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Note that the front panel terminals are isolated from the rear panel terminals Therefore if you are using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal Figure 2 2 Two wire connections local sense 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT DUT TERMINALS ON OFF REAR OUTPUT SourceMeter Front Panel Sense Selection 2 wire 2 6 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 2 3 Four wire connections remote sense 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT DUT TERMINALS ON OFF REAR OUTPUT SourceMeter Front Panel Sense Selection 4 wire NOTE Connections alone do not determine sense mode For local sensing Figure 2 2 2 wire sensing must be selected from the SENSE MODE option of the CONFIGURE V SOURCE menu For remote sensing Figure 2 3 4 wire sensing must be selected The 2 wire sense mode is the BENCH and GPIB default See Sense selection page 2 11 for details 4 wire remote sensing When sourcing and or measuring voltage there can be errors associated with IR drops in the test leads V
178. via the Trigger Link Unless otherwise noted the programmable aspects of the trigger model are performed from the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Configuring triggering page 11 8 Event detection In general operation is held up at an Event Detector until the programmed event occurs Note however that if an event detector has a bypass operation can be programmed to loop around the event detector Idle The SourceMeter is in idle when it is not operating in the Arm Layer or Trigger Layer of the trigger model When in idle the ARM annunciator is off To take the SourceMeter out of idle turn the output ON The SourceMeter can be returned to idle at any time by selecting the HALT menu item of the CONFIGURE TRIGGER menu See Configuring triggering page 11 8 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 1 Front panel trigger model Cide gt Turn Output ON Bypass Arm Event Immediate Never J GPIB Timer Manual Arm Event TLink Detector JStest TStest Arm Out Event gt On Off Once Bypass Source Event Detector 2 Never On Off SOURCE Action Immediate Trigger Link DELAY 0 001 sec Action Trigger Out Event F gt On Off On Off oe Detector 7 Bench Default Output Trigger MEASURE Action Trigger Out Event gt On Off _ _ _ _ Triggering 11 3 Arm Out Event gt On Off Stet h
179. width Signal measurement the reference and zero measurements for a pulse reading are performed during the output off time of the pulse period Figure 5 2 The time to perform these two measurements depends on the speed setting NPLC of the SourceMeter and the power line frequency Meas Ref amp Zero 2 x NPLC Line Frequency Where Meas Ref amp Zero is the time it takes to measure the reference and zero NPLC is the present speed setting 0 01 to 0 1 PLC Line Frequency is the frequency of the power line 50 or 60 Hz Overhead time As shown in Figure 5 2 there is some overhead time that is inherent to the source measure process The 2 9msec is the minimum overhead time that can be achieved during the out put off time If the SourceMeter is configured to perform additional operations e g math calculations relative store sweep this time will be higher 5 6 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse delay The pulse delay PD is set by the user It can be set from 0 to 9999 999sec Pulse duty cycle Duty Cycle is the percentage of time during the pulse period that the output is on It is cal culated as follows Duty Cycle Pulse Width Pulse Width Off time For example if the pulse width is msec and the off time is 9msec the duty cycle is calcu lated as follows Duty Cycle Imsec Imsec 9msec Imsec 10msec 0 10 10 Based on the possibl
180. 015 x 10V 1 5mV 1 5mV 1 5mV 13mV Thus the actual reading range is 10V 3mV or from 9 997 to 10 003V DC current measurement calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values Source accuracy Source accuracy is calculated similarly except source specifications are used As an exam ple of how to calculate the actual source output limits assume that you are sourcing 0 7mA on the ImA source range You can compute the reading limit range from source current one year accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy 0 034 of output 200nA offset 0 034 x 0 7uA 200VA 238nA 200nA 438nA In this case the actual current output range is 0 7mA 438nA or from 0 69956mA to 0 70044mA A 6 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Delay Measure SDM cycle timing The following timing information assumes that the SourceMeter is being triggered exter nally via the Trigger Link For Cases I through IV it is assumed that the Output Auto Off feature is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON and the source setting changes for each triggered SDM cycle The discussion is applicable for linear log and custom sweeps It is also applicable to applications that use the triggered source feature SOURce1 VOLTage TRIGger or SOURce1 CURRent TRIGger The discussion is not applicable for memory sweeps SOURce1 MEMory
181. 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern SMLocation lt NRf gt Specify next FAIL Source Memory NEXT NEXT location NEXT location or 1 to 100 SMLocation Query FAIL memory location CALCulate3 Subsystem to control CALC3 v FORMat lt name gt Specify math format MEAN SDEViation MEAN Jv MAXimum MINimum or PKPK FORMat Query math format Jv DATA Read math result of CALC3 v The format ASCII hexadecimal octal or binary for the returned value is set by FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt 18 8 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 2 DISPlay command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Turn on or turn off front panel display Note 1 v ENABle Query state of display v CNDisplay Return to source measure display state WINDow 1 Path to locate message to top display v TEXT Control user test message Note 2 v DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 20 Jv characters DATA Query text message v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode Note 3 v STATe Query text message state y DATA Query data on top portion of display ATTRibutes Query attributes of message characters blinking 1 or not blinking 0 WINDow2 Path to locate message to bottom display v TEXT Control user test message Note 2 v DATA lt a gt Define ASCII message a up to 32 v characters
182. 15 11 Clearing 15 4 Condition 15 16 Event 15 16 Event enable 15 17 Measurement event 15 13 Operation event 15 12 Questionable event 15 15 Reading 15 6 Serial polling and SRQ 15 9 Service request enable 15 9 Standard event 15 11 Status byte 15 8 Relative 8 2 Front panel operation 8 2 Remote programming 8 3 Remote commands Triggering 11 18 Remote operation 14 1 Auto zero 3 9 Compliance limit 3 7 Contact check function F 14 Data store 9 6 Digital output control 13 5 Guard selection 2 12 Limit testing 12 23 Line frequency 1 12 Measure only 3 21 Operation enhancements 14 2 Pulse Mode configuration 5 11 Pulse Mode sweep 10 34 Selecting an interface 14 3 Sense selection 2 11 Source delay 3 13 Source measure procedure 3 18 Sweep 10 22 Terminals selection 2 3 Triggering 11 11 V source protection 3 12 Remote output configuration 13 11 Remote programming Data store 9 6 Display 1 15 Filter 7 12 Math 8 7 Ohms 4 12 Range and digits 7 5 Relative 8 3 Speed 7 8 Sweeps 10 22 REN remote enable 14 7 Response messages 14 17 RS 232 interface Baud rate 14 18 Connections 14 19 Data bits and parity 14 18 Flow control signal handshaking 14 19 Operation 14 18 Programming example 14 21 Sending and receiving data 14 18 Terminator 14 19 Safety interlock 13 5 Safety symbols and terms 1 2 SCPI Command reference 18 1 Command summary 17 2 Conformance E 1 Eliminating common errors B 8 SCPI commands see Comma
183. 20 1A range power equations I7 x Hour 0 4 x Vour X Iour x 7 1 x DC Tamse lt 150 and 30 lour x 42 x DC x 1 2 Tame lt 120 Model 2420 SourceMeter There are two equations for each of the high power voltage ranges 20V and 60V Both of the equations for the selected voltage range must be true to ensure that the SourceMeter will not overheat The result of the first equation must be lt 100 and the result of the sec ond equation must be lt 85 20V range power equations 33 x Hour Vour X Iour x 0 7 x DC Tap lt 100 and 30 our X 40 x DC x 0 35 Tame lt 85 60V range power equations 76 x Hour Vour X Iour x 0 7 x DC Tag lt 100 and 30 pur X 120 x DC x 0 35 Tams lt 85 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 9 Models 2425 and 2430 SourceMeters There are two equations for each of the high power ranges 20V 3A and 100V 1A Both of the equations for the selected voltage range must be true to ensure that the SourceMeter will not overheat The result of the first equation must be lt 100 and the result of the sec ond equation must be lt 85 NOTE For the lower power ranges the following equations will always be true 20V 3A range power equations 33 x Hour Vour X Iour x 0 7 x DC Tay lt 100 and 30 our X 40 x DC x 0 35 Tame lt 85 100V range power equations 100 x lour I Vour X Iour x
184. 20 21 Fax 91 80 509 1322 ITALY Viale San Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 JAPAN New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F e 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 KOREA 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 NETHERLANDS Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 635333 Fax 0183 630821 SWEDEN c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr 169 70 Solna 08 509 04 679 Fax 08 655 26 10 SWITZERLAND Kriesbachstrasse 4 8600 D bendorf 01 821 94 44 Fax 01 820 30 81 TAIWAN 1FL 85 Po Ai Street Hsinchu Taiwan R O C 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 4 02 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 1998 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A Seventh Printing May 2002 Document Number 2400S 900 01 Rev G Manual Print History The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all Revisions and Addenda created for this manual The Revision Level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes sub sequent updates Addenda which are released between Revisions contain important change in formation that the user should incorporate immediately into the manual Addenda are numbered sequentially When a new Revision is created all Addenda associated with the previous Revision of the manual are incorporated into the new R
185. 21 Jv s5 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands fol lows the last command summary table in this section For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range is invalid error 831 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 004 to 0 100 2 3 4 If source V is active 5 If source I is active and auto ohms is disabled 18 12 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 6 continued SENSe command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection LEVel Query voltage compliance limit Jv TRIPped In voltage compliance 1 yes 0 no v RS YNchronize lt b gt Enable or disable measure and OFF compliance range synchronization RS YNchronize Query range synchronization RESistance Path to configure resistance y MODE lt name gt Select ohms mode MANual or AUTO AUTO y MODE Query ohms mode OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable or disable offset compensated OFF v s ohms OCOMpensated Query state of offset compensated ohms v RANGe Configure measurement range v UPPer Select range by specifying the expected 2 le5 Jv y lt n gt lUPIDOWN resistance reading UPPer Query range y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto range ON v v AUTO Query auto range Jv ULIMit lt n gt Set auto range uppe
186. 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guard sense When the GUARD to LO resistance path is less than 1kQ remote guard sensing should be used to compensate for IR drop in the GUARD test lead and or switch contacts on a switching card Figure 6 19 was modified to create Figure 6 20A by changing the value of R3 to 100Q and showing the 1Q resistance Rr of the GUARD test lead Since the resistance path from GUARD to LO is less than 1kQ the IR drop in the guard test lead Rr becomes signifi cant The guard voltage applied to the bottom of R2 is now significantly lower than the In Out HI voltage of the SourceMeter As a result leakage current I flows through R2 adversely affecting the resistance measurement of R1 The guard test lead IR drop is compensated for by connecting GUARD SENSE as shown in Figure 6 20B Sensing allows the guard voltage to be sensed measured at the resistor network for better guard voltage regulation If the remotely sensed guard voltage is less than the output voltage of the SourceMeter the guard voltage will be increased until the sensed guard voltage equals the output HI voltage Note that in order to ensure that guard current Ig in Figure 6 20 does not exceed 50mA output voltage from the SourceMeter must not exceed 5V 50mA x 100Q 5V NOTE Guard sense operation is automatic There is no menu selection to enable or dis able guard sense For 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD output off s
187. 2410 can make resistance measurements from lt 100Q to gt 200M The Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 can make resistance measurements from lt 2Q to gt 20MQ For the auto ohms measurement method the following ranges are available 2400 and 2410 20Q 200Q 2kQ 20kQ 200kQ 2MQ 20MQ and 200MQ 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 2Q 20 200Q 2kQ 20kQ 200kQ 2MQ and 20MQ When using the manual ohms measurement method you cannot select ohms ranges The ohms reading is the mathematical result of V I Measure only V or I The SourceMeter can be used exclusively as a voltmeter V Meter or an ammeter I Meter When used as a V Meter only the I Source is set to output OA When used as an I meter only the V Source is set to output OV Range of operation The maximum power outputs are summarized as follows 2400 22W 21V at 1 05A or 210V at 105mA 2410 22W 21V at 1 05A or 1100V at 21mA 2420 66W 63V at 1 05A or 21V at 3 15A 2425 and 2430 DC Mode 110W 105V at 1 05A or 66W 21V at 3 15A 2430 Pulse Mode 1 1kW 105V at 10 5A 2440 66W 42V at 1 05A or 10 5V at 5 25A 3 4 Basic Source Measure Operation The full range of operation is explained in Section 6 Overheating protection and Oper ating boundaries NOTE Output transient recovery The time required for the V source to recover to its original value within 0 1 plus load regulation errors after a step change in load current
188. 25 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 0 to 2 1e7 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN Select range for ohms Expected reading in amps Expected reading in volts Expected reading in ohms 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms 1 05 amps 210 volts 0 ohms 1 05 amps 210 volts 2 1e8 ohms Select next higher measurement range Select next lower measurement range Expected reading in amps Expected reading in volts Expected reading in ohms 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms 1 05 amps 1100 volts 0 ohms 1 05 amps 1100 volts 2 1e8 ohms Select next higher measurement range Select next lower measurement range Expected reading in amps Expected reading in volts Expected reading in ohms 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms 3 15 amps 63 volts 0 ohms 3 15 amps 63 volts 2 1e7 ohms Select next higher measurement range Select next lower measurement range Expected reading in amps Expected reading in volts Expected reading in ohms 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms 3 15 amps 105 volts 0 ohms 3 15 amps 105 volts 2 1e7 ohms Select next higher measurement range Select next lower measurement range SCPI Command Reference Query Description 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Expected reading in amps 105 to 105 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in
189. 2500 points can be in a list POINts SOURce 1 LIST CURRent POINts Query length of I Source list SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage POINts Query length of V Source list Description This command is used to determine the length of the specified source list The response message indicates the number of source values in the list STARt lt n gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent STARt lt n gt Set current list start point SOURce 1 LIST VOLTaget STARt lt n gt Set voltage list start point Parameters lt n gt 1 to 100 Set start point of list sweep MINimum 1 MAXimum 100 DEFault 1 Description These commands set the starting point in the current or voltage list sweep The lt n gt parameter is 1 based and it must be less than or equal to the number of points in the sweep The new starting location will only be used when the direction of the sweep is up SOUR LIST CURR DIR UP for example Changing the direction to down will make the sweep start at the last point in the list but the start ing point will be restored when the direction is changed to up If the sweep reaches the end of the list the sweep will continue from the first point in the list The starting points for voltage and current sweeps are saved separately and are part of a user saved setup Configure memory sweep A memory sweep lets you perform a sweep using setups stored in up to 100 memory loca tions This allows you to sweep using multiple source measure operations and math expressi
190. 3 20 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Measure only Front panel measure only In addition to being used for conventional source measure operations the SourceMeter can also be used to measure only voltage or current Perform the following steps to use the SourceMeter to measure voltage or current 1 Select source measure functions Measure voltage only voltmeter Press SOURCE I to select the I Source and press MEAS V to select the voltage measurement function Measure current only ammeter Press SOURCE V to select the V Source and press MEAS I to select the current measurement function Set source and compliance levels Use the editing procedure provided in step 2 of the Basic source measure proce dure to edit the source and compliance levels as follows a Select the lowest source range and set the source level to zero 0 00000nA or 000 000mV b Set compliance to a level that is higher than the expected measurement CAUTION When using the SourceMeter as a voltmeter V Compliance must be set higher than the voltage that is being measured Failure to do this could result in instrument damage due to excessive current that will flow into the SourceMeter Select range Use the RANGE A and keys to select a fixed measurement range that will accommodate the expected reading Use the lowest possible range for best accuracy When measuring current AUTO range can be used inst
191. 30 105V 1 05A or 105V 10 5A pulse mode Model 2440 10 5v 5 25A or 42V 1 05A When charging a battery the SourceMeter is operating as a source When discharging a battery the SourceMeter is operating as a sink Use the V Source to charge and discharge batteries Perform the following steps for both charging and discharging Connect Input Output HI to the positive terminal of the battery and Input Output LO to the negative terminal of the battery Configure the SourceMeter to source voltage and measure current Set I compliance to the current level at which the battery is to be charged or discharged Select an appropriate current measurement range or use AUTO range Battery charging To charge the battery program the SourceMeter to output a voltage that is equivalent to the voltage rating of the battery For example to charge a 10V battery set the SourceMeter to source 10V As the battery fully charges cur rent will decrease until it reaches zero or near zero battery charged CAUTION When the SourceMeter goes into compliance the V source becomes an I source or the I source becomes a V source For this reason make sure the voltage compliance is higher than the battery voltage See Section 6 for more details Battery discharging To discharge the battery program the SourceMeter to out put OV In this configuration the SourceMeter operates as a sink to discharge the battery Current from the battery
192. 4 Trigger Layer ciic csccecccescesecdeessvterssancsssseassavsecstvsesinte 11 5 COUNLENS orinar e eda edest ete oiets 11 6 Output triggers oo eee eeseeeeneceseeceeeeseeceaeeeseeeeaeenees 11 6 Bench detaullts 2i 3d ceacisisiiieeiniiateeeraieie teehee 11 7 Operation SUMMATY ec eeceeeeceseeeeneeeteeeeaeeeeneeeaeeeees 11 7 Configuring triggering oo eee eeeeeseceseeceneeeseeceeeeteeeeaeeees 11 8 Trigger configuration menu eee eeeeeereeeteeeeeeeeee 11 8 Remote trigger operation 2 0 eseecceeseeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeneees 11 11 Remote trigger model eee eeseeeteesteceseeeeeeeeneeeeneeeaeens 11 11 Tdle and initiate ve iss cscevs isd vakevecnesereessteeettavtacdessenctes 11 11 Event detection cceeceeeceesceseceeeeceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 11 13 Attn layer 2 465 casteatsdiiiseccetiheteds ian ae 11 13 Trigger Layer oo eeeesccescceeteceseceeaeceseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeneees 11 14 COUMTE aoire dais ER ERE RARER 11 16 Output triggers esssesesssssssesssssseserssressererssresesssreseesere 11 16 GPIB defaults inune igiediinaiindh 11 17 Operation SUMMATY eessssssssessesessrssseseeseresresesereseesert 11 17 Remote trigger commands 2 ceeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 18 Trigger link ecesecssscuaeeeess teva cassccaavscaxcevevtesscesevseisessstessinnieseevaeess 11 19 Input trigger requirements eel eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeee 11 19 Output trigger specifications ee eeeeseeteeeeteeeeneeeneees 11 20 Triggering
193. 425 2430 250VA Model 2440 240VA COOLING Model 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 Forced air variable speed WARRANTY 1 year EMC Conforms to European Union Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61326 1 SAFETY Conforms to European Union Directive 73 23 EEC EN61010 1 VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Random WARM UP 1 hour to rated accuracies DIMENSIONS 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 in x 8 in x 14 in Bench Configuration with handle amp feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 in x 9 in x 14 in WEIGHT 3 21kg 7 08 lbs Model 2425 2430 2440 4 1kg 9 0 lbs ENVIRONMENT For Indoor Use Only Maximum 2000m above Sea Level Operating 0 50 C 70 R H up to 35 C Derate 3 R H C 35 50 C Storage 25 C to 65 C ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Model 1754 Universal Test Lead Kit User s Manual Service Manual LabVIEW and TestPoint Drivers HW Rev B 4 30 02 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 5 Accuracy calculations The information below discusses how to calculate accuracy for both sense and source functions Measure accuracy Measurement accuracy is calculated as follows Accuracy of reading offset As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measur ing 10V on the 20V range You can compute the reading limit range from one year mea sure voltage accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy of reading offset 0
194. 74 Select Tan Ge sss ciisihieselet cece esasestebussvecieseues sede daeeteeeeeeey 18 75 RA NGG lt SMS esaia o aeii 18 75 AUTO lt B gt 8 sites need heed 18 77 Set amplitude for fixed source oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 18 77 MMediate AMPLitude lt n gt ceeeeeesseeeeee 18 77 TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt oo ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 18 79 Set voltage limit siccciccsccsceeebeesaeceseseeasesedeveesepeecvivenees 18 80 HEB Vel KAS pienas aiseee aere iaa tarde ea 18 80 Set delay eccirni a iea ak 18 83 DELY SOS peenise i AE 18 83 AUTO lt B gt siei tee eee ia eie iei a 18 83 Configure voltage and current SWEEPS seses 18 84 RANGing lt NaMe gt siie eia 18 84 SPACING lt MAMC gt sristi resnie rrira re i aa 18 85 STARG gt niei a ae 18 85 STOP n gt soca E E ecateeeeaeceistidt ithe 18 85 CEN Tet lt i gt ennn esas cence 18 87 SPA Nan ieee Sassnelestivreensabeveleustteapeupeseeee fear 18 87 STEP lt i gt aurea eee ld 18 88 POINTS lt gt 2 cies aeaea aenean aeaa Eaa aE iaa 18 90 DIRection lt mame gt cccceecesessssscesscccceeesesseeceseseeess 18 91 Configure list oi eee neinei a ER te 18 91 CURRent lt NRE listener 18 91 VOLTage lt NRE HSU sccivecccieticssctissciensctevecsecieseciess 18 91 APPend lt NRf list oo eeeeeeeeesecereneeeceeeseeaeeeeeees 18 92 POING sesdccgeeeccsts dengueecdvesccieesdacsccdenesstesducpdaieetvievele 18 93 STARI lt I gt casescses chesansenas tens sente ETO A 18 93 C
195. 8 117 TRACE subsystem eani ei ia 18 117 Read and clear buffer cccccceseccesseeeesseeeeseeessneeees 18 117 DATA ie r E TA A 18 117 COBAN oisein E EA E E ORAA 18 118 Configure and control buffer o e 18 118 FREE i eenia E EESE ONEA 18 118 POINISS I gt aer ARR ee kind 18 118 AC Tall arreirar OAR 18 118 FEED lt name gt ehose tes 18 119 CONTrol lt name gt ssssssssssssesessesserssserserersrerssrsnssrene 18 119 Select timestamp format essssesesseeresessrsrereerrsrrresrrrseeee 18 119 FORMat lt name gt sssessesesesserssressserssrerssrerseessseessre 18 119 TRIG ger SUbSYSteM secin aiieorietin sasoirik 18 120 Clear input triggers sareretan iniret eiaa i rennarin 18 120 CLE AP oe teh ieee ete 18 120 Initiate source measure cycle oo eee eeseeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 18 120 ININ ates easy E AN 18 120 Abort source measure cycle sssssesssssessserssesresesrresrsrse 18 121 ABOR sec Heese ANARA 18 121 Program trigger model oo eee eee eseeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeenes 18 121 COU NESS a rr E N AA 18 121 WB Ee a e EE 18 122 SOURCE lt name gt ees an iid E R 18 123 TIMET Sn erae A 18 124 DIRection lt name gt cccsscessssecessseessseeessneeeesnees 18 124 INPut lt event list gt ssssssssssosssssssessssesssrserersrerrsresssrene 18 124 INe NRE r a 18 125 OLINE lt NR I gt herinneren ies a E E ir 18 125 OUTPut lt event list sarsicce iini 18 126 Specifications Status and Error Messages T trod ctiom arresero naa a ai Ta
196. A 10V 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A 10V to 0 7A 40V 1A 10V to 0 7A 40V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 8 Figure 6 8 Model 2440 operating boundaries T mp 30 C I Source IV V 100 Duty Cycle lt 60 Duty Cycle 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 21 I Source operating boundaries Figure 6 9 and Figure 6 10 show the operating boundaries for the I Source Only the first quadrant of operation is covered Operation in the other three quadrants is similar 2400 Figure 6 9A shows the output characteristics for the Model 2400 I Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 105mA at 210V or 1 05A at 21V Note that when sourcing more than 105mA voltage is limited to 21V 2410 Figure 6 9B shows the output characteristics for the Model 2410 I Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 21mA at 1100V or 1 05A at 21V Note that when sourcing more than 21mA voltage is limited to 21V 2420 Figure 6 9C shows the output characteristics for the Model 2420 I Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 1 05A at 63V or 3 15A at 21V Note that when sourcing more than 1 05A voltage is limited to 21V 2425 and 2430 Figure 6 9D shows the output characteristics of the Model 2430 I Source In the DC Mode solid line
197. AM v LOCal Take unit out of remote RS 232 only y RWLock lt b gt Enable or disable local lockout RS 232 only RCMode lt name gt Set auto range on compliance mode SINGle SINGle or MULTiple RCMode Query auto range on compliance mode MEP Path to 488 1 protocol Appendix G STATe Query protocol 1 SCPI 0 488 1 HOLDoff lt b gt Enable disable NDAC hold off OFF The auto line frequency setting is not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 21 Table 18 10 TRACe command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI TRACel DATA Use TRACe or DATA as root command Note v DATA Read the contents of the buffer data store v CLEar Clear readings from buffer FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use v POINts lt NRf gt Specify size of buffer 1 to 2500 v ACTual Queries number of readings stored in the buffer POINts Query buffer size v FEED lt name gt Select source of readings SENSe 1 v CALCulate 1 or CALCulate2 CONTrol lt name gt Specify buffer control mode NEVER or NEXT v CONTrol Query buffer control mode v TSTamp Path to set timestamp format FOR Mat lt name gt Select format ABSolute or DELTa FORMat Query timestamp format Note SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on the commands in this subsystem 18 22 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMe
198. ARNING When handling the SourceMeter NEVER touch the heat sink located on the left side of the case This heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns NOTE See Section 1 Cooling fan for operation details on the cooling fan Excessive heat could damage the SourceMeter and at the very least degrade its perfor mance The SourceMeter must be operated in an environment where the ambient tempera ture does not exceed 50 C CAUTION _ To prevent damaging heat build up and thus ensure specified perfor mance adhere to the following precautions e Keep the heat sink free of dust dirt and contaminates since its ability to dissipate heat could become impaired e Keep the bottom cooling vents from becoming blocked NEVER remove the plastic feet and place the SourceMeter directly on a flat surface NEVER operate the SourceMeter when it is sitting on a conformable surface such as a carpet This could block the bot tom cooling vents e Do not position any devices adjacent to the SourceMeter that force air heated or unheated into or onto its surfaces or cooling vents This additional airflow could compromise accuracy performance e When rack mounting the SourceMeter make sure there is ade quate airflow around the bottom and sides to ensure proper cool ing Adequate airflow enables air temperatures within approximately one inch of the SourceMeter surfaces to remain within specified limits under all operating conditions e Rack mounti
199. B 2 Status and error Messages ssscssssscisseisriesisssuscoreieeroesionisi teesis ecse B 2 Eliminating common SCPI errors sssssesssseseesssssrssrsssesersesssees B 8 113 Undefined header sssseeseeeseeeeseeresrrreseresee B 8 410 Query INTERRUPTED ossssesessssessseseesrsesesee B 8 420 Query UNTERMINATED seesereereererseeree B 9 Data Flow Introduction cccsccceessccessecessseceeseceesseseeeseecessaeeessseeeesseeessaees C 2 FETCH perane E E E T cseeeiees C 3 CALCulate 1 DATA oo cc ecccsseceseceseeseseeeseessseesseeeeeees C 4 CAL Culate2 DATA meaisan ri a ee Eis C 4 TRACE DATA u ccceccccssccesscssscesseceseeessecsseesseeesseesseessseeeseees C 4 CALCulate3 DATA cisci rinii ain C 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview INGPOCUCH ON enamn Git D 2 BUS descriptio sc 3eiascsucssenesoascsceinsevawssesaoer eslans Sune teeaseepysosucdvebsceas D 3 Bus mes aeee E a ashes D 5 Data MOS eiaa shcdeesencstaidicceiedeachdadecasdectoincdizs D 5 Bus management lines oo eeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes D 5 Handshake lines 0 cceesccceesssncceeecesssecececeessseseeeeesssneeees D 5 BUS Command asrin aas E e aaa D 7 Uniline commands c ccccccccssssececcessnsceeecesssseseeceesssneeees D 8 Universal multiline commands cccccccceeesesteceeeeesseeeees D 8 Addressed multiline commands ccccccccccsssseceeeeesseeees D 9 Address comma ds suresinin N D 9 Unaddress commands
200. BILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SUCH EXCLUDED DAM AGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO COSTS OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY KEITHLEY Keithley Instruments Inc 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 e www keithley com Sales Offices BELGIUM Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 CHINA Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 6202 2886 Fax 8610 6202 2892 FINLAND Tiet j ntie 2 02130 Espoo Phone 09 54 75 08 10 Fax 09 25 10 51 00 FRANCE 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 GERMANY Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 GREAT BRITAIN Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB 0118 929 7500 Fax 0118 929 7519 INDIA Flat 2B Willocrissa 14 Rest House Crescent Bangalore 560 001 91 80 509 13
201. C 0 08 Set pulse width to 2msec Set pulse delay to 3msec Set speed to 0 08 PLC 3 Set pulse count 4 Select source TRIG COUN 25 Set to output 25 pulses SOUR FUNC VOLT Select V Source SOUR VOLT MODE FIXED Fixed voltage source mode 5 Set source range level compliance SOUR VOLT RANG 20 Select 20V source range SOUR VOLT LEV 10 Source output 10V SENS CURR PROT 10E 3 10mA compliance SENS FUNC CURR Current measure function SSENS CURR RANG 10E 3 10mA measure range READ Output 25 pulses acquire 25 pulse readings 6 Set measure function range 7 Turn on output and read data 1 Steps correspond to front panel steps in Front panel pulse measure procedure page 5 12 2 Commands must be sent in order given 3 Instrument must be addressed to talk after READ to acquire data Pulse measure considerations Measurement speed Measurement speed for the Pulse Mode can be set from 0 004 to 0 100 PLC If the speed setting while in the DC Mode is gt 0 10 PLC it will change to 0 004 when the Pulse Mode is selected If the speed setting is lt 0 10 PLC that setting will be retained when the Pulse Mode is selected If the Pulse Mode speed setting is lt 0 01 it will change to 0 01 when the DC Mode is selected For remote operation the parameter value for the SENSe NPLC lt b gt commands is limited to 0 10 Details are provided in Section 7 Speed 2400 Series SourceMeter
202. CLS clears all bits of the registers 1 Error Queue Messages Power up clears list of messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect Register Query Commands The format for the response messages ASCII hexadecimal octal or binary depends on which data format is presently selected see Status register format page 18 56 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 19 Table 18 9 SYSTem command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SYSTem PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults v POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet or SAV 0 4 POSetup Query power on setup VERSion Query revision level of SCPI v ERRor Path to read messages in error queue Note 1 NEXT Return and clear oldest error code and v message ALL Return and clear all errors codes and messages COUNt Return the number of errors CODE Path to return error code numbers only NEXT Return and clear oldest error code only ALL Return and clear all errors codes only CLEar Clears messages from error queue RSENse lt b gt Enable or disable remote sensing OFF y RSENse Query state of remote sensing KEY lt n gt Simulate key press 1 to 31 See Figure 18 3 KEY Query the last pressed key v GUARd lt name gt Select guard type OHMS or CABLe CABLe v GUARd Query guard type BEEPer Control beeper IMMediate Beep at specified fr
203. CPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source memory sweep operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement Fast 0 01 internal 164 8 165 2 0 23 0 01 external 162 6 163 0 0 23 Medium 0 10 internal 132 8 133 0 0 15 0 10 external 131 4 131 4 0 00 Normal 1 00 internal 44 4 44 4 0 00 1 00 external 44 2 44 2 0 00 Note Pass Fail test performed using one high limit and one low math limit G 8 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Single shot operation Table G 5 through Table G 7 show reading rates for measure only source measure and source measure limit test single shot operation respectively Note that the reading rate can be increased by gt 100 Table G 5 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for measure only single shot operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement 0 01 internal 0 10 internal 1 00 internal Table G 6 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure single shot operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement 0 01 internal 0 10 internal 1 00 internal Note Includes time to reprogram source to a new level before making measurement Table G 7 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure limit test single shot operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement Fast 0 01 internal 79 3 135 9 71 44 Medium 0 10 internal 69
204. Configuration Delay current signal phase Source On Time gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration 5Ousec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185usec Firmware Overhead 300usec for Source V 640usec for Source I Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay A D Conversion Firmware Overhead Example Source Delay 0 NPLC Setting 0 08 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50yusec 0 0 08 x 1 60 185usec 40psec 1 85msec for Source V 2 2msec for Source I A 10 Specifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Case IV Auto Zero disabled and all measurements disabled Figure A 4 Case IV timing diagram Trigger Trigger Source Source Latency Delay Configuration Delay L Source On Time Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration SOusec max Firmware Overhead 310psec for Source V 590usec for Source I Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay Firmware Overhead Example Source Delay 0 Source On Time 50usec 0 125usec 360usec for Source V 640usec for Source I 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 11 Cases V and VI Measure one function Output Auto Off disabled and no source setting changes Figure A 5 Case V timing diagram A D A D A D Conversion Conversion Conversion si
205. Conversely if sourcing voltage you will be setting the current measurement range The most sensitive measurement range provides the best accuracy NOTE Measurement range is limited by the compliance setting For example if the voltage compliance is 1V 2V compliance range the highest voltage measure ment range that can be selected is 2V 5 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will turn on to indicate the output is on 6 Observe reading on display The SourceMeter is in compliance if the Cmpl label or the units label i e mA for the displayed compliance setting is flashing If the Cmpl label is flashing real compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the displayed compliance value If the units label is flashing range compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the maximum compliance value for the present fixed measurement range For example if presently on the 2V measurement range a flashing units label for the voltage compliance reading indicates that the output is clamped at 2 1V The SourceMeter can be taken out of compliance real or range by going into the edit mode and decreasing the source value or increasing the compliance value Note that increasing the compliance limit may compromise protection for the DUT If in range compliance selecting a higher measurement range may take the SourceMeter out of compliance NOTE See Section 6 Complian
206. DATA Query text message v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode Note 3 v STATe Query text message state v DATA Query data on bottom portion of display ATTRibutes Query attributes of message characters blinking 1 or not blinking 0 DIGits lt n gt Specify display resolution 4 to 7 6 DIGits Query display resolution Notes 1 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the display circuitry Pressing LOCAL or cycling power enables ON the display circuit 2 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on a user defined message Pressing LOCAL or cycling power cancels all user defined messages 3 RST and SYSTem PRESet has no effect on the state of the message mode Pressing LOCAL or cycling power disables OFF the message mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 9 Table 18 3 FORMat command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI FORMat SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status event registers ASCii v ASCii HEXadecimal OCTal or BINary SREGister Query format for reading status event registers DATA lt type gt lt length gt Specify data format ASCii REAL 32 or SREal ASCii v DATA Query data format v BORDer lt name gt Specify byte order NORMal or SWAPped Note v BORDer Query byte order v ELEMents SENSe 1 lt item list gt Specify data elements VOLTage CURRent All RESistance
207. DIT key EDIT annunciator on The editing cursor flashing digit appears for the source or compliance reading If a value is not edited within six seconds the edit mode is cancelled While in the edit mode the EDIT key toggles between the source value and compliance value See Section 3 for details on setting source and compliance values 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 15 TOGGLE key NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the TOGGLE key is disabled With the output on the TOGGLE key manipulates readings on the top display and on the bottom left display It has no effect on the compliance reading Cmpl which is located on the bottom right Each press of the TOGGLE key sequences through the display options With the voltage V or current I measurement function selected the TOGGLE key lets you display both the current and voltage measurements at the same time It also allows you to toggle display positions of the source and measure readings With the ohms Q measurement function selected the ohms measurement is always displayed on the top display The TOGGLE key lets you display either the programmed source value the current measurement or the voltage measurement on the bottom left display The TOGGLE key is also used to display statistical data on readings stored in the data store This function is performed from the data store RECALL mode NOTE If FCTN REL or Limits is enabled the TOGGLE key is
208. Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte The complete handshake sequence for one data byte is shown in Figure D 2 Once data is placed on the data lines the source checks to see that NRFD is high indicating that all active devices are ready At the same time NDAC should be low from the previous byte transfer If these conditions are not met the source must wait until NDAC and NRFD have the correct status If the source is a controller NRFD and NDAC must be stable for at least 100nsec after ATN is set true Because of the possibility of a bus hang up many control lers have time out routines that display messages in case the transfer sequence stops for any reason Once all NDAC and NRED are properly set the source sets DAV low indicating to accept ing devices that the byte on the data lines is now valid NRFD will then go low and NDAC will go high once all devices have accepted the data Each device will release NDAC at its own rate but NDAC will not be released to go high until all devices have accepted the data byte The sequence just described is used to transfer both data talk and listen addresses as well as multiline commands The state
209. EASURE SPECIFICATIONS 27 CONTACT CHECK SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY Local or Remote Sense ae hia ae SPEED 350s for verification and notification ACCURACY 1 Year DEFAULT INPUT 23 C 5 C CONTACT CHECK 20 15Q 50Q MODEL RANGE RESOLUTION RESISTANCE rdg volts No contact AL 200 000my IV bG O 0 012 300 pV Check failure lt 1 002 lt 13 5Q lt 47 5Q 2 00000 V 10 pV gt 10 GQ 0 012 300 pV Always contact 2400 20 0000 V 100 pV gt 10 GQ 0 015 1 5 mV check failure gt 3 00Q gt 16 5Q gt 52 50 200 000 V lmV gt 10 GQ 0 015 10 mV 2410 20 0000 V 100 pV gt 10 GQ 0 015 1mV 1000 00 V 10 mV gt 10 GQ 0 015 50 mV 2420 2425 2430 20 0000 V 100 pV gt 10 GQ 0 015 1 mV 2420 60 0000 V lmV gt 10 GQ 0 015 3 mV 2430 100 000 V lmV gt 10 GQ 0 015 5 mV 2440 10 0000 V 100 pV gt 10 GQ 0 015 750 pV 40 0000 V lmV gt 10 GQ 0 015 3 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 0 15 x accuracy specification C CURRENT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY Local or Remote Sense ACCURACY 1 Year DEFAULT VOLTAGE 23 C 5 C MODEL RANGE RESOLUTION BURDEN rdg amps 2400 2410 00000 pA 10 pA lt ImV 0 029 300 pA All 10 0000 pA 100 pA lt 1mV 0 027 700 pA 100 000 pA 1nA lt 1mV 0 025 6 nA 1 00000 mA 10nA lt lmV 0 027 60 nA 2400 2420 2425 2430 2440 0 0000 mA 100 nA lt lmV 0 035 600 nA 2410 20 0000 mA 100 nA lt lmV 0 035 1 2 pA All 00 000 mA 1pA lt ImV
210. ER Select this option if you do not want the display to disable SWEEP Select this option if you want the display to disable while performing a sweep The display will disable as soon as sweep is started The display will automatically re enable after the sweep is completed STORE Select this option if you want the display to disable when storing source measure readings in the buffer The display will disable as soon as the buffer is enabled The display will automatically re enable after the storage process is completed Note that with this option the display will disable while performing a sweep Sweep readings are automatically stored in the buffer Remote command programming Use the following SCPI commands to enable or disable the front panel display circuitry DISPlay ENABle OFF Disable the display DISPlay ENABle ON Enable the display Configuration menus There are a number of configuration menus that can be accessed by pressing the CONFIG key followed by the appropriate function or mode key For example you can configure the voltage source by pressing CONFIG then SOURCE V Configuration menus which are summarized in Table 1 6 through Table 1 10 are available for the following operating modes e Measure functions V Q FCTN Table 1 6 e SOURCE V SOURCE I and RANGE Table 1 7 REL FILTER and LIMIT Table 1 8 e TRIG Table 1 9 e SWEEP DIGITS SPEED and STORE Table 1 10 e ON OFF OUTPUT and Display
211. F is selected from the RS 232 FLOW CONTROL menu When the input queue of the unit becomes more than full the instrument issues an XOFF command The con trol program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the SourceMeter issues the XON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below half full The SourceMeter recognizes XON and XOFF sent from the controller An XOFF will cause the instrument to stop outputting characters until it sees an XON Incoming commands are processed after the lt CR gt character is received from the controller If NONE is the selected flow control there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the SourceMeter Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port is connected to the serial port of a computer using a straight through RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard Figure 14 4 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 14 2 shows the pinout for the connector If your computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem 14 20 Remote Operations Figure 14 4 RS 232 interface connector RS232
212. FAIL queries A returned value of 1 indicated a failure of that limit test 12 26 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 12 3 Limits test programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SENS FUNC CONC OFF Turn off concurrent functions SOUR FUNC CURR Current source function SENS FUNC VOLT DC SOUR CURR TRIG 0 1 SOUR DEL 0 1 gt CALC2 FEED VOLT CALC2 LIM2 UPP 0 85 gt CALC2 LIM2 LOW 0 75 gt CALC2 LIM3 UPP 0 82 gt CALC2 LIM3 LOW 0 78 gt CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 1 gt CALC2 LIM2 UPP SOUR2 2 gt CALC2 LIM2 LOW SOUR2 2 gt CALC2 LIM3 UPP SOUR2 3 gt CALC2 LIM3 LOW SOUR2 3 gt CALC2 CLIM BCON IMM CALC2 LIM1 STAT 0 gt CALC2 LIM2 STAT 1 CALC2 LIM3 STAT 1 OUTPUT ON SINIT OUTP OFF gt CALC2 LIM2 FAIL gt CALC2 LIM3 FAIL Volts sense function Output 100mA when triggered 100ms source delay Use voltage for limits comparison Limit 2 upper value 0 85V Limit 2 lower value 0 75V Limit 3 upper value 0 82V Limit 3 lower value 0 78V Digital I O port 0001 1 when test passes Digital I O port 0010 2 when upper Limit 2 fails Digital I O port 0010 2 when lower Limit 2 fails Digital I O port 0011 3 when upper Limit 3 fails Digital I O port 0011 3 when lower Limit 3 fails Update Digital I O port immediately after test Turn off Limit 1 test Turn on Limit 2 test Turn on Limit 3 test Turn
213. FC command is sent by the controller to place the SourceMeter in the local talker listener idle states The unit responds to the IFC command by cancelling front panel TALK or LSTN lights if the instrument was previously placed in one of these states Note that this command does not affect the status of the instrument Settings data and event registers are not changed Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual With auto output off enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON the output will remain on if operation is terminated before the output has a chance to automatically turn off To send the IFC command the controller need only set the IFC line true for a minimum of 100us LLO local lockout Use the LLO command to prevent local operation of the instrument After the unit receives LLO all of its front panel controls except OUTPUT OFF are inoperative In this state pressing LOCAL will not restore control to the front panel The GTL command restores control to the front panel Cycling power will also cancel local lockout GTL go to local Use the GTL command to put a remote mode instrument into local mode The GTL com mand also restores front panel key operation DCL device clear Use the DCL command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a known state Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously When the SourceMeter receives a
214. For Cases V and VI it is assumed that the Output Auto Off feature is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF and the source setting remains the same for each trig gered SDM cycle In this configuration the static source remains on during all SDM cycles Definitions Trigger latency Trigger latency is the time from when an external trigger event occurs to when the Source Meter takes the appropriate action It is from when an external trigger is detected in the Trigger Layer of the trigger model to when the trigger delay begins Trigger delay Trigger delay is the time from when the external event is detected to when the source con figuration begins This is a user programmable delay that can be set from 0000 0000 sec onds to 999 99990 seconds Source configuration This is the time it takes to configure the source DAC For the following discussion it is assumed that the range and polarity do not change when the source value is changed Source delay This is the time between the source configuration and the start of the first A D conversion This programmable delay is typically used to allow the source to settle before starting the measurement With Auto Delay enabled 10Ousec is added to the user programmed source delay The user programmed delay can be set from 0000 0000 seconds to 9999 99900 seconds 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 7 A D conversion This is the time it takes to measure the specified A D
215. Front panel trigger model ooo eee eee ese eeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaeees 11 3 Trigger configuration menu tree ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeees 11 10 Remote trigger Modelo eee ienien 11 12 Meas re ACHION sss scesssssssscserscsscerscosvsrascdsestsessosesasoctnesscbeesies 11 15 Rear panel Pinout ccssedicd ccdisccscts niina e ia 11 19 Trigger link input pulse specifications seseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeee 11 19 Trigger link output pulse specifications 00 0 eee 11 20 Trigger model for front panel trigger example 11 22 DUT test Syste sirensis idlive Metacceieuscvsseveeaseiheeieecteds 11 23 Trigger link connections sssssssssssessessssrsseseesstssressrssessees 11 24 Figure 11 11 Operation model for triggering example s es 11 27 Figure 11 12 Trigger model for remote trigger example eee 11 29 Figure 11 13 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model front panel operation 11 31 Figure 11 14 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model remote operation 11 32 12 Limit Testing Figure 12 1 Limit tests seroso teneci iao E T E cdanbensves 12 2 Figure 12 2 Grading mode limit testing 0 eee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 6 Figure 12 3 Immediate binning oo eee cece eseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeaeees 12 7 Figure 12 4 End Dit G25 2s cascvads ie ceceasdezacseascesiaieeecesuerssaseasudvaguveestensniaes 12 7 Figure 12 5 Sorting mode limit testing oe eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 12 10 Figure 12 6 Handler interface connections oo eee ee e
216. GH IMPEDANCE output off state before going to the selected power on output off state If an Over Temperature condition or an interlock violation occurs the Source Meter will go into the HIGH IMPEDANCE output off state Output off states and inductive loads The output off state you select for inductive loads depends on how much energy the induc tor holds The NORMAL output off state is not recommended as it lowers the compliance setting The ZERO or possibly GUARD state are better suited as ZERO does not change the compliance setting and the GUARD output off state would change the voltage source to a current source with a voltage compliance The GUARD state is typically used only for guarded ohms measurements To protect the unit from inductive energy the application may require a spark gap across the INPUT HI and LO terminals The SourceMeter does not have internal spark gap protection as some leakage current nA is associated with the protection circuits 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 13 11 Remote output configuration Output configuration commands Table 13 2 summarizes output configuration commands These commands include those to enable and disable the interlock as well as commands to control output off states See Section 18 OUTPut subsystem and SOURce subsystem for more information Table 13 2 Output configuration commands Command
217. H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V 0 7 in 3 bit mode 0 to 65535 with 2499 DIGIO option MODE lt name gt SOURce2 TTL4 MODE lt name gt Control Digital I O port line 4 mode Parameters lt name gt EOTest Use line 4 as EOT signal BUSY Use line 4 as BUSY signal Query MODE Query Digital I O line 4 mode Description This command controls the operation of Digital I O line 4 to act as either an End of Test or Busy signal in the 3 bit output mode EOT is not automatically controlled in 4 bit mode See BSIZe lt n gt page 18 102 Likewise with BUSY enabled in the 4 bit mode the unit behaves if it were in 3 bit mode by ignoring all attempts to drive Digital T O line 4 18 102 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual BSTate lt b gt SOURce2 TTL4 BSTate lt b gt Control BUSY and EOT polarity Parameters lt b gt 1 Set EOT BUSYpolarity high 0 Set EOT BUSY polarity low Query BSTate Query EOT BUSY polarity Description This command sets the polarity of the EOT or BUSY signal in the 3 bit mode BSIZe lt n gt SOURce2 BSIZe lt n gt Set Digital I O bit size Parameters lt n gt 3 Set 3 bit size 4 Set 4 bit size Query BSIZe Query Digital I O port bit size Description This command sets the Digital I O bit size to 3 or 4 In the 3 bit mode Digital I O line 4 becomes EOT EOT BUSY or BUSY based on the SOUR2 TTL4 MODE and SOUR2 TTL4 BST commands ab
218. I O connector is marked output enable Port configuration The Digital I O Port is located on the rear panel and is shown in Figure 13 1 NOTE The four digital output lines and the SOT line are primarily intended for limit testing with a device handler See Section 12 Limit Testing for details on per forming limit tests and interfacing to handlers and Section 11 Triggering for information on programming the SourceMeter to respond to the start of test SOT pulse from a handler Figure 13 1 Digital I O port Note Connector marked OUTPUT ENABLE on Model 2400 SourceMeter 1 5 eeee0o eee 6 9 1 Digital Output 1 2 Digital Output 2 3 Digital Output 3 4 Digital Output 4 EOT EOT BUSY BUSY 5 Ground 6 Trigger Input SOT a 7 4 5V 8 Interlock 9 Ground Digital output lines The port provides four output lines Each open collector output can be set high 5V or low OV Each output line can source up to 2mA or sink up to 500mA When using a cat egory register handler for limit testing output line 4 is typically used for the end of test EOT or BUSY pulse This pulse from the SourceMeter signals the handler to perform the binning operation or indicates a busy condition See Section 12 Configuring limit tests INTERLOCK DIGITAL UG 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 13 3 SOT line The inpu
219. IL TEST 5 SPEED NPLC TRIGGER ORIGIN TO GPIB TO GPIB TO GPIB Fast 488 1 0 01 internal 537 140 135 Fast 488 2 0 01 internal 256 256 79 83 79 83 Medium 488 2 0 10 internal 167 166 72 70 69 70 Normal 488 2 1 00 internal 49 42 34 31 35 30 COMPONENT INTERFACE HANDLER TIME for 60Hz 50Hz MEASURE SOURCE SOURCE MEASURE PASS FAIL TEST SPEED NPLC TRIGGER ORIGIN TO GPIB PASS FAIL TEST TO GPIB Fast 0 01 external 1 04ms 1 08 ms 0 5ms 0 5 ms 4 82ms 5 3 ms Medium 0 10 external 2 55 ms 2 9 ms 0 5ms_ 0 5 ms 6 27ms_ 7 1 ms Normal 1 00 external 17 53 ms 20 9 ms 0 5ms 0 5 ms 21 31 ms 25 0 ms 1 Reading rates applicable for voltage or current measurements Auto zero off autorange off filter off display off trigger delay 0 and binary reading format Purely resistive lead 1A and 10pA ranges lt 65ms 31000 point sweep was characterized with the source on a fixed range 4Pass Fail test performed using one high limit and one low math limit 5 Includes time to re program source to a new level before making measurement 6 Time from falling edge of START OF TEST signal to falling edge of END OF TEST signal 7Command processing time of SOURce VOLTagelCURRent TRIGgered lt nrf gt command not included GENERAL NOISE REJECTION NPLC Fast 0 01 Medium 0 1 Slow 1 CMRR 80 dB 80 dB 60 dB 100 dB 1 Except lowest 2 current ranges 90dB LOAD IMPEDANCE Stable into 20 000pF typical DIFFERE
220. IM BCON END SENSE FUNC CONC OFF TRIG COUN 3 ATSO S0 SO SOU SCA OUT SEIN UR FUNC MEM UR MEM POIN 3 UR MEM STAR 1 LC2 cLIM PASS SOUR2 12 PUT ON rT Sweep Operation 10 31 Restore GPIB default conditions Turn off Concurrent Functions Trigger count sweep points Source Memory sweep Mode Number of Memory Points 3 Start Memory Loca tion 1 R2 CLE AUTO ON SOUR2 CLE AUTO DEL 1 Set Digital I O auto clear Set Digital Output Pattern for Limit 2 Passing Turn on Output Trigger Sweep 10 32 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only When performing a sweep with the Model 2430 in the Pulse Mode each step or point of the sweep is made up of a pulse period In general a pulse period consists of the pulse width output on time and the output off time Figure 10 10 shows an example of a 3 step linear staircase sweep for the Pulse Mode start 1V stop 3V step 1V A measured reading is performed for each of the three pulse steps Readings are not performed for the output off times For normal DC Mode sweep operation the time duration spent on each step consists of the set source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement For the Pulse Mode source delay is not used The pulse width consists of the pulse width delay internal over head time
221. Invalid string data EE Standard Event 5 150 String data error EE Standard Event 5 148 Character data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 144 Character data too long EE Standard Event 5 141 Invalid character data EE Standard Event 5 140 Character data error EE Standard Event 5 128 Numeric data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 124 Too many digits EE Standard Event 5 123 Exponent too large EE Standard Event 5 121 Invalid character in number EE Standard Event 5 120 Numeric data error EE Standard Event 5 114 Header suffix out of range EE Standard Event 5 113 Undefined header EE Standard Event 5 112 Program mnemonic too long EE Standard Event 5 111 Header separator error EE Standard Event 5 110 Command header error EE Standard Event 5 109 Missing parameter EE Standard Event 5 108 Parameter not allowed EE Standard Event 5 105 GET not allowed EE Standard Event 5 104 Data type error EE Standard Event 5 103 Invalid separator EE Standard Event 5 102 Syntax error EE Standard Event 5 101 Invalid character EE Standard Event 5 100 Command error EE Standard Event 5 000 No error SE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 5 Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit Measurement events 100 Limit 1 failed SE Measurement Event 0 101 Low limit 2 failed SE Measurement Event 1 102 High limit 2 failed SE Measurement Event 2
222. KEITHLEY Model 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual A GRENDER MEAS U R BOIe ONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments Inc warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of year from date of shipment Keithley Instruments Inc warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment probes cables rechargeable batteries diskettes and documentation During the warranty period we will at our option either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective To exercise this warranty write or call your local Keithley representative or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland Ohio You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions Send the product transportation prepaid to the indicated service facility Repairs will be made and the product returned transportation prepaid Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period or at least 90 days LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley s express written consent or misuse of any product or part This warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instructions THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUD ING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTA
223. LS 3 Select LINE FREQ then press ENTER to display LINE FREQUENCY Place the cursor on 50Hz 60Hz or AUTO and press ENTER 5 Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote command line frequency Table 1 1 summarizes remote commands used to control line frequency See Select power line frequency setting page 18 111 for additional information on using these commands Programming examples 50Hz operation iSYST LFR 50 Auto frequency operation SYST LFR AUTO ON Table 1 1 Line frequency remote commands Commands Description SYSTem LFRequency lt freq gt Select line frequency freq 50 or 60 SYSTem LFRequency AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto frequency state ON or OFF 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 13 Fuse replacement A rear panel fuse protects the power line input of the SourceMeter If the line fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage replace the fuse only with the type and rating listed If the instrument repeat edly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the problem before replacing the fuse 1 The fuse is located in a drawer above the AC receptacle Figure 1 2 At the bottom of the fuse drawer is a small tab At this location use a small bladed screwdriver to pry the fuse drawer open 2 Slide the fuse drawer out to gain access to the fuse Note that the fus
224. Limit 4 test OFF v STATe Query state of Limit 4 test v FAIL Return result of Limit 4 test 0 pass or y 1 fail 18 6 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 LIMit5 12 Path to control LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests v see Note UPPer Configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v y 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit v SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 y lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit Jv DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v y 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit v SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 y lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v v lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 5 to 12 tests OFF v v STATe Query state of Limit 5 to 12 tests v FAIL Return result of Limit 5 to 12 tests v 0 pass or 1 fail CLIMits Composite limits for Limit through Limit 12 BCONtrol lt name gt Specify when to send b
225. Locks out local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Low Returns unit to default conditions Clear GTL Go To Local Low Returns device to local Unaddressed UNL Unlisten Low Removes all listeners from the bus UNT Untalk Low Removes any talkers from the bus Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments for common operations High Programs SCPI compatible instru ments for particular operations SCPI D 8 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Uniline commands ATN IFC and REN are asserted only by the controller SRQ is asserted by an external device EOI may be asserted either by the controller or other devices depending on the direction of data transfer The following is a description of each command Each command is sent by setting the corresponding bus line true REN Remote Enable REN is sent to set up instruments on the bus for remote opera tion When REN is true devices will be removed from the local mode Depending on device configuration all front panel controls except the LOCAL key if the device is so equipped may be locked out when REN is true Generally REN should be sent before attempting to program instruments over the bus EOI End or Identify EOI is used to positivel
226. M BCON END Set Binning Control to End Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM PASS SML NEXT Set SML Pass Location Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML 100 Set SML Fail Location Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR MEM SAVE 1 Save in Source Memory Location 1 Setup Source Memory Location 2 Call OutputCmd intGPIB RST Restore GPIB default conditions Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR FUNC VOLT Current Source Function Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS FUNC CURR DC Current Sense Function Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS CURR PROT 105 Set 105mA Compliance Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS CURR RANGE 1 Set 100mA Current Measure Range Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR DEL 1 Set Source Delay to 1 Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR VOLT 10 10V Source Voltage Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 FEED CURR Send Current A Readings to Buffer Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 STAT ON Set Limit 1 on Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 COMP FAIL IN Set Fail Mode to In Compliance Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 COMP SOUR2 5 Set Digital Output Pattern for Compli ance Failure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Call Call Call Call Call Call Call Call Out Out Out Out Out Out putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd intG intG intG intG
227. MAXimum Query maximum allowable compliance This command is used to set compliance limits A current compliance limit is set for the V Source and a voltage compliance limit is set for the I Source The SourceMeter cannot source levels that exceed these speci fied limits The SENSe CURRent PROTection LIMit command is used to set the current compliance for the V Source and the SENSe VOLTage PROTection LIMit command is used to set the voltage compliance for the I Source NOTE You cannot set compliance less than 0 1 of the present measurement range RSYNhronize lt b gt SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection RSYNchronize lt b gt Control current measure and compliance Parameters range sync SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection RSY Nchronize lt b gt Control voltage measure and compliance range sync lt b gt OFF Disable range sync ON Enable range sync Description Turning this feature on will make the measurement range follow the compliance range setting when autoranging is off When the compliance value is set the measurement range will be on the same range as the compliance setting The two commands above change one setting changing the state of one will automatically change the other 18 70 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TRIPped SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection TRIPped SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection TRIPped Query current compliance state Query voltage compliance state
228. Manual 3 Relative and Math e Relative Discusses the relative REL mode that can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline value from readings Math operations Provides detailed information on the following math FCTN operations power offset compensated ohms varistor alpha voltage coefficient and percent deviation 8 2 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative The rel relative feature can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings With REL enabled subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input value and the rel value as follows Displayed Reading Actual Input Rel Value Once a rel value is established for a measurement function the value is the same for all ranges For example if 5V is set as a rel value on the 20V range the rel value is also 5V on the 2V and 200mV ranges Selecting a range that cannot accommodate the rel value does not cause an overflow condi tion but it also does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range For exam ple on 20V range the SourceMeter still overflows for a gt 21 1V input NOTE When rel is enabled the REL annunciator turns on Changing measurement functions disables rel Front panel rel Enabling and disabling rel Rel can be used to null out zero offsets or to establish a zero baseline by pressing the REL key The reading which becomes the rel value
229. Mode only the source detector is used You can enable the delay and measure detectors but they will be ignored For remote operation the TRIGger INPut lt event list gt command is used to enable or disable the source input event detector To enable the source detector use the SOURce parameter To disable the detector use the NONE parameter Output triggers In the DC Mode you can configure the SourceMeter to output a trigger after the source delay and or measure operation See Section 11 for details on triggering In the Pulse Mode an output trigger can only occur after the measurement You can set the Model 2430 to output a trigger after the source and or delay operations but they will not occur in Pulse Mode For remote operation the TRIGger OUTPut lt event list gt command is used to control the output trigger To enable the output trigger use the SENSe parame ter To disable the output trigger use the NONE parameter Auto output off For the DC Mode with auto output off enabled the output will turn on at the beginning of each SDM cycle and turn off after each measurement is completed See Section 13 Output off states for details on auto output off While in the Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled For remote operation you can send the SOURce CLEar AUTO OFF command to disable auto output off but it will be ignored Output off state In the Pulse Mode the normal output off is used You cannot selec
230. NTIAL MODE VOLTAGE 2400 250 V Pk 2410 1100 V Pk 2420 75 V Pk 2425 2430 125 V Pk 2440 42 V Pk COMMON MODE VOLTAGE 250V DC 40V DC for Model 2440 COMMON MODE ISOLATION gt 10 Q lt 1000pE OVERRANGE 105 of range source and measure MAX VOLTAGE DROP BETWEEN INPUT OUTPUT AND SENSE TERMINALS 5V MAX SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE 1MQ for rated accuracy SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE gt 10 Q GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE lt 150pV typical 300pV for Models 2430 2440 SOURCE OUTPUT MODES Pulse Model 2430 only Fixed DC level Memory List mixed function Stair linear and log SOURCE MEMORY LIST 100 points max MEMORY BUFFER 5 000 readings 5 digits two 2 500 point buffers Includes selected measured value s and time stamp Lithium battery backup 3 yr battery life Specifications subject to change without notice SourceMeter is a registered trademark of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies PROGRAMMABILITY IEEE 488 SCPI 1995 0 RS 232 5 user definable power up states plus factory default and RST DIGITAL INTERFACE Output Enable Active low input Handler Interface Start of test end of test 3 category bits 5V 300mA supply Digital I O 1 trigger input 4 TTL Relay Drive outputs 33V 500mA diode clamped POWER SUPPLY 100V to 240V rms 50 60Hz automatically detected at power up Model 2400 190VA Model 2410 210VA Model 2420 220VA Model 2
231. OCAL key 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 49 FORMat subsystem The commands for this subsystem are used to select the data format for transferring instru ment readings over the bus These commands are summarized in Table 18 3 Data format DATA lt type gt length FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt Select data format Parameters lt type gt lt length gt ASCii ASCII format REAL 32 TEEE754 single precision format SREal TEEE754 single precision format NOTE lt length gt is not used for the ASCii or SREal parameters It is optional for the REAL parameter If you do not use lt length gt with the REAL parameter the lt length gt defaults to 32 single precision format Query Description DATA Query data format This command is used to select the data format for transferring readings over the bus Only the ASCII format is allowed over the RS 232 inter face This command only affects the output of READ FETCh MEASure TRACe DATA CALC1 DATA and CALC2 DATA over the GPIB All other queries are returned in the ASCII format NOTE Regardless of which data format for output strings is selected the SourceMeter will only respond to input commands using the ASCII format Figure 18 1 ASCII format The ASCII data format is in a direct readable form for the operator Most BASIC languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats However some speed is comp
232. OFF to disable compensa tion and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to exit the menu structure 4 10 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Offset compensated ohms procedure NOTE The following procedure assumes that the desired ohms measurement method auto or manual is already selected and the SourceMeter is connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 Refer to Selecting ohms measurement method to check or change the measurement method 1 Turn the output off and select the Q measurement function 2 Enable offset compensation as previously explained Enabling disabling offset compensated ohms page 4 9 NOTE _ If using the auto ohms measurement method go to step 5 3 For manual ohms measurements configure the desired source V or I to output the appropriate source level Set compliance and select a measurement range or use AUTO range See steps 1 2 and 3 of Section 3 Basic source measure proce dure for details 4 Turn the output on and observe the offset compensated ohms reading on the dis play Note that the source alternates between the programmed output value and zero but only one reading is displayed for each two source cycle NOTE When the output is turned off the displayed source value may be zero OV or OA It will usually be the previously programmed value in Manual Ohms mode However the programmed source value is remembered and used when the out put is turne
233. OT line is pulsed high or low ONCE Bypass event detection once NEVER Never bypass event detection ARM OUT Configure arm layer output trigger LINE Select trigger link output line 1 4 EVENTS Enable disable events TRIG LAYER EXIT Enable ON or disable OFF on exiting trigger layer TL ENTER Enable ON or disable OFF on entering trigger layer COUNT Specify arm count FINITE Programmable count INFINITE Never ending count TRIG LAYER Configure trigger layer of trigger model TRIGGER IN Select trigger layer detection event IMMEDIATE Trigger event occurs immediately TRIGGER LINK Select trigger link line as event 1 4 TRIGGER OUT Configure trigger layer output trigger LINE Select trigger link line 1 4 EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF for SOURCE DELAY and MEAS DELAY Program trigger delay time COUNT Program trigger count HALT Return unit to idle state 1 32 Getting Started Table 1 10 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep digits speed and data store configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG SWEEP CONFIGURE SWEEPS TYPE STAIR LOG CUSTOM POINTS ADJUST POINTS INIT SRC MEMORY START POINTS SWEEP COUNT FINITE INFINITE SOURCE RANGING BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE FIXED CONFIG DIGITS DISPLAY DIGITS CONFIG SPEED SPEED ACCURACY MENU FAST MED NORMAL HI ACCURACY OTHER CONFIG STORE STORE TIMESTAMP ABSOLUTE DELTA Configure sweeps
234. OURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt Parameters SCPI Command Reference 18 79 The MINimum and MAXimum parameters are only valid if the highest source range is presently selected Sending the MINimum or MAXi mum parameters on a lower source range will generate error 221 Set ting Conflict TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt 2400 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 5 25 to 5 25 42 to 42 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Set fixed l Source amplitude when triggered Set fixed V Source amplitude when triggered Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 1 05A or 210V 1 05A or 210V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 1 05A or 1100V 1 05A or 1100V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 63V 3 15A or 63V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V Source amplitude volts OA or OV 3 15A or 105V 3 15A or 105V Set I Source amplitude amps Set V
235. Poll Function The instrument does not have parallel polling capabilities PPO DC Device Clear Function DC1 defines the ability of the instrument to be cleared initialized DT Device Trigger Function DT1 defines the ability of the SourceMeter to have readings triggered C Controller Function The instrument does not have controller capabilities CO TE Extended Talker Function The instrument does not have extended talker capa bilities TEO LE Extended Listener Function The instrument does not have extended listener capabilities LEO E Bus Driver Type The instrument has open collector bus drivers E1 D 16 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual E IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information E 2 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction The IEEE 488 2 standard requires specific information about how the SourceMeter imple ments the standard Paragraph 4 9 of the IEEE 488 2 standard Std 488 2 1987 lists the documentation requirements Table E 1 provides a summary of the requirements and pro vides the information or references the manual for that information Table E 2 lists the coupled commands used by the SourceMeter The SourceMeter complies with SCPI version 1996 0 Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 list the SCPI confirmed commands and the non SCPI commands implemented by the SourceMeter 2400 Serie
236. Provides a detailed reference for all common commands except for those associated with the status structure discussed in Section 15 16 2 Common Commands Command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common commands summarized in Table 16 1 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Most of these commands are described in detail in this section NOTE The following common commands associated with the status structure are cov ered in Section 15 CLS ESE ESE ESR SRE SRE and STB Table 16 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and Error Queue ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the Standard Event Enable Register ESE Event enable query Read the Standard Event Enable Register ESR Event status register query Read and clear the Standard Event Enable Register IDN Identification query Returns the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete command Set the Operation Complete bit in the Standard Event Register after all pending commands have been executed OPC Operation complete query Places an ASCII 1 into the Output Queue when all pending selected device operations have been completed RCL lt NRf gt Recall command Returns the SourceMeter to
237. Pulse Mode remote operation the output is turned on and initiation is satisfied when INITiate READ or OUTPut 1 STATe ON is sent Source event detector For the DC Mode three event detectors are used for the trigger layer For the Pulse Mode only the Source Event Detector is used Note that since the Delay Event Detector is not used source delay is not used Pulse delay Instead of a Trigger Delay used in the DC Mode the Pulse Mode uses a Pulse Delay This delay is set by the user and is part of the pulse off time After event detection operation proceeds to the Pulse Delay However for the initial pass through the trigger model the Pulse Delay is bypassed as shown in Figure 11 13 This ini tial loop around the delay allows the pulse to be sourced as soon as the output is turned on Source action The source action turns on the output to source the pulse Pulse width The pulse width is the time duration that the output is on Depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width can be as short as 0 2msec or as long as Smsec In general the pulse width is made up of a delay and the signal measurement See Section 5 for details on pulse width timing Measure action With Auto Zero enabled a reading consists of three measurements signal reference and zero These three measurements are then used to calculate an accurate pulse reading The signal is measured first while the output is on After the signal mea
238. Pulse delay setting Pulse jitter Pulse jitter is defined as the variance in the configured pulse on and off times The amount of jitter that can occur depends on how the SourceMeter is set up For the least amount of jitter lt Susec for pulse on time turn off the display See Section 1 Disabling front panel display With the display on pulse on time jitter depends on the pulse width For pulses lt Imsec wide on time jitter can be up to 20usec For pulses gt 1msec wide on time jitter is 5 40usec Jitter for pulse off time can be as high as msec depending on the integration rate auto zero and on time In general the higher the off time the higher the jitter 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 9 Pulse energy limitations 10A range Energy for pulses are provided by an internal bank of capacitors Each pulse consumes energy from the capacitors After a pulse is generated the capacitors begin to recharge The next pulse will occur at the configured time as long as the capacitors have had enough time to recharge If the capacitors are not charged enough to provide the pulse the instru ment will wait until the necessary charge energy is available Charge energy consumption by a pulse depends on the pulse current and pulse width and is expressed as follows Q Ixt Where Q is the charge energy consumed by the pulse Tis the pulse current t is the output on time pulse wi
239. Q limited by voltage slew rate 500us typ source I 10A into 1Q limited by voltage slew rate OUTPUT SLEW RATE Voltage 109 load 0 25V us 30 on 100V range 0 08V us 30 on 20V range 10A range Current OQ load 0 25A us 30 on 100V range 0 08A us 30 on 20V range 10A range 2400 2410 Only Specifications valid for continuous output currents below 105mA For operation above 105mA continuous for gt 1 minute derate accuracy 10 35mA above 105mA 2 Full operation 1A regardless of load to 30 C 50 C for Model 2420 2440 Above 30 C 50 C for Model 2420 2440 ambient derate 35mA C and prorate 35mA Q load 4 wire mode For current sink operation on 1A 3A or 5A ranges maximum continuous power is limited to approximately 1 2 rated power or less depending on current up to 30 C ambient See power equations in the User s Manual to cal culate allowable duty cycle for specific conditions 3 For sink mode 1pA to 100mA range accuracy is Model 2400 0 15 offset 4 Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 0 5 offset 3 For 1A range accuracy is Model 2400 1 5 offset 8 Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 1 5 offset 3 4 10A range only in pulse mode Limited to 2 5ms pulse width maximum 10 duty cycle maximum HW Rev B 4 30 02 2400 2400 C 2410 2410 C Sour ceMeter Line Specifications 2420 2420 C 2425 2425 C 2430 2430 C 2440 2440 C M
240. Query Error Device Specific Error Execution Error Command Error SRE2 User Request M 5 5 MSS Power On Logical aster Summary Status OR MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit MAV Message Available ESB Event Summary Bit RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Staus OSB Operation Summary Bit Always Zero Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte MSS bit is in STB response Measurement Operation Measurement Measurement Event Operation Operation Event Condition Event Enable Condition Event Enable Register Register Register Register Register Register Limit 1 Fail U1 LI Calibrating Cal Low Limit 2 Fai LL2F gt l High Limit 2 Fai HL2F gt Low Limit 3 Fai LL3F Sweeping High Limit 3 Fai 7 ae Waiting for Limits Pass Trigger Reading Available Logical Waiting for Arm Logical Reading Overflow OR M OR Buffer Available g Buffer Ful Contact Check Idle Interlock Assertet Over Temperature Over Voltage Protection Compliance Always Zero 15 4 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Clearing registers and queues When the SourceMeter is turned on the bits of all registers in the status structure are cleared reset to 0 and the two queues are empty Commands to res
241. R DC Current Sense Function Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS CURR PROT 105 Set 105mA Compliance Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS CURR RANGE 1 Set 100mA Current Mea sure Range Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR DEL 1 Set Source Delay to 1 Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR VOLT 10 10V Source Voltage Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 FEED CURR Send Current A Read ings to Buffer 10 28 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 STAT ON Set Limitl on Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 COMP FAIL IN Set Fail Mode to In Compliance Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM1 COMP SOUR2 8 Set Digital Output Pattern for Compliance Failure Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 STAT ON Set Limit2 on Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 UPP 2E 2 Set Upper Limit to 20mA Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 LOW 1E 3 Set Lower Limit to 10mA Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 UPP SOUR2 2 Set Digital Output Pattern for Upper Limit 2 Failure LOW SOUR2 3 Set Digital Output Pattern for Lower Limit 2 Failure Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 13 Set Digital Output Pattern for Limit 2 Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 Passing Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM MODE GRAD Set Limit Results to Grading Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLI
242. RE common command To read the Service Request Enable Register use the SRE query command The Service Request Enable Register clears when power is cycled or a parameter value of 0 is sent with the SRE command i e SRE 0 The commands to pro gram and read the SRQ Enable Register are listed in Table 15 3 Serial polling and SRQ Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set bit B6 and generate an SRQ service request In your test program you can periodically read the Status Byte to check if an SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for exam ple branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request Typically SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the SourceMeter If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the Status Byte Register will remain cleared and the pro gram will simply proceed normally after the serial poll is performed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the Status Byte Register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the Status Byte Register This allows subse quent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all Stat
243. RONT PANEL MENU od l CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FII 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 9 Ohms guard Use the guarded ohms connection schemes shown in Figure 2 5 for the following source measure operation e In circuit resistance measurements on the DUT where other parasitic leakage devices are present Note that ohms guard must be selected for this connection scheme Ohms guard is not available for the 1A range source or measure See Guard selection page 2 12 to select ohms guard and Section 4 6 wire ohms measurements Figure 2 5 shows how to make connections to measure the resistance of a single resistor DUT in a resistor network See Section 6 Guard for more information on guarded ohms measurements The basic connection scheme for guarded ohms measurements is shown in Figure 2 5A If the guard resistance path Rg is lt 1kQ IR drop in the GUARD test lead could be high enough that the guard voltage at the resistor network is significantly less than the output voltage at the DUT This results in leakage current and will corrupt the measurement To cancel the effect of IR drop in the GUARD test lead connect GUARD SENSE to the resis tor network as shown in Figure 2 5B Guard sense ensures that the guard voltage at the resistor network is the same as the output voltage at the DUT Note that if the DUT is lt 1kQ you should use the 4 wire measurement method remote s
244. Rent lt NRf list gt VOLTage lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage lt NRf list gt Define I Source list Define V Source list Parameters lt NRf list gt NRf NRf NRf 2400 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 I Source value 210 to 210 V Source value 2410 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 I Source value 1100 to 1100 V Source value 2420 NRf 3 15 to 3 15 I Source value 63 to 63 V Source value 2425 and 2430 DC Mode NRf 3 15 to 3 15 I Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2430 Pulse Mode NRf 10 5 to 10 5 I Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2440 NRf 5 25 to 5 25 I Source value 42 to 42 V Source value Query CURRent Query I Source list VOLTage Query V Source list 18 92 SCPI Command Reference Description 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual These commands are used to define a list of source values up to 100 for the list sourcing mode of operation When operation is started the instrument will sequentially source each current or voltage value in the list A measurement is performed at each source level The following command shows the proper format for defining an I Source list using current source values of 1OmA 130mA and 5mA SOURce 1 LIST CURRent 0 01 0 13 0 005 If using manual source ranging you can use auto range for source val ues that are not within a single range NOTE In order to execute a source list the selected source must be
245. SENS VOLT PROT 25 3 Select volts measure range SENS VOLT RANG 20 FORM ELEM VOLT 5 Turn on output OUTP ON 6 Read data READ 7 Turn off output OUTP OFF 1 Steps correspond to front panel steps listed previously in Front panel measure only 2 Commands must be sent in order given 3 Instrument must be addressed to talk after READ to acquire data Comments Restore GPIB defaults Current source function Fixed current source mode Volts measure function Lowest source range QUA source level 25V compliance 25V range Volts only Output on before measuring Trigger acquire reading Output off after measuring 3 22 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sink operation When operating as a sink V and I have opposite polarity the SourceMeter is dissipating power rather than sourcing it An external source i e battery or an energy storage device i e capacitor can force operation into the sink region For example if a 12V battery is connected to the V Source In Out HI to battery high that is programmed for 10V sink operation will occur in the second quadrant Source V and measure I See for details on charging and discharging batteries CAUTION When using the I Source as a sink ALWAYS set V Compliance to a level that is higher than the external voltage level Failure to do so could damage the instrument due to excessive current that
246. Such damage may invalidate the war ranty Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock and fire replacement components in mains circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety ap provals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component Note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled accord ing to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing Table of Contents 1
247. TALK Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB LSTN Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB SRQ Service request over GPIB REAR Rear input output connectors selected REL Relative measure reading displayed FILT Digital filter enabled MATH Math function enabled 4W Remote sensing enabled AUTO Autoranging enabled ARM Source measure operations being performed TRIG External trigger source selected Reading being stored Input output connectors INPUT OUTPUT HI and LO Use to source measure volts amps and ohms 4 WIRE SENSE HI and LO Use for 4 wire remote sensing Input output controls ON OFF Turns the source on or off FRONT REAR Selects front or rear panel input output connections Handle Pull out and rotate to desired position 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 9 Rear panel summary The rear panel of the Model 2400 SourceMeter is shown in Figure 1 2 The Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 are similar The following abbreviated information should be reviewed before operating the instrument Figure 1 2 SourceMeter rear panel WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY a PK MADE IN KEITHLEY KOLJO 7 ae C LISTED 250V Le sv 250V LINE FUSE SourcoMetor PEAK PEAK PEAK PEAK SLOWBLOW 2 5A 250V J LINE RATING GUARD 190 240VAC SENSE Lo 130VAt MAX 4 WIRE INPUT 250V ais SENSE A OUTPUT PEAK J FUSE DRAWER IEEE 488 g ENTER
248. TATe Query state of null offset Description This command is used to enable or disable null offset When enabled the CALC2 reading will include the null offset value See OFFSet lt n gt page 18 35 When disabled CALC2 will not include the null offset Read CALC2 DATA CALCulate2 DATA Read CALC2 Description This command is used to acquire all the readings used for the CALC2 limit tests Note that if null offset is enabled then the CALC2 readings will include the null offset value See Null feed reading page 18 35 At least one of the limit tests have to be enabled to acquire limit test readings See Configure and control limit tests page 18 36 and STATe lt b gt page 18 33 18 36 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data LATest CALCulate2 DATA LATest Read latest CALC2 data Description This command works exactly like CALC2 DATA except it returns only the latest null offset or limit result Configure and control limit tests COMPliance FAIL lt name gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL lt name gt Parameters lt name gt IN Fail Limit 1 test when unit goes into compliance OUT Fail Limit 1 test when unit comes out of compliance
249. Tage PROTection lt n gt Set voltage compliance n compliance 3 8 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic circuit configurations The fundamental source measure configurations for the SourceMeter are shown in Figure 3 1 When sourcing voltage you can measure current or voltage configuration A When sourcing current you can measure voltage or current configuration B See Section 6 Basic circuit configurations for more detailed information on these cir cuit configurations Figure 3 1 Fundamental source measure configuration A Source V l Source B Source I 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 9 Operation considerations The following paragraphs discuss warm up period auto zero V source protection and source delay Warm up The SourceMeter must be turned on and allowed to warm up for at least one hour to achieve rated accuracies See Appendix A for specifications Auto zero Every A D conversion reading is calculated from a series of zero reference and signal measurements With auto zero enabled all three of these measurements are performed for each reading to achieve rated accuracy With auto zero disabled zero and reference are not measured This increases measurement speed but zero drift will eventually corrupt accu racy With auto zero disabled periodically change measurement speed Temperature ch
250. Testing 12 15 Multiple element device binning Figure 12 8 shows a basic binning system to test three element resistor networks Note that this system requires a scanner card that is installed in a switching mainframe Scanner card switching is controlled through the Trigger Link End binning control is required for this test system therefore the grading mode must be used Trigger operations for the scanner and SourceMeter must be configured appropriately for this test In general the scanner must be configured to scan three channels and the SourceMeter must be configured to perform a 3 point sweep and output a trigger to the scanner after each measurement See Section 11 Triggering for details When the testing process is started Ch of the scanner card closes and R1 is measured Two events occur concurrently after the measurement is completed R1 is tested and the SourceMeter sends a trigger pulse to the switching mainframe causing Ch to open and Ch 2 to close Assuming there is no failure a measurement is then performed on R2 While R2 is being tested Ch 2 opens and Ch 3 closes Again assuming no failure a mea surement is performed on R3 and it is then tested Assuming that all the tests on all three resistors passed the device package is placed in the pass bin If any of the resistors in the network fails a test the FAIL message is displayed and the digital output information for the first failure is stored in memor
251. URce 1 CURRent STARt lt n gt Specify start current level current sweep SOURce 1 VOLTage STARt lt n gt Specify start voltage level voltage sweep SOURce 1 CURRent STOP lt n gt Specify stop current level current sweep SOURce 1 VOLTage STOP lt n gt Specify stop voltage level voltage sweep Parameters 2400 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set I Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 210V MAXimum 1 05A or 210V 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set I Source level amps 1100 to 1100 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 1100V MAXimum 1 05A or 1100V 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Set I Source level amps 63 to 63 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 3 15A or 63V MAXimum 3 15A or 63V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Set I Source level amps 105 to 105 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 3 15A or 105V MAXimum 3 15A or 105V 18 86 SCPI Command Reference Query Description 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Set I Source level amps 105 to 105 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 10 5A or 105V MAXimum 10 5A or 105V 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Set I Source level amps 42 to 42 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 5 25A or 42V MAXimum 5 25A or 42V STARt Query start level for sweep STARt DEFau
252. UTO Use the most sensitive source range for each sweep level FIXed Use the present source range for the entire sweep Query RANGing Query source ranging mode Description This command is used to select the source ranging mode for sweeps With BEST selected the SourceMeter will select a single fixed source range that will accommodate all the source levels in the sweep For front panel operation this is the BEST FIXED option With AUTO selected the SourceMeter will automatically go to the most sensitive source range for each source level in the sweep For front panel operation this is the AUTO RANGE option With FIXed selected the source remains on the range that it is presently on when the sweep is started For sweep points that exceed the source range capability the source will output the maximum level for that range For front panel operation this is the FIXED option 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SPACing lt name gt sSOURce 1 SWEep SPACing lt name gt SCPI Command Reference 18 85 Select scale for sweep Parameters lt name gt LINear Linear scale LOGarithmic Logarithmic scale Query SPACing Query scale for sweep Description This command is used to select the scale for the sweep With LINear selected the source measure points in the sweep will be performed on a linear scale With LOGarithmic selected the source measure points will be performed on a logarithmic scale STARt lt n gt STOP lt n gt SO
253. Use to ENABLE or DISABLE auto output off When enabled the OUTPUT will turn off after the measurement phase of every SDM cycle The OUTPUT turns back on at the beginning of the next SDM cycle When disabled the OUTPUT stays on as long as the SourceMeter is operating within the trigger model ARM annunciator on With the OUTPUT enabled pressing the ON OFF key will disable the OUTPUT and disable auto output off 13 8 Digital O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 13 5 Output configuration menu tree CONFIG ON OFF OUTPUT OFF STATE NORMAL ZERO AUTO OFF DISABLE ENABLE INTERLOCK DISABLE ENABLE Output off states HIGH IMPEDANCE GUARD NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode output off is always set to NORMAL HIGH IMPEDANCE With this output off state the output relay opens when the OUTPUT is turned OFF This disconnects external circuitry from the input output of the SourceMeter To prevent exces sive wear on the output relay do not use this output off state for tests that turn the output off and on frequently such as the Output Auto Off mode Note that there is a 15msec settling time for the relay when the output is turned on NORMAL When in this relatively high impedance output off state the V Source is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range In theory w
254. User s Manual Clear test results IMMediate CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar IMMediate Clears test results and resets Digital I O Port Description This command clears the test results pass or fail of the limit tests and resets the output lines of the Digital I O port back to the SOURce2 TTL settings See SOURce2 page 18 100 subsystem AUTO lt b gt CALCulate2 CLIMits CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto clear for test results Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto clear 0 or OFF Disable auto clear Query AUTO Query state of auto clear Description With auto clear enabled test results will clear and the output lines of the Digital I O port will reset when the INITiate command is sent to start a new test sequence When disabled you must use MMediate to perform the clear actions CALCu late3 Provides statistical data on buffer readings Select statistic FORMat lt name gt CALCulate3 FORMat lt name gt Specify CALC3 format Parameters lt name gt MEAN Mean value of readings in buffer SDEViation Standard deviation of readings in buffer MAXimum Largest reading in buffer MINimum Lowest reading in buffer PKPK MAXimum MINimum Query FORMat Query programmed math format This command is used to select the desired statistic on readings stored in Description the buffer See Section 9 Data Store for details on these statistics Readings stored in the buffer can be raw measured readings
255. a The READ command performs an INITiate and then a FETCh The INITiate triggers a new source measure cycle which puts new data in the Sample Buffer FETCh reads that new data The MEASure command places the SourceMeter in a one shot source measure mode and then performs a READ See Section 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Mea surement Commands for more information on READ and MEASure C 4 Data Flow 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CALCulate 1 DATA If CALCulatel is enabled Sample Buffer data is fed to the CALC1 block where the results for the selected math expression are calculated The CALC1 DATA command will read the results of the math expression If for example 20 data arrays in the Sample Buffer yield 10 math expression results then CALC1 DATA will acquire 10 readings results CALCulate2 DATA 2 If CALCulate2 is enabled Sample Buffer data and CALC1 math expression results become available to the CALC2 block for limit testing Depending on the selected feed limit testing can be performed on the voltage current resistance or timestamp readings of Sample Buffer data or it can be performed on the CALC1 math expression results If NULL rel is enabled the readings used for limit testing will be the results of the null operation The CALCulate2 DATA command acquires the readings used for limit testing TRACe DATA If the data store is enabled Sample Buffer data CALC1 results and CALC2 readings
256. a trigger after each action of the SDM cycle Source Delay and Measure Output triggers are con trolled with the TRIGger OUTPut command For example to output a trigger after the Measure Action the following command must be sent TRIGger OUTPut SENSe The above command disables output triggers for the Source and Delay Actions since their parameter names SOURce and DELay are not included in the parameter list When used with a scanner an output trigger after each measurement can signal the scan ner to select the next channel in the scan Arm layer output trigger As shown in Figure 11 3 the SourceMeter can be pro grammed to output a trigger when operation leaves the Arm Layer and enters the Trigger Layer or after operation leaves the Trigger Layer and enters back into the Arm Layer This output trigger is typically sent to another instrument to signal the end of a scan or sweep The ARM OUTPut command is used to control these output triggers The TENTer param eter enables the trigger on entering the Trigger Layer the TEXit parameter enables the trigger on exiting the Trigger Layer and the NONE parameter disables both output triggers 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 17 GPIB defaults The GPIB defaults are listed as follows They are also denoted in Figure 11 3 by the symbol e Arm In Event Immediate Trigger In Source Immediate e Arm Count 1 Trigger Count 1 Trigger Del
257. able as previously explained Figure 6 18 shows how cable guard can eliminate leakage current through the insulators in a test fixture In Figure 6 18A leakage current I flows through the insulators R and R 2 to In Out LO adversely affecting the low current or high resistance measurement of the DUT In Figure 6 18B the driven guard is connected to the metal guard plate for the insulators Since the voltage on either end of R is the same OV drop no current can flow through the leakage resistance path Thus the SourceMeter only measures the current through the DUT Cable guard should be used when sourcing or measuring low current lt 1pA NOTE When using shielded triaxial or coaxial cabling with guard the CABLE guard setting must be used to prevent oscillations CABLE guard is the factory default setting Ohms guard The OHMS guard selection provides a low impedance lt 1Q high current up to 5 0mA driven guard This lets you perform in circuit ohms measurements of the DUT where other parallel resistive paths are present These measurements are typically performed in Delta or Wye configurations NOTE Ohms guard is not available for the 1A 3A and 5A 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 ranges source and measure Ohms guard cannot be selected if already on range Conversely if ohms guard is already selected the 1A 3A and 5A 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 ranges cannot be selected See also Section 4 6 wire ohms m
258. able beeper Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable beeper 0 or OFF Disable beeper Query STATe Query state of beeper Description This command is used to enable or disable the beeper When enabled a short beep is provided to signal that a front panel key has been pressed 18 110 SCPI Command Reference Control auto zero 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual STATe lt name gt SYSTem AZERo STATe lt name gt Control auto zero Parameters lt name gt ON Enable auto zero OFF Disable auto zero ONCE Force immediate auto zero update Query STATe Query state of auto zero Description This command is used to enable or disable auto zero or to force an immediate one time auto zero update if auto zero is disabled When auto zero is enabled accuracy is optimized When auto zero is disabled speed is increased at the expense of accuracy Control NPLC caching CACHing SYSTem AZERo CACHing STATe lt b gt Enable disable NPLC caching SYSTem AZERo CACHing REFResh Update NPLC cache values SYSTem AZERo CACHing RESet Clear NPLC values from cache SYSTem AZERo CACHing NPLCycles Return list of NPLC values Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable NPLC caching 0 or OFF Disable NPLC caching Query STATe Query state of NPLC caching NPLCycles Return list of NPLC values stored in cache from oldest to newest Description NPLC caching speeds up source memory sweeps by caching A D refer ence and zero values When SYST AZER CACH is enabled
259. abled the instrument will measure the functions that are selected See ON lt function list gt page 18 61 OFF lt function list gt page 18 61 and ALL page 18 62 When disabled only one measurement function can be enabled When making the transition from CONCurrent ON to CONCurrent OFF the voltage VOLT DC measurement function will be selected All other measurement functions will be disabled Use the FUNCTion ON command to select one of the other measurement functions NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode concurrent measurements are always disabled Sending this command results in error 831 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 61 ON lt function list gt OFF lt function list gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON lt function list gt Specify functions to be enabled SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF lt function list gt Specify functions to be disabled Parameters lt function list gt CURRent DC Amps measurement function VOLTage DC Volts measurement function RESistance Ohms measurement function NOTE Each function in the list must be enclosed in quotes double or single and sepa rated by a comma i e func on volt curr Query ON Query functions that are enabled OFF Query functions that are disabled Description When concurrent measurements are enabled these commands are used to enable or disable functions to be measured The ON
260. address by ORing the address with H40 Talk commands are used to address devices to talk SCG Secondary Command Group Commands in this group provide additional addressing capabilities Many devices including the SourceMeter do not use these commands Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted UNL Unlisten Listeners are placed in the listener idle state by the UNL command UNT Untalk Any previously commanded talkers will be placed in the talker idle state by the UNT command D 10 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to all devices on the bus These com mands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that are particular to each device on the bus These com mands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consor tium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that
261. ading calculation For the Pulse Mode ohms source readback cannot be enabled Section 4 covers Ohms source readback NOTE Make sure that the source is not in compliance when taking pulse ohms readings Toggle key For the DC Mode the TOGGLE key manipulates display readings while the output is on For the Pulse Mode the output is only on for very short periods of time pulse width Therefore the TOGGLE key is disabled in the Pulse Mode 5 18 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Offset compensated ohms From the front panel there are two methods to perform offset compensated ohms measure ments For one method which is enabled from the CONFIG OHMS menu the 2 point measurement process is performed at a user set source level and at OV or OA This method is not available while in the Pulse Mode The other method which is a math func tion FCTN the user sets both source levels for the 2 point measurement process This method is valid in the Pulse Mode See Section 8 Math operations for details For remote operation offset compensated ohms as a math function CALCulate1 sub system can be performed in the Pulse Mode From the SENSe subsystem offset compensated ohms cannot be performed The SENSe RESistance 0COMpensated lt b gt command which enables disables offset compensated ohms causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode Source delay In the DC Mode the source
262. age limit Voltage limit detected 1 yes 0 no Specify start level for V sweep 0 Query start level for voltage sweep Specify stop level for V sweep 0 Query stop level for voltage sweep Specify step value for V sweep 0 Query step value for voltage sweep Specify span 0 Query span Specify center point 0 Query center point Set first sweep point soak time 0 00000 to 0 00000 9999 999s Query soak time S NNNNAN S N NNNNN NNN S s s 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2 SYSTem PRESet default is 40 RST default is NONE 3 If source V is active 18 16 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 SWEep Configure SWEep source mode v SPACing lt name gt Select sweep spacing type LINear or LINear v LOGarithmic SPACing Query sweep spacing v POINts lt n gt Specify number of sweep points 2 to 2500 v 2500 POINts Query number of points in sweep v DIRection lt name gt Sweep from start to stop UP or from stop UP to start DOWN DIRection Query sweep direction RANGing lt name gt Select source ranging mode BEST BEST v AUTO or FIXed RANGing Query sou
263. aircase sweep 10 2 10 17 LLO local lockout 14 8 LOCAL key 14 10 Logarithmic staircase sweep 10 4 10 18 Long form and short form versions 14 14 Manual ranging 7 3 Math 8 4 Built in functions 8 4 Front panel operation 8 6 Programming example 8 8 Remote operation 8 7 User defined functions 8 9 Measure only Front panel operation 3 20 Programming example 3 21 Remote operation 3 21 Measure voltage or current 3 20 Menus 1 20 Configuration 1 26 Main 1 20 Measurement configuration 1 27 Navigating 1 24 Output and display configuration 1 33 Rel filter and limit configuration 1 29 Source and range configuration 1 28 Sweep digits speed and data store configuration 1 32 Sweep digits speed and output configuration 1 34 Trigger configuration 1 31 Message Program 14 15 Response 14 17 Status and error B 2 Message exchange protocol 14 17 Multiple element device binning 12 15 NPLC caching 3 10 Offset compensated ohms math function 8 4 Ohms 6 wire measurements 4 11 Auto measurements 4 4 Configuration menu 4 2 Enabling disabling offset compensation 4 9 Guard 2 9 6 35 Manual measurements 4 5 Measurement methods 4 3 Measurements 4 1 Offset compensated 4 9 Programming example 4 13 Remote programming 4 12 Selecting measurement method 4 4 Sensing 4 7 Source readback 4 11 Operating boundaries 6 14 Current compliance 6 28 Duty cycle 6 14 I Source 6 21 Source or sink 6 14 Voltage compliance 6 24 V Source 6 26 Operation
264. al handshaking sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 14 19 RS 232 COMMECHONS siisii issiron 14 19 Error Messages nurori ir a E 14 21 Programming example ssesessesesseesssreresrereeesreresresesreserses 14 21 15 Status Structure OVETVIEW aisee einernie eTe Err Ers EAER R E aE ES 15 2 Status byte and SRQ sssssssessssssssssssssssssssrsssessrssssssrssressrssese 15 2 Stat s resister SCUS m scevceccsscccdessescideseoueacdaceesccesseceseeesaueseenes 15 2 OTE E EEE T E EE E E ATT 15 2 Clearing registers and queues sesesseesesesresseresrrsrsrrsreresresrees 15 4 Programming and reading registers eeeeseeeeseeeeeeerreresrerrereee 15 5 Programming enable registers esseeseeeeeesesreresreresresreees 15 5 Reading registers sesesseeseeeseesesssstsssssrssessessreseeseresresens 15 6 Status byte and service request SRQ sessesssesssssssssesrsssssesssse 15 7 Status byte register oo cee eeeeesecsseeeeeeceeeeseeceaeeeteeeseeeeees 15 8 Service request enable register 0 ese eseeseeseeeeeneeeeeees 15 9 Serial polling and SRQ wo eescesseeeseeeseceneeeseeesseeeseeeeaees 15 9 SPE SPD serial polling ooo eee eee eeeeeeeseeeseeeeneeeeees 15 9 Status byte and service request commands 15 10 Programming example set MSS B6 when error OCCUIS oo ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeseeneeenees 15 10 Stat s resister Sets ss zs celia ediscaceeeateeiscadlstesedidacseyececasevreedecsaevel 15 11 Register bit descriptions
265. alue to ON using the A and Y keys Press ENTER and then press EXIT to return to the CONFIGURE TRIG LAYER menu Set trigger count to 10 Use the key to scroll to the far right of the menu selections and select COUNT then press ENTER Set the count to 10 then press the ENTER key Press the EXIT key twice to leave CONFIGURE TRIGGER menus Enable auto output off Press the CONFIG key and then the ON OFF key to access the CONFIGURE OUTPUT menu Select AUTO OFF then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER Select ALWAYS then press ENTER Press the EXIT key to leave the CONFIGURE OUTPUT menu 11 26 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Switching mainframe setup l Restore bench defaults Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP and then press ENTER From the SAVESETUP menu select RESET then press ENTER Press ENTER to confirm the action Press ENTER to return to the SETUP MENU Press EXIT to leave the SETUP MENU Press EXIT to leave the MAIN MENU Setup scan list 1 1 1 10 Press the SCAN LIST key Press 1 1 1 1 0 then press the ENTER key Set the number of scans to 1 Press the SCAN key select SCAN CONTROL and then press ENTER From the SCAN CONTROL menu select NUMBER OF SCANS then press ENTER Select ENTER SCAN COUNT then press ENTER Set the count to 1 then press ENTER Press the EXIT key to return to the CONFIGURE SCAN menu Set channel spacing to trigger link Select CHAN CONTROL from th
266. amp Logical AND RAV Reading Available OR Logical OR 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 15 Questionable Event Register The used bits of the Questionable Event Register shown in Figure 15 7 are described as follows Bits BO through B7 Not used Bit B8 Calibration Summary Cal Set bit indicates that an invalid calibration constant was detected during the power up sequence This error will clear after successful calibration of the instrument Bits B9 through B13 Not used Bit B14 Command Warning Warn Set bit indicates that a Signal Oriented Measurement Command parameter has been ignored e Bit B15 Not used Figure 15 7 Questionable event status Warn a B15 oo B13 B9 B7 BO Warn ey B15 B14 B13 B9 B7 BO Questionable Condition Register stat ques cond Questionable stat ques Event Register To QSB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 Questionable Event Enable Register stat ques enab lt NRf gt stat ques enab Warn CAL B15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 BO Warn Command Warning Logical AND Cal Calibration Summary One Logical OR 15 16 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Condition registers As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set except the Standard Event Register set has a condition register A condition register is a real time read only register th
267. an be used to select a math expression that already exists built in or user defined Math expression names that already exist can be listed using the CATalog command The actual math expression can be read using the MATH command The built in math expressions except POWER require a two point sweep in order to per form the calculation The Program fragments show how to configure the SourceMeter for these math expressions When you want to create a new user defined math expression perform the following steps in order 1 If desired assign units to the calculation result See UNITs lt name gt page 18 29 Units is stored for the calculation 2 Assign a name to the expression using up to 10 ASCII characters using this command 3 Define the expression using the DEFine or EXPRession command The new expression is the one that will be presently selected Math expression errors 801 Insufficient vector data Returned to idle before acquiring enough data to fully populate the vector A CALC1 result is not built 804 Expression list full Attempted to create a new expression name when the list catalog is full The maximum number of user defined expression names is five 805 Undefined expression exists Attempted to create a new expression name while a previous expression name remains unde fined Remember after creating a name you have to define the expression 806 Express
268. and For example to enable the Source Event Detector and Measure Event Detector send the fol lowing command TRIGger INPut SOURce SENSe The Delay Event Detector will be disabled since the DELay parameter is not included in the above event list NOTE To disable all the Trigger Layer event detectors the NONE parameter must be sent alone i e trigger input none If it is listed with any of the other parame ters NONE will be ignored ILINe lt NRf gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure ILINe lt NRf gt Select input line arm layer TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure ILINe lt NRf gt Select input line trigger layer Parameters lt NRf gt 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Line 3 4 Line 4 Query ILINe Query input trigger line Description This command is used to select input lines for the Trigger Link For nor mal operation Trigger Link input and output see OLINe lt NRf gt should not share the same line OLINe lt NRf gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 TCONfigure OLINe lt NRf gt Select output line arm layer TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure OLINe lt NRf gt Select output line trigger layer Parameters lt NRf gt 1 Line 1 2 Line 2 3 Line 3 4 Line 4 Query OLINe Query output trigger line Description This command is used to select output lines for the Trigger Link For normal operation Trigger Link input and output see ILINe lt NRf gt should not share the same line 18 126 SCPI
269. and compliance values The edit mode is selected by pressing the EDIT key The flashing digit for the source or compliance reading indicates that the SourceMeter is in the edit mode If no editing operation is performed within six seconds the edit mode times out and is cancelled To return to the edit mode press EDIT again While in the edit mode the EDIT key toggles between the source value and the compliance value The SOURCE A lt and keys also enable the edit mode They choose the last selected field When editing the source value the source is updated immediately allowing you to adjust the source value while the output is on The source value cannot be changed while the SourceMeter is performing a sweep This occurs with Output ON and either the SWEEP key is pressed Offset Compensation is enabled under Ohms or OFF COMP OHMS VOLT COEFF or VAR ALPHA functions are enabled When editing the compliance value compliance is not updated until ENTER is pressed or the edit mode is allowed to time out EDIT always goes to the source field first except while sweeping in which case it goes into the compliance field Source and compliance values cannot be edited in AUTO OHMS mode MAN UAL OHMS allows you to edit source and compliance See Section 4 Perform the following steps to edit the source and compliance values f Press EDIT to enter the edit mode The flashing digit indicates which reading source or complia
270. and the pulse signal measurement The output off time typically consists of zero and reference measurements used to calculate accurate pulse readings internal overhead time and an optional pulse delay NOTE Details on Pulse Mode operation for the Model 2430 are provided in Section 5 Figure 10 10 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep Measure 2V gt Measure Ov Off _ Pulse 1 ge ok pate 3 gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 33 Front panel Pulse Mode sweep procedure The procedure to perform a Pulse Mode sweep is summarized as follows NOTE The following procedure assumes that the Model 2430 is already connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 WARNING Hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when performing fast pulse sweep operations To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO terminal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connection can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Step 1 Select and configure pulse mode Basic parameters for the Pulse Mode include pulse width pulse delay pulse measurement speed and pulse count Refer to Section 5 Pulse Mode configuration to select the Pulse Mode and set the pulse parameters Step 2 Set compl
271. and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental com mand Examples are ARM TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value ARM TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value ARM TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case and any case combination Examples RST rst DATA data SYSTem PRESet system preset NOTE Using all upper case will result in slightly faster command response times 14 14 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Long form and short form versions A SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command subsystem tables in Section 18 provide the long form version However the short form version is indicated by upper case characters Examples SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRES long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in long form or short form and not something in between For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the short form version of any SCPI command Ifthe length of the command word is four letters or less no short form version exists Example e auto auto These rules apply to command words that exceed four letters Ifthe fourth letter of
272. ands cccceeesesesseeeeeeesseeeees F 14 Contact check programming example 10 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeees F 16 Contact check defaults cccccccssseccccesssseeceeessseeeeeeeeses F 20 GPIB 488 1 Protocol SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for measure only sweep operation rdgs SeC oe G 6 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure sweep operation rdgs SeC s G 6 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure limit test sweep operation rdgs sec G 7 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source memory sweep operation rdgs Sec s s s G 7 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for measure only single shot operation rdgs sec G 8 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure single shot operation rdgs sec G 8 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure limit test single shot Operation rdgs sec oo eeeeceesececeesecseeeeesceeseeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeeees G 8 Getting Started General information Covers general information that includes warranty infor mation contact information safety symbols and terms inspection and available options and accessories Product overview Summarizes the features of the SourceMeter Front and rear panel familiarization Summarizes the controls and connectors of the instrument Power up Covers line power connection line voltage settings fuse replace ment and the power up sequence C
273. ange For example if on the 20V source range the voltage source limit line is at 21 V The current compliance limit line represents the actual compliance in effect Remember that compli ance can be real or range See Compliance limit page 6 2 These limit lines are bound aries that represent the operating limits of the SourceMeter for this quadrant of operation The operating point can be anywhere inside or on these limit lines The limit line bound aries for the other quadrants are similar Figure 6 13 V Source limit lines Current Compliance Limit Line Measure Voltage Source Limit Line V Source Current compliance boundaries Where within the boundaries the SourceMeter operates depends on the load DUT that is connected to the output Figure 6 14 shows operation examples for resistive loads that are 2KQ and 800Q respectively For these examples the SourceMeter is programmed to source 50V and limit 50mA In Figure 6 14A the SourceMeter is sourcing 100V to the 2kQ load and subsequently measures 25mA As shown the load line for 2kQ intersects the 50V voltage source line at 25mA Figure 6 14B shows what happens if the resistance of the load is decreased to 800Q The DUT load line for 800kQ intersects the current compliance limit line placing the SourceMeter in compliance In compliance the SourceMeter will not be able to source its programmed voltage 50V For the 800kQ DUT the SourceMeter will only output 40V at
274. anges across components within the instrument can cause the reference and zero values for the A D converter to drift due to thermo electric effects Auto zero acts to negate the effects of drift in order to maintain measurement accuracy over time Without auto zero enabled measurements can drift and become erroneous Front panel auto zero Set the auto zero from the front panel as follows Press the MENU key Select A D CTRL from the main menu then press ENTER Select AUTO ZERO then press ENTER Select ENABLE or DISABLE as appropriate then press ENTER Press EXIT as necessary to return to normal display OY ee Ne Remote command auto zero Use the SYSTem AZERo command to enable or disable auto zero via remote See Section 18 SYSTem subsystem For example send the following command to disable auto zero iSYST AZER ON Conversely send this command to disable auto zero SYST AZER OFF 3 10 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NPLC caching NPLC caching speeds up source memory sweeps by caching A D reference and zero val ues When NPLC caching is enabled using the NPLC CACHE ENABLE menu selec tion the A D reference and zero values will be saved for up to the 10 most recent voltage current and resistance measurement functions settings Whenever the integration rate is changed via the SPEED key a recalled user setup using the SAVESETUP RESTORE menu selection or during a source me
275. annunciators CHAR SET Test special display characters 1 22 Getting Started Table 1 5 continued 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Main menu Menu item Description Parameters A D CTRL Control auto zero line frequency NPLC caching AUTO ZERO Control auto zero DISABLE Disable auto zero ENABLE Enable auto zero ONCE Force auto zero immediate update LINE FREQ Set line frequency 50 or 60Hz or NPLC CACHE Control NPLC caching AUTO DISABLE Disable NPLC caching ENABLE Enable NPLC caching REFRESH Update all NPLC values in cache immediately RESET Clear NPLC cache of all NPLC values GENERAL Select general operations DIGOUT Set Digital I O port bit pattern 0 156 SERIAL Display serial number firmware revision SCPI YES or NO version TIMESTAMP Reset timestamp FAN 2420 2425 2430 and Set fan speed control ALWAYS fan runs at the ALWAYS or 2440 same speed with the output on or off OUTPUT OUTPUT ON ON fan runs at low speed with the output off See Cooling fan page 1 13 NUMBERS Select engineering units or scientific notation display ENGR format SCIENTIFIC BEEPER Enable or disable beeper Ne Top level menu choices indicated in bold Indentation identifies each lower submenu level When the remote operation interface selection GPIB or RS 232 is changed the SourceMeter performs a power on reset To check or change options of the selected interface you must re enter
276. aracters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the pro gram message Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message The Boolean parameter lt b gt is used to enable or disable an instrument operation 1 or ON enables the operation and 0 or OFF disables the operation Upper case characters indicate the short form version for each command word Default Parameter Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRESet defaults unless noted otherwise Parameter notes are located at the end of each table SCPI A checkmark indicates that the command and its parameters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is a SCPI command but does not conform to the SCPI standard set of commands It is not a recognized com mand by the SCPI consortium SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parameters are explained by notes Source Memory A checkmark VW indicates that the parameters associated with the specified command are saved in any one of 100 memory locations by the SOURce 1 MEMory SAVE command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 CALCulate command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate 1 Subsystem to control CALC1 y MATH Path to configure and control math v expressions EXPRession lt form gt Define math ex
277. arameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable display circuitry 1 or ON Enable display circuitry Query ENABle Query state of display Description This command is used to enable and disable the front panel display cir cuitry When disabled the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is frozen with the following message FRONT PANEL DISABLED Press LOCAL to resume As reported by the message all front panel controls except LOCAL and OUTPUT OFF are disabled Normal display operation can be resumed by using the ENABle command to enable the display or by putting the SourceMeter into local 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 47 ATTRibutes DISPlay WINDow 1 ATTRibutes Query attributes top display DISPlay WINDow2 ATTRibutes Query attributes bottom display Description CNDisplay DISPlay CNDisplay Description Read display DATA This query command is used to determine which characters on the dis play are blinking and which are not The response message provides that status of each character position for the specified display The primary display consists of 20 characters and the secondary display consists of 32 characters 1 Character is blinking 0 Character is not blinking For example assume the following menu is displayed with the SAVESETUP option blinking MAIN MENU SAVESETUP COMMUNICATION CAL gt The response message for DISP ATTR top display
278. at constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument For example while the SourceMeter is in the idle state bit B10 Idle of the Operation Condition Register will be set When the instrument is taken out of idle bit B10 clears The commands to read the condition registers are listed in Table 15 5 For details on read ing registers see Reading registers page 15 6 Table 15 5 Condition register commands Command Description STATus OPERation CONDition Read Operation Condition Register STATus MEASurement CONDition Read Measurement Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Read Questionable Condition Register Event registers As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set has an event register When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset Reading an event register clears the bits of that register CLS resets all four event registers The commands to read the event registers are listed in Table 15 6 For details on reading registers see Reading registers page 15 6 Table 15 6 Event register commands Command Description Default ESR Read Standard Event Status Register Note STATus OPERation EVENt Read Operation Event Register STATus MEASurement EVENt Read Measurement Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read Questionable Event Register N
279. ate of Limit 2 test v FAIL Return result of Limit 2 test 0 pass or y 1 fail 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 LIMit3 Path to control LIMIT 3 test v UPPer Configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Specify upper limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v 9 999999e20 DATA Query upper limit v SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 15 lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern LOWer Configure lower limit Jv DATA lt n gt Specify lower limit 9 999999e20 to 1 v 9 999999e20 DATA Query lower limit y SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern for grading 15 lt NDN gt mode 0 to 7 3 bit O to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern PASS Path to specify pass pattern for sorting mode SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 v lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Limit 3 test OFF v STATe Query state of Limit 3 test v FAIL Return result of Limit 3 test 0 pass or v 1 fail LIMit4 Path for LIMIT 4 test contact check option only SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 3 bit 15 lt NDN gt 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query fail bit pattern STATe lt b gt Enable or disable
280. ated ohms cannot be enabled using this command Sending this command results in error 831 18 64 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select measurement range Notes 1 You cannot select a current measurement range if sourcing current Conversely you cannot select a voltage measurement range if sourcing voltage Also autorange cannot be enabled for those source measure configurations The programmed source range determines measurement range You cannot select an ohms measurement range if in manual ohms you must be in auto ohms The highest current measurement range that can be selected is limited by the cur rent compliance range For example if current compliance is set for 50mA 100mA range then the highest available current measurement range is 100mA Similarly the highest voltage measurement range is limited by the voltage compli ance range Measurement range limitations 2400 With the 200V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 100mA With the 1A source range selected the highest voltage measure ment range is 20V 2410 With the 1kV source range selected the highest current measurement range is 20mA With the 1A or 100mA source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2420 With the 60V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 60V W
281. ath 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Math operations Built in math functions The SourceMeter has built in math functions to calculate the following e Power e Offset Compensated Q e Varistor Alpha e Voltage Coefficient e Percent Deviation The Power and Percent Deviation math functions use a single voltage and or current mea surement to perform the calculation The Offset Compensated Q Varistor Alpha and Volt age Coefficient math functions require 2 point measurements to perform a calculation Power This math function calculates power using the measured voltage and measured current values as follows Power VxI where V measured voltage I measured current Note that power is displayed in watts with W in the units field of the display Offset compensated ohms The presence of thermal EMFs Vy can adversely affect low resistance measurement accuracy To overcome these unwanted OFFset voltages use the Offset Compensated Q measurement method In general this method measures resistance V I at a specific I Source level and then subtracts a resistance measurement made with the I Source set to a different level typically zero NOTE Offset compensated Q is also available from the CONFIG OHMS menu struc ture Using Offset Compensated Q from this menu automatically selects zero as one of the source values For details see Section 4 Offset compensated ohms 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Ma
282. ation Front panel Pulse Mode configuration Select Pulse Mode and set pulse width and pulse delay Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or I Select SHAPE from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Select PULSE from the displayed choices then press ENTER Selecting the Pulse Mode enables the pulse width and pulse delay items of the menu 4 Select PULSE WIDTH from the displayed choices then press ENTER 5 Enter the desired pulsewidth value 0 15ms to 5 00ms then press ENTER Note that the pulse width internally will limit to 2 5ms on the 10A range source or measure 6 Select DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER Enter the desired pulse delay value 0 to 9999 99872 sec then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to the normal display Set pulse measurement speed Once the Pulse Mode is selected the available NPLC values become accessible to set pulse measurement speed 1 Press SPEED to display the pulse speed menu 2 Select the speed setting 0 004 to 0 100 and press ENTER Set pulse count The arm count and trigger count determine how many pulses will be sourced In general the number of pulses to be sourced is the product of the arm count and trigger count For example if the arm count is two and the trigger count is five ten pulses will be sourced when the output is turned on However with the arm count set to infinite the Model 2430 will continuously source pulses when the output is turned on Note that t
283. ations See RWLock lt b gt page 18 115 This action command is used to remove the SourceMeter from the remote state and enables the operation of front panel keys Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface RWLock lt b gt SYSTem RWLock lt b gt Disable or enable front panel keys Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable local lockout 1 or ON Enable local lockout Query RWLock Query state of local lockout Description This command is used to enable or disable local lockout When enabled the front panel keys are locked out not operational when the instru ment is in remote When disabled the front panel keys are operational in remote Removing the instrument from remote see LOCal page 18 115 restores front panel keys operation but does not change the status of the RWLock command Note that this command can only be sent over the RS 232 interface 18 116 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query timestamp TIME SYSTem TIME Query timestamp Query TIME Query timestamp Description This query returns the current timestamp value Reset timestamp RESet SYSTem TIME RESet Reset timestamp Description This action command is used to reset the absolute timestamp to 0 sec onds The timestamp also resets to 0 seconds every time the Source Meter is turned on Auto reset timestamp RESet AUTO lt b gt SYSTem TIME RESet AUTO lt b gt Reset timestamp when exitin
284. atus Limit 1 and 4 pass and 2 3 and O O JO JO JO Bit5 LP 5 12 disabled Limit test 1 fail O JO JO JO 1 BitO L1 Limit test 2 pass 0 JO JO 1 JO Bit5 LP Limit test 3 pass O JO JO 1 1 Bit 4 HL3 Limit test 4 fail O JO 1 JO 1 Bit10 CC Limit test 5 pass O IO 1 O JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 6 pass 0 JO 1 1 JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 7 pass O JO 1 1 1 Bit 5 LP Limit test 8 pass O 1 JO JO JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 9 pass O 1 JO JO JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 10 pass O 1 JO 1 JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 11 pass O 1 JO 1 1 Bit 5 LP Limit test 12 pass O 1 1 JO JO Bit 5 LP Limit 1 and 4 pass and 2 3 and 1 1 1 1 I l 5 12 fail 1 Limit 4 test available only with contact check option Appendix F 2 See Section 15 Measurement Event Register and Figure 15 6 for details 18 54 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Grading mode status bit values Meas Event Result Bit 21 20 19 9 8 Status All limits pass 0 JO JO JO JO Bit 5 LP Limit test 1 fail 0 JO JO JO 1 BitO L1 Hi Limit test 2 fail 1 JO JO 1 JO Bit 2 HL2 Lo Limit test 2 fail 0 JO JO 1 JO Bit1 LL2 Hi Limit test 3 fail 1 JO JO 1 1 Bit4 HL3 Lo Limit test 3 fail 0O JO JO 1 J1 Bit3 LL3 Limit test 4 fail 0 JO 1 JO 1 Bit 10 CC Hi Limit test 5 fail 1 O 1 JO JO J Lo Limit test 5 fail O JO 1 JO JO
285. ay 0 0 sec e Delay Action 0 001 sec e Enabled event detector Source Event Detector Delay and Measure detection disabled Enabled output triggers None e Event detection bypasses Acceptor both layers With output turned ON OUTPut ON the SourceMeter will perform one SDM cycle when the INITiate command is sent After the measurement the SourceMeter returns to the idle state Operation summary The trigger model is designed to offer versatility for the various source measure applica tions Typically it allows you to perform a specified number of measurements at various source levels For example assume you want to perform three measurements each at two different V source levels 1 V and 2V To do this set the arm count to two arm count 2 the trig ger count to three trigger count 3 and use the list sourcing mode with the following defined list source list volt 1 1 1 2 2 2 On the first pass through the trigger model three measurements will be performed at the 1V source level On the second pass three measurements will be performed at the 2V source level After the last measurement the SourceMeter returns to the idle state Note that the product of the arm count finite value and trigger count determines the number of measurements that are performed In this example six measurements are performed 2 x 3 For details on the list source mode see Section 18 SOURce subsystem 11 18 Triggerin
286. ay to 500ms SOUR DEL 5 Similarly send the following command to enable auto delay SOUR DEL AUTO ON 3 14 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic source measure procedure Output control Use the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the SourceMeter output on or off for basic source measure situations You can also control the output off state high impedance normal zero or guard and program the instrument for auto output off operation See Section 13 for complete details on these aspects WARNING To prevent electric shock do not make or break connections to the SourceMeter with the output on If on press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output off Front panel source measure procedure Use the following procedure to perform the basic source measure operations of the SourceMeter See Section 4 Ohms Measurements to measure ohms NOTE For the Model 2430 the following procedure pertains to the DC Mode of opera tion Pulse Mode operation is covered in Section 5 If the Model 2430 is in the Pulse Mode Vpls or Ipls displayed in the source field you can select the DC Mode from the source pulse configuration menu Press CONFIG SOURCE V or 1 select the SHAPE menu item then select DC Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display In the DC Mode Vsrc or Isrc is displayed in the source field The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already connected to the DUT as explained
287. ayer Event Immediate Count 1 Output trigger Line 2 Off Trigger layer Event Immediate Count 1 Output triggers Line 2 All off Delay 0 0 sec Getting Started 1 19 1 20 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote setups You can also save and recall setups via remote using the following SCPI commands e Save and recall user setups using SAV and RCL Section 16 e Restore GPIB defaults using RST Section 16 e Restore bench defaults using SYSTem PRESet Section 18 e Save the power on configuration using SYSTem POSetup Section 18 Menus The following paragraphs discuss the main menu configuration menus and rules to navi gate menus Main menu Use the MENU key to access the Main Menu to select configure and or perform various instrument operations These include default setup conditions communications GPIB or RS 232 calibration front panel tests digital output states auto zero timestamp numeric display format and the beeper The overall Main Menu structure is summarized in Table 1 5 Use the Rules to navigate menus to check and or change Main Menu options Figure 1 3 shows the main menu tree Table 1 5 Main menu Menu item Description Parameters SAVESETUP Configure setup conditions GLOBAL Control instrument settings SAVE Save present SourceMeter setup to memory location 0 to 4 RESTORE Return the SourceMeter to setup saved in memory 0 to4 POWERON Sele
288. be active in LLO 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 11 Programming syntax The information in this section covers syntax for both common commands and SCPI com mands For information not covered here see the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI standards See Section 16 and Section 18 for more details on common and SCPI commands respectively Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter NRf required RST No parameter used CALCulatel STATe lt b gt Parameter lt b gt required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used NOTE Atleast one space between the command word and the parameter is required Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brackets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in the pro gram message For example INITiate MMediate These brackets indicate that MMediate is implied optional and does not have to be used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways INITiate or INITiate MMediate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional com mand words in your program do not include the brackets Parameter types The following are some of the more common parameter types lt b gt Boolean
289. be determined by comparing the displayed compli ance setting to the present measurement range Make sure the correct measurement func tion is displayed If sourcing voltage select the current measurement function Conversely if sourcing current select the voltage measurement function If the compliance setting is lower than the maximum compliance value on the present fixed measurement range then the compliance setting is the compliance limit If the com pliance setting is higher than the measurement range then the maximum compliance value on that measurement range is the compliance limit Table 6 2 provides examples Model 2400 for determining the actual compliance limit For the first three entries in the table the compliance setting is 150V On the 200V mea surement range the actual compliance is 150V compliance setting lt measure range real compliance On the 20V and 200mV measurement ranges compliance is 21V and 210mV respectively measure range lt compliance setting range compliance The same rules apply for the next three entries for current compliance Table 6 2 Compliance examples Compliance setting Measurement range Actual compliance Display message Setting Display message Range Value Type Cmpl 0 15000kV 150V V 200V 150V Real Cmpl 0 15000kV 150V V 20V 21V Range Cmpl 0 15000kKV_ 150V mV 200mV 210mV_ Range Cmpl 075 000 mA 75mA mA 100mA 75mA Real Cmpl 075 000 mA
290. become available to the TRACE block for storage The selected feed determines which group of readings are stored The TRACe DATA command reads the entire contents of the data store CALCulate3 DATA 2 Statistical information minimum maximum mean standard deviation and peak to peak is available for measure readings stored in the buffer If the readings in the data store came directly from the Sample Buffer then the selected statistic calculation will be performed on all enabled measurement functions The calculation results are returned in the follow ing fixed order VOLTage result CURRent result RESistance result When the TRACE buffer is feeding off CALC1 or CALC2 the selected statistic calcula tion is performed on the selected feed Thus a single statistic result is acquired for each reading stored in the data store The CALCulate3 DATA command acquires the results of the selected calculation D IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 2 IEFEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction Basically the IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a computer When a computer is used on the bus it serves to supervise the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the controller consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output i
291. ble register v CONDition Read the condition register y OPERation Control operation status registers v EVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NDN gt Program the enable register Note 3 v or lt NRf gt ENABle Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register v QUEStionable Control questionable status registers s LEVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NDN gt Program the enable register Note 3 s or lt NRf gt ENABle Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register v PRESet Return status registers to default states s QUEue Path to access error queue NEXT Read the most recent error message Note 4 s ENABIe lt list gt Specify error and status messages for error queue Note 5 v ENABle Read the enabled messages s DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in error queue Note 5 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from error queue Notes Commands in this subsystem are not affected by RST and SYSTem PREset The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes Event Registers Power up and CLS clears all bits STATus PRESet has no effect Enable Registers Power up and STATus PRESet clears all bits CLS has no effect Accepts the SCPI 1995 0 mandated non decimal numeric format H Q or B Error Queue Power up and
292. by ty Trigger Trigger Out ites put gig pg Trigger Channels A Turning the SourceMeter OUTPUT ON places it at point A in the flowchart where it waits for an external trigger B Pressing STEP takes the Model 7001 2 out of the idle state and places operation at point B in the flowchart C For the first pass through the model the scanner does not wait at point B Instead it closes the first channel point C D After the relay settles the Model 7001 2 outputs a trigger pulse Since the instrument is programmed to scan 10 channels operation loops back to point B where it waits for an input trigger E and F With the SourceMeter operation at point A the output trigger pulse from the Model 7001 2 triggers a measurement of DUT 1 point E After the measurement is complete the SourceMeter outputs a trigger pulse and then loops back to point A where it waits for another input trigger 11 28 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The trigger applied to the Model 7001 2 from the SourceMeter closes the next channel in the scan which then triggers the SourceMeter to measure that DUT This process contin ues until all 10 channels are scanned and measured Remote trigger example Table 11 2 summarizes the command sequence for basic trigger operation while Figure 11 12 shows a trigger model flowchart These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows Arm layer source bus Arm layer count 2 Trig
293. byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appropriate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location D 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure D 1 IEEE 488 bus configuration To Other Devices Device 1 Able to Talk Listen and Control Computer Data Bus Device 2 Able to Talk and Listen Data Byte SourceMeter HHH Transler Control Device 3 Only Able to Listen Printer H General Interface Management Device 4 Only Able DIO 1 8 Data to Talk 8 Lines DAV NRFD Handshake NDAC IFC ATN Bus SRQ Management REN EOI 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 5 Bus lines The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and com mands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts represent ing a logic 1 true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses eight data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bidirectional The data lines operate with low true logic Bus management lines The five b
294. cally select the most sensitive range for the specified source level When disabled the instru ment will use the range that the instrument is currently on Auto range will be disabled if a fixed range is selected see previous command Both RST and SYSTem PREset enables source auto range When the SourceMeter goes into the local state source auto range disables Set amplitude for fixed source IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt Set fixed I Source amplitude immediately SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt n gt Set fixed V Source amplitude immediately Parameters 2400 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set I Source amplitude amps 210 to 210 Set V Source amplitude volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 210V MAXimum 1 05A or 210V 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 Set I Source amplitude amps 1100 to 1100 Set V Source amplitude volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 1 05A or 1100V MAXimum 1 05A or 1100V 18 78 SCPI Command Reference Query Description NOTE The sourcing MODE command is used to select a fixed source See Select 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 2440 lt n gt CURRent 10 5 to 10 5 105 to 105 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 5 25 to 5 25 42 to
295. cally turn off See next command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 73 AUTO SOURce 1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Control auto output off Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto output off 0 or OFF Disable auto output off Query AUTO Query state of auto output off Description This command is used to control auto output off for the source With auto output off enabled an INITiate or READ or MEASure will start source measure operation The output will turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each mea surement is completed With auto output off disabled the source output must be on before an INITiate or READ can be used to start source measure operation The MEASure command will automatically turn on the source output Once operation is started the source output will stay on even after the instrument returns to the idle state Auto output off disabled is the RST and SYSTem PRESet default WARNING With auto output off disabled the source output will remain on after all programmed source measure operations are completed Beware of hazardous voltage that may be present on the output terminals NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto output off is always enabled This com mand is ignored Select function modes SHAPe lt name gt Model 2430 only SOURce 1 FUNCtion SHAPe lt name gt Select output mode Parameters lt name gt DC Select DC Mod
296. cally used to trigger a specified number of measurements See READ When this command is sent the SourceMeter will be configured as follows e Select specified function e All controls related to the selected function are defaulted to the RST values The event control source of the Trigger Model is set to Immediate 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 17 3 The count values of the Trigger Model are set to one The Delay of the Trigger Model is set to zero e All math calculations are disabled Buffer operation is disabled e Autozero is enabled The source output will turn on WARNING When CONFigure is sent the output will turn on Beware of hazard ous voltage that may be present on the output terminals NOTE This command is automatically asserted when the MEASure command is sent Acquiring readings FETCh Description This query command requests the latest post processed readings stored in the sample buffer see Appendix C Data Flow After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk the readings are sent to the computer This command does not affect the instrument setup This command does not trigger source measure operations it simply requests the last available readings Note that this command can repeat edly return the same readings Until there are new readings this com mand continues to return the old readin
297. ce limit for details on real and range compliance 7 Turn output off When finished turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator light will turn off 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 7 Ohms sensing Ohms measurements can be made using either 2 wire or 4 wire sensing See Section 2 for information on connections and sensing methods Note that resistance measurement accuracy specifications are based on using 4 wire sensing The 2 wire sensing method has the advantage of requiring only two test leads However as shown in Figure 4 2 test lead resistance can seriously affect the accuracy of 2 wire resis tance measurements particularly with lower resistance values The 4 wire sensing method shown in Figure 4 3 minimizes or eliminates the effects of lead resistance by measuring the voltage across the resistor under test with a second set of test leads Because of the high input impedance of the SourceMeter voltmeter the current through the sense leads is negligible and the measured voltage is essentially the same as the voltage across the resis tor under test Figure 4 2 2 wire resistance sensing SourceMeter Be 8 Ne Input Output Test Current I HI Rica 3 Resistance Resistances Under Test Vm Rieap I Current sourced by SourceMeter Vu Voltage measured by SourceMeter Vk Voltage across resistor V Measured resistance Re 2 x Reap I
298. ceMeter out of idle TRG Trigger one measurement TST self test query Run self test and read result Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the Output Queue When the SourceMeter is addressed to talk the coded result is sent from the Output Queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common Commands 16 7 WAI wait to continue Wait until previous commands are completed Effectively the WAI command is a No Op no operation for the SourceMeter and thus does not need to be used Two types of device commands exist Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to finish before the next command is executed Overlapped commands A command that allows the execution of subsequent commands while device operations of the Overlapped command are still in progress The WAI command is used to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous Overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for Sequential commands 16 8 Common Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Command summary Summarizes those commands used to configure and acquire readings Configuring measurement function
299. cecsse cess ioii eteoesasedeessscassvevesteneosesantes 14 4 GPIB COMME CHONG siasii ster sachets ercezeptestaave thoes 14 4 Primary addreS sccvsiscssccescvsssiscedssiscassseescassscesssasssivsiseaszecaics 14 6 General bus commands cesceesceceneeeseeeeeeceeeeceaeeeseeseeeeeeeeeee 14 7 REN remote enable cccccsssccceesssseceecceesssneeeeeesseeees 14 7 IFC interface Clear accics sssedcdissssesd cescassesssvssavssceeucesasvovsess 14 7 LLO local lockout cce cc ececcsssececeessssceeeeeesssseeeceessseees 14 8 GIL g to local nsns anasan eR 14 8 DCL device clear cccceccccccssssscccceessssececcessseneeeecessseees 14 8 SDC selective device clear cccccsssscccccessssseceeeesssseeeees 14 8 GET group execute trigger oe ceeeesecsneeeseeeseeeteeeeeeeees 14 8 SPE SPD serial polling eee eeceeseseteeeneeeeaeeeseeesaes 14 9 Front panel GPIB operation eee ee eeeeseeseceseeeeenseeseeeeeeaes 14 9 Error and status messages ceeceeeceeseceseeeeseeeseeeeteeeneeeees 14 9 GPIB status indicators cceeeeseeseeeeneeeseeeeeeeeseeeeteeeneeeees 14 9 REM annenin AM BA Ree REE RM R Ris 14 9 TALE en errr rer a N O 14 10 LSTN rendesi inroiso an o re s 14 10 SRO e a e E e 14 10 LOCAL Key iieiaeie Ee E ES 14 10 Programming syntax eeeeeeesecesceeeeceesceeeeeceseeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeers 14 11 Command Words 00 rsaisesessesis isses iise aera reeserui disisi 14 11 Commands and command paramet
300. cifications 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay 3 x A D Conversion Firm ware Overhead Example Source Delay Ousec NPLC Setting 0 01 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50usec 0 3x 0 01 x 1 60 185usec 1 6msec 2 9msec for Source V 3 25msec for Source I Case II Auto Zero enabled and measuring two functions Figure A 2 Case II timing diagram A D A D Trigger Trigger Source Conversion Conversion ND A D Conversion Conversion Latency Delay Configuration Delay voltage signal current signal ref phase ref zero phase phase phase Source On Time gt Trigger Source Source Event On Off Trigger Latency 225usec max Source Configuration SOusec max A D Conversion NPLC Setting x 1 power line frequency 185usec Firmware Overhead 2 3msec for Source V 2 65msec for Source I Source On Time Source Configuration Source Delay 4 x A D Conversion Firm ware Overhead Example Source Delay Ousec NPLC Setting 0 06 PLC Power Line Frequency 60Hz Source On Time 50usec 0 4 x 0 06 x 1 60 185usec 2 6msec 7 1msec for Source V 7 45msec for Source I 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specifications A 9 Case III Auto Zero disabled and measuring one function Figure A 3 Case III timing diagram A D Trigger Trigger Source Source Conversion Latency Delay
301. cle on the rear panel 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 11 WARNING The power cord supplied with the SourceMeter contains a separate ground for use with grounded outlets When proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death due to electric shock 3 Turn on the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on 1 position Power up sequence On power up the SourceMeter performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momen tarily lights all segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momen tarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on error messages are listed in Appendix B NOTE For the Model 2430 there is an internal bank of capacitors that need to charge While charging the message Charging capacitor bank please wait message will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds If a problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Kei thley Instruments Inc for repair If the instrument passes the self tests the model number and the firmware revision levels are displayed For example REV A01 A02 where AOI is the main board ROM revision A02 is the display board ROM revision Also displayed is the line frequency If the wrong frequency is displayed it can be set ma
302. cleared to zero 0 1 Operation Event Enable Register 2 Event Enable Register 3 Measurement Event Enable Register NOTE The Standard Event Register is not affected by this command Error queue NEXT STATus QUEue NEXT Read Error Queue Description As error and status messages occur they are placed into the Error Queue This query command is used to read those messages See Appendix B for a list of messages NOTE The STATus QUEue NEXT query command performs the same function as the SYSTem ERRor query command See SYSTem subsystem page 18 106 CLEar STATus QUEue CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear the Error Queue of messages ENABle lt list gt STATus QUEue ENABle lt list gt Enable messages for Error Queue Parameters lt list gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to enable for the Error Query ENABle Query list of enabled messages Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want enabled Messages not specified will be disabled and prevented from entering the queue 18 106 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual DISable lt list gt STATus QUEue DISable lt list gt Disable messages for Error Queue Parameters lt li
303. command is used to include enable one or more measurement functions in the list and the OFF command is used to remove disable one or more func tions from the list Note that each function specified in the list must be enclosed in single or double quotes and functions must be separated by commas Examples FUNCtion VOLTage CURRent Enable volts and amps functions FUNCtion OFF VOLTage CURRent Disable volts and amps functions Note that there is a stand alone command that can be used to enable or disable all three measurement functions see ALL page 18 62 If concurrent measurements see CONCurrent lt b gt page 18 60 are disabled the ON command can only turn on one function at a time NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode only one function can be enabled Trying to enable more than one function results in error 108 18 62 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual ALL SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON ALL Enable all measurement functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF ALL Disable all measurement functions Description This command is used to enable or disable all measurement functions When enabled ON ALL amps volts and ohms measurements will be performed simultaneously if concurrent measurements are enabled See CONCurrent lt b gt page 18 60 If concurrent measurements are dis abled only the ohms function will be enabled The OFF ALL command disable
304. commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab stat pres In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root command stat and moves down the command levels until the command is executed Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example showing two commands in one program message stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root command stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command When the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be executed without having to retype the entire command path Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt enab 14 16 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third command level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be typed in without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not included in the pro gram message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root le
305. control which set of terminals is con nected to the SourceMeter Pressing this key toggles the SourceMeter connections between the front and rear terminals When the REAR annunciator is on the rear terminals are connected to the SourceMeter When REAR is off the front terminals are selected NOTE When the FRONT REAR TERMINALS key is pressed the OUTPUT will turn OFF 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 3 Remote command terminals selection Use the ROUTe TERMinals Section 18 command to select the front or rear panel termi nals via remote For example send the following command to select the rear terminals ROUT TERM REAR Conversely send the following command to choose the front terminals ROUT TERM FRON Test fixture interlock A test fixture interlock switch can be used with the SourceMeter to help protect the DUT The SourceMeter output will turn off when the lid of the test fixture is opened However you must ALWAYS assume that power is present until you verify that the SourceMeter output is off See Section 13 for details Connections to DUT The maximum allowable voltage differentials between terminals are labeled on the SourceMeter Figure 2 1 shows these voltage differentials for the various SourceMeter models WARNING _ To prevent electric shock and or damage to the SourceMeter DO NOT exceed the maximum allowable voltage differentials shown in Figure 2 1 The front and rear terminals of th
306. ct the power on default setup BENCH Powers on to BENCH defaults See Table 1 4 GPIB Powers on to GPIB defaults See Table 1 4 USER SETUP NUMBER Powers on to user setup 0 to4 RESET Returns unit to BENCH or GPIB defaults See Table 1 4 SOURCE MEMORY Control memory sweep source setup configurations SAVE Save present setup configuration to memory location 1 to 100 RESTORE Return to configuration saved in memory location 1 to 100 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 1 5 continued Getting Started 1 21 Main menu Menu item Description Parameters COMMUNICATION Select and configure remote interface GPIB Select GPIB IEEE 488 Bus set primary address and 0 to 30 GPIB protocol Default 24 RS 232 Select the RS 232 interface set parameters BAUD Select baud rate 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 BITS Select number of data bits 7 or8 PARITY Select parity NONE ODD EVEN TERMINATOR Select terminator CR CR LF LF or LF CR FLOW CTRL Select flow control NONE or XON XOFF CAL Calibrate SourceMeter See Service Manual UNLOCK Unlock calibration EXECUTE Execute calibration steps VIEW DATES Display cal dates and count SAVE Save calibration constants LOCK Lock calibration CHANGE PASSWORD Change calibration password TEST Perform tests on SourceMeter DISPLAY TESTS Test front panel keys and display digits KEYS Test front panel keys DISPLAY PATTERNS Test display pixels and
307. curs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link later in this section for more information With TLink selected you can loop around the Arm Event Detector by setting the event detector bypass to ONCE ISTEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 TSTEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed high This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 TJSTEST Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed either high or low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit test ing See Section 12 NOTE STEST can be used only at the beginning of a sweep and should not be used to trigger each point in a sweep 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 5 Trigger layer The Trigger Layer uses three event detectors one for each action Source Delay and Measure Each of these event detectors can be turned on or off individually Event Detector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 1 there is a bypass for the Source Event Detector This bypass is in effect only if Trigger Link is the selected Trigger In Source With this event detector bypass set to ONCE operation will proceed around the Source Event Detector
308. d Bit 5 Math Set to 1 if math expression calc1 is enabled Bit 6 Null Set to 1 if Null is enabled Bit 7 Limits Set to 1 if a limit test calc2 is enabled Bits 8 and 9 Limit Results Provides limit test results see grading and sorting modes below Bit 10 Auto ohms Set to 1 if auto ohms enabled Bit 11 V Meas Set to 1 if V Measure is enabled Bit 12 I Meas Set to 1 if I Measure is enabled Bit 13 Q Meas Set to 1 if Q Measure is enabled Bit 14 V Sour Set to 1 if V Source used Bit 15 I Sour Set to 1 if I Source used Bit 16 Range Compliance Set to 1 if in range compliance Bit 17 Offset Compensation Set to 1 if Offset Compensated Ohms is enabled Bit 18 Contact check failure see Appendix F Bits 19 20 and 21 Limit Results Provides limit test results see grading and sorting modes below Bit 22 Remote Sense Set to 1 if 4 wire remote sense selected Bit 23 Pulse Mode Set to 1 if in the Pulse Mode Bits 8 9 and 19 21 flag pass fail conditions for the various limits tests The bit values for the grading and sorting modes are covered below See CALC2 CLIM MODE and associated commands in Calculate sub systems page 18 24 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sorting mode status bit values SCPI Command Reference 18 53 Meas Event Result Bit 21 20 19 9 8 St
309. d back on If a new source value is programmed the SourceMeter uses the new source value when the output is turned back on The source value cannot be changed while the output is on If a global setup or source memory location is saved the previously programmed source value will always be stored 5 When finished turn the output off and disable offset compensated ohms 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 11 Ohms source readback NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode ohms source readback cannot be enabled With ohms source readback enabled the instrument measures the actual source value instead of the programmed value used for ohms measurements and then uses that mea sured value for reading calculations Normally ohms source readback should be left enabled for optimum ohms measurement accuracy because SourceMeter measurement accuracy is better than source programming accuracy See specifications in Appendix A However disabling source readback will allow you to make valid ohms measurements with the source in compliance See Section 6 Source I measure I and source V measure V for more details Ohms source readback selection Use the following procedure to enable or disable ohms source readback 1 Press CONFIG then Q 2 Select SRC RDBK then press ENTER 3 Select DISABLE or ENABLE as desired then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display NOTE Readings in the compliance field will
310. d by contact check The front panel display shows OPEN LEAD e User defined bits can be set on the Digital I O port as controlled from the front panel or with CALCulate2 LIMit4 commands See Front panel contact check operation page F 11 and Remote contact check operation page F 14 e Bit 18 of the FORMat ELEMents STATus command response is set if there is an open lead and can be read over the GPIB See FORMat subsystem page 18 49 e Bit 10 of the Measurement Condition Register can be read with the STAT MEAS COND query over the GPIB or RS 232 port See Measurement Event Register page 15 13 and Figure 15 6 Auto and manual ohms Contact check can be used with either the auto or manual ohms modes In auto ohms the SourceMeter automatically sets the test current based on the selected range In manual ohms you must manually set the test current See Auto ohms measurements page 4 4 and Manual ohms measurements page 4 5 for more information F 6 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Trigger model operation In relation to the standard trigger models Figure 11 1 and Figure 11 8 the contact check test is performed just before the SOURCE Action block in the trigger layer NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the trigger models are shown in Figure 11 10 and Figure 11 11 As with other trigger model operations there is an event detector for contact check W
311. d compliance example As an example assume the following SourceMeter Vopco 10V Icmp LOMA DUT resistance 10 With a source voltage of 10V and a DUT resistance of 1Q the current through the DUT should be 10V 1Q 10A However because the compliance is set to 10mA the current will not exceed that value and the voltage across the resistance is limited to 10mV In effect the 10V voltage source is transformed into a 10mA current source with a 1OmV compliance value Active load compliance example A different situation exists when an active load is connected to the SourceMeter For example assume that you wish to discharge a 6V battery to 5V at a 100mA discharge rate With this scenario you would set the voltage source to 5V and the current compliance to 100mA Under these circumstances the source polarity is reversed and the SourceMeter sinks instead of sourcing current Battery discharging will continue until the battery volt age is reduced to the 5V source value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 5 NOTE When in compliance the source output may exceed the programmed value in order to maintain the compliance limit Determining compliance limit The relationships to determine which compliance is in effect are summarized as follows e Compliance Setting lt Measurement Range Real Compliance e Measurement Range lt Compliance Setting Range Compliance The compliance that is in effect can
312. d compliance range using the RANGE A and W keys To increment or decrement the compliance value use the EDIT lt and gt keys to place the cursor over the digit to be changed then press the SOURCE A or W key to increment or decrement the compliance value 5 To change the compliance value directly simply enter the value using the numeric keys while the cursor is flashing in the compliance display field Compliance range synchronization Enabling this feature will force the measurement range to follow the compliance range set ting when autoranging is off When the compliance value is set the measurement range will be on the same range as the compliance setting You can enable range synchronization by pressing CONFIG then MEAS V for voltage or MEAS I for current Select CMPL RANGE SYNC then ON to enable or OFF to dis able range synchronization Remote compliance limit Table 3 3 summarizes basic commands to program the compliance limit See Section 18 Set compliance parameters for more details on these commands To program the com pliance simply send the command using the desired parameter For example the follow ing command sets the current compliance to 50mA SENS CURR PROT 50E 3 Similarly the following command sets the voltage compliance to 4V SENS VOLT PROT 4 Table 3 3 Compliance commands Command Description SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt Set current compliance n compliance SENSe VOL
313. d math expression Description This action command will remove delete all user defined math expres sions from the catalog Built in math expressions are not affected Assign unit suffix UNITs lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH UNITs lt name gt Specify units for user defined calculation Parameters lt name gt Three ASCII characters enclosed in single or double quotes Query UNITs Query units for user defined calculation Description This command is used to specify the units suffix name for a user defined math calculation Use three ASCII characters for the units suffix name If using fewer than three characters add spaces to the right of the units name in the string For example if the units name is Z send it as fol lows calc math unit Z The units name can also be enclosed in single quotes as follows calc math unit Z 18 30 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Define math expression EXPRession lt form gt or DEFine lt form gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession lt form gt Define math formula CALCulate 1 MATH EXPRession DEFine lt form gt Define math formula Parameters lt form gt mathematical formula using instrument readings numbers and standard math operator symbols See Description for details Query MATH Query user defined math expression Description Use either of these two commands to define a math formula using mea sure and source r
314. d reading depends on the DIGITS setting This set ting is global which means the digits setting selects display resolution for all measure ment functions The DIGITS setting has no effect on the remote reading format The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed Those parameters are controlled by the SPEED setting Setting display resolution There are two ways to set display resolution e DIGITS Press the DIGITS key until the desired number of digits is displayed e CONFIG DIGITS Press CONFIG and then DIGITS to display the digits menu Place the cursor on the desired number of digits 3 5 4 5 5 5 or 6 5 and press ENTER NOTE The concurrent measurement available on the secondary display by using the TOGGLE key is always 5 digits Changing SPEED changes DIGITS but changing DIGITS does not change SPEED Remote range and digits programming Table 7 1 summarizes the commands necessary to control range and digits See Section 18 for more details on these commands 7 6 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range and digits commands Table 7 1 Range and digits commands Command Description SENSe CURRent RANGe lt n gt Select manual amps range n range SENSe CURRent RANGe AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto amps range state ON or OFF SENSe VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Select manual volts measure range n range SENSe VOLTage RANGe AUTO lt s
315. dard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 padded carrying case A carrying case for a SourceMeter Includes han dles and a shoulder strap Product overview The SourceMeter combines a precise low noise highly stable DC power supply with a low noise highly repeatable high impedance multimeter It has 0 012 basic accuracy with 5 2 digit resolution At 51 2 digits the SourceMeter delivers 520 readings second over the IEEE 488 bus At 4 digits it can read up to 2000 readings second into its inter nal buffer The unit has broad source and measurement ranges Model 2400 e Source voltage from SuV to 210V measure voltage from IV to 211V Source current from 50pA to 1 05A measure current from 10pA to 1 055A e Measure resistance from 100pQ lt 100u Q in manual ohms to 211MQ e Maximum source power is 22W Model 2410 e Source voltage from SuV to 1100V measure voltage from 1pV to 1100V e Source current from 50pA to 1 05A measure current from 10pA to 1 055A e Measure resistance from 100pQ lt 100u Q in manual ohms to 211MQ e Maximum source power is 22W 1 6 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 2420 Source voltage from 5 V to 63V measure voltage from IV to 63 3V Source current from 500pA to 3 15A measure current from 100pA to 3 165A Measure resistance from 10uQ lt 10uQ in manual ohms to 21 1MQ Maximum source power is 66W Models 2425 and 2430 Source DC or puls
316. de with the source set to zero With the source set to zero the source level is Vgmr Thus the resistance contributed by the presence of Vengr is eliminated This two point measurement method is mathematically expressed as Offset Compensated Q AV AI where AV V2 V1 and AI I2 I1 V1 is the voltage measurement with the source set to a specific level V2 is the voltage measurement with the source set to zero I1 is the current measurement with the source set to a specific level I2 is the current measurement with the source set to zero For auto ohms the SourceMeter will select the appropriate current source level and voltage measurement range For manual ohms first select the appropriate source V or I value while the output is off When the source is turned on the output will cycle between the programmed value and zero OA or OV to derive the offset compensated ohms measurement NOTE Manual offset compensated ohms is also available as a math FCTN operation This math function allows you to specify both source values For details see Section 8 Offset compensated ohms Enabling disabling offset compensated ohms Offset compensated ohms is enabled or disabled from the OFFSET COMPENSATION option of the CONFIG OHMS menu as follows Press CONFIG and then Q to display the ohms configuration menu 2 Place the cursor on OFFSET COMPENSATION and press ENTER 3 Place the cursor over ON to enable compensation or
317. del See Figure 11 8 and Figure 11 9 With SOURce specified an output trigger occurs after the source is set With DELay specified an output trigger occurs after the delay period With MEASure specified an out put trigger occurs after the measurement NOTE When disabling triggers the NONE parameter must be sent alone i e trig outp none If it is listed with any of the other event parameters NONE will be ignored Specifications SourceMeter Line Specifications 2400 2400 C 2410 2410 C 2420 2420 C 2425 2425 C 2430 2430 C 2440 2440 C SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING ACCURACY Local or Remote Sense ACCURACY 1 Year NOISE PROGRAMMING 23 C 5 C peak peak MODEL RANGE RESOLUTION rdg volts 0 1Hz 10Hz ALL 200 000 mV 5 pV 0 02 600 pV 5 pV lopV 2430 2440 2 00000 V 50 pV 0 02 600 pV 50 pV 2400 Only 20 0000 V 500 uV 0 02 2 4mV 500 pV 200 000 V 5mV 0 02 24 mV 5mV 2410 Only 20 0000 V 500 pV 0 02 2 4mV 500 pV 1000 00 V 50 mV 0 02 100 mV 20mV 2420 Only 20 0000 V 500 pV 0 02 2 4mV 500 pV 60 0000 V 1 5 mV 0 02 7 2 mV 1 5mV 2425 and 20 0000 V 500 pV 0 02 2 4mV 500 pV 2430 Only 100 0000 V 2 5 mV 0 02 12mV 2 5mV 2440 Only 10 0000 V 500 uV 0 02 1 2mV 250 pV 40 0000 V 5mV 0 02 4 8 mV 1mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT 0 18 C amp 28 50 C 0 15 x accuracy specification C MAX OUTPUT POWER 22W 66W for Model 2420 110W for Model 2425 and 2430 55W for Mod
318. delay is a delay that occurs between the source and measure operations The delay period can be manually set or auto delay can be used With auto delay the delay is automatically set according to function and range See Section 3 Operation considerations and Source delay for details For the Pulse Mode source delay is not used For front panel operation the menu items to set source DELAY and select AUTO DELAY are replaced by menu items to set pulse DELAY and PULSE WIDTH when the Pulse Mode is selected Therefore you cannot set source delay while in the Pulse Mode For remote operation you can set the source delay however the setting will be ignored in the Pulse Mode The ignored commands for source delay include SOURce DELay lt n gt and SOURce DELay AUTO lt b gt Trigger delay In the DC Mode the trigger delay is a user set delay that occurs between the trigger and pulse operations In the Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used You can set the trigger delay while in the Pulse Mode but it will not be used until you go back into the DC Mode See Section 11 for details on triggering For remote operation the delay set by TRIGger DELay lt n gt is ignored in the Pulse Mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 19 Input triggers In the DC Mode you can enable the source delay and or measure input event detectors See Section 11 for details on triggering In the Pulse
319. des into the same source memory list For the 2 wire sense points contact check will not be performed but it will be performed for those locations using 4 wire sense if contact check is enabled when the sweep begins 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 7 Limit test sequence When enabled the contact check limit test Limit 4 is performed before all other limit tests as shown in Figure F 4 Figure F 5 shows a flowchart for grading mode limit testing with contact check limit testing enabled while Figure F 6 shows a flowchart for sorting mode limit testing again with contact check limit testing enabled See Section 12 for com plete details on other limit tests Figure F 4 Contact check limit test sequence Limit 4 Test Pass or Fail on Contact Check Contact Check Limit 1 Test Pass or Fail on Compliance compliance Limit 2 Test Coarse Limits Limit 3 5 12 Tests Fine Limits F 8 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure F 5 Grading mode contact check limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key _ __ gt Wait for SOT pulse from handler Perform Contact Check Perform Sourc Measure action No Display FAIL Immediate Output Limit 4 Fail Pattern Output Limit 1 Fail Pattern Store Limit 1 Fail Pattern in Memory E gt Org Output Limit 2 3 5 12 Fail Pattern Store Limit 2 3 5 12 Fail Pattern in Memor
320. disabled Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily During SourceMeter operation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either status or error in nature and are listed in Appendix B Remote display programming The display can also be controlled by various SCPI DISPlay subsystem commands Table 1 3 summarizes basic commands See Section 18 DISPlay subsystem for more infor mation on using these commands See also Disabling front panel display page 1 25 Table 1 3 Basic display commands Command Description DISPplay ENABle lt state gt Enable disable display state ON or OFF DISPlay CNDisplay Return to source measure display DISPlay DIGits lt n gt Set display resolution n 4 to 7 1 16 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel tests Use the TEST FRONT PANEL TESTS selection of the main MENU to test various aspects of the front panel Test selections include KEYS Front panel keys are tested Pressing a key displays a message that iden tifies that key Pressing EXIT twice cancels this test DISPLAY PATTERNS Use this selection to turn on all display pixels and annunciators Subsequent key presses cycle through tests that turn off annunciators and corner pixels of each digit turn on the rows of the top left display digit and turn on all annunciators and pixels o
321. ditional sheets as necessary Show a block diagram of your measurement including all instruments connected whether power is turned on or not Also describe signal source Where is the measurement being performed factory controlled laboratory out of doors etc What power line voltage is used Ambient temperature F Relative humidity Other Any additional information If special modifications have been made by the user please describe Be sure to include your name and phone number on this service form Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies KENT HLEY Keithley Instruments Inc Sales Offices BELGIUM CHINA FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREAT BRITAIN INDIA ITALY JAPAN KOREA NETHERLANDS SWEDEN SWITZERLAND TAIWAN 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 www keithley com Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 6202 2886 Fax 8610 6202 2892 Tietajintie 2 e 02130 Espoo e Phone 09 54 75 08 10 Fax 09 25 10 51 00 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26
322. dth From the above equation high current and or long output on time results in high energy consumption and therefore longer charge time for the capacitors On all but the 10A range source or measure charge energy consumption is low enough to allow the capacitors to recharge before the next pulse is due This fast recharge process allows the configured pulse period to be consistent jitter free On the 10A range source or measure the configured pulse period will be consistent as long as the pulse duty cycle is 8 or less Above 8 the capacitors will not be able to recharge sufficiently before the next pulse is due As a result the pulse period becomes longer due to additional charge time between pulses and more inconsistent jitter To achieve a consistent pulse period on the 10A range set a pulse off time that will pro vide a duty cycle that does not exceed 8 For example if the pulse width is 2msec the required off time is calculated as follows Pulse Off time Pulse Width Duty Cycle Pulse Width 2msec 8 2msec 25msec 2msec 23msec If a consistent pulse period is not required for your test the 10A range allows you to out put fast high energy gt 8 duty cycle pulses With the pulse delay set to Osec each subse quent pulse will output as soon as the capacitors become sufficiently charged 5 10 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode configur
323. e These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 and Power equa tions to avoid shutdown page 6 7 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output operation Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 1A range are derated as follows 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V 1A 20V to 0 6A 20V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 4 Figure 6 4 Model 2400 operating boundaries T mp lt 30 C l HI Source 100 Duty aj lt 60 Duty Cycle 6 16 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 2410 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2410 are shown in Figure 6 5 In this drawing the 1A 20V and 20mA 1kV magnitudes are nominal values The actual maxi mum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 1 05A 21V and 21mA 1 1kV Also note that the boundaries are not drawn to scale These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE
324. e Pulse Mode configuration page 5 10 NOTE The source field on the display will read Vpls or Ipls to indicate that the Pulse Mode is selected Step 2 Set pulse measurement speed Available speed settings 0 004 to 0 100 PLC are displayed by pressing SPEED Select the desired speed and press ENTER Step 3 Set pulse count Arm count and trigger count determine how many pulses will be sourced For finite count values the pulse count is the product of the arm count and trigger count With the arm count set to infinite the Model 2430 will continuously output pulses Arm and trigger counts are set from the trigger configuration menu which is displayed by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG Arm count is set from the ARM LAYER menu item and trigger count is set from the TRIG LAYER menu item See Front panel Pulse Mode con figuration and Set pulse count page 5 10 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 13 Step 4 Select source Press SOURCE V to source voltage pulses or press SOURCE I to source current pulses The presently programmed pulse value Vpls or Ipls and compliance level Cmpl are displayed Step 5 Set pulse level and compliance limit The pulse level is the voltage or current setting of the selected source A compliance is set to protect the DUT from damaging currents or voltages When using the V Source a cur rent compliance is set When using t
325. e Description This command is used to select the ohms measurement mode With MANual ohms selected the user must configure the source and measure aspects of the operation When the ohms function is selected the ohms reading is simply the result of the V I calculation Range changes cannot be made in manual ohms With AUTO ohms selected the SourceMeter will be configured to Source I Measure V when the ohms function is selected The current source value and voltage measurement range used depends on the ohms measurement range that is selected See Section 4 Ohms Measurements for details on manual and auto ohms RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt SENSe 1 RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Control offset compensated ohms Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable offset compensation 0 or OFF Disable offset compensation Query OCOMpensated Query state of offset compensation Description This command is used to enable or disable offset compensated ohms When using the auto ohms measurement mode the current source level is automatically set When using the manual ohms measurement mode you must set the source V or I output level See Section 4 Offset compensated ohms for details on making off set compensated ohms measurements NOTE Offset compensated ohms will disable when the MEASure command for the resistance function or the CONFigure RESistance command is sent NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compens
326. e PULSe Select Pulse Mode Query SHAPe Query selected output mode Description This command is used to select the output mode for the Model 2430 The DC parameter selects the DC Mode of operation and PULSe selects the Pulse Mode 18 74 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual MODE lt name gt SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE lt name gt Select source mode Parameters lt name gt VOLTage Select voltage mode CURRent Select current mode MEMory Select memory mode Query MODE Query selected source Description This command is used to select the source mode With VOLTage selected the V Source will be used and with CURRent selected the I Source will be used With MEMory selected a memory sweep can be performed Operating setups up to 100 saved in memory can be sequentially recalled This allows multiple source measure functions to be used in a sweep Select sourcing mode MODE lt name gt SOURce 1 CURRent MODE lt name gt Select DC sourcing mode for I Source SOURce 1 VOLTage MODE lt name gt Select DC sourcing mode for V Source Parameters lt name gt FIXed Select fixed sourcing mode LIST Select list sourcing mode SWEep Select sweep sourcing mode Query MODE Query DC sourcing mode Description This command is used to select the DC sourcing mode for the specified source The three modes are explained as follows FIXed In this DC sourcing mode the specified source will output a fixed level Us
327. e CONFIGURE SCAN menu then press ENTER Select CHANNEL SPACING from the CHANNEL CONTROL menu then press ENTER Select TRIGLINK then press ENTER Select ASYNCHRO NOUS then press ENTER Press ENTER ENTER then EXIT EXIT EXIT to leave the CONFIGURE SCAN menu Operation The basic operating procedure for this example is as follows 1 To store the readings in the SourceMeter buffer press STORE and set the buffer size for 10 When ENTER is pressed the asterisk annunciator will turn on to indicate the buffer is enabled See Section 9 Data Store for details Turn the SourceMeter OUTPUT ON The SourceMeter waits for an external trig ger from the switching mainframe Press STEP on the Model 7001 7002 to take it out of idle and start the scan The scanner s output pulse triggers the SourceMeter to take a reading and store it The SourceMeter then sends a trigger pulse to the switching mainframe to close the next channel This process continues until all 10 channels are scanned measured and stored Details of this testing process are explained in the following paragraphs and are referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 11 11 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 27 Figure 11 11 Operation model for triggering example 7001o0r 7002 Press STEP to start scan SourceMeter Wait for gt Trigger Link S Wait for Trigger Trigger Link Trigger by Make Measurement
328. e Contact check event detection enabled e Contact check timeout 2 seconds e Measurement function ohms e Sensing remote Table F 4 Contact check programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SYST CCH ON Enable contact check SYST CCH RES 2 Set 2 contact resistance SYST RSEN ON Enable 4 wire remote sense gt CALC2 LIM4 STAT ON CALC2 LIM4 SOUR2 15 SENS FUNC RES TRIG SEQ2 SOUR CCH TRIG SEQ2 TOUT 2 OUTP ON INIT gt CALC2 LIM4 FAIL Enable contact check pass fail Set Digital I O bits all HI on failure Select ohms function Enable contact check event detection Set 2 second contact check timeout Turn on output Trigger unit Query contact check pass fail 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 17 Contact check command reference Configure and control contact check CCHeck lt b gt SYSTem CCHeck lt b gt Enable or disable contact check Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable contact check 1 or ON Enable contact check Query CCHeck Query state of contact check Description This command is used to enable or disable contact check When using contact check remote sensing must be enabled SYST RSEN ON RESistance lt NRf gt SYSTem CCHeck RESistance lt NRf gt Set contact check threshold resistance Parameters lt NRf gt 0 60 2Q 15Q or 50Q threshold resistance 0 to2 20 gt 2 to 15 15Q gt 15 to 60 50Q Query RESis
329. e GENERAL MENU See Main menu in this section NOTE Ifthe Model 2420 2425 2430 or 2440 overheats the output will trip and the cooling fan will run at high speed regardless of the speed option setting See Section 6 Overheating protection for details Display Display format The SourceMeter display is used primarily to program source and compliance values and display measured readings Annunciators which are located along the top of the reading message display indicate various states of operation as covered previously in Front panel summary On power up the top primary display is used for measurements when the output is on with the output off OFF is displayed The bottom left display is used for the pro grammed source value Vsrc or Isrc and the bottom right display is used for the pro grammed compliance Cmpl limit Reading information can be displayed using either engineering units or scientific notation in either fixed or floating point format Use the GENERAL NUMBERS selection of the main MENU to select the display format as discussed in Menus later in this section Engineering units example 1 23456uA Scientific notation example 1 23456e 6 NOTE The display may be disabled for faster operation See Disabling front panel display page 1 25 EDIT key The SourceMeter must be in the edit mode to set source and compliance values The edit mode is selected by pressing the E
330. e GPIB bus controller addresses are usually 0 or 21 The primary address can be checked and or changed from the COMMUNICATIONS option of the Main Menu Section 1 Main menu 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 7 General bus commands General commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same general mean ing regardless of the instrument Table 14 1 lists the general bus commands Table 14 1 General bus commands Command Effect on SourceMeter REN Goes into remote when next addressed to listen IFC Goes into talker and listener idle states LLO LOCAL key locked out GTL Cancel remote restore SourceMeter front panel operation DCL Returns all devices to known conditions SDC Returns SourceMeter to known conditions GET Initiates a trigger SPE SPD Serial polls the SourceMeter REN remote enable The remote enable command is sent to the SourceMeter by the controller to set up the instrument for remote operation Generally the instrument should be placed in the remote mode before you attempt to program it over the bus Setting REN true does not place the instrument in the remote state You must address the instrument to listen after setting REN true before it goes into remote The SourceMeter must be in remote in order to use the following commands to trigger and acquire readings e INITiate and then FETCh e READ e MEASure IFC interface clear The I
331. e SourceMeters are rated for con nection to circuits rated Installation Category I only Do not connect the SourceMeter terminals to CAT II CAT III or CAT IV circuits Connections of the SourceMeter Input Output terminals to circuits higher than CAT I can cause damage to the equipment or expose the operator to hazardous voltages Common mode current limits As shown in Figure 2 1 the maximum common mode voltage is the voltage between INPUT OUTPUT LO and chassis ground In order to pre vent electric shock and or damage to the SourceMeter current from an external common mode voltage source must be limited Current limiting can be accomplished with the use of a protective impedance or a fuse 2 4 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING _ To prevent electric shock and or damage to the SourceMeter common mode voltage must be externally limited as follows Models 2400 and 2410 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 1 05A maximum Models 2420 and 2425 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 3 15A maximum Model 2430 Limit common mode voltage to 250VDC 10 5A pulse Model 2440 Limit common mode voltage to 40VDC 5 25A maximum Figure 2 1 Terminal voltage differentials rear panel WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT 250V i PEAK PEAK x PEAK PEAK GUARD SENSE a o 4 WIRE INPUT 250V CATI SENSE OUTPUT zD Model 2400 WARNING no INTERNAL OPERAT a Lo 4 WIRE INPUT 250v SENSE
332. e Standard Event Register will set after all pending command operations are complete When OPC is sent an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue after all pending command operations are complete Typically either one of these commands is sent after the INITiate command The INITiate command is used to take the instrument out of idle in order to perform measurements While operating within the trigger model layers all sent commands except DCL SDC IFC SYSTem PRESet RST RCL TRG GET and ABORt will not execute After all programmed operations are completed the instrument returns to the idle state at which time all pending commands including OPC and or OPC are executed After the last pending command is executed the OPC bit and or an ASCII 1 is placed in the Output Queue 16 4 Common Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual OPC programming example The command sequence in Table 16 2 will perform 10 measurements After the measure ments are completed in approximately 10 seconds an ASCII 1 will be placed in the Output Queue and displayed on the computer CRT Note that additional codes must be added to query the instrument for the presence of the ASCII 1 in the Output Queue Table 16 2 OPC programming example Command Description RST Return SourceMeter to GPIB defaults idle TRIG DEL 1 Set trigger delay for 1 second ARM COUN 10 Program for 5 measurements and stop OUTP ON T
333. e drawer does not pull all the way out of the power module 3 Snap the fuse out of the drawer and replace it with the same type Table 1 2 4 Push the fuse drawer back into the power module Table 1 2 Power line fuse SourceMeter Fuse description Keithley part number 2400 and 2410 250V 2 5A 5 x 20mm FU 72 2420 2425 2430 250V 3 15A 5 x 20mm FU 106 3 15 and 2440 Cooling fan The Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 use a cooling fan to help keep them from overheating The Model 2400 does not have a cooling fan In either case fan or no fan proper ventilation must be maintained to prevent overheating Refer to the WARNING CAUTION located at the beginning of Section 3 for details on maintaining proper ventilation Model 2410 Uses a constant speed fan that runs continuously while the power is on Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Uses a 3 speed fan With the OUTPUT ON the fan speed setting is determined by the present current range source or measure 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 range Fan speed 10uA 100uA lmA Low 50 10mA 100mA Medium 75 1A 3A 3A 10A 2430 High 100 1A 5A 2440 High 100 1 14 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual When the OUTPUT is turned OFF the fan will either run at the low speed or stay at the speed it was at when the output was on current range dependent This speed option is set from the FAN selection of th
334. e function function VOLTage or CURRent Disable pulse measurements Set pulse measurement speed n 0 004 to 0 100 Set pulse measurement speed n 0 004 to 0 100 Set current compliance n compliance Set voltage compliance n compliance Set current measure range n range Set voltage measure range n range Set arm count n 1 to 2500 or INFinite Set trigger count n 1 to 2500 Start trigger pulse output process and acquire pulse readings Start pulse output process pulse readings not acquired Stop pulse output process Ignored settings and invalid commands When in the Pulse Mode there are SCPI commands whose settings are ignored or are invalid causing error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode The affected commands are covered in Pulse measure considerations page 5 16 5 16 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse measure programming example Table 5 2 summarizes the command sequence to output and measure pulses Note that the steps correspond to those listed in the Front panel pulse measure procedure page 5 12 Table 5 2 Basic pulse programming example Step Action Commands Comments RST SOUR FUNC SHAP PULS Restore GPIB defaults 1 Select Pulse Mode and set pulse Select Pulse Mode width and pulse delay Set pulse measurement speed SOUR PULS WIDT 0 002 SOUR PULS DEL 0 003 SENS VOLT NPL
335. e output on off times that can be configured the pulse duty cycle can range from lt 1 to 83 5 Fast pulse output The fastest pulses are achieved by configuring the SourceMeter for the shortest pulse width and shortest output off time This is accomplished by setting the measurement speed to 0 004 PLC setting the pulse delay to Osec and making sure that no other opera tions i e relative math calculations store sweep are being performed The shortest pulse width for normal pulse measure operation is 150us 7Ous for signal measurement plus 80us for overhead The shortest output off time is 3 04msec 140psec for reference and zero measurements plus 2 9msec for overhead Faster pulse speed can be accomplished by disabling auto zero signal measurement only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 7 Auto zero The output off time can be reduced by disabling auto zero With auto zero disabled only the signal is measured As shown in Figure 5 3 the reference and zero measurements which normally are part of the off time are not performed Also note that the minimum overhead time that occurs during the off time is reduced to 1 4msec Therefore with pulse delay set to Osec the output off time can be as short as 1 4msec Figure 5 3 Pulse measure timing auto zero off k Delay ke 80us o Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time OV or OA Je 1 4ms PD
336. e results are communicated through the Digital I O port based on limit test data See Binning systems page 12 11 There are two types of bin ning control for the grading mode immediate and end NOTE _ Binning affects contact check tests See Appendix F for details 12 6 Limit Testing Figure 12 2 Grading mode limit testing d Wait for SOT pulse from handler m Perform Source Measure action Perform Limit 3 5 12 Tests Display PASS Immediate 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Display Immediate FAIL Output Limit 1 Fail Pattern Store Limit 1 Fail Pattern in Memory Display Immediate Output Limit 2 FAIL Fail Pattern Store Limit 2 Fail Pattern in Memory Display Binnin Immediate Output Limit 3 FAIL Control Fail Pattern Store Limit 3 5 12 Fail Pattern in Memory nd Yes Y y Output First Output Pass Fail Pattern Pattern E Press LIMIT Note Limit 4 contact option not shown See Appendix F 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 7 Immediate binning Use immediate binning when you want to stop all testing after the first failure occurs Any pending tests will be cancell
337. e sense 4 wire mode for contact check to function If in 2 wire mode contact check can be enabled but will not be performed All three source sense pairs are tested when contact check is enabled If a source sense pair is not used in a particular test it must have a shorting plug installed Other than this requirement normal connections to the DUT should be made as shown in Figure F 3 Figure F 3 Contact check DUT connections Contact Being Tested WARNING nofnfERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT RS232 om d gs CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI Note Jumper V Q GUARD and GUARD SENSE when using front panel terminals for contact check 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 5 Contact check threshold resistances There are three different threshold resistances available for contact check 2Q 15Q and 50Q The factory default is 50Q These threshold values were chosen to ensure that reli able contact failures would be detected Table F 1 summarizes recommended threshold values based on the selected range A contact check pass condition occurs when the DUT resistance is less than the selected threshold resistance value Table F 1 Recommended contact resistance threshold values Range Threshold 20 20 2Q or 15Q 200Q or higher 2Q 15Q or 50Q Contact check failure indications There are several options to handle failure conditions detecte
338. e setup position 0 4 to restore then press ENTER to complete the process 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 17 Power on configuration You can also define which of the stored setups factory default or user the instrument assumes as the power on configuration as follows 1 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 2 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 3 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select POWERON then press ENTER 4 From the SET POWER ON DEFAULT menu choose the power on configuration BENCH or GPIB see below or USER SETUP NUMBER 5 Ifyou chose to use a user setup as the power on configuration select the user setup number then press ENTER Factory default settings As summarized in Table 1 4 there are two sets of factory defaults BENCH front panel and GPIB remote You can restore either of these default conditions as follows 1 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 2 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 3 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select RESET then press ENTER 4 Select BENCH or GPIB defaults as desired then press ENTER to complete the process Table 1 4 Factory default settings BENCH or GPIB Setting default A D Controls Auto zero On Line frequency No effect Beeper On Data Store No effect Digital output HI HI HI HI Digits 51 2 Fan 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Output on FCTN Power off F
339. e status structure Status byte and service request SRQ Explains how to program the Status Byte to generate service requests SRQs Shows how to use the serial poll sequence to detect SRQs Status register sets Provides bit identification and command information for the four status register sets Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Mea surement Event Status and Questionable Event Status Queues Provides details and command information on the Output Queue and Error Queue 15 2 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Overview The SourceMeter provides a series of status registers and queues allowing the operator to monitor and manipulate the various instrument events The status structure is shown in Figure 15 1 The heart of the status structure is the Status Byte Register This register can be read by the user s test program to determine if a service request SRQ has occurred and what event caused it Status byte and SRQ The Status Byte Register receives the summary bits of four status register sets and two queues The register sets and queues monitor the various instrument events When an enabled event occurs it sets a summary bit in the Status Byte Register When a summary bit of the Status Byte is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the RQS MSS bit will set to indicate that an SRQ has occurred Status register sets A typical status register set
340. e the RANGe and AMPLitude commands to specify the fixed source level See Select range page 18 75 and Set amplitude for fixed source page 18 77 LIST In this mode the source will output levels that are specified in a list See Configure list for commands to define and control the exe cution of the list SWEep In this mode the source will perform a voltage current or memory sweep See Configure voltage and current sweeps page 18 84 and Configure memory sweep page 18 93 for com mands to define the sweep NOTE The sourcing mode will default to FIXed whenever the SourceMeter goes to the local state 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Select range RANGe lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent RANGe lt n gt SOURce 1 VOLTage RANGe lt n gt Parameters 2400 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 2410 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 2420 lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN SCPI Command Reference 18 75 Select range for I Source Select range for V Source Specify I Source level amps Specify V Source level volts 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source 1pA range I Source 200mvV range V Source 1A range I Source 200V range V Source Select next higher range Select next lower range Specify I Source level amps Specify V Source lev
341. e the instrument is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions In general operation is held up at an event detector until the programmed event occurs Note however that if an event detector has a bypass DIRection operation can be pro grammed to loop around the event detector Arm layer Event Detector Bypass As shown in Figure 11 3 there is a bypass ARM DIRection for the Arm Event Detector This bypass can only be used if TLINk NSTest PSTest or BSTest is the selected Arm In Event The bypass serves to jump start operation With the bypass set to SOURCce operation will loop around the Arm Event Detector when an INITiate command is sent assuming the output is turned ON The programmable arm in events for the Arm Layer are described as follows IMMediate Event detection occurs immediately allowing operation to continue BUS Event detection occurs when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received TIMer Event detection occurs immediately on the initial pass through the trigger model Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer interval elapses The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes into idle MANual Event detection occurs when the TRIG key is pressed The SourceMeter must be in LOCAL mode for it to respond to the TRIG key Press the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 24 over the bus to take the SourceMeter ou
342. e used for a logarithmic sweep Use the POINTs com mand to set the source measure points for a log sweep To avoid a setting conflicts error make sure the step size is greater than the start value and less than the stop value The number of source measure points in a linear sweep can be calcu lated as follows Points Stop Start Step 1l Points Span Step 1 18 90 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual An alternate way to set the source measure points in a linear sweep is to simply specify the number of source measure points in the sweep using the POINts command Note that the STEP and POINts commands are coupled Changing the step size also changes the number of source measure points Conversely changing the number of source measure points changes the step size POINts lt n gt SOURce 1 SWEep POINts lt n gt Set source measure points for sweep Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify number of source measure points MINimum 1 MAXimum 2500 DEFault 2500 Query POINts Query number of sweep points POINts DEFault Query RST default number of sweep points POINts MINimum Query lowest allowable number of sweep points POINts MAXimum Query highest allowable number of sweep points Description The POINts command specifies the total number of source measure points in a sweep For a linear sweep the source measure points are equally spaced stepped between the start level and the
343. e voltage from 5uV to 105V measure voltage from lV to 105 5V Source DC current from 500pA to 3 15A measure DC current from 100pA to 3 165A Source pulse current from 500pA to 10 5A measure pulse current from 100pA to 10 55A Model 2430 only Measure resistance from 10uQ lt 10uQ in manual ohms to 21 1MQ Maximum DC source power is 110W Maximum pulse source power is 1 1kW Model 2430 only Model 2440 Source voltage from 5uV to 42V measure voltage from IpV to 42V Source current from 500pA to 5 25A measure current from 100pA to 5 25A Measure resistance from 10uQ lt 10uQ in manual ohms to 21 1MQ Maximum source power is 66W NOTES The Models 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 are Y2K compliant Models with a C suffix have the Contact Check option See Appendix F Some additional capabilities of the SourceMeter include Concurrent measurements of all three functions over the remote interface Source measure sweep capabilities linear and logarithmic staircase sweeps source sweep list of up to 2500 points memory sweep of up to 100 instrument set ups 6 wire Q measurement with programmable I source or V source with V or I clamp 4 quadrant source and sink operation Up to 12 stages of limit testing with a built in comparator for pass fail testing Digital I O for stand alone binning operations or interface to component handler Programming language and remote interfaces The SourceMeter uses the
344. e volts function A limit value is not range sensitive A limit of 2 for volts is 2V on all measurement ranges SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance sOURce2 lt NRf gt I lt NDN gt Specify pattern LIMIT 1 failure CALCulate2 LIMitx _OWer SOURce2 lt NRf gt I lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitx UPPer SOURce2 lt NRf gt I lt NDN gt Parameters Query Description Specify pattern for grading mode lower LIMIT x failure x 2 3 5 12 Specify pattern for grading mode upper LIMIT x failure x 2 3 5 12 lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt Oto b111 3 bit Binary value Oto b1111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value SOURce2 Query source value for specified limit These commands are used to define the digital output fail patterns for the specified tests 0 to 7 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit Note that the fail patterns for Limits 2 3 5 12 apply only to the grading mode Tests are performed in the following order 1 Limit Test 4 contact option only see Appendix F 2 Limit Test 1 3 Limit Test 2 a Lower Limit 2 b Upper Limit 2 4 Limit Test x where x 3 5 12 in ascending numerical order a Lower Limit x b Upper Limit x The first failure in the test sequence determines the bit pattern for the digital output port Subsequent fa
345. e volts or amps read ing exceeds the selected measurement range of the SourceMeter e Bit B8 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two read ings in the buffer Bit B9 Buffer Full BFL Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is full Bit B10 Limit 4 Contact Check see Appendix F e Bit B11 Interlock Asserted Int Set bit indicates that the interlock line is at digital low asserted The source output can be turned on Bit B12 Over Temperature OT Set bit indicates that an over temperature condition exists The source output cannot be turned on e Bit B13 Over Voltage Protection OVP Set bit indicates that the source is being limited at the programmed limit level Bit B14 Compliance Comp Set bit indicates that the source is in compliance Bit B15 Not used Figure 15 6 Measurement event status Measurement Condition Register stat meas cond Measurement Event Register stat meas To Measurement Summary Bit MSB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 Measurement Event Enable Register stat meas enab lt NRF gt stat meas enab Comp In Compliance LP Limits Pass OVP Over Voltage protection acgentcy HL3 High Limit 3 OT Over temperature LL3 Low Limit 3 INT Interlock Asserted HL2 High Limit 2 CC Contact Check LL2 Low Limit 2 BFL Buffer Full L1 Limit1 BAV Buffer Available ROF Reading Overflow
346. ead The SourceMeter will automatically go to the most sensitive range When measuring voltage DO NOT use AUTO range see the following CAUTION CAUTION When using the SourceMeter as a voltmeter only DO NOT use AUTO range and NEVER select a measurement range that is below the applied signal level For these conditions high current will be drawn from the external source This high current could damage the external source or test circuit Connect voltage or current to be measured Connect the DUT to the SourceMeter using 2 wire connections Figure 2 2 Turn output on Press the ON OFF key to turn the output on Take reading from display When finished turn output off 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote command measure only Basic Source Measure Operation 3 21 Table 3 7 summarizes the basic command sequence for measure only The steps outlined correspond to those in the Front panel measure only sequence above These commands set up the SourceMeter for measure only voltage measurements up to 20V as follows e Measure function volts e Source function current e Source mode fixed e Source range minimum e Source value OmA e Measure range 20V e Compliance 25V Table 3 7 Measure only programming example Step Action Commands RST 1 Select measure source functions SOUR FUNC CURR SOUR CURR MODE FIXED SENS FUNC VOLT 2 Set source and compliance SOUR CURR RANG MIN SOUR CURR LEV 0
347. eadings numeric constants and standard math operator symbols After the math expression is defined it will be assigned to the name that was created using the NAME command and will become the selected math expression See NAME lt name gt page 18 24 for more details Valid parameter names for measure and source readings include VOLTage Use V Measure or V Source reading CURRent Use I Measure or I Source reading RESistance Use ohms reading TIME Use timestamp reading Valid math operators and their operations are listed as follows Add Subtract k Multiply Divide A Exponent log Logarithmic base 10 In Natural log sin Sine cos Cosine tan Tangent exp e NOTE The log and In operations are performed on the absolute value of the specified number For example log 100 2 and log 100 2 Expressions are evaluated according to the following precedence rules Enclosed by parentheses Unary operators and exponentiation multiplication and division addition and subtraction Left to right ae ae a 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 31 The readings used for the calculation depend on how the SourceMeter is configured If configured to Source V Measure I the voltage reading for the calculation will be the source value and the current reading will be the current measurement Conversely if configured to Source I Measure V the current reading will
348. easure 200mV 210mV 21lmV 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 2V 42 1V 2 11V 20V 21V 21 1V 20V 21V 21 1V 60V 63V 63 3V 100V 105V 105 5V 10pA 10 5uA 10 55uA 10pA 10 5uA 10 55pA 100pA 105uA 105 5uA 100pA 105uA 105 5uA ImA 1 05mA 1 055mA 1mA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A 1A 1 05A 1 055A 3A 43 15A 3 165A 3A 10A ER Max Power 66W 2425 and 2430 Max Power DC Mode 110W 105V 1 05A 66W 21V 3 15A Pulse Mode 1 1kW 2430 only 2440 Range Source Measure 200mV 210mV 211mV 2V 2 1V 2 11V 10V 10 5V 10 5V 40V 42V 42V 10pA 10 5uA 10 55pA 100pA 105pA 105 5uA ImA 1 05mA 1 055mA 10mA 10 5mA 10 55mA 100mA 105mA 105 5mA 1A 1 05A 1 055A SA 5 25A 5 25A Max Power 66W 3 15A DC mode 2425 and 2430 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only 3 165A DC mode 2425 and 2430 10 55A Pulse mode 2430 only 3 5 3 6 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Compliance limit When sourcing voltage the SourceMeter can be set to limit current Conversely when sourcing current the SourceMeter can be set to limit voltage The SourceMeter output will not exceed the compliance limit Table 3 2 summarizes compliance limits according to range See Section 6 fo
349. easure readings can be stored and accessed using the method described earlier in this section Over the bus however there are actually two sep arate 2500 reading buffers for a total of 5000 readings The TRACe buffer is a 2500 read ing buffer used by front panel data store bus TRACe commands and to store sweep data and it is battery backed up The READ buffer is a separate 2500 reading buffer that can only be accessed over the bus using the READ command You can store and access data from these two buffers separately as outlined below Using TRACe commands to store data Use TRAC POIN lt n gt and TRIG COUN lt n gt followed by TRAC FEED CONT NEXT to store data n number of readings 2500 maximum Turn on the output with OUTP ON and then send INIT to take the unit out of idle and store readings After data is stored send TRAC DATA to access it See Table 9 1 in this section for a summary of these commands and Section 18 TRACe subsystem for more details Using READ to store data Use TRIG COUN lt n gt to set the number of readings to be stored n number of read ings 2500 maximum Turn on the output with OUTP ON and then send the READ command to trigger and access readings Once you access these readings you will still be able to access previously stored TRACe buffer readings using TRAC DATA See Section 11 and Section 18 TRIGger subsystem for triggering details and Section 17 for informat
350. easurements and Section 2 Ohms guard If you want to measure the resistance of a single resistor in the network you must use the ohms guard configuration Figure 6 19B shows how to measure the resistance of R1 Since the voltage on either side of R2 is the same no current can flow through it Thus all the programmed current Ip from the SourceMeter will flow through R1 The voltage across R1 is then measured and an accurate resistance measurement is calculated in this case 20kQ NOTE Guard current Ig must not exceed 50mA If it does the guard voltage drops lower than the output voltage allowing leakage current Thus the guarded ohms measurement becomes corrupted 6 36 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 18 High impedance measurements Insulator Insulator SourceMeter IN OUT IM lb h us Metal Mounting Plate IN OUT Iq Measured current Ip DUT current LO I Leakage current GUARD cable mode A Unguarded SourceMeter IN OUT IN OUT Note Cable guard selected Connect to earth safety ground B Guarded using 18 AWG wire or larger 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 37 Figure 6 19 In circuit ohms measurements T SourceMeter IN OUT l Source IN OUT GUARD Ohms mode IN OUT l Source Note Ohms guard selected IN OUT B Guarded 6 38 Source Measure Concepts
351. eceeeeeeseeeesesseeeseeeeeeaees 15 12 Figure 15 5 Operation event Status eee eeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeseeeaes 15 13 Figure 15 6 Measurement event Status 0 eee eeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 15 14 Figure 15 7 Questionable event Status 1 eee eeseeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 15 15 18 Figure 18 1 Figure 18 2 Figure 18 3 C Figure C 1 D Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure D 3 F Figure F 1 Figure F 2 Figure F 3 Figure F 4 Figure F 5 Figure F 6 G Figure G 1 SCPI Command Reference ASCII data format 00 cece eececeeseesseesecseeseeeseeseseaeeseeeaeeees 18 49 TEEE 754 single precision data format 32 data bits 18 50 Key press codes 00 0 sceeceescesceceseeeeeeeeaeeeeaeceaeeeaeceaeeeseeeeaes 18 114 Data Flow Data flow block diagram 0 eee eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeseeaeenes C 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus configuration cee ceeeeescesceeeseeeseeeeseeeneeeeees D 4 TEEE 488 handshake Sequence c ceesseesseeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeaes D 6 Command codes ineeie cinerios aE sponses taveneses D 11 Contact Check Function Source of Kelvin resistance errors sssesesseesseeressesreereeee F 2 Contact check block diagram sesseeseeseeresesreresrrersrrerrerssee F 3 Contact check DUT connections sesssssseessesseseeerrsereseeereseee F 4 Contact check limit test sequence sssesseeeseerereerrerereeerereeee F 7 Grading mode contact check limit testing 00 0 eee F 8 Sor
352. eceneeeeneeeseeeeaeeeeeesaes 12 18 13 Configuring and performing limit tests ores 12 19 Configuring limit tests 0 ee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteesenetaes 12 19 Performing front panel limit tests oe ee eeeeeeereeee 12 21 Step 1 Configure test system eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 21 Step 2 Configure source measure functions 12 21 Step 3 Configure limit tests oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 22 Step 4 Turn output on oo ee eeeeeeceeeseeeseeseneeeeeeeeee 12 22 Step 5 Start testing Process 0 eeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 22 Step 6 Stop testing Process 0 eeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeee 12 22 Remote limit testing sccczicscccciscessasessaconsseancesensitsazeteessaiasoanayenaas 12 23 Limit commands sisicata 12 23 Limit test programming example ssssssseeeeeeeerererrerererreere 12 24 Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration Digital 1 O port siiicar ran a icdeeocacessaones 13 2 Port configuration 20 eee eeeeeeeeceseeeeeeceeeceaeeeteeceaeeesaeeeaeesees 13 2 Digital output lines oo ee eeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 13 2 SORNE deeman aeii esee eiee e s ienie aiae ENER ee 13 3 Interlock Mhe sesei ans 13 3 FSV OULPUL isisrseeieseosirnessosrsrccrresi seori coac sseeewios esos 13 3 Digital output configuration ssesseesssesseseesessesrerrsreresresrees 13 3 Sink operation sssseeseeeseeseesseessessessesssessessresreseresresens 13 3 Source operation senesine coronis oen sE 13 4 Controlling digital output li
353. ecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format Query SOURce2 Query response format Description This command controls the response format for all CALC2 XXXX SOUR2 and SOUR2 TTL queries in a manner similar to formats set by the FORM SREG command See Calculate sub systems page 18 24 and SOURce subsystem page 18 72 for details CALC data elements CALCulate lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents CALCulate lt item list gt Set CALC data elements Parameters lt item list gt CALC Include CALC1 or CALC2 data TIME Include timestamp STATus Include status information NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma for example CALCulate CALC TIME STAT Query CALCulate Query CALC data element list Description This command allows you to retrieve timestamp and status information with the CALC1 DATA And CALC2 DATA queries It also allows you to retrieve timestamp and status information when TRACe FEED is set to CALC1 or CALC2 See Calculate subsystems page 18 24 fora complete description of CALC1 and CALC2 See Data elements page 18 51 for a description of TIME and STATus information 18 56 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Byte order BORDer lt name gt FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify binary byte order Parameters lt name gt NORMal Normal byte order for binary formats SWAPped Reverse byte order for binary formats Query BORDer Query byte order
354. ected testing will start when SOT is pulsed either high or low For front panel operation with the IMMEDIATE arm event selected the testing process will start as soon as the LIMIT key is pressed assuming the output is ON See Section 11 Triggering for details on trigger model configuration When using the SOT line the handler will not pulse the line while it is in a not ready con dition When the handler is ready DUT properly positioned in the handler it pulses the SOT line low or high to start the test ANT line The INT line of the Digital I O can be used if the component handler is equipped with an interlock switch With proper use of the interlock power is removed from the DUT when the lid of the handler is opened to eliminate a possible shock hazard See Section 13 Dig ital I O port and Safety interlock for operation details on the interlock Handler types The SourceMeter can be used with either of the two basic types of handlers When used with a Category Pulse Handler the SourceMeter pulses one of the four handler lines The handler then places the DUT into the bin assigned to the pulsed line When used with a Category Register Handler the SourceMeter outputs a bit pattern to three handler lines After the SourceMeter sends the end of test EOT strobe pulse to the fourth handler line the handler places the DUT into the bin assigned to that bit pattern 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit
355. ected as follows Center Start Stop 2 Span Stop Start 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual CENTer lt n gt SPAN lt n gt SOURce 1 SOURce 1 SOURce 1 SOURce 1 CURRent CENTer lt n gt VOLTage CENTer lt n gt CURRent SPAN lt n gt VOLTage SPAN lt n gt Parameters 2400 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 420 to 420 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2410 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 2200 to 2200 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2420 lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 128 to 128 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 21 to 21 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 84 to 84 DEFault MINimum MAXimum SCPI Command Reference 18 87 Specify center point of current sweep Specify center point of voltage sweep Specify span of the current sweep Specify span of the voltage sweep Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 2 1A or 420V 2 1A or 420V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 2 1A or 2200V 2 1A or 2200V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 6 3A or 128V 6 3A or 128V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 6 3A or 210V 6 3A or 210V Set I Source level amps Set V Source level volts OA or OV 21A or 210V 21A or 210V Set I Source level amps Set V Source
356. ector math this command will only return the calculation results for the specified vector points An invalid NAN not a number result of 9 91e37 indicates that one of the following conditions exist Error in the expression The required measurement function is disabled e CALCI is disabled See STATe lt b gt page 18 33 NOTE See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data 18 34 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual LATest CALCulate 1 DATA LATest2 Read latest CALC1 result Description This command works exactly like CALC1 DATA except that it returns only the latest CALC1 result CALCu late2 Configure and control limit tests The following commands are used to configure and control the three limit tests for DUT When used with a handler to provide binning operations communication between the SourceMeter and the handler is provided via the Digital I O port Many control aspects of the digital output lines are performed from the SOURce2 Subsystem These control aspects include setting and clearing the digital output lines and setting pulse width See SOURce 2 page 18 100 subsystem for details Select input path FEED lt name gt CALCulate2 FEED lt name gt Select input path for limit tests Parameter
357. ed and the DUT will be placed in the bin assigned to that test failure If no failures occur all enabled tests will be performed and the DUT will be placed in the assigned pass bin This process is demonstrated in Fig ure 12 3 Figure 12 3 Immediate binning Digital 1 O Notification Pass Fail Pass Using a sweep with immediate binning lets you test different devices at different source levels For example assume a 3 point linear sweep at 1V 2V and 3V step levels The first DUT is tested at 1V the second DUT is tested at 2V and the third DUT is tested at 3V In this example testing will stop when the first failure occurs End binning End binning allows a sweep to finish before performing the binning oper ation In the event of a failure the first test failure determines the bin assignment See Figure 12 4 Using a sweep with end binning lets you test a device at different source levels For exam ple assume a 3 point list sweep at 1 1V 2 2V and 3 3V source levels Limit testing will be performed at each source level After the completion of the three test cycles the DUT is placed in the appropriate bin Adding a scanner to the system lets you test each element of a multi element device Le resistor network For example the previous 3 point list sweep can be used to test a 3 element resistor network The first test cycle using the 1 1V source level tests the first element of the network The second test cycle 2 2V
358. ed bin The pass fail condition can also be queried via remote with CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL Using a sweep with immediate binning lets you test different devices at different source levels For example assume a 3 point linear sweep at 1V 2V and 3V step levels The first DUT is tested at 1V the second DUT is tested at 2V and the third DUT is tested at 3V 12 10 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 12 5 Sorting mode limit testing Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Wait for SOT Pulse from Handler Perform Source Measure Action Perform Limit 2 Test Display _ Output Limit 2 PASS Pass Pattern Perform Limit 3 5 12 Tests 2 Display FAIL Output Fail Pattern Test Another Device 2 Display Output Limit 3 PASS 5 12 Pass Pattern Note Limit 4 contact option not shown Yes See Appendix F No Press LIMIT 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 11 Binning systems The SourceMeter can be used with a component handler to perform binning operations on DUT packages With this system you can test single element devices i e resistor Add ing a scanner to the system allows binning operations on multiple element DUT packages See Limit test programming example page 12 24 Handler interface The SourceMeter is interfaced to a handler via the Digital I O port as shown in Figure 12 6 The I
359. ed to allow the source to settle before a measurement is performed It can be manually set from 0 00000 to 9999 99900 seconds or Auto Delay can be enabled With Auto Delay enabled the SourceMeter automatically selects a nominal delay period based on the selected function and range NOTE The Delay Action is set from the CONFIGURE V SOURCE or CONFIGURE I SOURCE menu See Section 3 Source delay In MULTIPLE mode the soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 7 Auto range change mode 11 6 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual MEASURE Action During this phase of the SDM cycle the measurement process takes place If the repeat filter is enabled as shown in the blow up drawing for Measure Action the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield a sin gle filtered reading measurement If using the moving filter or if the filter is disabled only a single reading conversion will yield a reading Counters Programmable counters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model layers For example if performing a 10 point sweep the trigger counter would be set to 10 Operation will stay in the Trigger Layer until the 10 source delay measure points of the sweep are performed If you wanted to repeat the sweep three times the arm counter would be set to three Three 10 point sweeps can then be performed
360. eed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The bus will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a multiple command program message must be terminated outp on lt PMT gt Command execution rules e Commands execute in the order that they are presented in the program message An invalid command generates an error and of course is not executed Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 17 Response messages A response message is the message sent by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command program message Sending a response message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the Output Queue When the SourceMeter is then addressed to talk the response message is sent from the Output Queue to the computer Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple command messages page 14 15 the multiple response messages for all the queries are sent to the computer when the SourceMeter is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by commas
361. eeeeeaeeseees F 6 Limit TES SEQUENCE c ce5 isseceieadedtescssiasotegessbenseniceeassusdetieasedas F 7 Binning failure indications grading mode F 10 Auto clear on end binning eee eee eeeeeeeereeeeeees F 10 Auto clear on immediate binning 0 0 0 eee F 10 Auto clear off end binning eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees F 10 Auto clear off immediate binning eseese F 11 Front panel contact check Operation 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees F 11 Men sel ctions ereis F 11 Using contact Check inririerrenese tesir eroris skista F 12 Using event detection with contact check F 13 Using pass fail with contact check 0 eee F 13 Remote contact check Operation eee eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees F 14 Contact check remote commands ce ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees F 14 Contact check programming example eee F 16 Contact check command reference 0 eee eseeeeeeseeseeereeeeees F 17 Configure and control contact check oc eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees F 17 CCHeck SDS aiie a aan raa a SA F 17 RESistance lt NR S soriiicesnsieosirisciiieaii F 17 Configure and control contact check limit test 0 0 F 17 STATE lt b gt iyo Atle Niece thi a abe aai at F 17 BATE ninenin eara N EEA F 18 SOURce2 lt NRf gt KNDN gt ssseeeseresrsrererrsrsrrrsrrrerree F 18 Configure and control contact check event detection F 19 SOURCE lt MamMe gt gt sis ccristieseccsssassessteesseusesiesteeeteecieess F 19 POUT CNRS
362. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 11 Figure 12 7 Binning system single element devices 000 0 eeeeeeeee 12 14 Figure 12 8 Binning system multiple element devices 0 0 0 eee 12 16 Figure 12 9 Digital output auto clear timing example 0 0 eee 12 18 Figure 12 10 Limits configuration menu tree eee eeeereeeeeeeeeee 12 21 Figure 12 11 Diode pass fail limits 0 eee eeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeneees 12 25 13 Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration Figure 13 1 Digital I O port arsine i i 13 2 Figure 13 2 Sink opetatlON srsti senar ar aa 13 3 Figure 13 3 Source operation sorcerien 13 4 Figure 13 4 Using test fixture interlock sseessseeesseeeeesesreresreresresersrsresreee 13 6 Figure 13 5 Output configuration Menu tree sessssssesesreresreresrrerrsreresreee 13 8 14 Remote Operations Figure 14 1 IEEE 488 connector eseessseesesosseessssuseesososserorsresrsvesorseessses 14 4 Figure 14 2 IEEE 488 connections sessssssseessseessssesosresssreesrssnsrsossssseesssei 14 5 Figure 14 3 TEEE 488 connector location ssesseseseeseseeresrererrrersrerrsreee 14 6 Figure 14 4 RS 232 interface connector eeseeeseeeseeseseeresreresrreersrsrrees 14 20 15 Status Structure Figure 15 1 SourceMeter status register Structure sesser 15 3 Figure 15 2 16 bit status registert ee eee eee ceeeeaecseeeseeseeeaeeneeeaeeseeens 15 5 Figure 15 3 Status byte and service request SRQ sesser 15 7 Figure 15 4 Standard event Status sees eeeeeees
363. eeeerererseerrsrerrereee 6 43 Changing REL or LIMITS neeese 6 43 Range Digits Speed and Filters Range and digits ssocsirimesaniiei irisi esiisa 7 2 Ran G55 sd seoacseiscntdaaveelas E ER E E 7 2 Maximum readings sssseseeseeeseesssesrssssrssesrerssssssrrssessesse 7 2 Ranging limitations seseseeesessesessesreseereesrsesrrsrssesrrsesses 7 2 Manual ranging eeeeseesssesseeseseerssrereeresesresrrsesesresesrrsresess 7 3 AYO TAM SUN viie Se ioe esther Ei 7 3 Auto range Considerations 20 0 eeeeseeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeees 7 3 Auto range change mode 2 0 0 ee eseeseeseeeeeereeeeeeneeees 7 4 AUTO TAN GES limits ssciscsstersesdsnssedcessesceviesesscessazesteosceesdsees 7 4 Limits evaluation eee eseeseeseeeseceeeeeeceeeeseeseeeeeenees 7 5 DUIS soc seca gecesi dank E E e thas Saa 7 5 Setting display resolution eee eeeseeeeereeeeeees 7 5 Remote range and digits programming 0 00 0 eects 7 5 Range and digits commands o eee eeeeeeseeereeeeeeeees 7 6 Range and digits programming example 0 7 6 Speed iere ceveei cs ccecuetaiseveiandidestatedead ouvaevavedvacts sacvucsestesinac iecestaheves 7 7 Setting Speed sisenes ti osi vate sceeeacisaicceseecviee eaten ec hecastessies 7 7 Front panel speed control eee ee eeeeeseeeesseeeseeeeeeaees 7 7 PULSE SPEED NPLC Model 2430 Pulse Mode 7 8 Remote speed programming see eeeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 7 8 Speed commands 000 eee eeeeeseceseeceneeeseeeeaee
364. eeeneeeeee 18 13 Table 18 8 STATus command Summary cesceesceessceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 18 18 Table 18 9 SYSTem command summary 0 eeeceeseeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeee 18 19 Table 18 10 Table 18 11 B Table B 1 D Table D 1 Table D 2 Table D 3 Table D 4 Table D 5 Table D 6 E Table E 1 Table E 2 F Table F 1 Table F 2 Table F 3 Table F 4 Table F 5 G Table G 1 Table G 2 Table G 3 Table G 4 Table G 5 Table G 6 Table G 7 TRACe command summary cee eeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 21 TRIGger command SUMMATY 1 0 0 ee eeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 18 22 Status and Error Messages Status and error Messages ee eeeeeesseeeseeceneeeeaeeeeeesaeeeseeeaees B 3 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus command summary csceeeseeseeseeeeeeeees D 7 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes eee D 10 Typical addressed multiline command sequence D 12 Typical addressed common command sequence D 12 TEEE command groups 0 eeeeseeseesceeseeseeeseeeeeeaeeneeeseesees D 13 SourceMeter interface function codes s D 14 TEEE 488 documentation requirements 00 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee E 3 Coupled commands eeesceseeeeseceseceeteeeseeeeeeeseeesseeeneeeeaes E 4 Contact Check Function Recommended contact resistance threshold values F 5 Contact check menu selections cccccseseeeseesseeeseeeseeeeees F 11 Contact check remote comm
365. eep If an open lead is found during the sweep the output is turned off no more contacts are checked sweep memory locations are not recalled and triggers are maintained until the last sweep point If multiples of the same sweep are desired the following sweep after the open lead will start with a contact check for each sweep point and normal measurement operation if no other failures occur 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 11 Auto clear off immediate binning Bin control at end of each point is sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON IMM The output will remain on between each sweep point if no contact check failure occurs If a contact check failure occurs before the execution of a sweep point the output will be turned off for that point The test sequence will progress and perform a contact check on the next point in the sweep The output will not be turned on until a good contact is detected Front panel contact check operation Menu selections Table F 2 summarizes the menu selections for various contact check modes Note that only those selections specific to contact check operation are shown here See Section 1 for complete menu listings and Section 11 and Section 12 for details on triggering and limit testing respectively Table F 2 Contact check menu selections Menu item Description CONFIG LIMIT Configure limit tests CONFIGURE LIMITS MENU DIGOUT Set Digital I O modes SIZE Select 3 BIT or 4 BIT fail
366. eeseeeeeeaees 1 25 Front panel control ooo eee eee eseeeeeeseesseeseeeseeeeeeeeens 1 26 Remote command programming ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 26 Configuration Menus 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeceeceeeseeeeseseeeeaeeneeeaees 1 26 Connections Connection OVETVIEW oo ee eeeeseeeeeeeeseceseeeeeeseceeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeee 2 2 Front rear terminals selection ccscceeeeceseeeeeecesreeeneeeeeees 2 2 Front panel terminals selection 0 0 ceeeeeeeseeeeeeeneees 2 2 Remote command terminals selection c cesses 2 3 Test fixture interlock eee eee eseeeeeeeceeesseeeseeeeeeaees 2 3 Connections to DUT ooo eeceseeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeaeceeeeseeseeeseeeaee 2 3 Sensing Methods 0 ce ceeseeseceseeceseceeeeceeeeseeeeaeeesaeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 4 wire remote sensing sceeeeeseeseceeteeeseeeeaeeeteeeeeeesees 2 6 2 wire local sensing esesesesessesssessesssrssesrerssssssrsssesssese 2 7 Guarding methods sireci isinir snindii eai iii 2 8 Cabl g ard evecccdceiis cvadsisceceais casceceiceysctavectusstisvecestentinevs 2 8 Ohms guard ociscene i i 2 9 Sense and guard selections eceseeesceeseeesneeeseeeeees 2 11 Sense selection sisina a R EE 2 11 Guard selection 0 eee eeeeseesseeseesseeeceeeeaeeeseeseeeaeeaes 2 12 Basic Source Measure Operation WARNING CAUTION oo eceeseseeeeeneeseeseeeeeeeeeteeseeseeseenees 3 2 Oper tion OVELVICW eis eectesssesecsisennesnactecsccessseeskeesserasseeecseuedeseoss 3 3 Source measure ca
367. ei sca niaiseries iaei niintin inne 5 6 Fast pulse Output cise istics cits isereederdatieateri haves iccteacaenia lies 5 6 JANKO IAE u O E E A E E E 5 7 Pulse only seoir eien hi dass aa aE ES 5 8 PAE A PE A 5 8 Pulse energy limitations 10A range sesssseeseseesesreresreersresreees 5 9 Pulse Mode configuration 0 cccescesceeeseceseeeeeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeae 5 10 Front panel Pulse Mode configuration cceseeeeeeeeeee 5 10 Select Pulse Mode and set pulse width and pulse delay cvisivses sess cerscessevsinetvaieseaessiettsinterdt 5 10 Set pulse measurement speed cece eeeeeseesneeeteeeees 5 10 Set pull Se COUNE sissien e S 5 10 Disable enable auto zero ssesesseesseeeesesreserseerrsrerrsrese 5 11 Remote command Pulse Mode configuration 5 11 Basic Pulse Mode operation ssssesseesseesessessesessrssseseerssssresessees 5 12 Front panel pulse measure procedure eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 12 Step 1 Select Pulse Mode and set pulse width and pullse delay ii isesciceccsscsscovsecesvascvessdestesvscevenseats 5 12 Step 2 Set pulse measurement speed eee 5 12 Step 3 Set pulse COUNL oo eee eeeeseeeteeeneeeteeeeeeeeees 5 12 Step 4 Select source oo eee eeeceeteeeseeeeeeeteeetaeeeteeesees 5 13 Step 5 Set pulse level and compliance limit 5 13 Step 6 Select measurement function and range 5 13 Step 7 Turn Output ON oo e eee eeeeeceneeseeenee
368. eienseddaysbenstteavennes 9 4 Timestamp ACCULACY oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesseeaeeneeeaeeeaeees 9 5 Buffer considerations ceseeeesseeeeseceeeeseceeeeaeeeeesseeeeeeaes 9 5 Using TRACe commands to store data eee 9 5 Using READ to store data n se 9 5 Remote command data Store oo ee eeseeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseeneeeseeeneeaes 9 6 Data store commands 0 0 lees eseeseeeeeeneeeceeaeeeseeeteeetaeenaes 9 6 Data store programming example cece eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 9 7 10 Sweep Operation WEEP IDLY POSe rtstecicteest cesncencs cetsc esate Struvesiansnausetsivevadecstesdateesceessees 10 2 Linear staircase SWEEP scescceesscesceeeeeeseeeeseeeseeesteeeneeeeee 10 2 Logarithmic staircase sweep oo ee eeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeenees 10 4 CUSTOM SWEEP sa leisiesaeciis cscsccses vosteaseetexcestanevecedesiiavecasensatt 10 5 Custom sweep examples o0 eee eeeseeeeseceeeseeeseeees 10 6 Source Memory SWEEP oo eee eee eee eseceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeneeeaeens 10 7 Sweep Configuration cece eeeeseseeeeseeseeeeeseeeaees 10 7 Saving and restoring source memory setups 10 7 Saving multiple source memory sweeps 10 8 Saved source memory configurations 0 0 0 0 eee 10 8 Sweep branching 0 eee ceeeeseeeseeseeeeeseeeseeseeeaeees 10 10 Diode test example 0 ceesceeeceeeeeceseeeeeeceseeeeneeenees 10 12 Configuring and running a SWEEP eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeenees 10 14 Front panel swe
369. el volts 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source 1pA range I Source 200mV range V Source 1A range I Source 1100V range V Source Select next higher range Select next lower range Specify I Source level amps Specify V Source level volts 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source 10uA range I Source 200mV range V Source 3A range I Source 63V range V Source Select next higher range Select next lower range SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Specify I Source level amps 105 to 105 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source MINimum 10uA range I Source 200mvV range V Source MAXimum 3A range I Source 100V range V Source UP Select next higher range DOWN Select next lower range 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Specify I Source level amps 105 to 105 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100pA range I Source 20V range V Source MINimum 10uA range I Source 200mV range V Source MAXimum 10A range I Source 100V range V Source UP Select next higher range DOWN Select next lower range 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Specify I Source level amps 42 to 42 Specify V Source level volts DEFault 100pA range I Source 10V range V Source MINimum 10uA range I Source 200mV range V Source MAXimum 5A range I Source 40V range V Source UP Select next higher ra
370. el 2440 four quadrant source or sink operation SOURCE SINK LIMITS Model 2400 21V 1 05A 210V 105 mA Model 2410 21V 1 05A 1100V 21 mA Model 2420 21V 3 15A 63V 1 05A Model 2425 21V 3 15A 105V 1 05A Model 2430 105V 1 05A 105V 10 5A pulse mode only Model 2440 10 5V 5 25A 42V 1 05A VOLTAGE REGULATION Line 0 01 of range Load 0 01 of range 100V NOISE 10Hz 1MHz p p 10mV 50mvV typ Models 2430 and 2440 OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION User selectable values 5 tolerance Factory default none CURRENT LIMIT Bipolar current limit compliance set with single value Min 0 1 of range OVERSHOOT lt 0 1 typical full scale step resistive load 10mA range CURRENT PROGRAMMING ACCURACY Local or Remote Sense ACCURACY 1 Year NOISE PROGRAMMING 23 C 5 C peak peak MODEL RANGE RESOLUTION rdg amps 0 1Hz 10Hz 2400 2410 00000 pA 50 pA 0 035 600 pA 5 pA ALL 10 0000 pA 500 pA 0 033 2 nA 5nA 100 000 pA 5 nA 0 031 20 nA 50 nA 1 00000 mA 50 nA 0 034 200 nA 500 nA 2400 2420 2425 10 0000 mA 500 nA 0 045 2 pA 50 pA 2430 2440 2410 Only 20 0000 mA 500 nA 0 045 4 pA 200 nA ALL 00 000 mA 5 pA 0 066 20 pA 1pA 2400 2410 1 00000 A 50 pA 0 27 900 pA 100 pA 2420 2425 00000 A 50 pA 0 067 900 pA 50 pA 2430 2440 2420 2425 3 00000 A 150 pA 0 059 2 7mA 150 pA 2430 3 00000 A 500 pA 0 059 2 8 mA 300 pA 10 00000 A 2440
371. elect Pulse Mode SOUR PULS WIDT 0 005 Sms pulse width SOUR PULS DEL 0 003 3ms pulse delay SENS VOLT NPLC 0 1 Measure speed 0 1 PLC TRIG COUN 3 Pulse count sweep points SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function SENS FUNC CURR Current sense function SENS CURR PROT 0 1 100mA current compliance SOUR VOLT START 1 1V start voltage SOUR VOLT STOP 3 3V stop voltage SOUR VOLT STEP 1 1V step voltage SOUR VOLT MODE SWE Select volts sweep mode READ Trigger sweep request data 1 These commands are not required in this case since unit assumes these operating states after RST but are included to demonstrate complete programming steps 2 Trigger count should equal number of points in sweep Points Stop Start Step 1 You can use SOUR SWE POIN query to read the number of points 3 This command should normally be sent after START STOP and STEP to avoid delays caused by rebuilding sweep when each command is sent 11 Triggering Front panel trigger operation Discusses front panel triggering including the trigger model various layers event detection delay and device action and front panel trigger configuration Remote trigger operation Details the remote trigger model and summarizes trigger commands Trigger link Discusses the trigger link including input triggers and output triggers Triggering examples Shows examples for front panel triggering external trig ge
372. em list 0 00 eccssccessseeesseeeessneeessnees 18 51 BOURCE2 lt NAaMe gt serrera 18 55 CALC data elements ceeesccesssecessneeeesseeessseeeesseeeeeees 18 55 CALCulate lt item list gt 0 0 cceccecesseessseeeesseeessnees 18 55 BYt O0GE seriis iceteceigeasscycnsaseddaseeeecedesivnaetendstensetoass 18 56 BORDer lt name gt ceccecessceesseeceseeeesseeeesseeeessnees 18 56 Status register format 0 0 eee eeeeseeseeneeeeeeneeeneeseeeaetees 18 56 SREGister lt MaMe gt nene i T 18 56 OUTP t s bsystemi soian a 18 57 Turn source On OF Off hsrbi oiae a 18 57 STATE bhrin ena iedeetessenesad 18 57 Interlock Control enren eet 18 58 STA TG beni S V OKS 18 58 FRIPPGd aons A ES 18 58 Outp t off States siisireerrniiine aariaa ia 18 58 SMODE sai n a R 18 58 ROU Te s bsystei condrenirorasonnn anea 18 59 Select inp t Jacks sisuosinirecrissinsiiina a 18 59 TERMinals lt name gt c cccccssecssseeessseeeesseeessnees 18 59 SENSel SUbSYStCMD cicc c c cseeecbis iussscenessseccuteeseevedssteseseetbesaaes 18 60 Select measurement functions ceessesesteeessteeessnees 18 60 CONC irrent lt B gt seana eiaa as 18 60 ON lt furnction List oo ccc eeesseeessteessseeessteeessnees 18 61 OFF lt function list gt senine 18 61 AE EA E EE 18 62 COUNIS iont a E NE 18 62 STATe lt mame gt dnei EEEE 18 62 RESistance MODE lt name gt ccsscecessceessteeeseees 18 63 RESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt eee 18 63
373. ement Event STAT MEAS Questionable Event STAT QUES B 8 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Eliminating common SCPI errors There are three SCPI errors that occur more often than any others e 113 Undefined header e 410 Query INTERRUPTED e 420 Query UNTERMINATED The following paragraphs discuss the most likely causes for these errors and methods for avoiding them 113 Undefined header This error indicates that the command you sent to the instrument did not contain a recog nizable command name The most likely causes for this error are Missing space between the command and its parameter There must be one or more spaces blanks between the command and its parameter For example SENS VOLT DC RANGIOO Incorrect no space between command and parameter SENS VOLT DC RANG 100 Correct Improper short or long form Check the command list in Section 18 of this manual Blanks spaces within the command name For example SYST ERR Incorrect space between SYST and ERR SYST ERR Correct 410 Query INTERRUPTED This error occurs when you have sent a valid query to the instrument and then send it another command or query or a Group Execute Trigger GET before it has had a chance to send the entire response message including the line feed EOI terminator The most likely causes are Sending a query to the instrument and then send
374. en a memory location is specified the sweep will branch to that memory location if the test is successful PASS condition If not successful FAIL condi tion the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list With NEXT selected the default the sweep proceeds to the next memory location in the list regardless of the out come of the test PASS or FAIL condition Figure 10 5 shows a six point sweep branching example In this case the unit is pro grammed to branch to location 7 when a pass conditions occurs at location 3 Figure 10 5 Six point test branching example Source Memory Locations Pass Should be the same to maintain triggering sequence nu A U Nc 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 11 Caution must be used when branching since infinite memory loops can inadvertently be created Also a single Source Memory Sweep will always sweep the number of points specified regardless of how many branches were taken Memory sweep branching option is set from the PASS SRC MEM LOC item of the CONFIG LIMITS MENU See Section 12 Limit Testing and Configuring limit tests for details Via remote use the CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation command See Configuring and running a sweep in this section See Diode test example on page 10 12 for a typical example NOTE Branch on fail is available via remote only with CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML See Section 18 for details
375. ences For the various multiline commands a specific bus sequence must take place to properly send the command In particular the correct listen address must be sent to the instrument before it will respond to addressed commands Table D 3 lists a typical bus sequence for sending the addressed multiline commands In this instance the SDC command is being sent to the instrument UNL is generally sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active listeners are present Note that ATN is true for both the listen command and the SDC command byte itself Table D 3 Typical addressed multiline command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 7 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 8 38 56 3 SDC Stays low EOT 04 4 4 Returns high Assumes primary address 24 Table D 4 gives a typical common command sequence In this instance ATN is true while the instrument is being addressed but it is set high while sending the common command string Table D 4 Typical addressed common command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low 8 38 56 3 Data Set high 2A 42 4 Data Stays high R 52 82 5 Data Stays high S 53 83 6 Data Stays high T 54 84 Assumes primary address 24 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE command groups IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 13 Command groups supported by the SourceMeter are listed
376. ending operation and discards any pending output Baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the SourceMeter and the programming terminal commu nicate Choose one of these available rates 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 The factory selected baud rate is 9600 When you choose a baud rate make sure the programming terminal or printer that you are connecting to the SourceMeter can support the baud rate you selected Both the SourceMeter and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate Data bits and parity The RS 232 interface can be configured to send receive data that is 7 or 8 bits long using even odd or no parity No parity is only valid when using 8 data bits 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 19 Terminator The SourceMeter can be configured to terminate each program message that it transmits to the controller with any of the following combinations of lt CR gt and lt LF gt lt CR gt Carriage return lt CR LF gt Carriage return and line feed lt LF gt Line feed lt LF CR gt Line feed and carriage return Flow control signal handshaking Signal handshaking between the controller and the instrument lets the two devices com municate with each other about readiness to receive data The SourceMeter does not sup port hardware handshaking flow control Software flow control is in the form of XON and XOFF characters and is enabled when XON XOF
377. ensing by connecting SENSE HI and LO to the DUT and enabling remote sense Figure 2 5C NOTE Guard current Ig must never exceed 50mA If it does guard voltage will become less than the output voltage and corrupt the measurement 2 10 Connections Figure 2 5 Guarded ohms measurements ohms guard WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA VQ GUARD GUARD SENSE 4 WIRE SENSE INPUT OUTPUT IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL MENU CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI Sense Selection 2 wire local A Basic connections Ae D o 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH FRONT PANEL e ogy i C 6 wire ohms connections SHG eee eee eee 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING no int RNAL OPERATOR SERVICA GUARD SENSE a 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT ENER Ese REDRESS TA FRONT PANEL MENU To e lll Sense Selection 2 wire local CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FI B Connections using guard sense CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST Fil 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 11 Sense and guard selections NOTE When sense or guard settings are changed the OUTPUT will turn OFF Sense selection When using the SENSE HI and LO terminals of the SourceMeter 4 wire remote sensing must be selected When not using these terminals local sensing must be selected Sense selection is
378. ep Operation 00 eee eeeeeeseesseereeeeeeseeees 10 14 Sweep configuration Menu 0 ele eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 14 Setting delay miescie i oa 10 16 Trigger count and sweep points esesessseseerseeereereeesee 10 16 Performing SWEEPS sssseseesseesssresesresesrrsrssesrereseereees 10 16 Performing a linear staircase sweep ce eeeeeeeeee 10 17 Performing a log staircase SWEEP essees 10 18 Performing a custom SWEEP eee eeeeeseceeetseeeeeeeees 10 19 Performing a source Memory sweep sesser 10 21 Remote sweep Operation cece eee eseceeeeseeseeeseeseeeseeees 10 22 Staircase sweep commands 0 00 eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 10 22 Staircase sweep programming example 10 22 Custom sweep commands eee eeeeseeereeseeeeeeeees 10 24 Custom sweep programming example 10 25 Source memory sweep commands ee eeeeeeereee 10 25 Source memory sweep programming example 10 26 11 Sweep branching program example ceseeecesseeeeseeeeeeeee 10 27 Pulse Mode sweeps Model 2430 only oo cece eeeeeseeeeeeees 10 32 Front panel Pulse Mode sweep procedure eee 10 33 Remote Pulse Mode sweep operation sesser 10 34 Triggering Front panel trigger Operation ceecesceeeseceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesees 11 2 Front panel trigger model 000 eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeees 11 2 Event d tection ssiri ricini 11 2 a E E E E A AE 11 2 Am layer srnca iiss E E 11
379. equency eeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 1 12 Remote command line frequency eeeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 12 Fuse replacement 00 ecceecceesceseeceeeceeeeceseeeseeceaeeeseeeeaeeeas 1 13 Cooling fanis tees asia de bod still aes 1 13 Display srona saczs vues eE E E iasessss EE ESES 1 14 Display format scins sno taei n enan a AE OEE 1 14 EDI KEY enes aa a A ES 1 14 TOGGLE Key cnit meedere iaie oktana eesti 1 15 Status and error Messages seesssssessessesssssressesstsserssrseess 1 15 Remote display programming sseesseessesreresrsrerrseresreseres 1 15 Front panel tests seeseeseeseesoeeseeseesocesesseessessessresseesessseeses 1 16 Defa lt Settings sse seisine oic eae e easels 1 16 Saving and restoring User setups ssseeseeereeresrereereerereee 1 16 Saving Setups eisrean oa ESE OEE E 1 16 Restoring setups esessessseseessesssesrersssessereresesreresseseesse 1 16 Power on configuration ceecceeceesseceseeeeneeeeeeeeneeeees 1 17 Factory default settings cece cesceeesceeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeees 1 17 Remote s tups incroci E o 1 20 MOUS nennen a ethene eee est 1 20 Main Mem sis ssssccainteisbevendevasevoscenscddedekevsasesesens OA ERE 1 20 Rules to navigate Menus 0 eee eeeceeteeeeeeteeeeaeeneeeaees 1 24 Editing source and compliance values sssseeseereseeeeeeeee 1 24 Toggling the source and measure display fields 1 25 Disabling front panel display eee eeeeeseee
380. equency 65 to 2e6 Hz lt freq time gt for specified time period 0 to 7 9 seconds STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper ON STATe Query state of beeper v Clearing Error Queue Power up and CLS clears the error queue RST SYSTem PRESet and STATus PRESet have no effect 18 20 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 9 continued SYSTem command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SYSTem AZERo Control auto zero and NPLC caching y STATe lt name gt Control auto zero OFF disabled ON y ON enabled ONCE force immediate update of auto zero STATe Query auto zero state v CACHing Control NPLC caching STATe lt b gt Enable ON or 1 or disable OFF or 0 OFF NPLC caching STATe Query NPLC caching state REFResh Force an immediate update for all NPLC values in cache RESet Clear the cache of all NPLC values NPLCycles Return a list of NPLC values in the cache from oldest to newest LFRequency lt freq gt Select line frequency 50 or 60 Hz AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto frequency Note 1 AUTO Query state of auto frequency LFRequency Query line frequency TIME Timestamp RESet Reset timestamp to zero seconds AUTO lt b gt Enable disable timestamp reset when OFF exiting idle TIME Query timestamp MEMory Initialize memory INITialize Initialize battery backed R
381. er SEQuence2 SOURce lt name gt TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT lt NRf gt TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT Bit 18 262144 of the status word returned by READ FETCh MEASure MEASure VOLTage MEA Sure CURRent MEASure RESistance TRACe DATA CALCulatel DATA or CALCulate2 DATA signifies the status of contact check 1 open lead 0 OK Also bit 8 set if LIMit4 is enabled Enable 4 wire remote sense for contact check Query sense selection Enable disable contact checking Query state of contact check test Select threshold resistance 0 to 60 lt NRf gt 0 to 2 Selects 2Q threshold resistance gt 2 to 15 Selects 15Q threshold resistance gt 15 to 60 Selects 50Q threshold resistance Query threshold resistance Enable or disable contact check event detection lt name gt CCHeck enable or IMMediate disable Query state of event detection Specify contact check timeout in seconds 0 00000 to 999 99990 Query contact check timeout setting RST and SYSTem PRESet parameter defaults are shown in boldface F 16 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact check programming example Table F 4 summarizes a basic contact check programming example This example sets up the SourceMeter as follows e Contact check enabled e Contact check threshold resistance 2Q e Limit 4 test enabled Limit 4 Digital I O failure pattern all HI 15
382. er is in compliance if the Cmpl label or the units label i e mA for the displayed compliance setting is flashing If the Cmpl label is flashing real compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the displayed compliance value If the units label is flashing range compliance has occurred The output is clamped at the maximum compli ance value for the present fixed measurement range For example if presently on the 2V measurement range a flashing units label for the voltage compliance value indicates that the output is clamped at 2 1V The SourceMeter can be taken out of compliance by going into the edit mode and decreas ing the source value or increasing the compliance value Note that increasing the compli ance limit may compromise protection for the DUT If in range compliance selecting a higher measurement range may take the SourceMeter out of compliance NOTE See Section 6 Compliance limit for details on real and range compliance 3 18 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Step 6 Turn output off When finished turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator light will turn off Remote command source measure procedure Basic source measurement procedures can also be performed via remote by sending appropriate commands in the right sequence The following paragraphs summarize the basic commands and give a simple programming example
383. ered to start the output will go from the bias level to the start source level 1V and sweep through the symmetrical log points With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting Custom sweep This sweep type lets you configure a customized sweep Programmable parameters include the number of measurement points in the sweep and the source level at each point When this sweep is started the output goes from the bias level to the first source measure point in the sweep The sweep will continue through the source measure points in the order they were programmed and stop after the last source measure point With trigger delay set to zero the time duration at each step is determined by the source delay and the time it takes to perform the measurement NPLC setting This delay is the same for all sweep points 10 6 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Custom sweep examples The custom sweep can be configured to provide a 50 duty cycle pulse sweep Figure 10 3 shows a pulse sweep that provides three 1V pulses on a OV bias level This pulse sweep is configured by specifying six points for the custom sweep The specified voltage levels at points PO P2 and P4 are 1V and the specified voltage levels at points P1 P3 and P5 are OV Six measurements are performed for this sweep three at 1V and three at OV Figure 10
384. erflow EE Standard Event 3 504 DAC calibration underflow EE Standard Event 3 505 Source offset data invalid EE Standard Event 3 506 Source gain data invalid EE Standard Event 3 507 Measurement offset data invalid EE Standard Event 3 508 Measurement gain data invalid EE Standard Event 3 509 Not permitted with cal locked EE Standard Event 3 510 Not permitted with cal un locked EE Standard Event 3 Lost data errors 601 Reading buffer data lost EE Standard Event 3 602 GPIB address lost EE Standard Event 3 603 Power on state lost EE Standard Event 3 604 DC calibration data lost EE Standard Event 3 605 Calibration dates lost EE Standard Event 3 606 GPIB communication language lost EE Standard Event 3 Communication errors 700 Invalid system communication EE Standard Event 3 701 ASCII only with RS 232 EE Standard Event 3 Additional command execution errors 800 Ilegal with storage active EE Standard Event 4 801 Insufficient vector data EE Standard Event 4 802 OUTPUT blocked by interlock EE Standard Event 4 803 Not permitted with OUTPUT off EE Standard Event 4 804 Expression list full EE Standard Event 4 805 Undefined expression exists EE Standard Event 4 806 Expression not found EE Standard Event 4 807 Definition not allowed EE Standard Event 4 808 Expression cannot be deleted EE Standard Event 4 809 Source memory location revised EE Standard Event 4 810 OUTPUT blocked by Over Temp EE Standard Event 4
385. eries SourceMeter User s Manual Operating boundaries Source or sink Depending on how it is programmed and what is connected to the output load or source the SourceMeter can operate in any of the four quadrants The four quadrants of operation for the SourceMeter models are shown in Figure 6 4 through Figure 6 8 When operating in the first I or third IID quadrant the SourceMeter is operating as a source V and I have the same polarity As a source the SourceMeter is delivering power to a load When operating in the second II or fourth IV quadrant the SourceMeter is operating as a sink V and I have opposite polarity As a sink it is dissipating power rather than sourc ing it An external source or an energy storage device such as a capacitor or battery can force operation in the sink region See Section 3 Sink operation for more information Duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio of source on time to total time period expressed as a percentage For example if the source is on for six out of 10 seconds the duty cycle is 60 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 15 Model 2400 SourceMeter The general operating boundaries for the Model 2400 are shown in Figure 6 4 In this drawing the 1A 20V and 100mA 200V magnitudes are nominal values The actual max imum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 1 05A 21V and 105mA 210V Also note that the boundaries are not drawn to scal
386. eristics NOTE For the purpose of discussion positive polarity pulses are shown in the follow ing illustrations Keep in mind that the Model 2430 can output negative pulses As shown in Figure 5 1 a pulse period consists of an output on time pulse width and an output off time Depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width can be as short as 150usec or as long as Smsec The output off time can be as short as 1 1msec or as long as 10 000sec Figure 5 2 shows the components that make up the pulse width and the output off time NOTE See the Model 2430 specifications in Appendix A for pulse rise and fall times Figure 5 2 Pulse measure timing k Delay oe 80us si Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time OV or OA Meas Je 2 9ms gt Ref amp gt Po Zero Delay Pulse width delay 80us Minimum pulse width overhead Meas Sig Signal measurement 2 9ms Minimum output off time overhead Meas Ref amp Zero Reference and zero measurement PD Pulse delay setting 5 4 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse width The pulse width can be set from 0 15msec to 5 00msec However depending on how the SourceMeter is configured the pulse width setting may not be achievable For example if it takes 1 667msec to perform the signal measurement the minimum pulse width that can be achieved is 1 75msec 1 667msec signal measurement plus 80usec
387. ern will be output The testing process will stop and the DUT will be binned As a consequence the other elements in the device package are not tested MODE lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE lt name gt Control Digital I O port pass fail output Parameters lt name gt GRADing Output graded pass fail pattern SORTing Output sorted pass fail pattern Query MODE Query Digital I O pass fail mode Description This command controls how limit calculations drive the Digital I O lines In GRADing mode a reading passes if it is within all of the hi low limit tolerances enabled assuming that it has passed the LIMIT 4 con tact check contact check option only and LIMIT 1 compliance tests first The Digital I O lines will be driven with the first pattern of the first contact check optional compliance hi or low failure Otherwise the CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 pattern will be output In SORTing mode a reading will fail if it fails the contact check test the compliance test or is not within any of the Digital I O Bands If the tests pass and only LIMIT 1 or 4 is enabled CALC2 CLIM PASS SOUR2 pattern will be output Otherwise the first limit test band that passes will output its LOW SOUR2 pattern UPP SOUR2 patterns will be ignored If LIMIT1 or LIMIT 4 fails their SOUR2 patterns will be output If no LIMIT2 3 5 12 limit passes the CALC2 CLIM FAIL SOUR2 pattern will be output 18 44 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter
388. ers 14 11 Query COmMANAS sarsii nenna ea o on 14 13 Case sensitivity ssesseseeseseessesssesessresresesssressessresseseesese 14 13 Long form and short form versions ceeceeseeeeseeeneees 14 14 Short form rules 2 eee eeeeseeseeesecseeeseeseeeseeeaeeseeeaeeaes 14 14 Program Messages sescsecessccssecsseresisedsceversdvsesdesssiescegesteveneas 14 15 Single command messages s ssseessereseeresesresrreesreeee 14 15 Multiple command messages 0 0 ce eeeeeeeseeereeeees 14 15 Command path rules ooo ee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeaeees 14 16 Using common and SCPI commands in the SAME MESSAGE eeeeeeecceseeeseeeesceceaeeeseeeteeeeteeeeeeeeee 14 16 Program message terminator PMT eee 14 16 Command execution rules ccccceeeeeseeeeesereseeeeeeees 14 16 Response MESSAGES creisses 14 17 Sending a response message sssssessesseseresrsesreeee 14 17 Multiple response messages eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 14 17 Response message terminator RMT seese 14 17 Message exchange protocol 00 ee eeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 14 17 RS 232 interface Operation eeeeceeseesceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeseeeeees 14 18 Sending and receiving data oes eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 18 Baud Tate css seeesden cp casccieeeiztivadicadessucsnsdscareceaasvonsecvisceeansazes 14 18 Data bits and parity oo eee eeceeseeeeeeseceeeeseeneeeeteneeaes 14 18 POU ALOL ssion iniaatas a e a naai E E aat 14 19 Flow control sign
389. esaeeeneeeteeees 7 8 Speed programming example 00 0 0 eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 7 9 Filters sercom T A aaa 7 9 Response time considerations sseseseeeeeerreerrerere ereer 7 9 Front panel filter control oo eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaees 7 10 Configuring filter oo eee eeeeseeseeereeeeeteeeeeeeneeeees 7 10 CONFIGURE FILTERING menu eects 7 10 Enabling HIET s ccssesccsssesesssecssaisnestendtauses aaiceasvanaeseneiys 7 10 Response time sissien iiinis 7 11 Remote filter programming eee eee eeeeereeseeereeeeeeeees 7 12 Filter commands sssini sinss 7 12 Filter programming example ssessseeeseeeeeeereeresreerseeee 7 13 Relative and Math RELA VG erbitten asin eaea AA E E 8 2 Front panel tel s 0 s5sceccsscssssscesovscotusostecesssosoatbessan caves tecdaenssaey 8 2 Enabling and disabling rel oo eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 Defining a rel value sssseseseeseseesesresesreerssesrrsreresrrsesees 8 2 Remote rel programming sssesessessesesrretsresrrsrsresssesresreseses 8 3 Rel commands tscc ccss scssessesstessiecssessvasscoocsivoseverssedneoss 8 3 Rel programming example sssssseseeesseeeresreresrrresrrseses 8 3 Math operations ose eee eseeceeseesseeeceeeeeeseseeseeesesseeesesseseseeeees 8 4 Built in math functions oo elle eee eeeseeeseeeeceeeeeenseeaeeeaes 8 4 POWEE E E E E 8 4 Offset compensated ohms ss ssessssesseesssserssreresreresrrsesses 8 4 Varistor alpha i sssssissssssssrssisosssssss
390. eseeeeneeeeaes 5 14 Pulse ohms measurements 00 0 eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 14 Auto and Manual pulse ohms measurements 5 14 Offset compensated pulse ohms measurements 5 14 Remote command pulse measure operation eee 5 15 Basic pulse commands 0 eee eeseeseceeeeseeeseeseeeeeeees 5 15 Ignored settings and invalid commands 5 15 Pulse measure programming example eee 5 16 Pulse measure Considerations cceseseseesesssssssssseseceeeeeeseeees 5 16 Measurement speed cciccescessseassscsceiesastsocscenssepasesneneteasonacase 5 16 Filtet iiaii cedetdssee hebissevee coast suet igved sted cvtectavees 5 17 Auto TAN DS ietan ni ar a e ar Ea eE EE 5 17 Concurrent measurements ssesessesssseereeeertstrsrerrseresreseeees 5 17 Ohms source readback ssesesseesesseseesesresesresersrsrrsrerrsresreres 5 17 Toggle Key sornnrigeisri iieiea a 5 17 Offset compensated ohms ssssssessessesrssesesresrrsrerrsrerrsresreses 5 18 Source delay ccenrcnnnnanon aai ia 5 18 Trigger delay csesecescczesecsasecisseasasessatesast arnai 5 18 IMPUl triggers osierocenie i a aR aN 5 19 Output triggers scmpri iarsna eia 5 19 AUtO outp t off sessin 5 19 Ou tput off State os cscsscsestesceetensesseiondcsuedazenstepigernesvetageaaiace 5 19 Tu rning SOULCE O vesec cedseesctesisescsstese dust seansecveeesbessantuensieee 5 20 SCPI signal oriented measurement commands
391. ess CONFIG then SWEEP Select TYPE then press ENTER Select STAIR then press ENTER At the prompts enter the desired START STOP and STEP values From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired 6 Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate Se oh a 7 Press EXIT to return to normal display 10 18 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Step 3 Set delay Set the source delay as follows 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V or SOURCE I depending on the selected source function Select DELAY then press ENTER Set the delay to the desired value then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The SourceMeter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 6 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information See Section 9 Data Store Performing a log staircase sweep Step 1 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows 1 Select the
392. est Vp Reverse Break down Voltage Test Vp and Leakage Current Test Ip Figure 10 6 illustrates the test points on a typical diode curve Figure 10 6 Typical diode I V curve and test points not to scale Ve Test Forward Voltage Test Vp This test involves sourcing a specified forward bias current within the normal operating range of the diode then measuring the resulting voltage drop To pass the test the voltage must be within the specified minimum and maximum values Reverse Breakdown Test Vp A specified reverse current bias is sourced and the resulting voltage drop across the diode is measured The voltage reading is compared to a specified minimum limit to determine the pass fail status of the test Leakage Current Test Ip The leakage test verifies the low level of current that leaks across the diode under reverse voltage conditions A specified reverse voltage is sourced then the resultant leakage current is measured Good diodes have leakage current that is less than or equal to the specified maximum value This test example also uses sweep branching to simplify handling of each diode No mat ter how the polarity sensitive diode is installed in the test fixture it will be biased properly See Sweep branching for details Testing process The test uses seven SMLs source memory locations However only four memory locations are used for each tested diode If the diode is installed correctly t
393. ests at locations 001 002 003 and 004 are performed If the diode is installed backwards tests at locations 001 005 006 and 007 are performed To sweep four memory locations the sweep count must be set to four The source memory sweep is summarized as follows 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 13 SML 001 Compliance Test e Limit test Fail if in compliance branch to source memory location 005 for pass condition e Summary Limit 1 test is configured such that if the diode is installed correctly in the test fixture it will fail the compliance test and operation will proceed to the tests at memory locations 002 003 and 004 If the diode is installed backwards it will pass the compliance test and operation will branch around locations 002 003 and 004 to perform the tests at locations 005 006 and 007 Source Memory Loca tion 002 Forward Voltage Test diode installed correctly SML 002 Forward Voltage Test e Source I Measure V e Limit 2 test Min max limits for voltage reading Summary The voltage measurement and the result of the test pass or fail is stored in the buffer SML 003 Reverse Breakdown Test e Source I Measure V e Limit 2 test Min max limits for voltage reading Summary The voltage measurement and the result of the test pass or fail is stored in the buffer SML 004 Leakage Current Test e Source V Measure I
394. et 110111 the following values will be returned for the selected data format ASCii 55 decimal value Hexadecimal H37 hexadecimal value OCTal Q67 octal value BINary B110111 binary value See Section 16 Common Commands and STATus subsystem page 18 104 for more information OUTPut subsystem This subsystem is used to control the output of the selected source and the interlock These commands are summarized in Table 18 4 Turn source on or off STATe lt b gt OUTPut 1 STATe lt b gt Turn source on or off Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Turn source off standby 1 or ON Turn source on operate Query OUTPut Query state of source Description This command is used to turn the source output on or off Measurements cannot be made while the source is off Turning the source off places the SourceMeter in the idle state The only exception to this is when source auto clear is enabled In this mode the source turns on during each source phase of the SDM cycle and turns off after each measurement See SOURce 1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt page 18 73 NOTE The SOURce CLEar command will also turn the source off For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the instrument is taken out of the idle state when the output is turned on 18 58 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Interlock control STATe lt b gt OUTPut 1 INTerlock STATe lt b gt Control hardware interlock Param
395. et V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 2 1A or 420V MAXimum 2 1A or 420V 2410 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 Set I Source level amps 2200 to 2200 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 2 1A or 2200V MAXimum 2 1A or 2200V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 89 Query Description 2420 lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 Set I Source level amps 128 to 128 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 6 3A or 128V MAXimum 6 3A or 128V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 6 3 to 6 3 Set I Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 6 3A or 210V MAXimum 6 3A or 210V 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 21 to 21 Set I Source level amps 210 to 210 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 21A or 210V MAXimum 21A or 210V 2440 lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Set I Source level amps 42 to 42 Set V Source level volts DEFault OA or OV MINimum 10 5A or 84V MAXimum 10 5A or 84V STEP Query step size for sweep STEP DEFault Query RST default level STEP MINimum Query lowest allowable level STEP MAXimum Query highest allowable level This command is used to specify a step size for a linear sweep When the sweep is started the source level changes in equal steps from the start level to the stop level A measurement is performed at each source step including the start and stop levels NOTE This command cannot b
396. et the event and event enable registers and the Error Queue are listed in Table 15 1 In addition to these com mands any enable register can be reset by sending the 0 parameter value with the individ ual command to program the register NOTE SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on status structure registers and queues Table 15 1 Common and SCPI commands to reset registers and clear queues Commands Description Ref To Reset Registers CLS Reset all bits of the following event registers to0 Note 1 Standard Event Register Operation Event Register Measurement Event Register Questionable Event Register STATus PRESet Reset all bits of the following enable registers to 0 Note 1 Operation Event Enable Register Measurement Event Enable Register Questionable Event Enable Register To Clear Error Queue CLS Clear all messages from Error Queue Note 2 STATus QUEue CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Note 3 SYSTem ERRor CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Note 3 Notes 1 The Standard Event Enable Register is not reset by STATus PRESet or CLS Send the 0 parameter value with ESE to reset all bits of that enable register to 0 see Status byte and service request commands page 15 10 2 STATus PRESet has no effect on the Error Queue 3 Use either of the two clear commands to clear the Error Queue 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 5 Programming and reading registe
397. etector Ee NSTest ARM OUTPut NONEITEXit PSTest BSTest ARM OUTPut gt NONEITENTer Trigger Layer TRIGger ks No DIRection ACCeptor Another oo Trigger 2 1 TRIGger INPut Source Event Detector SOURCE Action TRIGger SOURce IMMediate TLINk SOURce DELay lt n gt IAUTO 0 001 sec TRIGger OUTPut gt DELay DELAY Action Measure Event TRIGger INPut SENSe Detector GPIB Default gt Output Trigger MEASURE Action TRIGger OUTPut GPIB default parameter for TRIGGER OUTPut is NONE x In SYSTem RCMode MULTiple the soak time programmed with SOURce 1 SOAK takes the place of the delay time only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trigger See Section 17 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 13 While operating within the trigger model ARM indicator on most commands will not be executed until the SourceMeter completes all of its programmed source measure opera tions and returns to the idle state The IFC interface clear SDC selected device clear and DCL device clear commands can be executed under any circumstance while operat ing within the trigger model They will abort any other command or query e ABORt e SYSTem PRESet e TRG or GET e RST e RCL NOTE SDC DCL or ABORt place the SourceMeter in the idle state For fastest response use SDC or DCL to return to idle Event detection Onc
398. etects an error in a program message unit it discards all further program message units until the end of the string for example SENS DATE SENS FUNC In the above program message the program message unit SENS DATE will gen erate error 113 Undefined header and the SourceMeter will discard the second program message unit SENS FUNC even though it is a valid query B 10 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Flow C 2 Data Flow 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction Data flow for remote operation is summarized by the block diagram shown in Figure C 1 Refer to this block diagram for the following discussion Figure C 1 Data flow block diagram SENSE Measurements Volts Amps Ohms Timestamp Filter Limit Tests NULL Rel Data Store CALC3 Min Max Sdev Mean Pk Pk FETCh READ MEAS CALC2 DATA CALC3 DATA CALC1 DATA TRACe DATA 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Flow C 3 The SENSE block represents the basic measured readings of voltage current and resis tance If Filter is enabled the readings will be filtered The SENSE block also measures time for the timestamp When the INITiate command is sent the programmed number of source measure opera tions are performed and the respective data is temporarily stored in the Sample Buffer For example if 20 source measure operations were performed then 20 sets of data wil
399. eter User s Manual Introduction The SourceMeter supports two GPIB protocols SCPI and 488 1 The 488 1 protocol is included to significantly increase speed over the GPIB When using the 488 1 protocol throughput is enhanced up to 10 times for data sent to the SourceMeter command messages and up to 20 times for data returned by the Source Meter response messages The speed of readings sent over the GPIB is also increased see GPIB reading speed comparisons page G 6 for details NOTE With the 488 1 protocol selected you will still use SCPI commands to program the SourceMeter Operation differences between the two protocols are discussed in this appendix Selecting the 488 1 protocol Perform the following steps to select the 488 1 protocol 1 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU Place the cursor on COMMUNICATION and press ENTER to display the COMMUNICATIONS SETUP menu 3 Place the cursor on GPIB and press ENTER to display the present GPIB address 4 Press ENTER to display the GPIB PROTOCOL menu 5 Place the cursor on 488 1 and press ENTER 6 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure ra When switching between the SCPI protocol and 488 1 protocol the instrument does not reset The GPIB protocol setting is saved in EEPROM and the unit will power up with that selected protocol The GPIB protocol cannot be changed over the bus However there is a query command to determine the presently selected pr
400. eters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable interlock 1 or ON Enable interlock Query STATe Query state of interlock Description This command is used to enable or disable the hardware interlock When enabled the source cannot be turned on unless the interlock line pin 8 of the rear panel Interlock Digital I O connector is pulled to a logic low state When the interlock line goes to a logic high state the source turns off See Section 13 Digital I O port and Safety inter lock for details about using interlock with a test fixture When disabled the logic level on the interlock line has no effect on the output state of the source TRIPped OUTPut 1 INTerlock TRIPped Description This query command is used to determine if the enabled interlock has been tripped The tripped condition 1 means that the source can be turned on interlock line at logic low level A 0 will be returned if the source cannot be turned on interlock line at logic high level Output off states SMODe OUTPut 1 SMODe lt name gt Select output off mode Parameters lt name gt HIMPedance Disconnect Input Output NORMal Normal output off state ZERO Zero output off state GUARd Guard output off state Query SMODe Query output off mode Description This command is used to select the output off state of the SourceMeter With HIMPedance selected the output relay opens when the source is turned off This disconnects external circuitry fr
401. evision of the manual Each new Revision includes a revised copy of this print history page Revision A Document Number 2400S 900 01 ceeeceeeeseeteeeeeees Revision B Document Number 2400S 900 01 ceeeseeceseeteeeeees Addendum B Document Number 2400S 900 02 Revision C Document Number 2400S 900 01 ceeeseeeseeteeeeeees Addendum C Document Number 2400S 900 02 Revision D Document Number 2400S 900 01 ceeceseseeteeeeees Revision E Document Number 2400S 900 01 ceeseceseeteeeeeees Revision F Document Number 2400S 900 01 eeeeseeteeteeeeees Revision G Document Number 2400S 900 01 cceeseeceseeseeeenees All Keithley product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Keithley Instruments Inc Other brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders OR EE August 1998 EE aseaeeennteaes January 1999 April 1999 RA TAN April 1999 November 1999 PAETE EEA January 2000 OAE E ES July 2000 E EA June 2001 Stostusturecennssuseateertitet May 2002 KEUS Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familia
402. explained as follows See Section 3 Operation overview for details on sense NOTE The SourceMeter defaults to the 2 wire local sense mode when the output is off regardless of the sense setting When the output is turned on the present sense setting will be in effect Front panel sense selection On power up the instrument is automatically set for 2 wire local sense Perform the fol lowing steps to check and or change the sense selection 1 Press CONFIG and then the SOURCE V MEAS V or Q key Changing sense in one configuration menu changes it in all of the others 2 For SOURCE V and Q use the lt and keys to place the cursor flashing menu item on SENSE MODE and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the present sense selection Two wire indicates that local sense is selected and 4 wire indicates that remote sense is selected To retain the present selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the sense selection place the cursor on 4 wire to select remote sense or on 2 wire to select local sense and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Remote command sense selection Use the SYSTem RSENse command Section 18 SYSTem subsystem to choose between local and remote sensing via remote For example send the following command to enable remote sensing iSYST RSEN ON Conversely send this command to disable remote
403. f each digit in a sequential manner Press EXIT to cancel this test CHAR SET This test displays special characters Press EXIT to cancel the test See Menus page 1 20 for more information Default settings By using appropriate menu selections you can save and recall various instrument setups define the power on configuration or restore factory defaults as outlined below Saving and restoring user setups You can save and restore up to five of your own user setups as covered below This feature provides a convenient way to save specific instrument configurations and then recall them as needed Note that you can also set up the SourceMeter to restore a specific user setup at power on See Power on configuration page 1 17 NOTE There are two types of setups Instrument configuration user setups covered here and source memory sweep setups Section 10 Saving setups 1 Select the various instrument operating modes you wish to save 2 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 3 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 4 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select SAVE then press ENTER 5 Select the setup position 0 4 to save then press ENTER to complete the process Restoring setups 1 Press the MENU key select SAVESETUP then press ENTER 2 From the SAVESETUP menu select GLOBAL then press ENTER 3 From the GLOBAL SETUP MENU select RESTORE then press ENTER 4 Select th
404. face include the following factory default settings are shown in parentheses e Baud rate 9600 e Data bits 8 e Parity none e Terminator CR e Flow control none An interface is selected and configured from the COMMUNICATIONS option of the Main Menu Section 1 Main menu For details on the programmable aspects of the interfaces see Primary address page 14 6 and RS 232 interface operation page 14 18 NOTE When changing interface selections the SourceMeter performs a power on reset To check and or change options of the selected interface you must re enter the menu structure 14 4 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB operation This section contains information about GPIB standards bus connections and primary address selection GPIB standards The GPIB is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and programming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers in 1975 The SourceMeter conforms to these standards e JTEEE 488 1 1987 e TEEE 488 2 1992 The above standards define a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instrument and a group of common commands The SourceMeter also conforms to this standard e SCPI 1996 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This standard defines a command la
405. fect only if TLINK is the selected Trigger In Source With this event detector bypass set to SOURce operation will proceed around the Source Event Detector The programmable trigger in sources for the Trigger Layer are described as follows IMMediate With Immediate selected event detection for the three detectors is satisfied immediately Operation proceeds through the Trigger Layer to perform the Source Delay and Measure actions TLINk With TLINk selected event detection at each enabled detector occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received A detector is enabled by including its parameter name with the TRIGger INPut command For example to enable the Delay Event Detector and Measure Event Detector the follow ing command must be sent TRIGger INPut DELay SENSe The above command disables the Source Event Detector since its parameter name SOURCce is not included in the parameter list With the Source Event Detector disabled operation will not hold up It will continue and perform the Source Action Operation will hold up at the Delay Event Detector until an input trigger is received and then it will hold up at the Measure Event Detector until another input trigger is received 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 15 Trigger delay A programmable delay is available before the Source Action The Trigger Delay can be manually set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 seconds Note that
406. ffer tracks Buffer pauses Buffer pauses V I or Q stored MATH not stored OK Buffer pauses V I or Q stored REL or Limits not stored MATH stored REL or Limits not stored OK The first column of Table 6 3 shows the SourceMeter configuration when the storage pro cess is started The next three columns show what happens when configuration changes are made while the SourceMeter is storing readings Changing V I or Q measurement function Ifyou started with only a basic measurement function selected the buffer will track a basic measurement function change For example if you started in volts and changed to current the buffer will store the current readings Ifyou started with MATH REL and or LIMITS enabled the buffer will stop stor ing readings if you change the basic measurement function Storage will continue if you return to the original configuration See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure for more information on selecting the measurement function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 43 Changing MATH function If you started with only a basic measurement function selected you can enable a MATH function but only the voltage current or resistance component of the cal culation will be stored in the buffer The results of the MATH function will not be stored If you started with a MATH function enabled you can select a different MATH function The re
407. ffs for the time needed to display store or output a filtered reading These affect the number of reading conversions for speed versus accuracy and response to input signal changes 7 12 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 7 3 Filter configuration menu tree CONFIG FILTER AVERAGE AVERAGE MODE COUNT REPEAT Remote filter programming Filter commands Table 7 4 summarizes filter commands See Section 18 SENSe1 subsystem Configure and control filter for more details Table 7 4 Filter commands Command Description SENSe AVERage TCONtrol lt type gt Select filter type type REPeat or MOVing SENSe AVERage COUNt lt n gt Set filter count n count 1 to 100 SENSe AVERage lt state gt Enable disable filter state ON or OFF For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the filter cannot be enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 13 Filter programming example Table 7 5 summarizes the command sequence to program filter aspects as follows e Filter type moving e Filter count 20 e Filter state on Table 7 5 Filter programming example Command Description RST Restore RST defaults SENS AVER TCON MOV Moving average type filter SENS AVER COUN 20 Filter count 20 SENS AVER ON Enable filter 7 14 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s
408. figuration 13 7 Pulse Mode configuration 5 10 Pulse Mode sweep procedure 10 33 Relative 8 2 Sense selection 2 11 Source delay 3 13 Source measure procedure 3 14 Speed control 7 7 Sweep 10 14 Terminals selection 2 2 Triggering 11 2 V source protection 3 12 Front panel summary 1 7 Front panel tests 1 16 Front rear terminals selection 2 2 Fuse replacement 1 13 GET group execute trigger 14 8 Getting started 1 1 GPIB Connections 14 4 Front panel operation 14 9 Operation 14 4 Primary address 14 6 Protocol differences G 3 Protocol selection G 2 Reading speed comparisons G 6 Standards 14 4 Status indicators 14 9 GPIB protocol G 1 Grading mode limits operation 12 5 GTL go to local 14 8 Guard 6 34 Cable 2 8 6 34 Methods 2 8 Ohms 2 9 6 35 Selection 2 12 Sense 6 38 Sense selection 2 11 Handler Interface 12 11 Types 12 12 TEEE 488 bus Commands D 7 Description D 3 Interface function codes D 14 Lines D 5 Overview D 1 TEEE 488 conformance E 1 IFC interface clear 14 7 Inspection 1 3 I Source operating boundaries 6 21 Limit 1 test compliance 12 3 Limit 2 course limits 12 2 Limit testing 12 1 Binning 12 4 Configuring 12 19 Data flow 12 3 Front panel operation 12 21 Grading mode 12 5 Modes 12 4 Operation 12 5 Pass fail information 12 3 Programming example 12 24 Remote operation 12 23 Sorting mode 12 9 Types 12 2 Limits 3 5 12 fine limits 12 2 Line power Connection 1 10 Frequency 1 12 Linear st
409. figuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG SOURCE V CONFIGURE V SOURCE PROTECTION SENSE MODE 2 WIRE 4 WIRE GUARD OHMS CABLE DELAY AUTO DELAY DISABLE ENABLE TRIG CONTROL SCALE FACTOR SHAPE DC PULSE CONFIG SOURCE I CONFIGURE I SOURCE GUARD OHMS CABLE DELAY AUTO DELAY DISABLE ENABLE TRIG CONTROL SCALE FACTOR SHAPE DC PULSE Configure V source Select voltage protection Select 2 wire or 4 wire sensing Local sensing Remote sensing Select ohms or cable guarding Program delay between source and measure Enable disable auto delay Control triggered source Enable disable triggered source Program scale factor Select DC or pulse source shape Model 2430 only Configure I source Select ohms or cable guarding Program delay between source and measure Enable disable auto delay Control triggered source Enable disable triggered source Program scale factor Select DC or pulse source shape Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 29 Table 1 7 continued Source and range configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG A RANGE Program upper range limit CONFIG Ww RANGE Program lower range limit CONFIG AUTO RANGE AUTO RANGE TYPE Select auto range type SINGLE SRC MTR Select single SourceMeter operation MULTIPLE Select multiple SourceMeter program soak time Table 1 8 Rel
410. figurations Table 10 2 summarizes the configurations that are saved at each source memory location along with the equivalent remote command See Section 18 for more details on these remote commands The SCPI command reference tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 also list source memory parameters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 9 Table 10 2 Source memory saved configurations Mode Remote command Current integration rate SENSe 1 CURRent NPLCycles Resistance integration rate SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles Voltage integration rate SENSe 1 VOLTage NPLCycles Concurrent functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion CONCurrent Enable functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON Disable functions SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF Manual auto ohms SENSe 1 RESistance MODE Offset compensated ohms SENSe 1 RESistance 0COMpensated Enable disable filter SENSe 1 AVERage STATe Filter type SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol Filter count SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt 2430 pulse function SOURce 1 FUNCtion SHAPe Source mode SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE Source delayt SOURce 1 DELay Source auto delay SOURce 1 DELay AUTO Scaling factor SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor Enable disable scaling SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor STATe 2430 pulse width SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh 2430 pulse delay SOURce 1 PULSe DELay Source Value Range Auto Range Sense Protection Range Auto Range Enable disable auto zero SYSTem AZERo STATe Enable disable remote sense SYSTem RSENse
411. for details on OPC and OPC Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Query Error QYE Set bit indicates that you attempted to read data from an empty Output Queue Bit B3 Device Dependent Error DDE Set bit indicates that an instrument operation did not execute properly due to some internal condition Bit B4 Execution Error EXE Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter detected an error while trying to execute a command Bit B5 Command Error CME Set bit indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors include JTEEE 488 2 syntax error SourceMeter received a message that does not fol low the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard e Semantic error SourceMeter received a command that was misspelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that is not implemented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message Bit B6 User Request URQ Set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the SourceMeter front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power ON PON Set bit indicates that the SourceMeter has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read 15 12 Status Structure Figure 15 4 Standard event status To Event Summary Bit ESB of Status Byte Register See Figure 15 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Standard B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register Pt tty Standard ESE nn
412. function FUNC RES Select ohms measurement function Select ohms mode RES MODE AUTO Auto ohms mode 3 Select range RES RANG 20E3 Select 20kQ range SYST RSEN ON Enable 4 wire sensing FORM ELEM RES Resistance reading 4 Output on OUTP ON Turn on output 5 Get reading READ Trigger and acquire reading 6 Output off OUTP OFF Turn off output Numbers correspond to steps in Auto ohms measurements procedure page 4 4 4 14 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 5 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only Overview Provides a summary of Pulse Mode operation Pulse characteristics Describes the timing characteristics that make up the pulse width and output off time of the pulse period Explains how to achieve the fastest pulse output Pulse energy limitations 10A range Covers pulse energy consumption limi tations for the 10A source or measure range Pulse Mode configuration Explains how to select and configure the fundamen tal aspects of Pulse Mode operation Basic Pulse Mode operation Provides the basic front panel procedure for pulse measure operation and explains how to perform pulse ohms measurements Lists the fundamental commands for remote operation and includes a program ming example Pulse measure considerations Explains the operational differences between normal DC Mode and Pulse Mode operation 5 2 Pulse Mode Operat
413. g 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote trigger commands Table 11 1 summarizes remote trigger commands These commands are covered in more detail in Section 18 except for TRG a common command covered in Section 16 Table 11 1 Remote trigger commands Command INITiate ABORt ARM COUNt lt n gt ARM SOURce lt name gt ARM TIMer lt n gt ARM DIRection lt name gt ARM ILINe lt NRf gt ARM OLINe lt NRf gt ARM OUTPut lt event list gt TRIGger CLEar TRIGger COUNt lt n gt TRIGger DELay lt n gt TRIGger SOURce lt name gt TRIGger DIRection lt name gt TRIGger ILINe lt NRf gt TRIGger OLINe lt NRf gt TRIGger INPut lt event list gt TRIGger OUTPut lt event list gt TRG Description Take SourceMeter out of idle state Abort operation return to idle Set arm count n count Specify arm control source Name IMMediate TLINk TIMer MANual BUS NSTest PSTest or BSTest Set arm layer timer interval n interval Control arm bypass Name SOURce or ACCeptor Select arm layer input line NRf input line Select arm layer output line NRf output line Select arm layer output events Event list TENTer TEXit or NONE Clear any pending input triggers immediately Set trigger count n count Set trigger delay n delay Specify trigger control source Name IMMediate or TLINk Control trigger bypass Name SOURce or ACCeptor
414. g idle Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable auto timestamp reset 0 or OFF Disable auto timestamp reset Query AUTO Query enabled disabled auto timestamp reset state Description RES AUTO enables or disables auto timestamp reset When enabled the timestamp will be automatically reset when exiting the idle layer of the trigger model This command is intended for use with READ INIT when taking more than one reading 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 117 Auto range change mode RCMode lt name gt SYSTem RCMode lt name gt Control auto range change mode Parameters lt name gt SINGle Single mode MULTiple Multiple mode Query RCMode Query auto range change mode Description This command controls the auto range change mode In the SINGle mode the SourceMeter will auto range only after first taking a reading In the MULTiple mode the SourceMeter will auto range up on compli ance in the Delay phase of the Source Delay Measure cycle thereby minimizing the chance of a SourceMeter being in compliance in a multiple SourceMeter system A SourceMeter can downrange only once a reading has been taken In the MULTiple mode you can control the soak time using the SOUR SOAK command See SOURce sub system Note that you can use the LLIMIT and ULIMIT commands to control auto range limits See SENSe1 subsystem TRACe subsystem The commands in this subsystem are used to configure and contro
415. ger layer delay 0 1s Trigger layer count 10 Trigger layer output events source and sense Trigger layer trigger link output line 1 After the unit is set up INIT is sent to take the unit out of idle TRG is sent to trigger the unit after which it cycles 10 times through the trigger layer A second TRG is required to trigger the unit the second time and it then completes the second cycle through the trigger layer NOTE You must allow sufficient time between the first and second TRG commands or the second trigger will be ignored Table 11 2 Commands for remote triggering example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR VOLT 10 Source 10V ARM SOUR BUS Select bus arm layer source TRG command ARM COUN 2 Arm layer count 2 TRIG DEL 0 1 0 1s trigger layer delay TRIG COUN 10 Trigger layer count 10 TRIG OUTP SOUR SENS Source sense output trigger events TRIG OLIN 1 Trigger output line 1 OUTP ON Turn on output INIT Take unit out of idle TRG Trigger first sequence TRG Trigger second sequence OUTP OFF Turn off output FETC Request readings 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 11 12 Trigger model for remote trigger example Arm Event Detector Trigger Arm Layer Count 10 Trigger Layer 0 1 sec Trigger Delay SOURCE Action TLink Trigger Out DELAY Action TLink Trigger Out Triggering 11 29 11 30 Tri
416. gered SFACtor lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt Set current scaling factor SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt Set voltage scaling factor Parameters lt n gt 999 9999e 18 to 999 9999e 18 Scaling factor Query SFACtor Query scaling factor Description SFAC instructs the SourceMeter to source the scaling factor times the previous source memory location value For example if 10 0V is stored in the first source memory Source I Measure V Mode and the unit is in the Source V Measure I mode with SFAC set to 0 1 and enabled the unit will output 1 0V for the second source memory location NOTE These commands work only with source memory sweeps TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt Enable disable current scaling SOURce 1 VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt Enable disable voltage scaling Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable scaling 0 or OFF Disable scaling Query SFACtor STATe Query enabled disabled scaling state Description SFAC STAT enables or disables scaling NOTE These commands work only with source memory sweeps Sweep and list program examples Linear voltage sweep Linear voltage sweep from 1V to 10V in 1V increments RST SOUR FUNC MODE VOLT SOUR SWE SPAC LIN 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 97 SOUR VOLT STAR 1 0 SOUR VOLT STOP 10 0 SOUR VOLT STEP 1
417. ggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 Triggering for the Model 2430 is similar to triggering for the DC Mode However in order to accomplish fast pulse output triggering is simplified for the Pulse Mode The following information covers the triggering differences between the DC Mode and Pulse Mode Trigger models The front panel trigger model for the Pulse Mode is shown in Figure 11 13 while the trig ger model for remote operation is shown in Figure 1 14 These trigger models are simpli fied versions of their DC Mode counterparts Figure 11 1 and Figure 11 13 NOTE The following trigger model information assumes that you are already familiar with the basic DC Mode trigger model operation presented earlier in this section 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 31 Figure 11 13 2430 Pulse Mode trigger model front panel operation Idle Bypass Arm Event No Detector Immediate Never eee rom ee Arm Counter Arm pens 2 1 Layer Manual jeer n Stest fUstest Arm Out Event On Off Stes Sp eS a re ie ee Series Trigger Layer Another Trigger 2 Trigger Counter 1 Immediate Trigger Link Trigger In Source Trigger Out Event gt Delay On Off Measure Event Detector SOURCE Action Pulse Width MEASURE Action c gt Output Trigger Bench Default Trigger Out Event gt Measure On Off rigger In
418. gh 2V 5V TTL Low lt 0 8V 11 20 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output trigger specifications The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger after various trigger model actions See Trigger models page 11 30 The output trigger provides a TTL compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 11 7 A trigger link line can source 1mA and sink up to 50mA Figure 11 7 Trigger link output pulse specifications Meter Complete TTL High 3 4V Typical TTL Low 0 25V Typical Triggering examples Front panel trigger example As an example of how to program the instrument for front panel trigger operation assume the trigger parameters below Figure 11 8 shows a flowchart of the front panel trigger model with these operating examples Assume the following trigger parameters e Arm layer source manual TRIG key e Arm layer count 2 Trigger layer delay 0 1s Trigger layer count 10 Trigger layer output events source and measure Trigger layout trigger link output line 1 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 21 To program the SourceMeter for the trigger parameters above perform the following steps Le TG PAS oe 20 Press CONFIG then TRIG Select ARM LAYER then press ENTER Choose ARM IN then press ENTER Select MANUAL then press ENTER
419. gnal phase ref phase ref zero phase Trigger Trigger Latency Delay Source On gt Trigger Event Auto Zero Enabled Trigger Latency 500psec max Figure A 6 Case VI timing diagram A D Conversion signal phase Trigger Trigger Latency Delay Source On gt Trigger Event Auto Zero Disabled Trigger Latency 100psec max The source turns on as soon as the output is turned on and remains on until the source is turned off As shown in the two timing diagrams the static source remains on for every measurement cycle The Source Delay portion of the SDM cycle is omitted With Trigger Delay set to zero Trigger Latency is the time from when the trigger event occurs to when the SourceMeter begins an A D conversion A 12 Specifications 2400 Series SourceM eter U ser s M anual Status and Error Messages B 2 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Introduction This Appendix contains a summary of status and error messages which status register bits are set when messages occur and methods to avoid or eliminate most common SCPI errors Status and error messages Table B 1 summarizes status and error messages which are stored in the Error Queue Each message is preceded by a code number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages Note that error and status conditions will also
420. gnificant assuming test lead resistance is not greater than 1Q Since current in a series circuit is the same at all points in the loop remote sensing does not improve I Source or I Measure accuracy Thus if sourcing current and measuring cur rent you can use local sensing Other conditions that allow the use of 2 wire local sensing include Test circuit impedance is 1kQ Above 1GQ guarding should also be used Cable guard e Measure Only V or I operation 2 8 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guarding methods Cable guard Use the high impedance cable guard connection scheme shown in Figure 2 4 for the fol lowing source measure condition Test circuit impedance is gt 1GQ Note that cable guard must be selected for this connection scheme See Guard selection page 2 12 to select cable guard A test fixture is typically used when testing high impedance devices The test fixture reduces noise and protects the user from a potentially hazardous voltage on the guard shield or plate See Section 6 Guard for details on using guard Note that the test fixture chassis is connected to In Out LO to reduce noise Figure 2 4 High impedance guarding cable guard Guard Shield Test Fixture Connect to earth safety ground using 18 AWG wire or larger WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICA 0 4 WIRE INPUT SENSE OUTPUT IEEE 488 ENTER IEEE ADDRESS WITH F
421. gnored The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on Wn SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section If source V is active A 18 14 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Command Description Default Source parameter SCPI memory SOURce 1 CURRent LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude lt n gt AMPLitude SFACtor lt n gt STATe lt b gt STATe SFACtor STARt lt n gt STARt STOP lt n gt STOP STEP lt n gt STEP SPAN lt n gt SPAN CENTer lt n gt CENTer VOLTage MODE lt n gt MODE RANGe lt n gt IlUPIDOWNI AUTO lt b gt AUTO RANGe Set level when triggered Specify current level Query current level Set current scaling factor 999 9999e 18 to 999 999e 18 Enable disable current scaling factor Query current scaling factor state Query current scaling factor Specify start level for I sweep Query start level for current sweep Specify stop level for I sweep Query stop level for current sweep Specify step value for I sweep Query step value for voltage sweep Specify span Query span Specify center point Query center point Path to configure V Source Select V Source mode FIXed SWEep or FIXed LIST Query V Source mode
422. gs For example assume that the SourceMeter performed 20 source measure operations The FETCh command will request the readings for those 20 source measure opera tions If FETCh is sent while performing source measure operations ARM annunciator on it will not be executed until the SourceMeter goes back into idle The readings that are acquired depend on which data elements are selected Section 18 Data elements and what the instrument is pres ently programmed to source measure Measure readings take priority over source readings and functions not sourced or measured are assigned the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 For example assume that voltage current and resistance readings are selected as data elements and the instrument is programmed to Source V and Measure I A reading string acquired by FETch will include the programmed V Source value and the I Measure reading The reading for resistance will be NAN since resistance was not measured 17 4 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual If the SourceMeter is instead programmed to Source V and Measure V the voltage reading will be the V Measure reading not the programmed V Source value Both current and resistance readings will be NANs current is not measured or sourced NOTE The FETCh command is automatically asserted when the READ or MEASure command is sent See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed ex
423. gt Specify fail source memory location Location NRf memory or NEXT next location Control I O port pass fail update Name IMMediate at failure or END end of sweep Clear test results reset I O port Enable disable auto clear state ON or OFF Select Digital I O control mode name GRADing or SORTing LIMitX LIMit2 LIMit3 LIMit5 through LIMit12 LIMit4 Contact check option not shown see Table 18 1 and Appendix F Table 12 2 Commands to control Digital I O port for limit testing Command Description SOURce2 BSIZe lt n gt Set Digital I O port bit size n 3 or 4 SOURce2 TTL lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Set I O port bit pattern NRf NDN pattern SOURce2 TTL4 MODE lt name gt Set Digital I O line 4 mode name EOTest or BUSY SOURce2 TTL4 BSTate lt state gt Set BUSY and EOT polarity HI or LO SOURce2 CLEar Clear digital output lines SOURce2 CLEar AUTO lt state gt Enable disable I O port auto clear state ON or OFF SOURce2 CLEar AUTO DELay lt n gt Set auto clear delay n delay Limit test programming example Diode breakdown voltage test is an example that readily lends itself to pass fail analysis This test verifies the reverse and often the forward voltage at which the device begins to show a large deviation in current for a small deviation in voltage The test is performed by sourcing a specified current level and then measuring the result
424. guard selection Use the SYSTem GUARd command Section 18 SYSTem subsystem to choose between cable and ohms guard mode via remote For example send the following com mand to enable ohms guard SYST GUAR OHMS Conversely send this command to enable cable guard SYST GUAR CABL Basic Source Measure Operation Operation overview Discusses source measure capabilities compliance limit and fundamental source measure configuration e Operation considerations Covers warm up auto zero V source protection and source delay e Basic source measure procedure Describes the basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for source measure operations including selecting the source function output values and compliance limits choosing measurement range and function and turning the output on and off e Measure only Covers how to use the SourceMeter for measurements only Sink operation Describes sink operation 3 2 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual WARNING CAUTION The SourceMeter uses a heat sink to dissipate heat Also the Models 2410 2420 2430 and 2440 have a cooling fan The left side of the case is cut out to expose the black finned heat sink This heat sink gets hot and could be hot enough to cause burns Even if the instrument is turned off you should assume that the heat sink is still hot as it takes consid erable time for it to cool off W
425. gure limit tests Select and configure the following limit tests parameters as explained in Configuring limit tests page 12 19 e Use DIGOUT to configure the Digital I O port for SIZE MODE and AUTO CLEAR Set your H W LIMITS and S W LIMITS parameters as desired e Set up PASS conditions for Digital I O bit pattern and memory source location if using source memory sweep e Ifusing 3 bit port size program the Digital I O Line 4 EOT MODE for EOT or BUSY as appropriate Step 4 Turn output on Press the ON OFF key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The Source Meter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Start testing process To enable the limit tests press the LIMIT key If the SOT line of the Digital I O is being used by a handler the testing process will not start until the handler sends a low going pulse Otherwise the testing process will start when LIMIT is pressed NOTE The PASS and FAIL messages indicate the status of each test cycle with the fol lowing exceptions When in the NORMAL HIGH IMPEDANCE or GUARD output off state the OFF message is displayed The pass and fail conditions will be dis played as P OFF and F OFF respectively When in the ZERO output off state the ZER message is displayed The pass and fail conditions will be displayed as P ZER and F ZER respectively e If the source reaches the over voltage protection OVP limit the OVP mes sage will be displayed T
426. h state ON or OFF CALCulate DATA Query math data 8 8 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Math programming example Table 8 4 summarizes the basic command sequence for voltage coefficient testing which is a change in resistance of resistive elements with applied voltage Although such changes in resistance with voltage are present in virtually all resistors to at least some degree volt age coefficients are most noticeable in high value resistors gt 10 Q See Figure 8 2 for DUT connections This example sets up the SourceMeter as follows e Source function volts e Sense functions all e Source Delay lsec e Start voltage 10V e Stop voltage 50V e Math Expression voltage coefficient Table 8 4 Voltage coefficient programming example Command Description RST SENS FUNC ON ALL SENS RES MODE MAN SOUR FUNC VOLT SOUR VOLT STAR 10 SOUR VOLT STOP 50 SOUR VOLT MODE SWE SOUR SWE POIN 2 TRIG COUN 2 gt CALC MATH NAME VOLTCOEF CALC STAT ON OUTP ON INIT CALC DATA Reset unit to GPIB defaults Enable all sense functions Manual resistance mode Volts source function 10V start voltage SOV stop voltage Volts sweep mode Sweep points 2 Trigger count 2 Select voltage coefficient math expression Enable math Turn on output Trigger sweep Request voltage coefficient data 2400 Series SourceMeter User
427. h the 1A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 40V With the 5A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 10V The present I Compliance range determines the highest current measurement range that can be selected Similarly the present V Compliance range determines the highest voltage measurement range that can be selected For example if I Compliance is on the 100mA range the highest current measurement range that can be selected is 100mA If V Compliance is on the 2V range the highest voltage measurement range that can be selected is 2V Manual ranging For the Source V Measure I Source I Measure V and Ohms configurations the RANGE A and 9 keys are used to select a fixed range Note that the highest available range is dependent on the corresponding compliance setting See Ranging limitations page 7 2 Within range compliance or if the instrument displays the OVERFLOW message on a particular range select a higher range until an on range reading is displayed Use the low est range possible without causing an overflow to ensure best accuracy and resolution Auto ranging NOTE For the Model 2430 auto ranging cannot be performed while in the Pulse Mode Therefore all the following information on auto ranging is not applicable to the Model 2430 Pulse Mode For the Source V Measure I Source I Measure V and Ohms configurations press AUTO RANGE to enable auto ranging The
428. hat a hazardous voltage gt 30V rms is present when the OUTPUT is ON To prevent damage to DUT devices under test or external circuitry DO NOT program the V Source to levels that exceed the voltage pro tection limit Use caution when floating the SourceMeter gt 30V rms Front panel V source protection To program V source protection from the front panel 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V 2 Select PROTECTION from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Select the desired protection value then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote command V source protection Use the SOURce VOLTage PROTection command to program the V source protection value via remote See Section 18 Set voltage limit for details For example the follow ing command sets the protection value for the Model 2400 or 2410 to 20V SOUR VOLT PROT 20 Source delay NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The following infor mation assumes that the Model 2430 is in the DC Mode of operation Vpls or Ipls displayed To select the DC Mode press CONFIG and then SOURCE V or I select SHAPE from the available menu items and then select DC The source delay options are used to set the settling time for the source This source delay is the delay phase of the Source Delay Measure SDM cycle See Section 6 The auto delay option is used to automatically set the delay The delay period is range dependen
429. he next byte of data 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 3 Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is also frequently referred to as the GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer with out using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines that are used for both data and with most commands Five bus manage ment lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typical set up for controlled operation is shown in Figure D 1 Generally a system will contain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators controller talker and listener The controller does what its name implies it controls the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instrument any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener There are two categories of controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control from one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited
430. he 80psec is the minimum overhead times that can be achieved If the SourceMeter is configured to perform additional operations e g math calculations relative store sweep this time will be higher 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 5 Pulse width delay When the pulse width setting is greater than the sum of the signal measurement and over head times a delay is used to achieve the desired pulse width The pulse width delay can be calculated as follows Pulse Width Delay PW Sig Meas 80psec Where PW is the pulse width setting Sig Meas is the signal measurement time 80usec is the minimum pulse width overhead time For example assume the pulse width setting is Imsec and the signal measurement time is 167psec For the 80usec overhead time the pulse width delay is 753psec Pulse Width Delay Imsec 167psec 80usec 753usec NOTE Ifthe result of the pulse width delay calculation is a negative number pulse width delay is set to Osec A negative number indicates that the pulse width set ting is too short not achievable If the result of the pulse width delay calculation is a negative number the mini mum delay that can be set is 60usec For example if the result of the delay cal culation is 33usec the delay will be set to 60usec Resolution for setting pulse width delay is 10usec Output off time Reference and zero measurements As previously explained in Pulse
431. he Error Queue of messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 113 Simulate key presses KEY SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press Parameters lt NRf gt 1 RANGE up arrow key 2 SOURCE down arrow key 3 left arrow key 4 MENU key 5 FCTN key 6 FILTER key 7 SPEED key 8 EDIT key 9 AUTO key 10 right arrow key 11 EXIT key 12 V SOURCE key 13 LIMITS key 14 STORE key 15 V MEAS key 16 TOGGLE key 17 RANGE down arrow key 18 ENTER key 19 I SOURCE key 20 TRIG key 21 RECALL key 22 I MEAS key 23 LOCAL key 24 ON OFF key 2500 26 SOURCE up arrow key 27 SWEEP key 28 CONFIG key 29 Q key 30 REL key 31 DIGITS key 32 FRONT REAR key Query KEY Query last pressed key Description This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select the voltage measurement function V you can send the fol lowing command to simulate pressing the V MEAS key isyst key 15 18 114 SCPI Command Reference Figure 18 3 Key press codes 15 22 29 5 KEITHLEY 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual The parameter listing provides the key press code in numeric order Fig ure 18 3 also illustrates the key press codes The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent over the bus and the SourceMeter is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed either physi cally or with KEY
432. he I Source a voltage compliance is set Compliance defines the maximum absolute output value the Model 2430 can output To set the pulse level press EDIT to select the source field and key in the desired source value To set compliance press EDIT to select the compliance field and key in the desired compliance value NOTE Details on setting source pulse and compliance levels are provided in Step 2 of Section 3 Front panel source measure procedure Step 6 Select measurement function and range Select the desired measurement function by pressing MEAS V or MEAS I When measuring the source i e Source V Measure V you cannot select the range using the measurement RANGE keys The selected source range determines the measurement range When not measuring the source i e Source V Measure I use the manual RANGE keys to select range auto range is not valid in the Pulse Mode For best accuracy select the lowest possible range NOTE With the 100V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 10A With the 10A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 100V Measurement range is limited by the compliance setting For example if voltage compliance is 1V 2V compliance range the highest voltage measurement range that can be selected is 2V 5 14 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Step 7 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressi
433. he next measurement F 20 Contact Check Function TOUT lt NRf gt TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT lt NRf gt 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Specify contact check timeout Parameters lt NRf gt 0 00000 to 999 99990 sec Contact check timeout Query Description TOUT Query contact check timeout This command programs the contact check timeout interval When con tact event detection is enabled SOURce lt name gt page F 19 the SourceMeter will wait the specified timeout period before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to the next measurement If the timeout interval is set to 0 with contact event detection enabled the unit will wait indefinitely Contact check defaults Table F 5 summarizes default settings for various contact check modes along with the equivalent remote commands Table F 5 Contact check defaults Mode Default setting Remote command Contact check mode Contact check threshold resistance Limit 4 test Limit 4 Digital I O failure pattern Contact check event detection Contact check timeout Disabled 50Q Disabled 15 Disabled 0 SYSTem CCHeck OFF SYStem CCHeck RESistance 50 CALCulate2 LIMit4 STATe OFF CALCulate2 LIMit4 SOURce2 15 TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce IMMediate TRIGger SEQuence2 TOUT 0 Bench S YSTem PRESet and GPIB R ST defaults are the same G GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 2 GPIB 488 1 Protocol 2400 Series SourceM
434. he output off 1 Select ohms measurement function Press MEAS Q to select the ohms measurement function 2 Select auto ohms measurement method Select the auto ohms measurement method as follows e Press CONFIG then Q e Select SOURCE then press ENTER e Select AUTO then press ENTER e Press EXIT to return to normal display Note that the SourceMeter will be configured to Source I and Measure V Also the I Source level and V Compliance limit are based on the measurement range and cannot be edited NOTE Use the manual ohms mode and the V source method when high speed settling is required 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 5 3 Select measurement range Use the RANGE A and W keys to select a range appropriate for the expected ohms reading or use autorange by pressing AUTO When using manual ranging select ing the most sensitive lowest range provides the best accuracy Autorange auto matically goes to the most sensitive range 4 Turn output on Turn the output on by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will turn on to indicate the output is on 5 Observe reading on display The SourceMeter will go into compliance if you exceed the maximum ohms mea surement range 6 Turn output off When finished turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator light will turn off Manual ohms measurements Perform the following steps to perform manual ohms measu
435. he pass and fail conditions will be displayed as P OVP and F OVP respectively Step 6 Stop testing process The testing process can be terminated at any time by again pressing LIMIT When using a handler the testing process will stop after the last DUT is tested 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote limit testing Limit commands Limit Testing 12 23 Table 12 1 summarizes remote commands to control limit testing parameters while Table 12 2 summarizes commands to control the Digital I O port bit parameters for limit testing See Section 18 CALCulate2 and SOURce2 for more details on these commands Table 12 1 Limit commands Command Description CALCulate2 FEED lt name gt CALCulate2 DATA CALCulate2 LIMit COMPliance FAIL lt name gt CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer lt n gt CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer lt n gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMitX PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe lt state gt CALCulate2 LIMitX STATe lt state gt CALCulate2 LIMit 1 FAIL CALCulate2 LIMitX FAIL CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SMLocation lt location gt Select limit
436. he product of finite value counts cannot exceed 2500 See Section 11 Trigger models for details Perform the following steps to set the arm count 1 Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu 2 Select ARM LAYER from the displayed choices and press ENTER 3 Select COUNT from the displayed choices and press ENTER 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 11 For continuous pulse output select INFINITE press ENTER and proceed to step 6 Otherwise select FINITE press ENTER and proceed to the next step to set the arm count Enter the desired arm count value and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Perform the following steps to set the trigger count SP Soh Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu Select TRIG LAYER from the displayed choices and press ENTER Select COUNT from the displayed choices and press ENTER Enter the desired trigger count value and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Disable enable auto zero Pulse speed can be increased by disabling auto zero However zero drift will eventually corrupt the accuracy of the pulse measurement To re establish an accurate pulse measure ment enable auto zero or change the speed setting oP Sh Press MENU to display the main menu Select A D CTRL from the displayed choices and press ENTER Select AUTO ZERO from the displayed cho
437. he relative 18 52 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual timestamp is reset SYSTem TIME RESet The timestamp for each reading sent over the bus is referenced in seconds to the start time After 99 999 999 seconds the timer resets to zero and starts over NOTE Timestamp values are approximate See Section 9 for details Limit test bits Timestamp is also available for buffer readings Timestamp can be refer enced to the first reading stored in the buffer absolute format which is timestamped at 0 seconds or can provide the time between each reading delta format The TRACe TSTamp FORMat command is used to select the absolute or delta format STATus A status word is available to provide status information con cerning SourceMeter operation The 24 bit status word is sent in a deci mal form and has to be converted by the user to the binary equivalent to determine the state of each bit in the word For example if the status value is 65 the binary equivalent is 0000000000001000001 Bits 0 and 6 are set The significance of each status bit is explained as follows Bit 0 OFLO Set to 1 if measurement was made while in over range Bit 1 Filter Set to 1 if measurement was made with the filter enabled Bit 2 Front Rear Set to 1 if FRONT terminals are selected Bit 3 Compliance Set to 1 if in real compliance Bit 4 OVP Set to 1 if the over voltage protection limit was reache
438. he timestamp format see Timestamp format in this section Displaying other buffer readings To display the other source readings stored in the buffer display the desired memory loca tion number The A and Y keys for SOURCE and RANGE increment and decrement the selected digit of the location number Cursor position is controlled by the lt and keys When scrolling forward past the last stored reading the buffer wraps to the first stored reading Conversely when scrolling in reverse past the first stored reading the buffer wraps to the last stored reading A different key click tone announces the wrap around The memory location number can also be keyed in using the 0 through 9 number keys Position the cursor on the appropriate digit and press the desired number key The cursor then moves right to the next least significant digit For example to display reading 0236 position the cursor all the way to the left MSD and press 0 2 3 6 Note that if keying in a number that exceeds the buffer size the reading at the highest memory location is displayed To exit from the data store recall mode press EXIT Buffer statistics With the data store in the recall mode buffer statistics are displayed by using the TOG GLE key Use the TOGGLE key to sequence through the statistics and return the SourceMeter to the normal data store recall state Pressing EXIT at any time returns the instrument to the normal source measure display state
439. he unit for any range above the upper limit ohms only SENSe 1 CURRent DC PROTection LEVel lt n gt SENSe 1 VOLTage DC PROTection LEVel lt n gt Parameters 2400 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 DEFault MINimum MAXimum 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 DEFault MINimum MAXimum Set current compliance Set voltage compliance Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 1 05A 210V 1 05A 210V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 1 05A 1100V 1 05A 1100V Current compliance limit Voltage compliance limit 105uA 21V 3 15A 63V 3 15A 63V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 69 Query Description 2425 and 2430 DC Mode lt n gt 3 15 to 3 15 Current compliance limit 105 to 105 Voltage compliance limit DEFault 105uA 21V MINimum 3 15A 105V MAXimum 3 15A 105V 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 10 5 to 10 5 Current compliance limit 105 to 105 Voltage compliance limit DEFault 105uA 21V MINimum 10 5A 105V MAXimum 10 5A 105V 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Current compliance limit 42 to 42 Voltage compliance limit DEFault 105uA 21V MINimum 5 25A 42V MAXimum 5 25A 42V LEVel Query compliance value LEVel DEFault Query RST default compliance LEVel MINimum Query minimum allowable compliance LEVel
440. hen the measure ment is made Table 13 3 Output configuration programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR VOLT 10 Output 10V OUTP INT STAT ON Enable interlock OUTP SMOD HIMP Select high impedance output off mode SOUR CLE AUTO ON Enable auto off mode READ Trigger and acquire readings Connect pins 8 and 9 of digital I O port to simulate closed interlock switch 14 Remote Operations Differences remote vs local operation Summarizes remote operation enhancements and local to remote and remote to local transitions Selecting an interface Describes how to select between the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces GPIB operation Covers GPIB bus standards bus connections and primary address selection General bus commands Describes general bus commands used for fundamen tal GPIB control Front panel GPIB operation Summarizes GPIB error messages status indica tors and using the LOCAL key Programming syntax Describes the basic programming syntax for both com mon and SCPI commands RS 232 interface operation Outlines use of the RS 232 interface to control the SourceMeter via remote 14 2 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Differences remote vs local operation Operation enhancements remote operation There are some source measure operations you can do over the IEEE 488 bus and RS 232 interface that you cann
441. her settings are not affected including those for the TRACe buffer data store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 3 Remote to local transition When changing from remote to local operation the following actions occur e The SourceMeter stops performing source measure operations and returns to the idle state ARM annunciator off e All sweep operations are aborted All user defined display messages are cancelled The display is turned on if it was previously turned off e Source autoranging is disabled e Concurrent measurements are enabled e Ifresistance was enabled source readback is enabled e The display is set to the default toggle state e Readings are continuously taken if OUTPUT is on Selecting an interface The SourceMeter supports two built in remote interfaces GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus e RS 232 interface You can use only one interface at a time The factory interface selection is the GPIB bus You can select the interface only from the front panel The interface selection is stored in non volatile memory it does not change when power has been off or after a remote inter face reset The GPIB bus is the IEEE 488 interface You must select a unique address for the Source Meter The address is displayed when the instrument is turned on At the factory the address is set to 24 The RS 232 interface is a serial interface Programmable aspects of this inter
442. iance limit and select measurement function and range Configure the Model 2430 for these aspects of operation as explained in steps 1 through 3 Section 3 Basic source measure procedure Note that the AUTO measurement range is not valid in the Pulse Mode Make sure the fixed measurement range that you select can accommodate every measurement point in the sweep Step 3 Configure sweep Select and configure the sweep as explained in Configuring and running a sweep Step 4 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the last pulse in the sweep is sourced the output will turn off and stay off A sweep that is in progress can be stopped at any time by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key or the EXIT key Step 5 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information See Section 9 Data Store 10 34 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Pulse Mode sweep operation The commands for Pulse Mode operation are provided in Table 5 1 in Section 5 while the staircase sweep commands are provided in Table 10 3 Table 10 9 provides a typical remote command sequence for performing the 3 point Pulse Model linear staircase sweep shown in Figure 10 10 Table 10 9 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB default conditions SOUR FUNC PULS S
443. ices and press ENTER Select DISABLE or ENABLE and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu Remote command Pulse Mode configuration For remote operation the commands to select and configure the Pulse Mode are provided in Table 5 1 5 12 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Pulse Mode operation NOTE The following procedure assumes that the Model 2430 is already connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 WARNING Hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when performing fast pulse operations To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO terminal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connection can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Front panel pulse measure procedure NOTE The following procedure assumes that you are already familiar with Section 3 Basic source measure procedure Step 1 Select Pulse Mode and set pulse width and pulse delay Press CONFIG SOURCE V or I to display source pulse configuration menu From the SHAPE menu item select PULSE and press ENTER Pulse width and pulse delay can then be set from the PULSE WIDTH and DELAY items of the menu When finished press EXIT to return to the normal display For details se
444. ies SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 15 Remote command pulse measure operation Basic pulse commands Table 5 1 summarizes the commands to perform pulse measure operations See Section 18 for more information on using these commands Table 5 1 Basic pulse measure commands Command Description SOURce PULSe WIDth lt n gt SOURce PULSe DELay lt n gt SOURce FUNCtion lt name gt SOURce CURRent MODE FIXed SOURce VOLTage MODE FIXed SOURce CURRent RANGe lt n gt SOURce VOLTage RANGe lt n gt SOURce CURRent LEVel lt n gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt n gt SENSe FUNCtion lt function gt SENSe FUNCtion OFF ALL SENSe CURRent NPLC lt n gt SENSe VOLTage NPLC lt n gt SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt SENSe CURRent RANGe lt n gt SENSe VOLTage RANGe lt n gt ARM COUNt lt n gt TRIGger COUNt lt n gt READ INITiate ABORt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe Select Pulse Mode of operation Set pulse width in sec n 0 00015 to 0 0050 Set pulse delay in sec n 0 to 9999 999 Select source function name VOLTage or CURRent Select fixed sourcing mode for I source Select fixed sourcing mode for V source Select I source range n range Select V source range n range Set I source amplitude n amplitude in amps Set V source amplitude n amplitude in volts Select measur
445. ies must be used in accordance with its specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating in formation and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock If or Pe is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The A symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading in a manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in a manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument
446. igh power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off See Overheating protection page 6 6 and Power equa tions to avoid shutdown page 6 7 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output operation Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 3A and 1A ranges are derated as follows 3A Range Limits linearly derated from 3A OV to 2A 20V 3A OV to 2A 20V 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A OV to 0 5A 100V 1A OV to 0 5A 100V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 7 Model 2430 Pulse Mode In Figure 6 7B for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the 10A and 100V magnitudes are nomi nal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 10 5A and 105V These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C high power operation could overheat the SourceMeter causing the output to turn off The heavy solid lines show the limits for an output duty cycle of 8 Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 10A range are derated as follows 10A Range Limits linearly derated from 10A OV to 6A 100V 10A OV to 6A 100V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 5 or less
447. ilter Off Averaging type Repeat Count 10 GPIB address No effect Getting Started Table 1 4 continued Factory default settings 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual BENCH or GPIB Setting default Guard Cable Limit tests DigOut Size 4 bit Mode Grading Binning control Immediate Auto clear Disabled Delay 0 00001 sec Clear pattern 15 H W limits Control Disabled Fail mode In compliance Cmpl pattern 15 S W limits Lim 2 3 5 12 Control Disabled Low limit 1 0 Low pattern 15 High limit 1 0 High pattern 15 Pass all tests Pass pattern 15 Source memory Next location EOT mode EOT Numbers No effect Ohms source mode Auto Offset compensated ohms Off Output Off Interlock Disabled Off state Normal Auto off Disabled Power on default No effect Model 2410 default off state is guard 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 1 4 continued Factory default settings BENCH or GPIB Setting default Pulse Mode 2430 only Pulse delay 0 0s Pulse width 0 20ms Ranging measure Auto range Enabled Rel Off Value 0 0 RS 232 No effect Sense mode 2 wire Source delay lms Auto delay Enabled Source shape 2430 only DC mode Speed Normal 1 PLC Sweep Linear staircase Start OV or OA Stop OV or OA Step OV or OA Sweep count 1 Sweep Pts 2500 Source ranging Best fixed Voltage protection NONE Triggered source Control Disabled Scale factor 1 0 Triggering Arm l
448. ilures in the test sequence will not change the defined digital output pattern Note that the output value can be specified as a binary octal decimal or hexadecimal value 18 38 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern For non decimal parameters convert the decimal value to its binary octal or hexadecimal equivalent Decimal OUT 4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT 1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V OUT 4 not used in 3 bit mode values 0 to 7 The SourceMeter can be configured to place the defined fail bit pattern on the digital output immediately when a fail condition occurs or it can wait until all testing on a device package is completed operation leaves trigger layer See Composite testing page 18 40 and BCONtrol lt name gt page 18 43 for details 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 39 PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt NDN CALCulate2 LIMitx PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Set sorting mode pass pattern x 2 3 5 12 Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt Oto b111 3
449. in the list sourcing mode and the product of the arm and trigger count should be at least the same as the number of source points in the list Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the current or voltage source function See Select function modes page 18 73 Use the CURRent MODE or VOLTage MODE command to select the LIST sourcing mode See Select sourcing mode page 18 74 The trigger count is set using the TRIGger COUNt command See TRIGger sub system page 18 120 APPend lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST CURRent APPend lt NRf list gt SOURce 1 LIST VOLTage APPend lt NRf list gt Parameters Add value s to l Source list Add value s to V Source list lt NRf list gt NRf NRf NRf 2400 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 I Source value 210 to 210 V Source value 2410 NRf 1 05 to 1 05 I Source value 1100 to 1100 V Source value 2420 NRf 3 15 to 3 15 I Source value 63 to 63 V Source value 2425 and 2430 DC Mode NRf 3 15 to 3 15 I Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2430 Pulse Mode NRf 10 5 to 10 5 I Source value 105 to 105 V Source value 2440 NRf 5 25 to 5 25 I Source value 42 to 42 V Source value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 93 Description This command is used to add one or more values up to 100 to a source list that already exists The source values are appended to the end of the list By using multiple appended lists up to
450. ing and limit tests Factory defaults shown in boldface Using contact check 1 Make connections to the DUT Figure F 3 2 Press the MENU key select A D CTRL then choose CONT CHK and press ENTER 3 Select ENABLE then press ENTER At the CONT CHK RESISTANCE prompt select the desired contact check thresh old resistance 2Q 15Q or 50Q then press ENTER See Table F 1 for recommendations 5 Use EXIT to back out of the menu structure Press CONFIG then Q then select SENSE MODE and press ENTER 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function F 13 Select 4 WIRE then press ENTER Press EXIT to return to normal display Select the Q function and set range then turn on the output Observe the display for an OPEN LEAD message when the contact check fails Using event detection with contact check Nea aie Enable contact check as previously explained Press CONFIG then TRIG Select CONTACT CHECK then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER Set the contact check timeout then press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Using pass fail with contact check SD er ee Enable contact check as previously explained Press CONFIG then LIMIT Select DIGOUT then press ENTER Select SIZE then press ENTER Select fail pattern size 3 BIT or 4 BIT then press ENTER Select MODE then press ENTER Select the limit testing mode GRADING or SORTING then pres
451. ing another command or query before reading the response to the first query For example the following sequence of commands will cause an error 410 iSYST ERR OPC This sequence generates an error because you must read the response to SYST ERR before sending the OPC query 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status and Error Messages B 9 Incorrectly configured IEEE 488 driver The driver must be configured so that when talking on the bus it sends line feed with EOI as the terminator and when lis tening on the bus it expects line feed with EOI as the terminator See the reference manual for your particular IEEE 488 interface 420 Query UNTERMINATED This error occurs when you address the instrument to talk and there is no response mes sage to send The most likely causes are Not sending a query You must send a valid query to the instrument before address ing it to talk Sending an invalid query If you have sent a query and still get this error make sure that the instrument is processing the query without error For example sending an ill formed query that generates an error 113 Undefined header and then addressing the instrument to talk will generate an error 420 Query UNTERMI NATED as well Valid query following an invalid command This situation can occur when you send multiple commands or queries program message units within one command string program message When the SourceMeter d
452. ing the source lets you measure the actual output voltage With the use of the TOGGLE key you can display the measurement of any two of the three functions volts amps and ohms concurrently For remote operation you can measure all three functions concurrently See Section 17 and Section 18 Source readback accuracy SourceMeter measurement accuracy is better than sourcing accuracy see the source and measure specifications in Appendix A For that reason select the same measurement and source functions then use the measured value instead of the programmed source value for optimum accuracy 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 31 Basic circuit configurations Source When configured to source current I Source as shown in Figure 6 15 the SourceMeter functions as a high impedance current source with voltage limit capability and can mea sure current I Meter or voltage V Meter For voltage measurements the sense selection 2 wire local or 4 wire remote determines where the measurement is made In local sense voltage is measured at the Input Output terminals of the SourceMeter In 4 wire remote sense voltage can be measured directly at the DUT using the Sense ter minals This eliminates any voltage drops that may be in the test leads or connections between the SourceMeter and the DUT NOTE The current source does not require or use the sense leads to enhance current source accuracy With
453. ing voltage drop The volt age drop is then compared with one set of limits to determine if the diode passes or fails and should be discarded Voltage measurements for failing diodes are also compared against a more restricted range of limits to determine if they should be routed to QA Quality Assurance for further analysis 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 25 Test parameters for this test include e Source Function current e Sense Function voltage e Source Current 100mA e Source Delay 100ms e Limit 2 Upper Value 0 85V e Limit 2 Lower Value 0 75V e Limit 3 Upper Value 0 82V e Limit 3 Lower Value 0 78V Figure 12 11 demonstrates graphically how parts are sorted Diodes with a voltage between 0 78V and 0 82V are considered good and will pass the limits test Diodes that test with a slightly wider voltage range are routed to QA for analysis while those with the largest voltage tolerance will be discarded Figure 12 11 Diode pass fail limits Low Limit 2 Upper Limit 3 0 75V Low Limit3 82V Upper Limit 2 0 78V 0 85V Table 12 3 summarizes the basic SCPI command sequence for performing a limit test for the diode breakdown described above and Table 12 4 summarizes pass fail parameters Note that the test connections shown in Figure 10 8 can be used for this test NOTE Additional programming steps will be necessary to test the values returned by the CALC2 LIM2 FAIL and CALC LIM3
454. inning info to IMM handler A limit test is performed IMMediate or after a sweep list or memory sequence END BCONtrol Query binning control MODE lt name gt Set how limit results control Digital I O GRAD lines GRADing or SORTing MODE Query limit results control of Digital I O lines Note Use LIMit5 through LIMit12 to control Limit 5 through Limit 12 tests respectively For example send LIM5 STAT ON to enable Limit 5 send LIM10 FAIL to return the result of Limit 10 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI memory CALCulate2 CLEar Clear test results IMMediate Clear latest limit test result and reset Digital I O port back to SOURce2 TTL settings AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable clearing of test results ON when INITiate command is sent AUTO Query state of auto clear PASS Define pass digital output pattern Sorting mode only if limits 2 3 5 12 disabled SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output pass pattern 0 to 7 15 lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to 15 4 bit SOURce2 Query pass bit pattern SMLocation lt NRf gt Specify next PASS Source Memory NEXT NEXT Sweep location NEXT location or 1 to 100 SMLocation Query PASS memory location FAIL Define fail digital output pattern SOURce2 lt NRf gt Specify output fail pattern 0 to 7 15 lt NDN gt 3 bit 0 to
455. instrument is in the talker active state Place the unit in the talk state by addressing it to talk with the correct MTA My Talk Address command TALK is off when the unit is in the talker idle state Place the unit in the talker idle state by sending an UNT Untalk command addressing it to listen or sending the IFC Interface Clear command LSTN This indicator is on when the SourceMeter is in the listener active state which is activated by addressing the instrument to listen with the correct MLA My Listen Address com mand LSTN is off when the unit is in the listener idle state Place the unit in the listener idle state by sending UNL Unlisten addressing it to talk or sending IFC Interface Clear command over the bus SRQ You can program the instrument to generate a service request SRQ when one or more errors or conditions occur When this indicator is on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have been cleared See Section 15 Status Structure for more information LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restores local operation of the instrument Pressing the LOCAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to nor mal if a user defined message was displayed If the LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inoperative For safety reasons the OUTPUT key will still
456. ion Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Overview NOTE The Pulse Mode is only available for the Model 2430 The documentation in this section does not apply to the Models 2400 2410 2425 and 2440 While in the Pulse Mode the Model 2430 can output one or more pulses A pulse is formed by turning the output on for a period of time and then turning the output off OV or OA A single pulse period is shown in Figure 5 1 The Model 2430 can output current pulses up to 10 5A at 105V or voltage pulses up to 105V at 10 5A Pulse output polarity can be positive or negative While in the fixed source mode the output will alternate between the set pulse level and zero OV or 0A When per forming a sweep the output will alternate between each sweep step point and zero See Section 10 for details on sweep operation A pulse reading is only performed while the output is on When the output is off OV or OA a reading is not performed For remote operation the pulse reading can be disabled Auto and manual ohms measurements can be performed while in the Pulse Mode Also offset compensated ohms is available as a math function FCTN However ohms source readback cannot be enabled in Pulse Mode Figure 5 1 Pulse period Pulse Width Output On Time Output Off Time gt OV or OA Pulse Period 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 5 3 Pulse charact
457. ion 2 Restore GPIB default conditions Current Source Function Current Sense Function Set 105mA Compliance Set 100mA Current Measure Range Set Source Delay to 1 10V Source Voltage Send Current A Read ings to Buffer Set Limit 1 on CALC2 LIM1 COMP FAIL IN Set Fail Mode to In Compliance CALC2 LIM1 COMP SOUR2 10 Set Digital Output Pattern for Compliance Failure 10 30 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 STAT ON Set Limit2 on Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 UPP 4E 2 Set Upper Limit to 40mA Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 LOW 3E 3 Set Lower Limit to 30mA Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 UPP SOUR2 6 Set Digital Output Pat tern for Upper Limit 2 Failure Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 LIM2 LOW SOUR2 7 Set Digital Output Pat tern for Lower Limit 2 Failure Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 cLIM PASS SOUR2 15 Set Digital Output Pattern for Limit 2 Passing Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM MODE GRAD Set Limit Results to Grading Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM BCON END Set Binning Control to End Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM PASS SML NEXT Set SML Pass Location Call OutputCmd intGPIB CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML 100 Set SML Fail Location Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR MEM SAVE 3 Save in source memo
458. ion not found Attempted to delete a named math expression that cannot be found 807 Definition not allowed Attempted to define an expression that has not been previously named 808 Expression cannot be deleted Attempted to delete one of the built in math expressions See DELete SELected lt name gt page 18 29 809 Source memory location revised Occurs when a SOURce MEMory sweep location references an expression that no longer exists 811 Not an operator or number Defined a null math expression by not using a valid operator or number 812 Mismatched parenthesis Number of open parentheses must be the same as the number of closed parentheses For example CALC1 MATH EXPR 2 sin VOLT generates this error 813 Not a number of data handle An invalid floating point num ber or symbol other than VOLT CURR RES or TIME appears in the math expression 18 26 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 814 Mismatched brackets Improper use of brackets for vectored math expression indices For example CALC1 MATH EXPR VOLT 0 CURR 0 generates this error 815 Too many parenthesis Too many closed parentheses were detected For example CALC1 MATH EXPR In VOLT gener ates this error 816 Entire expression not parsed Occurs when the input expres sion does not produce a function for the SourceMeter to ca
459. ion on the READ command 9 6 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote command data store Data store commands Table 9 1 summarizes commands associated with data store operation See Section 18 TRACe subsystem and CALCulate3 for more detailed information on these commands Table 9 1 Data store commands Command Description TRACe DATA Read contents of buffer TRACe CLEar Clear buffer TRACe FREE Read buffer memory status TRACe POINts lt n gt Specify buffer size n buffer size TRACe POINts ACTual Query number of stored readings TRACe FEED lt name gt Specify reading source Name SENSe 1 raw readings TRACe FEED CONTrol lt name gt TRACe TSTamp FOR Mat lt name gt CALCulate3 FOR Mat lt name gt CALCulate3 DATA CALCulate 1 Calcl readings or CALCulate2 Calc2 readings Start or stop buffer Name NEXT fill buffer and stop or NEVer disable buffer Select timestamp format Name ABSolute reference to first buffer reading or DELTa time between buffer readings Select buffer statistic name MEAN SDEViation MAXimum MINimum or PKPK Read buffer statistic data If TRACe FEED is set to SENSe 1 this command will return one V I Q and MATH result 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Store 9 7 Data store programming example Table 9 2 summarizes the commands for basic data store operation These commands set
460. ion to 4 digits e NORMAL Sets speed to 1 00 PLC and sets display resolution to 54 digits HI ACCURACY Sets speed to 10 00 PLC and sets display resolution to 642 digits e OTHER Use to set speed to any PLC value from 0 01 to 10 Display resolution is not changed when speed is set with this option NOTE After setting speed display resolution can be changed using the DIGITS key 7 8 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual PULSE SPEED NPLC Model 2430 Pulse Mode Press SPEED or CONFIG SPEED to display the speed choices 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 NOTE Display resolution for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode is not affected by the speed setting Figure 7 1 Speed configuration menu tree FAST MED NORMAL HI ACCURACY OTHER 0 01PLC 0 10PLC 1 00PLC 10PLC Set speed 3 digits A digits 5 digits 6 digits 0 01 to 10PLC Remote speed programming Speed commands Table 7 3 summarizes commands to control speed See Section 18 Set measurement speed for more information NOTE The speed setting is global which means that setting the speed for one function affects the speed for the other functions However the speed setting is stored in source memory and you can use this feature to change speed during a sweep See Section 10 for details on using source memory Table 7 3 Speed commands Command Description SENSe CURRent NPLCycles lt
461. is arm event you will be prompted to select the state of the event detection bypass 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Triggering 11 9 ARM OUT Use to configure the arm layer output trigger LINE Select the Trigger Link line for the output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF the arm layer output triggers TRIG LAYER EXIT ON enables an output trigger on exiting the trigger layer while TL ENTER ON enables a trigger on entering the trigger layer COUNT Specify the arm count FINITE programmable count or INFINITE never ending count TRIG LAYER Use this menu item to configure the trigger layer of the trigger model TRIGGER IN Use to select the detection event for the trigger layer IMMEDIATE Event detection occurs immediately TRIGGER LINK After selecting this trigger in source you will be prompted in sequence as follows gt TRIG IN TLINK LINE Select the input line 1 2 3 or 4 for the Trigger Link gt EVENT DETECT BYPASS Set the bypass for the Source Event Detector With ONCE operation will loop around the Source Event Detector With NEVER selected operation will wait for an input trigger gt TRIGGER IN EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF trigger in events SOURCE DELAY and MEASURE With a trigger in event ON operation will wait at that event for an input trigger With the trigger in event OFF operation will not wai
462. is finished executing a command The follow ing command controls NDAC hold off SYSTem MEP HOLDoff ON OFF The default is OFF but NRFD hold off will still be enabled and will prevent an instrument from accepting further commands See Figure G 1 for the complete IEEE 488 handshake sequence Figure G 1 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DATA SOURCE DAV SOURCE VALID ALL READY ACCEPTOR NRFD ALL ACCEPTED NDAC ACCEPTOR 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 5 Trigger on talk Trigger on talk functionality has been added for the 488 1 protocol If a query has not been received by the instrument the SourceMeter will automatically assume a READ command has been sent when it is addressed to talk This technique increases GPIB speed by decreasing the transmission and parser times for the command Trigger on talk is extremely useful in the single shot reading mode RST default and is the main reason for a gt 2x speed improvement over the SCPI protocol Remember that the output must be on OUTput STATe ON before you can take readings The ARM SOUR BUS and ARM COUN INF commands are not supported by READ with the 488 1 protocol selected If you send one of these commands a DCL or IFC may be required to reset the GPIB Message available The MAV message available bit in the Serial Poll byte will be set when the query is fin ished being processed not when there is data available in the
463. istance Query ELEMents Query elements in data string This command is used to specify the elements to be included in the data string in response to the following queries FETCh READ MEASure TRACe DATA You can specify from one to all five elements Each element in the list must be separated by a comma These elements shown in Figure 18 1 are explained as follows NOTE An overflow reading reads as 9 9E37 VOLTage This element provides the voltage measurement or the pro grammed voltage source reading If sourcing voltage and measuring voltage this element will provide the voltage measurement measure reading takes priority over source reading If voltage is not sourced or measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used CURRent This element provides the current measurement or the programmed current source reading If sourcing current and measuring current this element will provide the current measurement measure reading takes priority over source reading If current is not sourced or measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used RESistance This element provides the resistance measurement If resistance is not measured the NAN not a number value of 9 91e37 is used TIME A timestamp is available to reference each group of readings to a point in time The relative timestamp operates as a timer that starts at zero seconds when the instrument is turned on or when t
464. ital I O line 4 at end of test In 4 bit mode EOT is not automatically controlled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 21 Figure 12 10 Limits configuration menu tree CONFIG LIMIT HW SW EOT LIMITS LIMITS PASS MODE FAIL LIM2 3 DIG 1 0 SRC MEM CONTROL MODE LIM5 12 PATTERN CONTROL Lorm HILIM BUSY BUSY EOT Performing front panel limit tests DIGOUT AUTO SIZE MODE CLEAR Perform the basic steps below to run limit tests from the front panel See Remote limit testing page 12 23 for remote commands and a programming example Step 1 Configure test system As previously explained your test system could be as simple as connecting a DUT to the SourceMeter Section 2 Connections or could employ the use of a handler for binning operations Adding a scanner to the test system allows you to test multi element devices such as resistor networks Step 2 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows 1 Select the desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I 2 Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values 3 Press MEAS V or MEAS I to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range Refer to Section 3 Basic source measure procedure for more information 12 22 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Step 3 Confi
465. ith contact check event detection enabled operation will hold up at the detector until contact check is performed and or a specified timeout period expires If contact check passes event detection is satisfied allowing operation to move on to perform the SOURCE Action If contact check fails open lead condition the SourceMeter will wait for the set timeout period to expire before issuing an open lead failure and moving on to perform the SOURCE Action The contact check timeout can be set from 0 00000 to 999 99990 sec onds Note however that setting the timeout to 0 seconds disables the timeout That is operation will be held up indefinitely until contact check detection occurs With contact check event detection disabled operation will not hold up at the contact check event detector and wait for contact check to be performed In other words event detection is satisfied immediately If contact check is disabled or the SourceMeter is in 2 wire sense mode event detection is disabled Sweep and binning considerations Sweep limitations Staircase and custom sweeps Auto ohms cannot be used with staircase and custom sweeps To use these types of sweeps with contact check you must use the manual ohms mode See Manual ohms measure ments page 4 5 for details Source memory sweeps Although the contact function is not stored in source memory Source memory sweep page 10 7 it is possible to mix both 2 and 4 wire sense mo
466. ith the 3A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode With the 100V source range selected the highest cur rent measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the highest volt age measurement range is 100V With the 3A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2430 Pulse Mode With the 100V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 10A With the 10A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 100V Auto range cannot be used in the Pulse Mode 2440 With the 40V source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 42V With the 5A source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 10 5V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual UPPer lt n gt SCPI Command Reference 18 65 SENSe 1 CURRent DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt IUPIDOWN Select range for amps SENSe 1 VOLTage DC RANGe UPPer lt n gt UPIDOWN Select range for volts SENSe 1 RESistance RANGe UPPer lt n gt UPIDOWN Parameters 2400 lt n gt 2410 lt n gt 2420 lt n gt 1 05 to 1 05 210 to 210 0 to 2 1e8 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 1 05 to 1 05 1100 to 1100 0 to 2 1e8 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 3 15 to 3 15 63 to 63 0 to 2 1e7 DEFault MINimum MAXimum UP DOWN 24
467. ith the V Source set to zero the SourceMeter will not source or sink power In practice the source value may not be exactly at zero Therefore the SourceMeter may source or sink a very small amount of power In most cases this source or sink power level is not significant 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 13 9 ZERO When in this output off state the ZER message is displayed instead of OFF and the SourceMeter is configured as follows When the V Source is the selected source The programmed V Source value remains on the display e Internally the V Source is set to OV The current compliance setting remains the same as the output on value Real and range compliance detection remains active e Measurements are performed and displayed When the I Source is the selected source The programmed I Source value remains on the display e Internally the V Source is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to the programmed Source I value or to 0 5 full scale of the present current range whichever is greater e Measurements are performed and displayed While in the ZERO output off state the SourceMeter can be used as an I Meter The ZERO output off state can also be used with the V Source and Output Auto Off to generate very quick pulsed voltage waveforms For example with Output Auto Off enabled you can generate 0 to 5V pulses While in
468. l Logarithmic staircase sweep This sweep is similar to the linear staircase sweep The steps however are done on a loga rithmic scale as shown in the example sweep in Figure 10 2 This is a 5 point log sweep from 1 to 10V As with the staircase sweep the delay period is the same for all steps Figure 10 2 Logarithmic staircase sweep example 5 point sweep from 1 to 10 volts Log Scale 10 Stop 10 5 6234 Volts 3 1623 1 7783 Log Points 5 fF ft Tofo Measure 1 Measure 2 Measure 3 Measure 4 Measure 5 X Measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 5 The programmable parameters for a log sweep include the start and stop levels and the number of measurement points for the sweep The specified start stop and point parame ters determine the logarithmic step size for the sweep Step size for the sweep in Figure 10 2 is calculated as follows log10 stop log10 start Points 1 _ log10 10 log10 1 5 1 Log Step Size 0 0 4 0 25 Thus the five log steps for this sweep are 0 0 25 0 50 0 75 and 1 00 The actual V Source levels at these points are listed in Table 10 1 the V Source level is the anti log of the log step Table 10 1 Logarithmic sweep points Measure point Log step V Source level volts Point 1 0 1 Point 2 0 25 1 7783 Point 3 0 50 3 1623 Point 4 0 75 5 6234 Point 5 1 0 10 When this sweep is trigg
469. l IMMEDIATE END BCONtrol LIMit4 STATe ON OFF STATe SOURce2 lt NRf gt SOURce2 FAIL FORMat ELEMents SENSe 1 STATus Queries installed options Response message indicates the presence or absence of options For example 0 No options present CONTACT CHECK Contact check board present Set digital I O port bit size 3 or 4 Query bit size of digital I O port Selects limit testing mode grading or sorting Figure F 5 and Figure F 6 Query limit testing mode Selects binning control for grading mode immediate at fail ure or end of sweep Query binning control mode Bit 10 of the Measurement Event Register represents the result of the LIMit4 test Enables or disables contact check If there is an open lead the limit test fails LIMit4 is performed before all other limit tests Query contact check pass fail state Pattern to be placed on the I O lines if Limit4 test fails lt NRf gt 0 to 7 for 3 bit or 0 to 15 for 4 bit Query I O pattern for Limit4 test failure Query if contact check failed 1 fail Specify the STATus data element 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table F 3 continued Contact check remote commands Contact Check Function F 15 Command Description FORMat ELEMents CALCulate STATus SYSTem RSENse ON SYSTem RSENse SYSTem CCHeck ON OFF SYSTem CCHeck SYSTem CCHEck RESistance lt NRf gt SYSTem CCHeck RESistance TRIGg
470. l be stored in the Sample Buffer Data from this buffer is then routed to other enabled data flow blocks Assuming that all functions are enabled the data that is output by the read commands FETCh CALC1 DATA CALC2 DATA TRACe DATA and CALC3 DATA depend on which data elements are selected With all elements selected available data will include voltage current and resistance readings as well as the time stamp and status infor mation Note that if a measurement function is not enabled then either the NAN not a number value or the source reading will instead be used See Section 18 FORMat sub system for details After all source measure operations are completed the SourceMeter returns to the idle state The data stored in the Sample Buffer will remain there until data from another source measure cycle overwrites the buffer Data in the Sample Buffer is lost if the SourceMeter goes to the local state REM annunciator off NOTE With no data in the Sample Buffer the FETCh CALCulate1 DATA and CALCulate2 DATA commands to read data will display the message Data corrupt or stale FETCh This command is used to read data stored in the Sample Buffer If for example there are 20 data arrays stored in the Sample Buffer then all 20 data arrays will be sent to the com puter when FETCh is executed Note that FETCh does not affect data in the Sample Buffer Thus subsequent executions of FETCh acquire the same dat
471. l data storage into the buffer The commands are summarized in Table 18 10 TRACel DATA The bar I indicates that TRACe or DATA can be used as the root command for this sub system From this point on the documentation in this manual uses TRACe If you prefer to use DATA simply replace all the TRACe command words with DATA Read and clear buffer DATA TRACe DATA Read contents of buffer Description When this command is sent and the SourceMeter is addressed to talk all the readings stored in the data store are sent to the computer The format used to send readings over the bus is controlled from the FORMat subsystem 18 118 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data CLEar TRACe CLEar Clear buffer Description This action command is used to clear the buffer of readings If you do not clear the buffer a subsequent store will overwrite the old readings Configure and control buffer FREE TRACe FREE Read status of memory Description This command is used to read the status of storage memory After send ing this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk two values separated by commas are sent to the computer The first value indicates how many bytes of memor
472. lculate 817 Unknown token Attempted to define an expression using an invalid function name 818 Error parsing mantissa Occurs when a floating point num ber has an invalid mantissa 819 Error parsing exponent Occurs when a floating point num ber has an invalid exponent 820 Error parsing value Occurs when an invalid floating point number is entered 821 Invalid data handle index An invalid array index value was assigned to a vectored expression Array indices start at 0 and can be as high as 2499 Notes Up to five user defined math expressions can be created e A selected math expression can only be performed if CALC1 is enabled See STATe lt b gt e When the math expression is vectored the math result will not be generated until all source measure operations for the vector array are performed Initializing memory SYSTem MEMory INITialize deletes all user defined math expressions and selects the POWER expression Program examples OFFCOMPOHM VOLTCOEF and VARALPHA require two source measure sweep points in order to perform the math expressions Shown below are code fragments that will properly configure the SourceMeter to perform the built in math expressions Power RST SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC VOLT CURR CALC MATH EXPR NAME POWER CALC STAT ON OUTPUT ON INIT CALC DATA 2400 Series SourceMeter User
473. level volts OA or OV 10 5A or 42V 10 5A or 42V 18 88 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Query CENTer Query center point for sweep CENTer DEFault Query RST default level CENTer MINimum Query lowest allowable level CENTER MAXimum Query highest allowable level SPAN Query span for sweep SPAN DEFault Query RST default level SPAN MINimum Query lowest allowable level SPAN MAXimum Query highest allowable level Description A sweep can be configured by specifying center and span parameters By specifying a center point you can sweep through the operating point of a device The span determines the sweep width with the operating point at the center of the sweep For example assume you are testing a device that operates at 10V and you want to sweep from 8 to 12 volts To do this you would specify the center to be 10V and the span to be 4 volts 12 8 Use the STEP or POINts command to specify the number of source measure points in the sweep CENTer and SPAN are coupled to STARt and STOP Thus when center and span values are changed the values for start and stop are affected as follows Start Center Span 2 Stop Center Span 2 STEP lt n gt SOURce 1 CURRent STEP lt n gt Specify step size current sweep SOURce 1 VOLTage STEP lt n gt Specify step size voltage sweep Parameters 2400 lt n gt 2 1 to 2 1 Set I Source level amps 420 to 420 S
474. line commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in question Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true SDC Selective Device Clear The SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds Generally instruments return to their power up default conditions when responding to the SDC command GTL Go To Local The GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command GET Group Execute Trigger The GET command is used to trigger devices to per form a specific action that depends on device configuration for example take a reading Although GET is an addressed command many devices respond to GET without addressing Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted The commands include LAG Listen Address Group These listen commands are derived from an instru ment s primary address and are used to address devices to listen The actual command byte is obtained by ORing the primary address with H20 TAG Talk Address Group The talk commands are derived from the primary
475. ling 1 25 Format 1 14 Remote programming 1 15 EDIT key 1 14 Errors Eliminating common SCPI errors B 8 Examples Contact check function programming example F 16 Custom sweep 10 6 Custom sweep programming example 10 25 Data store programming example 9 7 Diode test 10 12 Filter programming example 7 13 Limit testing programming example 12 24 Math programming example 8 8 Measure only programming example 3 21 Ohms programming example 4 13 Output configuration programming example 13 12 Program and read register set programming example 15 18 Pulse measure programming example 5 16 Range and digits programming example 7 6 Read error queue programming example 15 20 Relative programming example 8 3 RS 232 interface programming example 14 21 Set MSS B6 when error occurs programming example 15 10 Sink programming example 3 24 Source memory sweep programming example 10 26 Source measure programming example 3 19 Speed programming example 7 9 Staircase sweep programming example 10 22 Triggering 11 20 User defined math function programming example 8 10 Factory default settings 1 17 Filter 7 9 Front panel control 7 10 Programming example 7 13 Remote programming 7 12 Front panel operation Auto zero 3 9 Compliance limit 3 7 Contact check function F 11 Data store 9 2 Digital output control 13 4 Filter 7 10 GPIB 14 9 Guard selection 2 12 Limit testing 12 21 Line frequency 1 12 Math 8 6 Measure only 3 20 Menus 1 20 Output con
476. lists a command sequence to program the SourceMeter for sink operation These commands set up the unit as follows e Source function volts e Measure function current e Source voltage 0V e Measure range auto e Compliance discharge current 100mA Table 3 8 Sink programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR FUNC VOLT V source function SOUR VOLT MODE FIXED Fixed source mode SENS FUNC CURR Current measure function SENS CURR RANG AUTO ON __ Auto measure range SENS CURR PROT 100E 3 100mA compliance discharge current OUTP ON Turn on output READ Trigger and acquire reading Ohms Measurements Ohms configuration menu Outlines the ohms configuration menu that allows you to set up various ohms measurement aspects Ohms measurement methods Discusses auto and manual ohms measurement methods and how to select them Ohms sensing Covers 2 wire and 4 wire ohms sensing Offset compensated ohms Describes offset compensated ohms which can be used to overcome the effects of offsets when making low resistance measurements Ohms source readback Covers enabling and disabling ohms source readback 6 wire ohms measurements Describes the basic procedure for setting up the SourceMeter for 6 wire ohms measurement which can be used for measuring resistor networks and hybrid circuits Remote ohms programming Summarizes the basic remote commands requi
477. ls 1V and 2V To do this set the arm count to two the trigger count to three and use a 6 point Custom Sweep configured as follows P0000 1V P0001 1V P0002 1V P0003 2V P0004 2V P0005 2V When the sweep is started operation falls into the Trigger Layer and performs three mea surements at the 1V source level Operation then loops back into the Trigger Layer to per form three measurements at the 2V source level The six readings are stored in the buffer Note that after the sweep is finished the SourceMeter does not return to idle Operation continues at the top of the trigger model Subsequent measurements are performed at the 2V level and are not stored in the buffer For details on the Custom Sweep see Section 10 Sweep Operation 11 8 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configuring triggering Trigger configuration menu Press CONFIG and then TRIG to display the trigger configuration menu which is outlined below and shown in Figure 11 2 Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the menu while dashes and slashes indicate options Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change trigger options See also Front panel trigger example page 11 20 for more information on programming the various trigger parameters ARM LAYER Use this menu item to configure the arm layer of the trigger model ARMIN Use to select the detection event for the arm
478. lt Query RST default level STARt MINimum Query lowest allowable level STARt MAXimum Query highest allowable level STOP Query start level for sweep STOP DEFault Query RST default level STOP MINimum Query lowest allowable level STOP MAXimum Query highest allowable level These commands are used to specify the start and stop levels for a sweep If using a fixed manual source range the sweep will be per formed using a source range that will accommodate all source values Best Fixed Range You can use source auto range if sweeping through one or more source ranges When the sweep is started the source will output the specified start level and after the delay period of the SDM cycle a measurement is per formed NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used The delays in a Pulse Mode sweep are pulse width and pulse delay See Section 5 and Section 10 for details The sweep continues until the source outputs the specified stop level At this level the instrument again performs another measurement after the SDM delay and then stops the sweep The source measure points in a sweep can be set by specifying a step size or by specifying the number of source measure points in the sweep Refer to STEP lt n gt page 18 88 and POINts lt n gt page 18 90 STARt and STOP are coupled to CENTer and SPAN Thus when start and stop values are changed the values for center and span are aff
479. ltage coefficient is the percent change in resistance per unit change in applied voltage and is defined as follows AR Coefficient R2xAV x 100 where AR R2 RI1 AV V2 V1 R1 is the resistance measurement at the first source point R2 is the resistance measurement at the second source point V1 is the voltage measurement at the first source point V2 is the voltage measurement at the second source point If sourcing voltage you will be prompted to enter the two V source values If sourcing cur rent you will be prompted to enter the two I source values See Front panel math opera tions page 8 6 8 6 Relative and Math 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Percent deviation This calculation provides the percent deviation between the normal display reading and the user set reference value Deviation Xn x 100 where X is the normal display measurement reading V I or Q Y is the reference value When prompted to enter the reference value Y you can enter the value or have the SourceMeter acquire the reference value To acquire the reference value turn on the out put and press AUTO The SourceMeter will perform a measurement and display that read ing as the reference Limit testing After the reference value is entered you will be prompted to enter high and low tolerances in for the reference value These tolerances set the high and low limits for Limit 2 test For example perform the following
480. lts sense function 100mA source current Save in source memory location 2 Current sense function Save in source memory location 3 Trigger count sweep points Turn on source output Trigger sweep request data 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 27 Sweep branching program example The code fragment below is a Visual Basic sweep branching subroutine This example sets up source memory locations 1 3 as indicated in code comments Location 100 is used as a dummy location Failure at any one of locations 1 3 causes a branch to location 100 to stop the sweep as soon as possible in the event of failure For all three source memory locations operating modes are set as follows e Source function volts 10V output voltage e Measurement function current 100mA range 105mA compliance e Delay Is Test limits for the three memory locations are e Location 1 10mA to 20mA e Location 2 20mA to 30mA e Location 3 30mA to 40mA Attribute VB_Name Headers Option Explicit Public Sub RunSourceMemory Dim intGPIB As Integer Dim strAnswer As String intGPIB 24 Primary address 24 Call OutputCmd intGPIB TRAC CLE Clear Readings from Buffer Setup Source Memory Location 1 Call OutputCmd intGPIB RST Restore GPIB default conditions Call OutputCmd intGPIB SOUR FUNC VOLT Current Source Function Call OutputCmd intGPIB SENS FUNC CUR
481. lues Use the following keys to edit source and compliance values EDIT selects the source or compliance display field for editing A blinking cur sor will appear in the field to be edited If no key is pressed within a few seconds the edit mode will be cancelled automatically EDIT lt q and p places the display cursor on the display digit to be changed 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 25 SOURCE A or y increments or decrements the source or compliance value Note that pressing either of these keys will automatically enable the source edit mode RANGE A or A Selects the source or compliance range Numeric keys 0 9 allow you to directly enter source or compliance values EXIT exits the edit mode without waiting for the time out period The basic procedure for editing source and compliance values is outlined below See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure for more details 1 Press the EDIT key until the blinking cursor is in either the source or compliance display field to be edited If desired use the RANGE A and y keys to select the desired source or compli ance range To simply increment or decrement the display value use the EDIT lt and keys to place the blinking cursor on the digit to be changed then increment or decrement the value with the SOURCE A and y keys Note that the source or compliance value will be updated immediately you need not press ENTER
482. m mand along with the null list parameter as follows STATus QUEue ENABle 15 20 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 15 9 Error queue commands Command Description Default STATus STATus Subsystem QUEue Read Error Queue Note 1 NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message ENABIe lt list gt Specify error and status messages for Error Queue Note 2 ENABle Read the enabled messages DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 2 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue SYSTem SYSTem Subsystem ERRor Read Error Queue Note 1 NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message ALL Read and clear all errors status code and message COUNt Read the number of messages in queue CODE Code numbers only NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code only ALL Read and clear all errors status codes only CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Notes 1 Power up and CLS empties the Error Queue STATus PRESet has no effect 2 Power up enables error messages and disables status messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect Programming example read error queue The following command reads the error queue STAT QUE 16 Common Commands Command summary Lists the IEEE 488 2 common commands used by the SourceMeter e Command reference
483. mands and subsystems to configure the Trigger Model These commands and subsystems are summarized in Table 18 11 NOTE See Section 11 Triggering for more details on triggering and the trigger model Clear input triggers CLEar TRIGger CLEar Clear pending input triggers Description When this action command is sent any pending latched input triggers are cleared immediately When the SourceMeter is being triggered by another instrument it may inadvertently receive and latch input triggers that do not get executed These pending triggers could adversely affect subsequent operation When using external triggering it is recommended that TRIGger CLEar be sent after sending the ABORt command and at the beginning of a program before sending an initiate command See INITiate command Initiate source measure cycle INITiate INITiate IMMediate Take SourceMeter out of idle state Description This command is used to initiate source measure operation by taking the SourceMeter out of idle The READ and MEASure commands also perform an initiation Note that if auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF the source output must first be turned on before an initiation can be per formed The MEASure command automatically turns the output source on before performing the initiation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 121 WARNING With auto output off disabled the source outp
484. mes full the measurement conversions are averaged yielding a reading For each subsequent conversion placed into the stack the oldest conversion is discarded The stack is re averaged yielding a new reading When the filter is first enabled the stack is empty Keep in mind that a filtered reading is not yielded until the stack is full The first reading conversion is placed in the stack and is then copied to the other stack locations in order to fill it Thus the first filtered reading is the same as the first reading conversion Now the normal moving average filter process can continue Note that a true average is not yielded until the stack is filled with new reading conversions no copies in stack For example in Figure 7 2A it takes ten filtered readings to fill the stack with new reading conversions The first nine filtered readings are calcu lated using copied reading conversions Response time considerations The filter averaging mode and count affect the overall reading speed The moving averag ing filter is much faster than the repeat averaging filter because the unit does not have to refill the filter stack for each reading Also the number of readings averaged will affect reading speed as the number of readings averaged increases the reading speed decreases 7 10 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel filter control Configuring filter Filter type and count is configured f
485. mode set to MULTIPLE you can also program the soak time which specifies the amount of time after the first point of a sweep that the unit will sit ina loop actively auto ranging up and down to allow a multiple SourceMeter configuration to settle This process will occur only during the first SDM cycle after the initial sweep trig ger See Section 11 Trigger models This feature is especially useful for situations with long DUT settling times such as low current measurements when several down range change cycles from the higher ranges are required The soak time takes the place of the delay time only during the delay phase of the first SDM cycle after an initial sweep trigger See Figure 11 1 for an overview of the trigger model Selecting the auto range change mode To configure the auto range change mode press CONFIG then AUTO Choose SINGLE SRC MTR or MULTIPLE as desired from the AUTO RANGE TYPE menu If you choose MULTIPLE you will also be prompted to enter the SOAK time which can be pro grammed in the range of 0 000s to 9999 999s Auto range limits Auto range limits are included to support the auto range change mode For voltage and current the upper limit is controlled by the compliance range and cannot be programmed For the auto ohms mode however the lower limit is adjustable The lower limit for all three functions is programmable and must be less than or equal to the upper limit If the lower limit is equal to the
486. mory recall either with the SOURCE MEMORY RESTORE menu or during a source memory sweep NPLC caching will occur If the integration rate is already stored in the cache the stored reference and zero values are recalled and used Otherwise a reference and zero value are acquired and stored in the cache If there are already 10 NPLC values stored the oldest one will be overwritten by the newest one NOTE Auto zero should be disabled for maximum source memory sweep speed other wise the cache is of little use With auto zero enabled new A D reference and zero values are taken for every reading and saved into the cache slowing down sweep operation However with auto zero disabled measurements may drift and become erroneous To minimize drift when using NPLC caching with auto zero disabled periodically select AUTO ZERO ONCE in the A D CTRL menu to force an immediate auto zero update NPLC cache setup Follow the steps below to enable and use NPLC caching with a source memory sweep Press the MENU key select A D CTRL then press ENTER Select AUTO ZERO then press ENTER Choose DISABLE then press ENTER to disable auto zero From the A D CONTROLS menu select NPLC CACHE then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER to enable NPLC caching Use the EXIT key to back out of the main menu structure ON Sh Se Set up the source memory parameters and run the source memory sweep See Section 10 Performing a source memory sweep
487. mpliance program bit pattern Control LIM2 3 5 12 tests limits and bit patterns Enable disable limit tests Disable test Enable test Set low limit Set high limit Set pass Digital I O bit pattern Set limit test pass conditions Set pass conditions Digital I O bit pattern Set pass conditions next source memory location Use next location Specify location number Set Digital I O line 4 to act as EOT or BUSY signal Set line 4 HI while unit is busy 3 bit mode Set line 4 LO while unit is busy 3 bit mode Output line 4 HI pulse at end of test 3 bit mode Output line 4 LO pulse at end of test 3 bit mode 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 31 Table 1 9 Trigger configuration menu Configuration menu item Description CONFIG TRIG Configure triggering CONFIGURE TRIGGER ARM LAYER Configure trigger model arm layer ARM IN Select arm layer detection event IMMEDIATE Immediate event detection GPIB GPIB GET or TRG TIMER After timer interval elapses enter interval MANUAL Front panel TRIG key TLINK Enter TLINK line and state ONCE Bypass event detection once NEVER Never bypass event detection VSTEST When Digital I O SOT line is pulsed low ONCE Bypass event detection once NEVER Never bypass event detection TSTEST When Digital I O SOT line is pulsed high ONCE Bypass event detection once NEVER Never bypass event detection TLSTEST When Digital I O S
488. mum sink current 500MmA Digital I O Port 13 4 Digital O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source operation Figure 13 3 shows the basic output configuration for source operation In this case the external relay coil is connected between the digital output line pins 1 to 4 and ground pin 9 With this configuration the digital output line must be set HI to energize the relay and the maximum source current is 2mA Figure 13 3 Source operation SourceMeter 5V0 Maximum source current 2mA l I 1 ceed tae 1 1 Pins 1 4 To other I 1 I 1 Pin 9 External a Set a i Relay Digital 1 O Port Controlling digital output lines Although the digital output lines are primarily intended for use with a device handler for limit testing they can also be used for other purposes such as controlling external relays or indicator lights You can control these lines either from the front panel or via remote as covered below Front panel digital output control Set digital output line logic levels from the front panel as follows Press the MENU key Select GENERAL then press ENTER Select DIGOUT then press ENTER Using the RANGE and cursor keys set the digital output parameter to the desired decimal value Table 13 1 For example to set the output lines to L H H H set the digital output parameter value to 7 TA a 5 Press EXIT to return to no
489. n When a failure occurs the FAIL message is displayed and also can be read via remote with CALC2 LIM lt n gt FAIL and operation proceeds to the Binning Control decision block Immediate binning For immediate binning the testing process is terminated when a failure occurs and the fail pattern for that particular failure is sent to the component handler to perform the binning operation Triggering is maintained for other instruments or components in the test system End binning For end binning the fail pattern for the first failure is stored in memory and operation proceeds to Another Test Cycle decision block If programmed to perform additional tests i e sweep on the DUT package operation loops back up to perform the next source measure action After all programmed test cycles are completed the SourceMeter outputs the fail pattern stored in memory on the Digital I O port This reflects the first failure that occurred in the testing process for the device package The component handler places the DUT in the appropriate bin If configured to test another DUT package operation loops back to the top of the flowchart and waits for the start of test SOT pulse from the component handler 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 9 Sorting mode Sorting mode limits operation is detailed by the flowchart in Figure 12 5 A test is only performed if it is enabled If disabled operation proceeds to the next
490. n Table 15 4 enables EAV error available When an invalid command is sent line 4 bits B2 EAV and B6 MSS of the Status Byte Register set to 1 The last command reads the Status Byte Register using the binary format which directly indicates which bits are set The command to select format FORMat SREGister is documented in Table 15 2 To determine the exact nature of the error you will have to read the Error Queue see Queues page 15 18 Table 15 4 Status byte programming example Command Description CLS Clear Error Queue SRE 4 Enable EAV FORM SREG BIN Select binary format XYZ Generate error STB Read Status Byte Register 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 11 Status register sets As shown in Figure 15 1 there are four status register sets in the status structure of the SourceMeter Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Measurement Event Status and Questionable Event Status NOTE See Appendix B for details on which register bits are set by specific error and status conditions Register bit descriptions Standard Event Register The used bits of the Standard Event Register shown in Figure 15 4 are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete Set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the SourceMeter is ready to accept new commands This bit only sets in response to the OPC query command See Section 16
491. n be set from 10nA to 10 5A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 105V 2440 Current limit can be set from 10nA to 5 25A and the voltage limit can be set from 200uV to 42V NOTE For the following discussion measurement range refers to the measurement function that is the opposite of the source function When sourcing voltage the current measurement range is the point of discussion Conversely when sourc ing current the voltage measurement range is the point of discussion Types of compliance There are two types of compliance real and range Depending upon which value is lower the output will clamp at either the displayed compliance setting real compliance or at the maximum possible compliance value for the fixed measurement range range compliance This clamping action effectively limits the power that can be delivered to the device When the SourceMeter is acting as a current source the voltage is clamped at the compliance value conversely the current is clamped at the compliance value when the SourceMeter is acting as a voltage source Note that range compliance cannot occur if the AUTO measurement range is selected Thus to avoid range compliance use AUTO range NOTE For the Model 2430 AUTO range is not valid in the Pulse Mode When in real compliance the source clamps at the displayed compliance value For exam ple if the compliance voltage is set to 1 V and the measurement range is 2V out
492. n gt Set amps speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 SENSe VOLTage NPLCycles lt n gt Set volts speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 SENSe RESistance NPLCycles lt n gt Set ohms speed n PLC 0 01 to 10 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode n PLC 0 01 to 0 10 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 9 Filters Speed programming example Use any NPLC command to set the speed For example send the following command to set the amps speed to 10 PLC SENS CURR NPLC 10 NOTE For the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 filtering is not used and therefore can not be enabled Pressing the FILTER key results in the Invalid in Pulse Mode message Filter lets you set the filter response to stabilize noisy measurements The SourceMeter uses a digital filter which is based on reading conversions The displayed stored or trans mitted reading is an average of a number of reading conversions from 1 to 100 There are two averaging filter types to choose from repeating and moving Figure 7 2 For the repeating filter which is the power on default the stack filter count is filled and the conversions are averaged to yield a reading The stack is then cleared and the process starts over Choose this filter for sweeping so readings for other source levels are not aver aged with the present source level The moving average filter uses a first in first out stack When the stack filter count beco
493. nce is presently selected for editing If you wish to edit the other field press EDIT again Use the RANGE A and keys to select a range that will accommodate the value you want to set See Section 7 for range information For best accuracy use the lowest possible source range Enter the desired source or compliance value There are two methods to edit the value value adjust and numeric entry 3 16 Basic Source Measure Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE To clear the source value to OV or OA press the MENU key while in the edit source field e Value adjust To adjust the value use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cur sor at the appropriate position and use the SOURCE A and keys to incre ment or decrement the value e Numeric entry When the edit mode is entered the cursor is located on the most significant digit of the value From this position you can key in the value using the number keys 0 through 9 After each number is keyed in the cursor moves one position to the right If desired you can use the EDIT cursor keys to place the cursor on a digit to be changed and press the appropriate number key The cursor does not have to be on the polarity sign of the value to change polarity If the MENU key is pressed the Source Value will be clear to OV or OA 4 To edit the other field press EDIT to select it and repeat steps 1 and 2 5 When finished editing the source and compliance values pres
494. nd Math Table 8 5 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Commands for user defined math functions Command Description CALCulate MATH UNITs lt name gt CALCulate MATH NAME lt name gt CALCulate MATH EXPression lt form gt CALCulate STATe lt state gt CALCulate DATA Specified units for user defined function name three ASCII characters in quotes Define math name name user name Define math formula form formula Valid names VOLTage CURRent RESistance TIME Valid math operators log In sin cos tan exp Enable disable math state ON or OFF Query math data User defined math function programming example Table 8 6 shows the command sequence for a typical user defined math function This example defines a percent deviation math function Table 8 6 User defined math function programming example Command Description RST SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC ON RES CALC MATH UNIT CALC MATH EXPR NAME PER_DEV CALC MATH EXPR RES 10e3 10e3 100 CALC STAT ON OUTP ON INIT lt CALC DATA Restore GPIB defaults Disable concurrent functions Select resistance function Define units name Define math expression name Define math expression Enable math data Turn on output Trigger unit Request math data 9 Data Store Data store overview Outlines basic data st
495. nd reference Com mand summary Common commands and Signal oriented measurement commands SDC selective device clear 14 8 Sensing 2 5 2 wire local 2 7 4 wire remote 2 6 Guard 2 9 6 38 Ohms 4 7 Selection 2 11 Serial polling 15 9 Settings Default 1 16 Factory default 1 17 Power on configuration 1 17 Remote setups 1 20 Restoring 1 16 Saving 1 16 Short form rules 14 14 Signal oriented measurement commands CONFigure lt function gt 17 2 FETCh 17 3 MEASure lt function gt 17 5 READ 17 4 SENSe 1 DATA LATest 17 4 Single element device binning 12 14 Sink operation 3 22 Programming example 3 24 Source delay 3 12 Source I measure I and source V measure V 6 30 Source memory sweep 10 7 10 21 10 25 Source delay measure cycle 6 10 Source measure capabilities 3 3 Source measure procedure Front panel operation 3 14 Remote operation 3 18 SPE SPD serial polling 14 9 Specifications A 1 Speed 7 7 Programming example 7 9 Remote programming 7 8 Setting 7 7 Status and error messages 1 15 Status byte and service request SRQ 15 2 15 7 Status byte and service request commands 15 10 Status register sets 15 2 15 11 Store data 9 2 Sweep Configuring and running 10 14 Contact check function F 6 Customized 10 5 10 19 10 24 Front panel operation 10 14 Linear staircase 10 2 10 17 10 22 Logarithmic staircase 10 4 10 18 10 22 Programming example 10 22 10 25 10 26 Pulse Mode Model 2430 only 10 32 Remote
496. nes o eee eeeeseeeeeeees 13 4 Front panel digital output control oo eee 13 4 Remote digital output control oo eee eeeeeee 13 5 Safety interlock cicne ren E er EES 13 5 Front panel output configuration esssesseseesesesessesrsresreresresreees 13 7 Configure OUTPUT menu eee eeceeeseeseceneeeseeeeneeeees 13 7 Quitput Off States sir isere rearea eiaeaen iai 13 8 HIGH IMPEDANCE ee ceeeeeecseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 13 8 NORMAL scsstertccessuastans sceactsegeesstdeinensccvecbonaieudete sites 13 8 ZERO a E E TO anbails 13 9 GUARD eraro irar E 13 9 Output off states and inductive loads olen 13 10 Remote output configuration ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 11 Output configuration commands ceeeeeceeesteeeneeeneees 13 11 Output configuration programming example 13 12 14 Remote Operations Differences remote vs local Operation esceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 14 2 Operation enhancements remote operation e 14 2 Math expressions eeccceseceseeecceseeeeseeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeae 14 2 Concurrent measurements ceeceeeeeeseeeteeeteeeteeeeee 14 2 Local to remote transition cee eeeeeeseeesteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeeees 14 2 Remote to local transition cee ceeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 14 3 Selecting an interface oo eee eeeeestecsseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeesaes 14 3 GPIB Operation is cci siveessdecieac casi a n a E En ARESE 14 4 GPIB standards c5 c s
497. nformation and as a listener a device will receive information To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each one On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the controller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen to the talker are addressed to listen by the controller Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlisten instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the transfer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credi bility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active con troller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen 2 The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 The listener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for t
498. ng a resistor element of a resistor network Cable guard The CABLE guard selection provides a high impedance 10kQ driven guard to prevent positive feedback which could cause oscillations when using shielded cables Cable guard is used to drive the shields of cables and test fixtures Guard is extended to a test fixture using a safety banana plug such as the Model 8008 BAN Inside the test fixture the guard can be connected to a guard plate or shield that surrounds the DUT WARNING To prevent injury or death a safety shield must be used to prevent physical contact with a guard plate or guard shield that is at a hazard ous potential gt 30Vrms or 42 4V peak This safety shield must com pletely enclose the guard plate or shield and must be connected to safety earth ground Figure 6 18B shows the metal case of a test fixture being used as a safety shield 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 35 Inside the test fixture a triaxial cable can be used to extend guard to the DUT The center conductor of the cable is used for In Out HI the inner shield is used for guard and the outer shield is used for In Out LO and is connected to the safety shield which is con nected to safety earth ground A coaxial cable can be used if the guard potential does not exceed 30Vrms 42 4V peak The center conductor is used for In Out HI and the outer shield is used for guard For higher guard potentials use a triaxial c
499. ng calculation The larger the filter count the more filtering that is performed NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is ignored 18 72 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual STATe lt b gt SENSe 1 AVERage STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable digital filter 1 or ON Enable digital filter Query STATe Query state of digital filter Description These commands are used to enable or disable the digital averaging fil ter When enabled voltage current and resistance readings are filtered according to how the filter is configured NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is invalid error 831 SOURCce subsystem This subsystem is used to configure and control the I Source and V Source and to set the logic level high or low of each digital output line The commands for this subsystem are summarized in Table 18 7 SOURce 1 Use the following commands to configure and control the I Source and V Source At the end of this subsystem are program examples of sweeps and lists Control source output off IMMediate SOURce 1 CLEar IMMediate Turn source output off Description This command is used to turn off the source output The output will turn off after all programmed source measure operations are completed and the instrument returns to the idle state Note that if auto output off is enabled the source output will automati
500. ng high power dissipation equipment adjacent to the SourceMeter could cause excessive heating to occur The specified ambient temperatures must be maintained around the surfaces of the SourceMeter to specified accuracies e A good measure to ensure proper cooling in rack situations with convection cooling only is to place the hottest equipment i e power supply at the top of the rack Precision equipment such as the SourceMeter should be placed as low as possible in the rack where temperatures are the coolest Adding spacer panels below the SourceMeter will help ensure adequate air flow 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 3 Operation overview Source measure capabilities From the front panel the SourceMeter can be configured to perform the following operations e Source voltage Display current and or voltage measurement e Source current Display voltage and or current measurement e Measure resistance Display voltage or current component of measurement e Measure only V or I Display voltage or current measurement Voltage and Current Table 3 1 lists the source and measure limits for the voltage and current functions Minimum source measure levels are listed as follows V Source 5uV V Measure 1pV I Source 50pA 2400 and 2410 500pA 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 I Measure 10pA 2400 and 2410 100pA 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Resistance The Models 2400 and
501. ng the TRIG key or the ON OFF OUTPUT key The OUTPUT indicator will be on whenever a pulse is being sourced During each pulse off time the output will be off indicator off If configured to output a finite number of pulses the output will disable after the last pulse is sourced While sourcing pulses you can disable the output at any time by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Pulse ohms measurements NOTE Ohms source readback cannot be used for the Pulse Mode Make sure that the source is not in compliance when taking pulse ohms readings Section 4 covers Ohms source readback Auto and Manual pulse ohms measurements While in the Pulse Mode the Model 2430 can perform auto or manual ohms measure ments After selecting and configuring the Pulse Mode as explained in this section per form the Auto ohms measurements procedure or the Manual ohms measurements procedure in Section 4 For remote operation see Section 4 Remote ohms programming for the commands for basic ohms measurements Offset compensated pulse ohms measurements While in the Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms is available as a math function FCTN After selecting and configuring the Pulse Mode as explained in this section refer to Section 8 Math operations to perform offset compensated ohms measurements For remote operation see Section 8 Remote math operations for the commands to per form offset compensated ohms 2400 Ser
502. nge DOWN Select next lower range Query RANGe Query range for specified source RANGe DEFault RANGe MINimum RANGe MAXimum Query RST default source range Query lowest source range Query highest source range Description This command is used to manually select the range for the specified source Range is selected by specifying the approximate source magni tude that you will be using The instrument will then go to the lowest range that can accommodate that level For example if you expect to source levels around 3V send the following command SOURce VOLTage RANGe 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 77 The above command will select the 20V range for the V Source As listed in the Parameters you can also use the MINimum MAXimum and DEFault parameters to manually select the source range The UP parameter selects the next higher source range while DOWN selects the next lower source range Note that source range can be selected automatically by the instrument see next command AUTO lt b gt SOURce 1 CURRent RANGe AUTO lt b gt Select auto range for I Source SOURce 1 VOLTage RANGe AUTO lt b gt Select auto range for V Source Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto range 1 or ON Enable auto range Query AUTO Query state of auto range Description This command is used to enable or disable auto range for the specified source When enabled the instrument will automati
503. nguage protocol It goes one step farther than TEEE 488 2 1992 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of an instrument GPIB connections To connect the SourceMeter to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard TEEE 488 connectors as shown in Figure 14 1 Figure 14 1 IEEE 488 connector 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote Operations 14 5 To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connectors Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure Present standards call for metric threads which are identified with dark colored screws Earlier versions have different screws which are silver colored Do not use these types of connectors on the SourceMeter it is designed for metric threads Figure 14 2 shows a typical connecting scheme for a multi unit test system Figure 14 2 IEEE 488 connections Instrument Instrument Instrument _ Controller To avoid possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromagnetic radiation use only shielded IEEE 488 cables Available shielded cables from Keithley are Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 14 6 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual To connect the SourceMeter to the IEEE 488 bus follow these steps 1 Line up the cable connector with the connector located on the rear panel The con
504. nt the SourceMeter performs the following operations Returns the SourceMeter to the GPIB default conditions see Default column of SCPI tables in Section 18 e Cancels all pending commands Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC commands TRG trigger Send bus trigger to SourceMeter Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to the SourceMeter It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation The SourceMeter reacts to this trigger if BUS is the programmed arm control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem NOTE Details on triggering are covered in Section 11 16 6 Common Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TRG programming example The command sequence in Table 16 4 configures the SourceMeter to be controlled by bus triggers The last command which sends a bus trigger triggers one measurement Each subsequent bus trigger will also trigger a single measurement NOTE With ARM SOURce BUS selected do not send any commands except TRG GET DCL SDC IFC and ABORt while performing source measure opera tions Otherwise erratic operation will occur Table 16 4 TRG programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults ARM SOUR BUS _ Select BUS control source ARM COUN INF Set arm layer count to infinite OUTP ON Turn on output INIT Take Sour
505. nt or manual If an additional manual is required order the appropriate manual package for example 2400 901 00 The manual packages include a manual and any pertinent addenda Options and accessories The following options and accessories are available from Keithley for use with the SourceMeter General purpose probes Model 8605 high performance modular test leads Consists of two high voltage 1600V test probes and leads The test leads are terminated with a banana plug that has a retractable sheath on each end Model 8606 high performance probe tip kit Consists of two spade lugs two alligator clips and two spring hook test probes The spade lugs and alligator clips are rated at 30V RMS 42 4V peak the test probes are rated at 1000V These components are for use with high performance test leads terminated with banana plugs such as the Model 8605 The following test leads and probes are rated at 30V RMS 42 4V peak Models 5805 and 5805 12 Kelvin probes Consists of two spring loaded Kelvin test probes with banana plug termination Designed for instruments that measure four terminal resistance The Model 5805 is 0 9m long the Model 5805 12 is 3 6m long 1 4 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 5806 Kelvin clip lead set Includes two Kelvin clip test leads 0 9m with banana plug termination Designed for instruments that measure four terminal resistance A set of replacement rubber band
506. ntly running EE Standard Event 4 282 Ilegal program name EE Standard Event 4 281 Cannot create program EE Standard Event 4 260 Expression error EE Standard Event 4 241 Hardware missing EE Standard Event 4 230 Data corrupt or stale EE Standard Event 4 225 Out of memory EE Standard Event 4 224 Ilegal parameter value EE Standard Event 4 223 Too much data EE Standard Event 4 222 Parameter data out of range EE Standard Event 4 221 Settings conflict EE Standard Event 4 220 Parameter error EE Standard Event 4 215 Arm deadlock EE Standard Event 4 214 Trigger deadlock EE Standard Event 4 213 Init ignored EE Standard Event 4 212 Arm ignored EE Standard Event 4 211 Trigger ignored EE Standard Event 4 210 Trigger error EE Standard Event 4 202 Settings lost due to rtl EE Standard Event 4 201 Invalid while in local EE Standard Event 4 200 Execution error EE Standard Event 4 B 4 Status and Error Messages 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table B 1 continued Status and error messages Number Error message Event Status register Bit 178 Expression data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 171 Invalid expression EE Standard Event 5 170 Expression error EE Standard Event 5 168 Block data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 161 Invalid block data EE Standard Event 5 160 Block data error EE Standard Event 5 158 String data not allowed EE Standard Event 5 154 String too long EE Standard Event 5 151
507. nu select SWEEP COUNT press ENTER then choose FINITE or INFINITE as desired Again from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu choose SOURCE RANGING press ENTER then select BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE or FIXED as appropriate Press EXIT to return to normal display Step 3 Turn output on Press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on Step 4 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 5 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 10 3 summarizes remote commands used for linear and log staircase sweep opera tion See Section 18 Configure voltage and current sweeps for more details on these 10 22 Sweep Operation Remote sweep operation Staircase sweep commands commands Table 10 3 Linear and log staircase sweep commands Command Description SOURce CURRent MODE SWEep SOURce CURRent STARt lt n gt SOURce CURRent STOP lt n gt SOURce CURRent STEP lt n gt SOURce CURRent CENTer lt n gt SOURce CURRent SPAN lt n gt SOURce VOLTage MODE SWEep SOURce VOLTage STARt lt n gt SOURce VOLTage STOP lt n gt SOURce VOLTage STEP lt n gt SOURce VOLTage CENTer lt n gt SOURce VOLTage SPAN lt n gt SOURce SWEep RANGing lt name g
508. nual Table 18 7 continued SOURce command summary SCPI Command Reference 18 17 Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI memory SOURce2 Path to control digital output lines BSIZe lt n gt Set Digital I O bit size 3 or 4 4 BSIZe Query Digital I O bit size TTL LEVel DEFault Specify digital output pattern 15 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt LEVel DEFault Query default output pattern ACTual Read actual output pattern TTL4 MODE lt name gt Set Digital I O mode EOTest or BUSY EOTest MODE Query Digital I O line 4 mode BSTate lt b gt Set BUSY and EOT polarity HI or LO LO BSTate Query BUSY and EOT polarity CLEar Clear digital output IMMediate Restore clear to TTL output pattern AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear OFF AUTO Query state of auto clear DELay lt n gt Specify pulse width of pass fail pattern 0 00001 0 0000 to 60 sec DELay Query delay 16 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option Bit range set by BSIZe Ww N Format set by FORMat SOURce2 lt name gt 18 18 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table 18 8 STATus command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI STATus Note 1 y MEASurement Control measurement event registers LEVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NDN gt Program the enable register Note 3 v or lt NRf gt ENABle Read the ena
509. nual Relative and Math 8 5 This two point measurement method is mathematically expressed as Offset Compensated Q AV AI where AV V2 V1 and AI I2 I1 e V1 is the voltage measurement with the I Source set to a specific level e V2 is the voltage measurement with the I Source set to a different level typically zero e Il is the current measurement with the I Source set to a specific level 2 is the current measurement with the I Source set to a different level typically zero You will be prompted to enter the two I Source values and the results is displayed in ohms with the Q symbol in the units field of the display Varistor alpha This math formula is used to determine varistor alpha an important parameter that defines varistor characteristics Alpha is defined as the logarithmic ratio of two voltage measurement points on a non linear V I curve and is expressed as follows _ log 12 11 log V2 V1 where V1 is the voltage measurement at the first I Source point V2 is the voltage measurement at the second I Source point The log x function uses the absolute value of x When configuring this math function you will be prompted to enter the two I source val ues See Front panel math operations later in this section Voltage coefficient High value or high megohm resistors exhibit a change in resistance with a change in applied voltage This effect is known as voltage coefficient The vo
510. nual Triggering 11 11 Remote trigger operation NOTE For the Model 2430 the following discussion on the remote triggering pertains explicitly to the DC Mode of operation The trigger model operates a little dif ferent for the Pulse Mode These differences are covered in Pulse Mode trig gering Model 2430 page 11 30 Remote trigger model The trigger model flowchart in Figure 11 3 summarizes remote trigger operation The flowchart is essentially the same as the one for front panel operation shown in Figure 11 1 except that remote commands to program the various trigger parameters are shown on this diagram Operation is controlled by SCPI commands from the Trigger Subsystem Key remote commands are included in the trigger model Also note that the GPIB defaults are denoted by the symbol The primary actions of the trigger model are Source Delay and Measure The source action outputs the programmed voltage or current value and the programmed delay pro vides a settling period for the source before the measurement is performed The trigger model consists of two layers Arm Layer and Trigger Layer to provide versa tility Programmable counters allow operations to be repeated and various input and out put trigger options are available to provide source measure synchronization between the SourceMeter and other instruments via the Trigger Link Idle and initiate The instrument is considered to be in the idle state ARM
511. nually as covered below The communication interface status is briefly displayed If the IEEE 488 bus is the presently selected interface the identification message will include the primary address For example if the primary address is 24 factory default the IEEE Addr 24 message is displayed If the RS 232 interface is selected the RS 232 message is displayed After the power up sequence the instrument goes to its normal display state with the out put off OUTPUT indicator light off With the output off the OFF message is dis played and dashes replace the reading System identification To obtain the serial number and revision information use the MENU GENERAL SERIAL selection or the IDN query via remote 1 12 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Line frequency setting At the factory the SourceMeter is configured to sense the power line frequency and auto matically select the frequency setting If however the line power source is noisy the SourceMeter may select the wrong setting on power up If this situation occurs noisy measurement readings will result and accuracy may be affected You can manually set the line frequency from the front panel or via remote as follows Front panel line frequency Set the line frequency from the front panel as follows Press the MENU key to display MAIN MENU 2 Using the right arrow key select AD CTRL then press ENTER to display A D CONTRO
512. number of memory location points POINTS in the sweep When config ured to sweep past point 100 the sweep automatically wraps around to point 1 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 15 e SWEEP COUNT Use this menu item to specify how many sweeps to perform FINITE Use this option to enter a discrete number of sweeps to perform with the results stored in the data store buffer The maximum number of finite sweeps that can be performed is determined as follows maximum finite sweep count 2500 Points in sweep INFINITE Select this option to continuously repeat the configured sweep Use the EXIT key to stop the sweep Data is not stored in the buffer e SOURCE RANGING Use this menu item to control source ranging ignored in source memory BEST FIXED With this option the SourceMeter will select a single fixed source range that will accommodate all of the source levels in the sweep For example if the minimum and maximum source levels in the sweep for the Model 2400 are 1V and 30V the 200V source range will be used AUTO RANGE With this option the SourceMeter will select the most sen sitive source range for each source level in the sweep For example for a 1V source level the 2V source range will be used and for a 3V source level the 20V source range will be used Note that the range changing process of AUTO RANGE may cause transients in the sweep If these transients
513. o give a programming example for a typical ohms measurement situation Remote ohms commands Table 4 2 summarizes the remote commands for making basic ohms measurements See Section 18 for more details on these commands Table 4 2 Remote commands for basic ohms measurements Command Description SENSe FUNCtion RESistance Select ohms function SENSe RESistance RANGe lt n gt Select ohms range n range SENSe RESistance MODE lt name gt Select ohms mode name MANual or AUTO SENSe RESistance OCOMpensated lt state gt Enable disable offset compensation state ON or OFF SENSe VOLTage PROTection lt n gt Set voltage compliance n for manual ohms SENSe CURRent PROTection lt n gt Set current compliance n for manual ohms SOURce FUNCtion lt name gt Select source function name VOLTage or CURRent SYSTem RSENse lt state gt 2 wire 4 wire sensing state ON 4 wire OFF 2 wire OUTPut lt state gt Turn output on or off state ON or OFF READ Trigger and acquire reading 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 13 Ohms programming example Table 4 3 summarizes the command sequence for a typical auto ohms measurement These commands set up the SourceMeter as follows e Ohms mode and range auto 20kQ Offset compensation off e Sense mode 4 wire Table 4 3 Auto ohms programming example Step Action Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults 1 Select
514. of the ATN line determines whether the data bus con tains data addresses or commands as described in the following paragraph Figure D 2 IEEE 488 handshake sequence paw KX Source DAV Source Valid Acceptor All Ready NRFD All Accepted NDAC Acceptor 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 7 Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface This section briefly describes the purpose of the bus commands which are grouped into the following four categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table D 1 Table D 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary Command State of type Command ATN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus contents SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low
515. ogramming example 10 26 Pulse Mode linear staircase sweep programming example 10 34 Triggering Remote trigger commands eeeceeeeeeteceteeeeeeeeteeeeteeeaeees 11 18 Commands for remote triggering example eee 11 28 Limit Testing Limit COMMANAS s ccscssesincversissconesosvseasedssiesencosssesontensuscderstes 12 23 Commands to control Digital I O port for limit testing 12 24 Limits test programming example 0 0 00 ce eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 12 26 Limit test results summary 2 0 0 eeeeeceeeteceteeeeeeeteeeeseeeanees 12 26 13 Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration Table 13 1 Digital output line settings eee eseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 13 5 Table 13 2 Output configuration commands eee eeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeee 13 11 Table 13 3 Output configuration programming example 13 12 14 Remote Operations Table 14 1 General bus commands cesceeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeseetees 14 7 Table 14 2 RS 232 connector pinout 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeaeers 14 20 Table 14 3 PC serial port pinout sssrinin 14 20 15 Status Structure Table 15 1 Common and SCPI commands to reset registers and Clear Queue css sssssaces ures aae E Ea O E 15 4 Table 15 2 Data format commands for reading status registers 15 6 Table 15 3 Status Byte and Service Request Enable Register commands ceceeeesseseeseeeeeeeeeneeeseeees 15 10 Table 15 4 Sta
516. ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 21 volts 2 1e5 ohms MINimum 10 5 amps 105 volts 0 ohms MAXimum 10 5 amps 105 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range 2440 lt n gt 5 25 to 5 25 Expected reading in amps 42 to 42 Expected reading in volts 0 to 2 1e7 Expected reading in ohms DEFault 1 05e 4 amps 10 5 volts 2 1e4 ohms MINimum 0 amps 0 volts 0 ohms MAXimum 5 25 amps 42 volts 2 1e7 ohms UP Select next higher measurement range DOWN Select next lower measurement range RANGe Query measurement range RANGe DEFault Query RST default range RANGe MINimum Query lowest range returns 0 RANGe MAXimum Query highest range This command is used to manually select the measurement range for the specified measurement function The range is selected by specifying the expected reading The instrument will then go to the most sensitive reading that will accommodate that reading For example if you expect a reading of approximately 50mV then simply let lt n gt 0 05 or 50e 3 in order to select the 200mV range You can also use the UP and DOWN parameters to select range Each time UP or DOWN is sent the next higher or lower measurement range is selected When on the maximum range sending UP is a No Op no operation When on the lowest range sending DOWN is a NO Op Measurement ranges can instead be automatically selected by the instru
517. oltage source and measure accuracy are optimized by using 4 wire remote sense connections When sourcing voltage 4 wire remote sensing ensures that the pro grammed voltage is delivered to the DUT When measuring voltage only the voltage drop across the DUT is measured Use 4 wire remote sensing for the following source measure conditions Test circuit impedance is lt 1kQ Optimum Ohms V Source and or V Measure accuracy are required NOTE Specified accuracies for both source and measure are only achieved using 4 wire remote sensing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Connections 2 7 WARNING When sourcing voltage in remote sense make sure the sense leads are connected to the DUT If a sense lead becomes disconnected 0V will be sensed and the SourceMeter will increase the output voltage to possi bly hazardous levels to compensate For increased safety you can limit the voltage output by the SourceMeter See Section 3 V source protection to limit the output voltage level NOTE When the output is turned off in the 4 wire sense mode the sense lines are inter nally disconnected for safety reasons The sense lines are automatically recon nected when the output is turned on and 4 wire sensing is restored 2 wire local sensing 2 wire local sense connections can only be used if the error contributed by test lead IR drop is acceptable to the user At current levels below 100mA the errors are usually not si
518. om the SourceMeter Input Output 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 59 NOTE To prevent excessive wear on the output relay do not use the HIMPedance mode for tests that turn the output on and off frequently With NORMal selected the V Source is selected and set to OV when the output is turned off Compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range In the ZERO output off state when the V Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is set to OV and current compliance is not changed When the I Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source mode is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to the programmed Source I value or to 0 5 full scale of the present current range whichever is greater The ZERO output off state is typically used with the V Source and Out put Auto On see the SOURce1 CLEar AUTO command to generate voltage waveforms that alternate between OV and the programmed output on voltage With GUARd selected the I Source is selected and set to OA Voltage compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range This output off state should be used when performing 6 wire guarded ohms measurements or for any other load that uses an active source NOTE For more information on output off states see Section 13 Output off states For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output off state is always NORMal ROUTe subsystem The ROUTe subsystem is summarized in Table 18 5
519. omatic test sequencer NOTE NPLC caching can be used to speed up source memory sweeps See Section 3 NPLC caching for details Sweep configuration The user specifies the number of memory location points to sweep and where to start the sweep For example you can specify a six point sweep that starts at memory location 98 When the sweep is started the setups at memory location points 98 99 100 1 2 and 3 are recalled When sweeping past point 100 the sweep automatically wraps back to mem ory location point 1 The default and typical scenario is starting the source memory sweep at location 1 NOTE These and other components of the sweep are configured from the CONFIGURE SWEEPS menu See Configuring and running a sweep later in this section Setups are saved in battery backed up memory and they remain and can be recalled even if the SourceMeter looses external power Saving and restoring source memory setups Source memory setups are saved in memory and restored from the SAVESETUP SOURCE MEMORY option of the MAIN MENU See Section 1 Main menu NOTE Source memory setups are different from the power on and user defined setups which are programmed from the SAVESETUP GLOBAL MAIN MENU option See Section I for details 10 8 Sweep Operation 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Saving source memory setups Perform the following steps to save source memory setups 1 Configure the SourceMeter for the desi
520. ompliance Below the limit the instrument is not in compliance For example assume you want to pass resistors that are below 1kQ To do this set the I Source to output 1mA at a compliance limit of 1V and configure the test to fail on com pliance If for example the resistor under test is 750Q output voltage will be 0 75V mA x 750Q 0 75V Since the output voltage is below the 1V limit the test passes If the resistor is 1kQ or more output voltage will be 1V ImA x 1kQ 1V Since the 1V limit is reached which places the SourceMeter in compliance the test fails The Limit 1 test can be used to determine the polarity of a device such as a diode By using this test with a source memory sweep you can branch to a different setup at a speci fied memory location when the device is installed backwards See the programming exam ple at the end of this section for details on diode testing 12 4 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit 2 limit 3 and limit 5 12 tests These software S W tests are used to determine if a DUT is within specified high and low limits Typically the Limit 2 test is used to test for coarse tolerance limits and the Limit 3 and Limit 5 12 tests are used for fine tolerance limits Distinct Digital I O bit pat terns can be set for each limit and each high low pass or fail condition For example assume you want to sort resistors into three groups 1 5 and gt 5 toler ance To do thi
521. onfigure Memory SWEEP 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeceaeeeseers 18 93 SAVE lt NRIS seriar niian a 18 94 POING lt NRI gt gnosi 18 95 STAR NRIS caiciescscziasssegnesisctsiebesresns ranu Oain 18 95 RECall lt NRE gt unnan 18 96 Set SCAMS LACKON sacescceisiseceebeesecincescoacesecdoveyeseasleciesusapoeensi 18 96 TRIGgered SFACtor lt n gt oo ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 18 96 TRIGgered SFACtor STATe lt b gt oo eee eeeeeeeeees 18 96 Sweep and list program examples 0 0 0 0 ceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 18 96 Linear voltage sweep eee eeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeaees 18 96 Voltage St osinn 18 97 Logarithmic current SWEEP sseeseeeseeeeeersererrsreresreee 18 97 CCUPTONE TSE oraeson ereiten eK aE ris 18 98 Soak TIME airera i n a aa is Res i aei 18 99 SOAK lt NRE gt uosnnotassnin i 18 99 Pulse Mode delays Model 2430 only neseser 18 99 WID S aeiiaaie 18 99 DELAY KiS rer riae area 18 100 SOUR narina E E A 18 100 Setting digital output sssesessseeeesseeresesrrsesrrereseeresrrresreee 18 100 LEVel lt NRf gt lt NDN gt oon ee eeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeees 18 100 MODE lt name gt arpion iniatas terin ngeia 18 101 BS Tate SOS aa 18 102 BSI e Sis ae naaa T O 18 102 Clearing digital output oo eee eeeceecneeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 18 102 PIM Mediate ccicsssiesccissearavssraietsiuceissesesassonalseainesastens 18 102 AUTO lt b gt creino ei 18 103 DELAY lt i gt ca a E A 18 103 STATUS sUbsySteM neiaie aa 18 104 Read event registers sisessre
522. ons See CALCulate 1 page 18 24 subsystem NOTE Inorder to run a memory sweep the memory function must be selected and the trigger count must be the same as the number of memory points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the MEMory function See Select function modes page 18 73 Arm count ARM COUN and trigger count TRIGger COUN are set from the Trigger Subsystem When memory is initialized SYSTem MEMory INITialize all 100 memory locations for a memory sweep are initialized to the present setup configuration 18 94 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual of the SourceMeter with CALCI disabled User defined math expressions are replaced with the Power math expression Error 809 Source memory location revised occurs when a memory sweep ref erences an expression that no longer exists The memory sweep is revised to dis able CALCI In order to execute a memory sweep the product of the arm count and trigger count should be at least the same as the number of points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the MEMory function See Select func tion modes page 18 73 Arm count ARM COUNTt and trigger count TRIGger COUNt are set from the Trigger Subsystem SAVE lt NRf gt SOURce 1 MEMory SAVE lt NRf gt Save setup in specified memory location Parameters lt NRf gt 1 to 100 Specify memory location Description This command is used
523. ontrol trigger bypass Parameters lt name gt SOURce Enable control source bypass ACCeptor Disable control source bypass Query DIRection Query state of bypass Description This command is used to enable SOURce or disable ACCeptor con trol source bypass When enabled operation will loop around the con trol source on the first pass in the layer After that repeat passes in the layer are held up and will wait for the programmed control source event INPut lt event list gt TRIGger SEQuence 1 TCONfigure ASYNchronous INPut lt event list gt Enable event detectors Parameters lt event list gt SOURce Enable Source Event Detector DELay Enable Delay Event Detector SENSe Enable Measure Event Detector NONE Disable all event detectors in Trigger Layer NOTE Each event in the list must be separated by a comma i e trigger input source delay sense Query INPut Query enabled event detectors in Trigger Layer 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 125 Description When TLINKk is the selected Trigger Layer control source and an event detector in the Trigger Layer is enabled operation will hold up at that detector until an input trigger is received via the Trigger Link When the event detector is disabled operation will not hold up It continues and performs the appropriate action A Trigger Layer event detector is enabled by including the parameter name in the event list for the INPut comm
524. ooling fan Covers the cooling fan in the Models 2410 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 Display Provides information about the SourceMeter display Default settings Covers factory default setups and saving and recalling user setups Menus Covers the main and configuration menus as well as rules to navigate menus 1 2 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual General information Warranty information Warranty information is located at the front of this manual Should your SourceMeter require warranty service contact the Keithley representative or authorized repair facility in your area for further information When returning the instrument for repair be sure to fill out and include the service form at the back of this manual to provide the repair facility with the necessary information Contact information Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual If you have any questions please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Application Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only Manual addenda Any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual will be explained in an addendum included with the manual Be sure to note these changes and incorporate them into the manual Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual The J symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should
525. operation 10 22 Source memory 10 7 10 21 10 25 Types 10 2 Sweep waveforms 6 12 System identification 1 11 TOGGLE key 1 15 Varistor alpha math function 8 5 Toggling the source and measure display Voltage measure 3 20 fields 1 25 Voltage coefficient math function 8 5 Trigger link 11 19 V Source operating boundaries 6 26 Input requirements 11 19 V source protection 3 11 Output specifications 11 20 Triggering 11 1 WwW Examples 11 20 Warm up 3 9 External example 11 23 Warranty information 1 2 Front panel configuration 11 8 Waveforms Front panel example 11 20 Sweep 6 12 Front panel model 11 2 Front panel operation 11 2 Invalid Pulse Mode settings 11 34 Pulse Mode Model 2430 11 30 Remote commands 11 18 Remote example 11 28 Remote model 11 11 Remote operation 11 11 Service Form Model No Serial No Date Name and Telephone No ____ _ _ gt S Company List all control settings describe problem and check boxes that apply to problem Q Intermittent Q Analog output follows display Particular range or function bad specify IEEE failure Q Obvious problem on power up U Batteries and fuses are OK Front panel operational U All ranges or functions are bad Q Checked all cables Display or output check one Drifts Unable to zero Unstable Overload Will not read applied input Q Calibration only Q Certificate of calibration required Data required attach any ad
526. ore buffer capabilities Storing readings Discusses the procedure for storing readings in the internal buffer Recalling readings Provides detailed information for recalling readings stored in the buffer Buffer statistics Discusses the various statistics available on buffer data includ ing minimum and maximum values average mean standard deviation and peak to peak values Timestamp format Explains how to select the timestamp format absolute or delta for recalled buffer readings Remote programming Summarizes the commands to control the data store and provides a programming example 9 2 Data Store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data store overview The SourceMeter has a data store buffer to store from 1 to 2500 source measure read ings The instrument stores the source measure readings that are displayed during the stor age process Each source measure reading also includes the buffer location number and a timestamp Cmpl will flash in buffer recall if reading is in compliance The data store also provides statistical data on the measured readings stored in the buffer These include minimum maximum mean and standard deviation NOTE Whena sweep is performed the readings are automatically stored in the buffer Front panel data store Storing readings Perform the following steps to store readings Set up the SourceMeter for the desired configuration Press the STORE key 3 U
527. ory SOURce 1 Path to control sourcing v CLEar Path to clear source IMMediate Turn selected source off AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear for source AUTO Query state of auto clear OFF MODE lt name gt Specify auto clear mode ALWays or ALWays TCOunt MODE Query auto clear mode FUNCtion Source selection v SHAPe lt name gt Model 2430 Only Select output mode DC y DC or PULSe SHAPe Query output mode MODE lt name gt Select source mode VOLTage CURRent VOLTage y y or MEMory MODE Query source selection v DELay lt n gt Specify settling time in sec 0 to 0 y 9999 999 AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto settling time ON v AUTO Query state of auto settling time DELay Query source settling time CURRent Path to configure I Source y MODE lt n gt Select I Source mode FIXed SWEep or FIXed A LIST MODE Query I Source mode y RANGe lt n gt IlUPIDOWNI Select fixed I Source range 1 05e 4 v i AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable autoranging ON v AUTO Query state of autoranging v RANGe Query I Source range setting v LEVel Set I Source level in amps y IMMediate Set level immediately v AMPLitude lt n gt Specify current level 0 v j AMPLitude Query current level v For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto clear is always enabled This command is ignored For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode source delay is not used This command is i
528. ot do from the front panel these are summarized below Math expressions There are five math expressions available from the panel All except the Percent Deviation are available as pre defined math expressions for remote operation However remote oper ation allows you to create up to five user defined math expressions for a total of nine expressions An example program shows how to create Percent Deviation as a user defined math expression Concurrent measurements With the use of the TOGGLE key you can measure display two functions concurrently Using remote operation you can perform concurrent measurements on all three functions voltage current and resistance See Section 18 SENSel subsystem for details NOTE For the Model 2430 concurrent measurements cannot be performed while in the Pulse Mode See Section 5 for details on Pulse Mode operation Local to remote transition When changing from local to remote operation the following actions occur e The SourceMeter stops performing source measure operations and returns to the idle state ARM annunciator off All sweep operations are aborted e All menus are exited e All pending front panel commands are aborted e Source and compliance editing are disabled Data in the sample buffer is lost i e FETCh CALC1 DATA and CALC2 DATA will not return any data until readings are taken while in remote e Concurrent measurements are enabled All ot
529. ote Power up and CLS resets all bits of all event registers to 0 STATus PRESet has no effect 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 17 Event enable registers As Figure 15 1 shows each status register set has an enable register Each event register bit is logically ANDed amp to a corresponding enable bit of an enable register Therefore when an event bit is set and the corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register The commands to program and read the event enable registers are listed in Table 15 7 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 15 5 and Reading registers page 15 6 NOTE The bits of any enable register can be reset to 0 by sending the 0 parameter value with the appropriate enable command i e STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Table 15 7 Event enable registers commands Command Description Default ESE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program Standard Event Enable Register See Note Parameters ESE Read Standard Event Enable Register STATus STATus Subsystem OPERation Operation Event Enable Register ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See Parameters ENABle Read enable register MEASurement Measurement Event Enable Registe
530. otocol When the 488 1 protocol is selected the mes sage exchange protocol MEP disables Therefore if you use the following query to request the state of MEP you will know which protocol is enabled SYSTem MEP STATe If a 1 is returned MEP is enabled and the SCPI protocol is selected A 0 indicates that MEP is disabled and the 488 1 protocol is enabled To summarize 1 SCPI protocol 0 488 1 protocol 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 3 Protocol differences The following information covers the differences between the 488 1 protocol and the SCPI protocol Message exchange protocol MEP When the 488 1 protocol is selected the MEP is disabled to speed up GPIB operation The following guidelines limitations must be followed when using the 488 1 protocol If a query is sent it must be the only command on the line this limitation also means no multiple queries can be sent Otherwise full SCPI command syntax is still supported including long form and short form commands multiple com mands and MIN MAX DEF parameter definitions For example the following command strings are invalid VOLT RANG 10 OPC RES RANG READ READ READ The following command strings are valid SOURI VOLTage STARt 1 STOP 10 step 1 volt nple 1 0 curr rang min RES RANG MAX READ When a query is sent either the data must be read back or a Device Clear DCL or Interface
531. ounters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model layers For example if performing a 10 point sweep the trigger counter would be set to 10 TRIGger COUNt 10 Operation will stay in the Trigger Layer until the 10 source delay measure points of the sweep are performed If you wanted to repeat the sweep three times the arm counter would be set to three ARM COUNt 3 Three 10 point sweeps can then be performed for a total of 30 source delay measure actions The maximum buffer size for the SourceMeter is 2500 readings The product of the finite values of the two counters cannot exceed 2500 For example if you set an arm count of two the maximum trigger count will be 1250 2500 2 1250 However you can set the arm count to infinite INF With an infinite arm count the maximum trigger count is 2500 NOTE With front panel operation only when a sweep is configured the trigger model settings will not change until the sweep is started After the sweep is finished the trigger model will reset to the previous settings Output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output a trigger via rear panel Trigger Link con nector after various trigger model operations An output trigger is used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation The default is no output triggers See Trigger link later in this section for more information Trigger layer output triggers The SourceMeter can be programmed to output
532. ove In 4 bit mode Digital I O line 4 is controlled manually if SOUR2 TTL4 MODE is set to EOT If SOUR2 TTL4 MODE is set to BUSY operation is identical to the 3 bit mode 16 bit size is available with the 2499 DIGIO option Clearing digital output IMMediate SOURce2 CLEar IMMediate Clear digital output lines Description This action command is used to immediately restore the digital output lines to the output pattern defined by the TTL LEVel command 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual AUTO lt b gt SOURce2 CLEar AUTO lt b gt 0 or OFF 1 or ON Parameters lt b gt SCPI Command Reference 18 103 Control auto clear for digital output Disable auto clear Enable auto clear AUTO This command is used to enable or disable auto clear for the digital out put lines When enabled the output pattern will clear automatically after the pass or fail output bit pattern of a limit test is sent to a handler via the digital output lines The DELay command specifies the pulse width of the limit test bit pat tern See next command After the delay period times out the digital output clears back to the output pattern programmed by the TTL LEVel command When auto clear is disabled the digital output pattern can only be cleared by the MMediate command Query Query auto clear Description On power up auto clear is enabled See CALCulate2 subsystem and Section 12 Limit Testing for details
533. own sweep operation However with auto zero disabled measurements may drift and become erroneous To minimize drift when using NPLC caching with auto zero disabled periodically send SYST AZER ONCE to force an immediate auto zero update Select power line frequency setting LFRequency lt freq gt SYSTem LFRequency lt freq gt Select line frequency Parameters lt freq gt 50 50Hz or 400Hz setting 60 60Hz setting Query LFRequency Query line frequency selection Description Use this command to manually select the line frequency setting 50 or 60Hz For 400Hz operation select 50Hz AUTO lt b gt SYSTem LFRequency AUTO lt b gt Control auto line frequency selection Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable and line frequency selection 0 or OFF Disable auto line frequency selection Query AUTO Query state of auto line frequency selection Description This command is used to enable or disable auto line frequency detec tion When enabled the SourceMeter will sense the line frequency on power up and select the appropriate line frequency setting Manually setting the line frequency disables auto frequency See previ ous command 18 112 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Error queue NOTE See Section 15 for details on the error queue NEXT SYSTem ERRor NEXT Read oldest error code and message Description As error and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue The E
534. pabilities 0 eee eseeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeaees 3 3 Compliance limit v c c cccscecstvececees esses sees sestesseveissuerseceeanatie 3 6 Setting the compliance limit oe eee eseeseeeseeeeeeaees 3 7 Front panel compliance limit n se 3 7 Compliance range synchronization cesses 3 7 Remote compliance limit 0 eee eeeeseeeeeseeeeenees 3 7 Basic Circuit configurations elec eee eeeceeeeeeeeetseteeeeaes 3 8 Operation Considerations 0 0 eee eeceeseceeeeseeeseseeeeaeeseeeaeeseeeaees 3 9 Warm Up seision nnii asea ea E ian a REEN 3 9 AULO ZEO opr EEN NEEE CERENA 3 9 Front panel auto Zero sscsssiseisssissgecirercorsecosseisesasseissras 3 9 Remote command auto Zero cceseeeessesssessseeseeeeeeees 3 9 NPG caching ciocras nia iara aiei 3 10 NPC Cache Setup esccccissesessacsasenssbecdasensteesaderennteadendaes 3 10 Typical NPLC cache test times n se 3 11 V source protection ooo eeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeteecsseeeeeeceaeessaeeeaeeees 3 11 Front panel V source protection cece eeeeeeeeeeee 3 12 Remote command V source protection 0 0 00 eee 3 12 So rcedelay orire a ira e a 3 12 Front panel source delay 0 0 eeeeeseeseeeseeseeereeeeeens 3 13 Remote command source delay n se 3 13 Basic source measure procedure sssseeesseeeeererrsrerrsrerrerrerees 3 14 Output control imsreserieniresoiisisrerin a i i 3 14 Front panel source measure procedure ssseeeeseeeeseeeeeeee 3 14 Step 1 Select SOULCE
535. parameters The following values are the default settings for the SourceMeter ComOpen COM2 9600 N 8 1 ASC CDO CSO DSO LF OPO RS TB8192 RB8192 OPEN ComOpen FOR RANDOM AS 1 SourceMeter setup commands PRINT yo RST Reset instrument to default parameters PRINT SENS FUNC RES Select ohms measurement function PRINT SENS RES NPLC 1 Set measurement speed to 1 PLC PRINT SENS RES MODE MAN Select manual ohms mode PRINT SOUR FUNC CURR Select current source function PRINT SOUR CURR 0 01 Set source to output 10mA PRINT SOUR CLE AUTO ON Enable source auto output off PRINT SENS VOLT PROT 10 Set 10V compliance limit PRINT r r TRIG COUN 1 Set to perform one measurement PRINT FORM ELEM RES Set to output ohms reading to PC Initiate a reading and print results PRINT READ Trigger and acquire one reading LINE INPUT 1 RDS RD Resistance RDS PRINT RDS Clean up and quit finish CLOSE 1 t Close file CLEAR Interface clear END 14 22 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 15 Status Structure Overview Provides an operational overview of the status structure for the SourceMeter Clearing registers and queues Covers the actions that clear reset registers and queues Programming and reading registers Explains how to program enable registers and read any register in th
536. pass or fail condition occurs This bit pattern determines the bin assignment for the DUT With the pass fail pattern on the output line 4 is then pulsed This end of test EOT pulse latches the bit pattern into the register of the handler which places the DUT in the assigned bin When interfacing to this type of handler a maximum of eight compo nent handler bins are supported If the handler requires a a high going or low going EOT pulse program SourceMeter for 3 bit operation and appropriate EOT mode NOTE The EOT and 3 bit modes are configured from the CONFIG LIMITS MENU See Configuring limit tests page 12 19 12 14 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic binning systems Two basic binning systems are shown in Figure 12 7 and Figure 12 8 Both systems require a handler to physically place the device packages in the appropriate bins The han dler is controlled by the SourceMeter via the Digital I O port Single element device binning Figure 12 7 shows a basic binning system for single element devices i e resistors After all programmed testing on the DUT is completed the pass fail digital output information is sent to the component handler which then places the DUT in the appropriate bin The component handler selects the next DUT and the testing process is repeated Figure 12 7 Binning system single element devices Handler SourceMeter 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit
537. peed and Filters Range and digits commands 00 ec eeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 7 6 Range and digits programming example 1 0 00 ee eeeeeeeeee 7 6 Speed commands 2 0 eeesesseeeseceseeceeeeseeceaeeeeaeeeaeeesaeeeeeeeeeees 7 8 Piller Command iesenii ineeie rE a a is 7 12 Filter programming example sssesesseesesesrrererrsesrerrsreresresee 7 13 Relative and Math Relcommands fc cscs issccesascciassaecetenessancedsieasseussnaioasdocanstteussdees 8 3 Rel programming example ec ceeeeeseeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 8 3 Math Commands sessies an lenses gaienses eicscenseteadennes 8 7 Voltage coefficient programming example eee 8 8 Commands for user defined math functions 1 0 0 0 eee 8 10 User defined math function programming example 8 10 Data Store Data store commands 00 ee eee eseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 9 6 Data store example ss secists ese ick etd ieii aeinn r E Ei 9 7 Sweep Operation Logarithmic sweep points sssessssssesseeseseerrersrrsresrerrsreresreeen 10 5 Source memory saved configurations eeesesseerererrereesee 10 9 Linear and log staircase sweep commands eee 10 22 Staircase sweep programming example diode test 10 24 Custom sweep Commands oe eeesesseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 10 24 Custom sweep programming example ce eeeeeeeeeeeee 10 25 Source memory sweep commands ee eeeeeeeeeseeereeees 10 25 Source memory sweep pr
538. planation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data SENSe 1 DATA LATest Description READ Description This command works exactly like FETCh except that it returns only the most recent reading This command is used to trigger and acquire readings The number of readings depends on how the trigger model is configured For example if configured for 20 source measure operations arm count 1 trigger count 20 then 20 sets of readings will be acquired after the Source Meter returns to the idle state When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented e INITiate e FETCh The INITiate command starts operation by taking the instrument out of idle After all source measure operations are completed the SourceMeter goes back into idle at which time the FETCh command is executed The readings are sent to the computer and displayed when the Source Meter is addressed to talk Note that if auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF then the output must be turned on before you can perform a READ The output will then remain on after all source measure operations are completed If auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON then the output will automatically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and tu
539. pression using standard Jv math operator symbols EXPRession Query math expression y CATalog Query list of math expression names v NAME lt name gt Create name for new user defined Power v expression NAME Query created name v DEFine lt form gt Same as EXPRession lt form gt y command DELete Path to delete user defined expressions v SELected lt name gt Delete specified expression v ALL Delete all user defined expressions v UNITs lt name gt Define units name for math expression Ww 3ASCII characters UNITs Query math expression units name STATe lt b gt Enable or disable math expression OFF v STATe Query state of math expression v DATA Path to CALC1 data v LATest Return only most recent math result DATA Read result of math expression v CALCulate2 Subsystem to control CALC2 v FEED lt name gt Select input path CALCulate 1 CURRent VOLT y VOLTage or RESistance FEED Query CALC2 feed v NULL Path to configure and control REL OFFSet lt NRf gt Specify REL value 9 999999e20 to 0 9 999999e20 OFFSet Query REL value STATe lt b gt Enable or disable REL OFF STATe Query state of REL ACQuire Automatically acquire REL value DATA Path to CALC2 data Jv LATest Return only most recent REL or LIMIT result DATA Read math result of CALC2 v 18 4 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 continued CALCulate command summary 2400
540. pulse DELAY and PULSE WIDTH menu items Remote operation The following commands are not valid in the Pulse Mode and are therefore ignored TRIGger DELay Trigger delay is not used in the Pulse Mode SOURce DELay and SOURce DELay AUTO Source delay is not used in the Pulse Mode 12 Limit Testing Types of limits Discusses the three types of limits compliance coarse limits and fine limits Also summarizes the two operating modes grading and sorting Operation overview Covers binning control and pass fail condition for the grading and sorting modes Binning systems Details the handler interface as well as single element and multiple element binning and digital output clear pattern that occurs after a binning operation Configuring and performing limit tests Describes how to configure the SourceMeter for limit testing and summarizes a typical test procedure Remote limit testing Summarizes limit commands and provides a basic pro gramming example 12 2 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Types of limits As shown in Figure 12 1 there are 11 limit tests that can be performed on a DUT These limits include e Limit 1 compliance test e Limit 2 course limits e Limits 3 5 12 fine limits NOTE _ Limit 4 is reserved for the contact check option See Appendix F for details A test is only performed if it is enabled Thus you can perform one two or all 11 tests The tes
541. put voltage will clamp at 1V In this case the CMPL annunciator will flash When in range compliance the source output clamps at the maximum compliance value for the fixed measurement range not the compliance value For example if compliance is set to 1V and the measurement range is 200mV output voltage will clamp at 210mV In this situation the units in the compliance display field will flash For example with the following display Vcmpl 10mA the mA units indication will flash 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Maximum compliance values Source Measure Concepts 6 3 The maximum compliance values for the measurement ranges are summarized in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Compliance limits 2400 2410 2420 Maximum Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 20V 21V 20V 21V 200V 210V 1000V 1 1kV 60V 63V 1pA 1 05pA 1pA 1 05pA 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 20mA 21mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 3 15A 2425 2430 2440 Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 10V 10 5V 100V 105V 40V 42V
542. r ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See Parameters ENABIle Read enable register QUEStionable Questionable Event Enable Register ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program enable register See Parameters ENABle Read Measurement Event Enable Register Parameters lt NDN gt Bxx x Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hx Hexadecimal format x 0 to FFFF Qx Octal format x 0 to 177777 lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 Decimal format Note Power up and STATus PRESet reset all bits of all enable registers to 0 CLS has no effect 15 18 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Programming example program and read register set The command sequence in Table 15 8 programs and reads the measurement register set Registers are read using the binary format which directly indicates which bits are set The command to select format FORMat SREGister is documented in Table 15 2 Table 15 8 Program and read register programming example Command Description FORM SREG BIN Select binary format to read registers STAT MEAS ENAB 512 Enable BFL buffer full STAT MEAS COND Read Measurement Condition Register STAT MEAS Read Measurement Event Register Queues The SourceMeter uses two queues which are first in first out FIFO registers e Output Queue Used to hold reading and response messages Error Queue Used to hold error and stat
543. r equa tions to avoid shutdown page 6 7 for details The heavy solid lines show the limits for continuous output operation Note that in quad rants II and IV sink operation the limits for the 3A and 1A ranges are derated as follows 3A Range Limits linearly derated from 3A OV to 2A 20V 3A OV to 2A 20V 1A Range Limits linearly derated from 1A 20V to 0 7A 60V 1A 20V to 0 7A 60V If the output duty cycle is decreased to 60 or less sink operation limits are restored to normal as shown by the dotted lines in Figure 6 6 Figure 6 6 Model 2420 operating boundaries Tmp 30 C I IV Source V 100 Duty Cycle lt 60 Duty Cycle 6 18 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Models 2425 and 2430 SourceMeters The general operating boundaries for the Models 2425 and 2430 are shown in Figure 6 7 The boundaries for the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode are shown in Figure 6 7A and the boundaries for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode are shown in Figure 6 7B Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode In Figure 6 7A for the Model 2425 and Model 2430 DC Mode the 3A 20V and 1A 100V magnitudes are nominal values The actual maximum output magnitudes of the SourceMeter are 3 15A 21V and 1 05A 105V These operating boundaries are valid only if the SourceMeter is being operated in an envi ronment where the ambient temperature is 30 C or less NOTE Above 30 C h
544. r equations to avoid shutdown Power equations can be used to determine if the SourceMeter will shut down For the fol lowing power equations lour SourceMeter measured current in amps Vour SourceMeter measured voltage in volts DC Duty cycle 0 to 1 Le 50 0 5 Tamp Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C For sink operation Iouyr or Vour but not both must be a negative number The excep tion is lIoyr which is a magnitude absolute value Tf a duty cycle of less than 1 is required for the equations to be true then the maximum output on time must be less than 10 seconds Model 2400 SourceMeter When using the 1A range you can use the two equations below to determine if the SourceMeter will overheat Both of the equations must be true to ensure that the SourceMeter will not overheat The result of the first equation must be lt 150 and the result of the second equation must be lt 120 1A range power equations 114 x IIour D 0 4 x Vour X Ioun x 8 5 x DC Tamg lt 150 and 20 lour x 36 x DC x 1 6 Tang lt 120 6 8 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Model 2410 SourceMeter When using the 1A range you can use the two equations below to determine if the SourceMeter will overheat Both of the equations must be true to ensure that the SourceMeter will not overheat The result of the first equation must be lt 150 and the result of the second equation must be lt 1
545. r limit v ULIMit Query auto range upper limit v LLIMit lt n gt Set auto range lower limit v LLIMit Query auto range lower limit y NPLCycles lt n gt Specify integration rate in line cycles 1 0 v s 0 01 to 10 4 NPLCycles Query integration rate Jv AVERage Path to configure and control digital filter REPeat v TCONtrol lt name gt Specify filter type MOVing or REPeat gt v y TCONtrol Query filter type y COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 v v COUNt Query filter count v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable filter OFF v Jv STATe Query state of filter y 1 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms cannot be enabled using this command This command is invalid error 831 2 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands fol lows the last command summary table in this section 3 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode auto range is invalid error 831 4 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode lt n gt 0 004 to 0 100 5 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode filtering is not used This command is ignored 6 For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the filter cannot be enabled This command is invalid error 831 7 If auto ohms is enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 13 Table 18 7 SOURce command summary Default Source Command Description parameter SCPI mem
546. r more details on compliance limit Table 3 2 Compliance limits 2400 2410 2420 Maximum Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 20V 21V 20V 21V 200V 210V 1000V 1 1kV 60V 63V 1pA 1 05pA 1pA 1 05pA 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 20mA 21mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 3 15A 2425 2430 2440 Maximum Maximum Measure compliance Measure compliance range value range value 200mV 210mV 200mV 210mV 2V 2 1V 2V 2 1V 20V 21V 10V 10 5V 100V 105V 40V 42V 10pA 10 5pA 10pA 10 5pA 100pA 105pA 100pA 105pA 1ImA 1 05mA 1ImA 1 05mA 10mA 10 5mA 10mA 10 5mA 100mA 105mA 100mA 105mA 1A 1 05A 1A 1 05A 3A 10A i 5A 5 25A 3 15A 2425 and 2430 DC mode 10 5A Pulse mode 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 7 Setting the compliance limit Front panel compliance limit Set the compliance limit from the front panel as follows 1 Select the desired source and measure functions using the MEAS and SOURCE keys 2 Press the EDIT key until the cursor flashes in the compliance Compl display field 3 Select the desire
547. r with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintenance information carefully before us ing the product Refer to the manual for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the product may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equip ment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the manual The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits and perform safe installations and repairs of products Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated In
548. rce ranging mode v LIST Configure LIST source mode v CURRent lt NRf gt Create list of I Source values APPend lt NRf gt Add I Source values to end of list v POINts Query number of source values in list STARt lt n gt Specify list sweep start point 1 STARt Query list sweep start point CURRent Query I Source list Jv VOLTage lt NRf gt Create list of V Source values 1 APPend lt NRf gt Add V Source values to end of list POINts Query number of source values in list STARt lt n gt Specify list sweep start point 1 STARt Query list sweep start point VOLTage Query V Source list MEMory Configure Source Memory Sweep SAVE lt n gt Save settings at memory location 1 to 100 RECall lt n gt Recall settings from memory 1 to 100 1 POINts lt n gt Specify number of sweep points 1 to 100 POINts Query number of sweep points STARt lt NRf gt Specify start location for Source Memory 1 Sweep 1 to 100 STARt Query start location PULSe Model 2430 Configure pulse for Pulse v Mode WIDTh lt n gt Set pulse width 0 00015 to 0 005 sec v y WIDTh Query pulse width v DELay lt n gt Set pulse delay 0 to 9999 999 sec Jv s DELay Query pulse delay v 1 The parameter values for this command are provided with the detailed command reference information Detailed information on SCPI commands follows the last command summary table in this section 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Ma
549. re limit test and source memory sweep operation respectively Note that the reading rate for sweep operation can be increased by almost 50 Table G 1 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for measure only sweep operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement Fast 0 01 internal 1198 7 1759 6 46 78 0 01 external 1079 3 1254 7 16 25 Medium 0 10 internal 509 6 511 5 0 37 0 10 external 438 4 440 2 0 41 Normal 1 00 internal 59 0 59 0 0 00 1 00 external 57 9 57 9 0 00 Table G 2 SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure sweep operation rdgs sec Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement Fast 0 01 internal 999 9 1369 3 36 94 0 01 external 916 0 1035 2 13 02 Medium 0 10 internal 470 2 471 6 0 29 0 10 external 409 3 409 8 0 12 Normal 1 00 internal 58 4 58 4 0 00 1 00 external 57 3 57 3 0 00 Table G 3 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI 488 1 reading speed comparisons for source measure limit test sweep operation rdgs sec GPIB 488 1 Protocol G 7 Speed NPLC Trig origin SCPI 488 1 Improvement Fast 0 01 internal 809 5 981 1 21 19 0 01 external 756 2 886 9 17 28 Medium 0 10 internal 388 9 398 0 2 35 0 10 external 374 6 383 9 2 47 Normal 1 00 internal 56 9 57 1 0 41 1 00 external 56 6 56 9 0 48 Note Pass Fail test performed using one high limit and one low math limit Table G 4 S
550. red to program the SourceMeter for ohms measurements and gives several typical pro gramming examples 4 2 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms configuration menu NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode offset compensated ohms cannot be enabled from the ohms configuration menu However offset compensated ohms is avail able as a math function Section 8 Math operations To access the ohms configuration menu press CONFIG then OHMS Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to select the various items in the menu tree which is shown in Figure 4 1 Menu items include SOURCE Select AUTO or MANUAL source mode SENSE MODE Select 2 WIRE or 4 WIRE sense mode GUARD Choose OHMS or CABLE guard OFFSET COMPENSATION Enable or disable offset compensated ohms not valid for Model 2430 Pulse Mode SRC RDBK Enable or disable source readback mode The following paragraphs discuss each of these aspects in detail Figure 4 1 Ohms configuration menu tree SOURCE CONFIG SENSE OFFSET SRC MODE GUARD COMPENSATION RDBK AUTO MANUAL 2 WIRE 4 WIRE OHMS CABLE JENABLE JDISABLE ENABLE DISABLE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Ohms Measurements 4 3 Ohms measurement methods NOTE For the Model 2430 the following ohms measurement procedures assume that the DC Mode of operation is selected Vsrc or Isrc displayed in the source field If in the P
551. red source measure and or math expres sion operation 2 Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU e Select SAVESETUP Select SOURCE MEMORY e Select SAVE e Use the A and w keys and the cursor keys to display the desired memory loca tion and press ENTER Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure 3 Configure the SourceMeter for the next point in the sweep and repeat Step 2 to save that setup in the next memory location 4 Repeat Step 3 for all points in the sweep Restoring source memory setups In addition to automatically sweeping through source memory locations see Configuring and running a sweep later in this section you can also recall them individually as follows Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU Select SAVESETUP then press ENTER Choose SOURCE MEMORY then press ENTER Select RESTORE then press ENTER Select the source memory location to restore 1 100 then press ENTER Bias De E Saving multiple source memory sweeps If desired you can save multiple source memory sweeps in the 100 memory locations For example you could save setups in locations through 4 for one sweep and other setups in any other range of memory locations such as locations 50 through 58 To select which sweep to execute simply select two settings 1 the sweep start location and 2 the num ber of sweep points See Performing a source memory sweep later in this section Saved source memory con
552. refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the termi nal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in per sonal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before per forming the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Getting Started 1 3 Inspection The SourceMeter was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvious signs of physi cal damage that may have occurred during transit There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immedi ately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment The following items are included with every SourceMeter order e SourceMeter with line cord e Safety test leads Model 1754 e Accessories as ordered e Certificate of calibration e User s Manual e Service Manual Support Software Disk including TestPoint instrument library for GPIB and Lab VIEW for Windows driver e Manual addenda containing any improvements or changes to the instrume
553. rements NOTE The following procedure assumes that the SourceMeter is already connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 WARNING To prevent electric shock do not make or break connections to the SourceMeter with the output on If on press the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output off 1 Select ohms measurement function Press MEAS Q to select the ohms measurement function 2 Select manual ohms measurement method Select the manual ohms measurement method as follows e Press CONFIG then Q e Select SOURCE then press ENTER e Select MANUAL then press ENTER e Press EXIT to return to normal display 3 Configure source For manual ohms you can Source I or Source V at the user programmed output level The lowest allowable compliance limit is based on the load and the source value For example if sourcing 1V to a 1kQ resistor the lowest allowable current compliance is lmA 1V 1kQ 1mA Setting a limit lower than 1mA will place the source in compliance Refer to steps and 2 of Section 3 Basic source measure procedure to configure the source 4 6 Ohms Measurements 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE Use the V Source for manual ohms measurements when high speed settling is required i e production testing 4 Select measurement range Using the RANGE A and W keys select the lowest possible fixed range or use AUTO range Note that if sourcing current you will be setting the voltage measurement range
554. ress CONFIG and then ON OFF OUTPUT to display the menu Figure 13 5 shows the overall menu structure NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode INTERLOCK is the only menu item that is dis played For the Pulse Mode the output off state is always set to NORMAL and auto output off is always enabled INTERLOCK Use to ENABLE or DISABLE the interlock line of the Digital output This line is used as an interlock for a test fixture See Digital I O port page 13 2 OFF STATE Use to select the OFF state of the output See Output off states page 13 8 for details HIGH IMPEDANCE When the OUTPUT is turned OFF the output relay opens This disconnects external circuitry from the input output of the SourceMeter NORMAL When the OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present current range ZERO When the V Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source is set to OV and current compliance is not changed When the I Source OUTPUT is turned off the V Source mode is selected and set to OV Current compliance is set to the programmed Source I value or to 0 5 full scale of the present cur rent range whichever is greater Measurements are performed and displayed while the OUTPUT is off GUARD When OUTPUT is turned OFF the current source is selected and set to OA Voltage compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range AUTO OFF
555. ression defines the vector array size For example assume the SourceMeter is programmed to perform 10 source measure operations and the following vectored math calculation is used volt 3 volt 9 The above expression defines a vector array that is made up of 10 read ings Since the SourceMeter is programmed to perform 10 source measure operations the calculation will yield one result every 10 SDM cycles The fourth voltage reading vector 3 and the 10th voltage read ing vector 9 are used for the calculation Now assume that the SourceMeter is configured to perform 20 source measure operations Since the vector size is still 10 two 10 reading 18 32 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual arrays will be created The calculation will now yield two results one for each array The first result as before is based on the fourth and 10th readings of the first array The second result is based on the 14th and 20th readings These are the fourth vector 3 and 10th vector 9 readings of the sec ond array Note that you need complete vector arrays to acquire valid calculation results If in the preceding example the SourceMeter is changed to per form 25 source measure operations then the third array will be incom plete first array is 10 readings second array is 10 readings third array is only 5 readings After the SourceMeter goes back into idle the Insufficient vector data error mes
556. ressions NOTE Percent deviation DEV is included in the catalog as a built in math expres sion but is only available from the front panel However percent deviation can be added as a user defined math expression for remote operation Program examples Select create math expression name CATalog CALCulate 1 MATH EXPression CATalog Query list of expression names Description This query command is used to list the math expression names This list includes the built in expression names as well as the names of expres sions defined by the user The names for the built in expressions are as follows POWER OFFCOMPOHM VOLTCOEF VARALPHA DEV Thus the CATalog command will return the above names as well as the names of any user defined expressions See NAME lt name gt page 18 24 to assign names to user defined expressions NAME lt name gt CALCulate 1 MATH EXPression NAME lt name gt Select math expression Parameters lt name gt POWER Instantaneous power equation OFFCOMPOHM Offset compensated ohms equation VOLTCOEP Resistor voltage coefficient equation VARALPHA Varistor alpha equation user name Assigned name for user defined expression where the user name is made up of ASCII characters up to 10 Query NAME Query selected math expression 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 25 Description This command c
557. rformed first and then limit tests are performed on that math result The result of the math operation and the result of the limit tests pass or fail are displayed As shown these readings can also be stored in the data store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 6 21 Data flow front panel Measurement Conversions V 1 Q A Math FCTN and Limit Tests Disabled Measurement Conversions V 1 Q Math FCTN or Limit Tests B Math FCTN or Limit Tests Enabled Measurement Conversions V 1 Q Math FCTN C Both Math FCTN and Limit Tests Enabled Source Measure Concepts 6 41 Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Readings Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Math or Limits Results Display Buffer and Statistics Readings Display Math and Limits Results 6 42 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Buffer considerations When the SourceMeter is in the process of storing readings configuration changes affect what gets stored in the buffer These storage considerations and restrictions are summa rized in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Buffer considerations What happens if the basic measurement What happens if Configuration at start of function V I or Q the MATH function What happens if REL or the storage process is changed is changed LIMITS is changed Measure V I or Q MATH FCTN enabled REL LIMITS enabled Bu
558. ring the off time of the pulse period and is used to adjust the duty cycle NOTE See Section 5 for details on Model 2430 Pulse Mode SOURce2 The following commands are used to set the logic level of the digital output lines and con trol the pulse width of limit test output patterns that are sent to component handlers Limit tests are configured and controlled from the CALCulate2 Subsystem For details on limit testing see Section 12 Limit Testing Setting digital output LEVel lt NRf gt lt NDN gt SOURCce2 TTL LEVel DEFault lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Set digital output pattern SOURce2 TTL LEVel ACTual Query actual output pattern Parameters lt NRf gt lt NDN gt 0 to 7 3 bit Specify digital output value 0 to 15 4 bit Query TTL Query default digital output value ACTual Query actual digital output value Description This command is used to set the logic levels of the output lines of the Digital I O port When set high the specified output line will be at approximately 5V When set low the output line will be at OV 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 101 Use the following table to determine the parameter value for the desired decimal digital output pattern Decimal OUT 4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H
559. ring with other instruments and remote triggering Pulse Mode triggering Model 2430 Explains the triggering differences between the DC Mode and Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 11 2 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Front panel trigger operation Front panel trigger model NOTE For the Model 2430 the following discussion on the trigger model pertains explicitly to the DC Mode of operation The trigger model operates a little dif ferently for the Pulse Mode These differences are covered in Pulse Mode trig gering Model 2430 later in this section The flowchart in Figure 11 1 summarizes triggering for front panel operation The trigger model is modeled after the remote commands used to control triggering See Remote trigger commands page 11 18 Key trigger model settings are included in the flowchart Note that the BENCH defaults are denoted by the symbol The primary actions of the trigger model are Source Delay and Measure The source action outputs the programmed voltage or current value and the programmed delay pro vides a settling period for the source before the measurement is performed The trigger model consists of two layers Arm Layer and Trigger Layer to provide versa tility Programmable counters allow operations to be repeated and various input and out put trigger options are available to provide source measure synchronization between the SourceMeter and other instruments
560. rmal display 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Digital I O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 13 5 Remote digital output control Use the SOURce2 TTL lt NRf gt command to control the digital output line logic levels where lt NRf gt is the decimal value shown in Table 13 1 For example send the following command to set the output lines to L H L H SOUR2 TTL 5 Table 13 1 Digital output line settings Decimal OUT 4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 value L L L L 0 L L L H 1 L L H L 2 L L H H 3 L H L L 4 L H L H 5 L H H L 6 L H H H 7 H L L L 8 H L L H 9 H L H L 10 H L H H 11 H H L L 12 H H L H 13 H H H L 14 H H H H 15 L Low Gnd H High gt 3V 0 7 in 3 bit mode which is controlled by CONFIG LIMIT menu See Section 12 0 65535 with 2499 DIGIO 16 bit option Safety interlock The digital I O port provides an interlock line for use with a test fixture interlock switch When properly used the OUTPUT of the SourceMeter will turn OFF when the lid of the test fixture is opened See Section 2 Connections for important safety information when using the test fixture interlock 13 6 Digital O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual When the interlock is enabled see Front panel output configuration page 13 7 the out put of the SourceMeter cannot be turned on unless the interlock line is pulled low through
561. rming a sweep with the SourceMeter contact check is performed before each point in that sweep To save test cycle time the contact check is performed before the memory location for the sweep point is recalled If there is a failure in any of the four modes below the sweep memory location containing the open lead will not be recalled from the memory Auto clear on end binning Source auto clear on SOUR CLE AUTO ON Bin control at end of sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON END If a point in a sweep operation fails contact check the output is turned off and will remain off until the end of the sweep points The triggers will be supplied and accepted to main tain timing The memory for each of the points after the failure will not be recalled and no further contact checks will be performed until the end of the sweep points If the sweep is to be repeated the new sweep will start with a contact check and normal measurement operation will resume Auto clear on immediate binning Bin control at end of each point sweep CALC2 CLLM BCON IMM If contact check detects an open lead the output is not turned on for that particular loca tion and that sweep point is not recalled and will be skipped The sweep proceeds to the next sweep point and a contact check test is performed Auto clear off end binning Source auto clear off SOUR CLE AUTO OFF Bin control occurring at end of sweep CALC2 CLIM BCON END The output is kept on throughout the entire sw
562. rn off after each measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 17 5 NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the output will turn on when the READ com mand is sent See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the type of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data MEASure lt function gt Parameters Description lt function gt CURRent DC Amps function VOLTage DC Volts function RESistance Ohms function This command combines other signal oriented measurement commands to perform a one shot measurement and acquire the reading Note that if a function is not specified the measurement will be done on the func tion that is presently selected When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented e CONFigure lt function gt e READ When CONFigure is executed the instrument goes into a one shot measurement mode See CONFigure for more details When READ is executed its operations will then be performed In general another ABORt is performed then an INITiate and finally a FETCh to acquire the readings See READ for more details When MEASure is sent the source turns on and a single measurement is performed If auto output off is enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON then the output will
563. rom the CONFIGURE FILTERING menu and is struc tured as shown in Figure 7 3 Use Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to check and or change the filter configuration CONFIGURE FILTERING menu Press CONFIG and then FILTER to display the menu e AVERAGING MODE Use this menu item to select filter type MOVING or REPEAT e AVERAGE COUNT Use this menu item to specify filter count 1 to 100 readings NOTE The configured filter is the same for all measurement functions Enabling filter The filter is enabled by pressing the FILTER key The Filter Enabled message and the filter count are briefly displayed The FILT annunciator is on while the filter is enabled Pressing FILTER a second time disables filter 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 7 2 Moving average and repeating filters Conversion Conversion Reading 1 Conversion Conversion Conversion 10 Conversion 9 8 7 6 Reading 5 10 4 3 2 Conversion 1 Conversion A Type Moving Average Readings 10 Conversion 10 Conversion 9 8 7 6 Reading 1 Conversion 1 Conversion B Type Repeating Readings 10 Response time Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 11 Conversion ee0 Reading Reading 2 3 Conversion Reading 11 Conversion 30 29 28 27 Reading 26 Reading 2 25 3 24 23 22 Conversion 21 The filter parameters have speed and accuracy trade o
564. romised to accommodate the conversion Figure 18 1 shows an example ASCII string that includes all the data elements See ELEMents lt item list gt page 18 51 Figure 18 1 also shows the byte order of the data string Data elements not specified by the ELEMents command are simply not included in the string Keep in mind that the byte order can only be reversed for the binary for mat See BORDer lt name gt page 18 56 command ASCII data format 1 000206E 00 1 000000E 04 1 000236E 04 7 282600E 01 4 813200E 04 Voltage Reading T Current Resistance Time Status Reading Reading 18 50 SCPI Command Reference Figure 18 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 754 single precision format REAL 32 or SREal will select the binary IEEE 754 single precision data format Figure 18 2 shows the normal byte order format for each data element For example if three valid elements are specified the data string for each reading conversion is made up of three 4 byte data blocks Note that the data string for each reading conversion is preceded by a 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 Figure 18 2 does not show the byte for the terminator that is attached to the end of each data string IEEE 754 single precision data format 32 data bits Header Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 e f sign bit 0 positive 1 negative exponent bits 8 fraction bits 23 Normal by
565. rrent Select current sweep mode Auto source ranging Select linear staircase sweep Trigger count sweep points 100ms source delay Turn on source output Trigger sweep request data 2 1 This command should normally be sent after START STOP and STEP to avoid delays caused by rebuilding sweep when each command is sent 2 For single sweep trigger count should equal number of points in sweep Points Stop Start Step 1 You can use SOUR SWE POIN query to read the number of points Custom sweep commands Table 10 5 summarizes remote commands used for custom sweep operation See Section 18 Configure list for more details on these commands Table 10 5 Custom sweep commands Command Description SOURce CURRent MODE LIST SOURce VOLTage MODE LIST SOURce LIST CURRent lt list gt SOURce LIST CURRent APPend lt list gt SOURce LIST CURRent POINts SOURce LIST VOLTage lt list gt SOURce LIST VOLTage APPend lt list gt SOURce LIST VOLTage POINts SOURce SWEep RANGing lt name gt Select current list custom sweep mode Select voltage list custom sweep mode Define I source list I1 I2 In Add I source list value s list I1 I2 In Query length of I source list Define V source list list V1 V2 Vn Add V source list value s list V1 V2 Vn Query length of V source list Select source ranging name BEST AUTO or FIXed
566. rrent is 0 5pA 10A range only in pulse mode HW Rev B 4 30 02 2400 2400 C 2410 2410 C 2420 2420 C 2425 2425 C 2430 2430 C 2440 2440 C SourceMeter Line Specifications SYSTEM SPEEDS MEASUREMENT MAXIMUM RANGE CHANGE RATE 75 second MAXIMUM MEASURE AUTORANGE TIME 40ms fixed source 2 SWEEP OPERATION READING RATES rdg second for 60Hz 50Hz SOURCE MEASURE MEASURE SOURCE MEASURE gt PASS FAIL TEST 5 SOURCE MEMORY SPEED NPLC TRIGGER ORIGIN TO MEM TO GPIB TO MEM TO GPIB TOMEM TO GPIB TOMEM TO GPIB Fast 0 01 internal 2081 2030 1754 1551 1515 1369 902 900 981 165 162 165 IEEE 488 1 Mode 0 01 external 1239 1200 1254 1018 990 1035 830 830 886 163 160 163 Fast 0 01 internal 2081 2030 1198 1210 1551 1515 1000 900 902 900 809 840 165 162 164 162 IEEE 488 2 Mode 0 01 external 1239 1200 1079 1050 1018 990 916 835 830 830 756 780 163 160 162 160 Medium 0 10 internal 510 433 509 433 470 405 470 410 389 343 388 343 133 126 132 126 IEEE 488 2 Mode 0 10 external 438 380 438 380 409 360 409 365 374 333 374 333 131 125 131 125 Normal 1 00 internal 59 49 59 49 58 48 58 48 56 47 56 47 44 38 44 38 IEEE 488 2 Mode 1 00 external 57 48 57 48 57 48 57 47 56 47 56 47 44 38 44 38 SINGLE READING OPERATION READING RATES rdg second for 60Hz 50Hz MEASURE SOURCE MEASURE SOURCE MEASURE PASS FA
567. rror Queue is a first in first out FIFO register that can hold up to 10 messages After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk the oldest message is sent to the computer and is then removed from the queue NOTE The STATus Queue command performs the same function as SYSTem ERRor NEXT See STATus subsystem page 18 104 ALL SYSTem ERRor ALL 2 Read all errors codes and messages Description This query command is similar to the NEXT command except that all messages in the Error Queue are sent to the computer when the SourceMeter is addressed to talk All messages are removed from the queue COUNT SYSTem ERRor COUNt Return the number of errors Description After sending this command and addressing the SourceMeter to talk a decimal number will be sent to the computer That is the number of mes sages in the Error Queue CODE NEXT SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT Read oldest error code only Description This command is identical to the NEXT command except only the code is returned The message itself is not returned The error is cleared from the queue CODE ALL SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL Read all errors codes only Description This query command is identical to the ALL command except only the codes are returned The actual messages are not returned All errors are cleared from the queue CLEar SYSTem CLEar Clear Error Queue Description This action command is used to clear t
568. rs Programming enable registers The only registers that can be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status structure are read only registers The following explains how to ascertain the parameter values for the various commands used to program enable registers The actual commands are covered later in this section Table 15 3 and Table 15 6 A command to program an event enable register is sent with a parameter value that deter mines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register An enable register can be programmed using any of the following data formats for the parameter value binary decimal hexadecimal or octal The bit positions of the register Figure 15 2 indicate the binary parameter value For example if you wish to sets bits B4 B3 and B1 the binary value would be 11010 where B4 1 B3 1 B1 1 and all other bits are 0 When you use one of the other formats con vert the binary number to its decimal hexadecimal or octal equivalent Binary 11010 Decimal 26 Hexadecimal 1A Octal 32 Note that Figure 15 2 includes the decimal weight for each register bit To set bits B4 B3 and B1 the decimal parameter value would be the sum of the decimal weights for those bits 16 8 2 26 Figure 15 2 16 bit status register Bit Position Binary Value Decimal Weights A Bits 0 through 7 Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 Weights 215
569. ry location 3 Setup Source Memory Location 100 Dummy Location Turn off everything to increase speed Using a Dummy Location allows the Source Memory Sweep to stop testing the DUT as quickly as possible This allow the test setup to ensure high yields and to not waste test time on devices that fail early in the Source Memory Sweep RST Restore GPIB default Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG w w w w w SOUR DEL 0 SOUR VOLT 0 M SENS FUNC OFF ALL CALC2 LIM1 STAT OFF CALC2 LIM2 STAT OFF conditions Set Source Delay to 0 Set Source Voltage to 0 Turn off all Measure Functions Turn Limit 1 Off Turn Limit 2 Off CALC2 CLIM PASS SML NEXT Set SML Pass Location CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML 100 Set SML Fail Location SOUR MEM SAVE 100 Save in source memory location 100 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out Call Out putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd putCmd intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG intG RST CALC2 CL
570. s Address changes and bus resets Determine by SYSTem POSetup Section 18 2048 bytes None All queries Common Commands and SCPI None See Table E 2 Contained in SCPI command sub systems tables see Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 Block display messages 32 characters max See Section 14 Programming syntax See Section 14 Programming syntax None See Section 18 FORMat subsystem See Section 16 Common Commands See Service Manual Not applicable Not applicable See Section 16 Common Commands Not applicable Not applicable See Section 16 Common Commands See Section 16 Common Commands See Section 15 Status Structure All are sequential except INIT OPC OPC and WAIT see Section 16 Common Commands E 4 IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Table E 2 Coupled commands Command Also changes SENSe RANGe UPPER SENSe RANGe AUTO SENSe NPLC NPLC for all other functions SOURCce RANGe SOURCce RANGe AUTO SOURce STARt SOURCce STEP SOURCce CENTer SOURCce SPAN SOURCce STOP SOURCce STEP SOURCce CENTer SOURCce SPAN SOURce STEP SOURce POINts SOURce POINts SOURce STEP SOURCce CENTer SOURce STARt SOURCce STOP SOURCce STEP SOURce SPAN SOURce STARt SOURCce STOP SOURCce STEP
571. s configure Limit 2 test for 5 HI and LO limits and Limit 3 test for 1 HI and LO limits If Limit 2 fails the handler places the DUT in the bin labeled gt 5 If Limit 2 passes Limit 3 test is run If Limit 3 fails the DUT is placed in the bin labeled 5 If Limit 3 passes the handler places the DUT in the bin labeled 1 Limit test modes There are two modes of operation for limit tests grading and sorting For Limit 1 test compliance operation is similar for both limit test modes If Limit 1 test fails the FAIL message is displayed and the testing process for that DUT or DUT element is terminated A pass condition allows the testing process to proceed to the next enabled limit test With the grading mode selected each enable software test Limit 2 3 5 12 is performed until a failure occurs When a test fails the FAIL message is displayed and the testing pro cess for that DUT or DUT element is terminated With the sorting mode selected each enabled software test Limit 2 3 5 12 is performed until a test passes When a test passes the PASS message is displayed and the testing pro cess for that DUT is terminated Binning Even though no additional equipment is required to perform limit tests on the DUT a component handler can be interfaced to the SourceMeter Digital I O port to perform bin ning operations After the testing process the DUT will be placed in an assigned bin For the grading mode the binning
572. s lt name gt CALCulate 1 Use result of CALC1 VOLTage Use measured voltage reading CURRent Use measured current reading RESistance Use measured resistance reading Query FEED Query input path for limit tests Description This command is used to select the input path for the limit tests With CALCulate 1 selected the specified limits will be compared to the result of CALC1 With VOLTage selected limits will be compared to the voltage measurement With CURRent or RESistance selected limits will be compared with the respective current or resistance measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 35 Null feed reading OFFSet lt n gt CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet lt n gt Specify null offset REL for feed Parameters lt n gt 9 999999e20 to Specify null offset value 9 999999e20 Query OFFSet Query null offset value Description This command lets you establish a null offset REL for the selected feed When Null Offset is enabled the result is the algebraic difference between the feed reading and the offset value CALC2 reading feed reading null offset ACQuire CALCulate2 NULL ACQuire Automatically acquire REL value Description This command automatically acquires the null offset value The next available reading will become the offset value STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 NULL STATe lt b gt Control null offset Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable null offset 0 or OFF Disable null offset Query S
573. s ENTER a Grading After selecting GRADING select IMMEDIATE or END binning then press ENTER b Sorting After selecting SORTING you will be prompted to set the fail pat tern for Limit 2 3 5 12 tests 0 7 for 3 bit or 0 to 15 for 4 bit then press ENTER This setting is only significant if performing Limit 2 3 5 12 tests see Section 12 for details Press EXIT select H W LIMITS then press ENTER Select LIMIT4 CCHK then press ENTER Select CONTROL then press ENTER Select ENABLE then press ENTER Select DIGIO PATTERN then press ENTER Set the output fail pattern as desired for when the contact check Limit 4 fails 0 to 7 3 bit or 0 to 15 4 bit Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display Select the Q function and set range then turn on the output Press LIMIT to enable limit testing and observe the display for a PASS or FAIL message when the contact check passes or fails respectively F 14 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Remote contact check operation Contact check remote commands Table F 3 summarizes contact check remote commands Commands specific to contact check operation are covered in detail later in this appendix while remaining commands are covered in Section 18 Table F 3 Contact check remote commands Command Description OPT SOURce2 BSIZe 314 BSIZe CALCulate2 CLIMits MODE GRADING SORTING MODE BCONtro
574. s ENTER or wait six seconds to exit from the edit mode NOTE When a compliance limit value is entered the SourceMeter automatically goes to the lowest most sensitive compliance range that will accommodate that value For the Models 2400 and 2410 the lowest compliance levels that can be set are 0 00100pA 1nA and 000 200mV 200uV For the Models 2420 2425 2430 and 2440 the levels are 00 0100uA 10nA and 000 200mV 200uV Step 3 Select measurement function and range Select the desired measurement function by pressing MEAS V voltage or MEAS I current When measuring the source i e Source V Measure V you cannot select the range using the measurement RANGE keys The selected source range determines the measurement range When not measuring the source i e Source V Measure I measurement range selection can be done manually or automatically When using manual ranging use the lowest possi ble range for best accuracy In autorange the SourceMeter automatically goes to the most sensitive range to make the measurement Measuring voltage When sourcing current you can use the RANGE A and Y keys to manually select the voltage measurement range You can also press AUTO to select autoranging When sourcing voltage the RANGE keys are inoperative Measuring current When sourcing voltage you can use the RANGE A and 9 keys to manually select the current measurement range You can also press AUTO to select autoranging
575. s Manual Offset compensated ohms RST SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC SOUR FUNC if SSOUR FUNC VOLT then if sSOUR FUNC CURR then SOUR SWE POIN TRIG COUN CALC MATH EXPR NAME CALC STAT OUTPUT INIT CALC DATA Resistor voltage coefficient RST SENS FUNC ON ALL SENS RES MODE SOUR FUNC ON if sSOUR FUNC VOLT then if SSOUR FUNC CURR then SOUR SWE POIN TRIG COUN gt CALC MATH EXPR NAME CALC STAT OUTPUT INIT CALC DATA SCPI Command Reference 18 27 VOLT CURR VOLT or CURR SOUR VOLT STAR lt n gt STOP lt n gt MODE SWE SOUR CURR STAR lt n gt STOP lt n gt MODE SWE 2 2 OFFCOMPOHM ON ON MAN VOLT or CURR SOUR VOLT STAR lt n gt STOP lt n gt MODE SWE SOUR CURR STAR lt n gt STOP lt n gt MODE SWE 2 2 VOLTCOEP ON ON 18 28 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Varistor alpha RST SENS FUNC OFF ALL SENS FUNC ON VOLT CURR SOUR FUNC MODE CURR SOUR CURR STAR lt n gt STOP lt n gt MODE SWE SOUR CURR STEP lt n gt TRIG COUN 2 CALC MATH EXPR NAME VARALPHA CALC STAT ON OUTPUT ON INIT CALC DATA Percent Deviation NOTE Percent deviation is not a built in math expression for remote operation This program example creates the following percent deviation PER_DEV calcula tion to test 1OkQ resistors This user defined math expression is added to the catalog
576. s SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 and SCPI Conformance Information Table E 1 IEEE 488 documentation requirements E 3 Requirements Description or reference 1 IEEE 488 Interface Function Codes 2 Behavior of SourceMeter when the address is set outside the range 0 30 3 Behavior of SourceMeter when valid address is entered 4 Power On Setup Conditions 5 Message Exchange Options a Input buffer size b Queries that return more than one response message unit c Queries that generate a response when parsed d Queries that generate a response when read e Coupled commands 6 Functional elements required for SCPI commands 7 Buffer size limitations for block data 8 Syntax restrictions 9 Response syntax for every query command 10 Device to device message transfer that does not follow rules of the standard 11 Block data response size 12 Common Commands implemented by SourceMeter 13 Calibration query information 14 Trigger macro for DDT 15 Macro information 16 Response to IDN identification 17 Storage area for PUD and PUD 18 Resource description for RDT and RDT 19 Effects of RST RCL and SAV 20 TST information 21 Status register structure 22 Sequential or overlapped commands 23 Operation complete messages See Appendix D Cannot enter an invalid addres
577. s all measurements NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode only one function can be enabled Sending FUNCtion ALL results in error 831 COUNt SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON COUNt Query number of functions enabled SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF COUNt Query number of functions disabled Description This query command is used to determine the number of functions that are enabled or disabled When ON COUNT is sent the response message will indicate the number of functions that are enabled When OFF COUNt is sent the response message will indicate the number of functions that are disabled STATe lt name gt SENSe 1 FUNCtion STATe lt name gt Query state of specified function Parameters lt name gt CURRent DC Amps measurement function VOLTage DC Volts measurement function RESistance Ohms measurement function NOTE The function name must be enclosed in double or single quotes i e func stat volt Description This command is used to query the state of the specified measurement function A returned response message of 0 indicates that the specified function is disabled while a 1 indicates that the function is enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 63 RESistance MODE lt name gt SENSe 1 RESistance MODE lt name gt Select ohms measurement mode Parameters lt name gt MANual Manual ohms mode AUTO Auto ohms mode Query MODE Query ohms mod
578. s covered in Section 5 Also see Section 10 for information on Pulse Mode sweeps Typical applications for staircase sweeps include I V curves for two and three terminal semiconductor devices characterization of leakage versus voltage and semiconductor breakdown Pulse sweeps are used in applications where thermal response is measured or where sustained power levels can damage the external device under test DUT Source memory sweeps are used in applications where multiple source measure functions and or math expressions are required The custom sweep can be used to configure a pulse sweep with a 50 duty cycle For example a 1V pulse sweep can be configured by programming the odd numbered points for 1V and the even numbered points for OV When the sweep is run the output will alter nate between 1V and OV After a sweep is run the data is stored in the sweep buffer This data can be accessed from the front panel or sent to a computer remote operation for evaluation plotting Statisti cal information on readings stored in the buffer are also available from the front panel 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 13 Figure 6 3 Three basic sweep waveform types Stop Bias A Linear Staircase Sweep Stop 100 10 Logarithmic scale 1 shown for Start staircase steps 0 1 Bias B Logarithmic Staircase Sweep First Point Last Point Bias C Custom Sweep 6 14 Source Measure Concepts 2400 S
579. s has requested service with the SRQ line However the serial polling sequence may be performed at any time to obtain the status byte from the SourceMeter Front panel GPIB operation This section describes aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and status messages See Appendix B for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 program ming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and command queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request annunciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state REM does not necessarily indicate the state of the bus REN line as the instrument must be addressed to listen with REN true before the REM indicator turns on When the instrument is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key are locked out When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel operation is restored NOTE IfLLO is in effect LOCAL will be locked out OUTPUT ON OFF is still opera tional in remote If ARM SOUR is set to manual the TRIG key will be active in remote 14 10 Remote Operations 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TALK This indicator is on when the
580. s is available Keithley P N GA 22 Model 8604 SMD probe set Consists of two test leads 0 9m each terminated with a surface mount device grabber clip on one end and a banana plug with a retractable sheath on the other end Low thermal probes Model 8610 low thermal shorting plug Consists of four banana plugs mounted to a 1 inch square circuit board interconnected to provide a short circuit among all plugs Model 8611 low thermal patch leads Consists of two test leads 0 9m each with a banana plug that has a retractable sheath at each end These leads minimize the thermally induced offsets that can be created by test leads Model 8612 low thermal spade leads Consists of two test leads 0 9m each termi nated with a spade lug on one end and a banana plug that has a retractable sheath on the other end These leads minimize the thermally induced offsets that can be created by test leads Cables and adapters Model 2499 DIGIO adapter Lets you expand the Digital I O port to 16 bits instead of 4 bits Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 shielded GPIB cables Connect the SourceMeter to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI The Model 7007 1 is 1m long the Model 7007 2 is 2m long Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 trigger link cables Connect the SourceMeter to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 7001 Switch System The Model 8501 1 is 1m long
581. s the accuracy of the measurements as well as the maximum signal that can be measured Note that with the output off dashed lines are dis played i e uA to indicate that measurements are not being performed Maximum readings The full scale input for each voltage current and auto ohms measurement range is defined by the selected range For example 2 11V is the full scale reading for the 2V range 105 5mA is the full scale reading for the 100mA range and 2 11kQ is the full scale reading for the 2kQ range Table 3 1 in Section 3 lists the full scale readings for all ranges For manual ohms measurements the display reading is the result of the V I calculation Effectively there are no ohms ranges Thus there are never any leading zeroes in the dis play reading For example a resistor that is measured at 936 236kQ will be displayed as 936 236kQ 5 digit resolution The RANGE keys are used to select the voltage or cur rent measurement range Input levels that exceed the maximum levels cause the OVERFLOW message to be dis played while 9 91E 37 will be returned via remote Ranging limitations When sourcing voltage Source V you cannot use the RANGE keys to change the voltage measurement Measure V range Also when sourcing current Source I you cannot use the RANGE keys to change the current measurement Measure I range For these source measure configurations the measurement range is determined by the selec
582. s volt ages are present at output HI they are also present at the GUARD terminal NOTE See Section 2 Guarding methods for details on guarded test connections as well as information on selecting guard modes For 6 wire ohms guard measurements use the GUARD output off state For details on the GUARD output off state see Section 13 Output off states The driven guard available at the rear panel GUARD terminal is always enabled and pro vides a buffered voltage that is at the same level as the Input Output HI or Sense HI for remote sense voltage The purpose of guarding is to eliminate the effects of leakage cur rent and capacitance that can exist between input output high and low In the absence of a driven guard leakage in the external test circuit could be high enough to adversely affect the performance of the SourceMeter Leakage current can occur through parasitic or non parasitic leakage paths An example of parasitic resistance is the leakage path across the insulator in a coax or triax cable An example of non parasitic resistance is the leakage path through a resistor that is connected in parallel to the DUT There are two programmable output impedance levels for the guard output The high impedance 10kQ CABLE guard is used to reduce the effects of capacitance and leak age current paths in the test circuit The low impedance lt 19 OHMS guard is used to cancel the effects of parallel resistances when measuri
583. sage will be displayed and the third result will be NAN 4 9 91e37 To avoid incomplete vector arrays make sure the programmed number of source measure operations arm count x trigger count is a multiple of the vector array size In the preceding example vector array size is 10 Thus in order to avoid Insufficient vector data errors the pro grammed number of source measure operations has to be a multiple of 10 10 20 30 40 and so on The following vector math expression to calculate offset compensated ohms demonstrates proper syntax calc math volt 1 volt 0 curr 1 curr 0 Notes 1 Use nested parentheses to force math operations that are imbedded in the calculation see example in Vectored math page 18 31 2 A calculation expression can be up to 256 characters in length including parentheses and white spaces 3 When using the filter the measured readings used in the calculation are filtered NOT the result of the calculation 4 For vector math it is recommended that only the REPEAT filter be used For the repeat filter the calculations use only the filtered read ings of the vector points If you instead use the MOVING filter each vector point will reflect the filtered average of all the previous readings in the vector array 5 The data format ASCII or binary for calculation results is selected using the FORMat DATA command See FORMat subsystem page 18 49 The RST and
584. se ierni eiiiai 16 5 FTRG SSOP ri encen ioi i a aa 16 5 TRG programming example ssesseseeeereseresreresreeee 16 6 T ST self test Query suimean ea ira 16 6 WAL wait to continue eeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeteeeeneeeteeeeaeers 16 7 Command summary ce ceeeeeeeeesececeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeseesaeeseeeaeeseeeas 17 2 Configuring measurement function 00 eee eeeeteeeeeneeeeeees 17 2 CONFigure lt function gt 0 cee eeeeseeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 17 2 Acquiring readings cis cccescaesbcsectssssssescesssbavedhbesserveasstasbenviness 17 3 FETCH X oss cescensassidsioesocshyteesbverasteneiaeest dlacdaystessad neesevsedavees 17 3 SENSe 1 DATA LATest oseese 17 4 READY iegrima tere eiga E ES 17 4 MEASure lt function gt seesssoeeesesessssessssessseessresssresssrene 17 5 SCPI Command Reference Reference tables sristi ieir ee eei rRe 18 2 Calculate SUBSYSTEMS siniese 18 24 CAL Culatel sca ceveccsecsetccssevesshisseeseessgsevessecoideageenssjesseesteesys 18 24 Select create math expression NAME eeeeeeteeeeeeee 18 24 CAT AOS sss teccssevsace casscates ces diatecasczses oro rarer SAEs Eai 18 24 NAME lt name gt snena ennaa 18 24 Program examples ccccesceseesececeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeees 18 26 DELete SELected lt name gt cccceeceseeeeereeeeee 18 29 DE Lete ALL Serseri cee daiianietarun vase 18 29 Assien unit SUPAR ciinei anoa 18 29 UNITS lt mame gt woe iccceeccccccc
585. se the lt and cursor keys and the SOURCE A and Y or RANGE A and W keys to specify the number of readings to store in the buffer 4 Press ENTER The asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate data storage opera tion It will turn off when the storage is finished 5 Turn on the output and if necessary trigger the unit to begin taking and storing readings Recalling readings Readings stored in the buffer are displayed by pressing the RECALL key The source measure readings are positioned at the left side of the display while the buffer location number and timestamp are positioned at the right side Buffer location number The buffer location number indicates the memory location of the source measure reading Location 0000 indicates that the displayed source measure reading is stored at the first memory location If limit testing was performed a P or an F will precede the buffer location number to indicate the pass fail result of the test Limit testing is covered in Section 12 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Store 9 3 Timestamp The first source measure reading stored in the buffer 0000 is timestamped at 0000000 000 seconds Subsequent readings can be recalled in absolute or delta timestamp format For the absolute format the timestamp references readings to zero seconds For the delta format the timestamp indicates the time between the displayed reading and the reading before it To set t
586. se voltage spikes could be at hazardous levels 42 4V peak and could damage sensitive DUTs Never touch external circuitry or the test leads when powering up the SourceMeter It is good practice to always disconnect DUTs from the SourceMeter before pow ering up the unit To prevent electric shock test connections must be configured such that the user cannot come in contact with conductors or any DUT that is in contact with the conductors Safe installation requires proper shields barriers and grounding to prevent contact with conductors Operator protection and safety are the responsibility of the person installing the product When handling the SourceMeter NEVER touch the heat sink located on the left side of the case This heat sink could be hot enough to cause burns Line power connection The SourceMeter operates from a line voltage in the range of 100 to 240V at a frequency of 50 or 60Hz Line voltage and line frequency are automatically sensed Therefore there are no switches to set Check to be sure the operating voltage in your area is compatible CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause dam age possibly voiding the warranty Perform the following steps to connect the SourceMeter to line power and turn it on 1 Before plugging in the power cord make sure the front panel power switch is in the off 0 position 2 Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC recepta
587. selected the instrument powers up to the RST default conditions With PRES selected the instrument powers up to the S YStem PRESet default conditions Default conditions are listed in the SCPI tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 With the SAVO 4 parameters specified the instrument powers on to the setup that is saved in the specified location using the SAV command Control remote sensing RSENse lt b gt SYSTem RSENse lt b gt Enable or disable remote sensing Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable remote sensing 1 or ON Enable remote sensing Query RSENse Query state of remote sensing Description This command is used to enable or disable remote sensing When using remote sensing 4 wire connections to the DUT are required Sourcing voltage With remote sensing enabled the output voltage is sensed measured at the DUT If the sensed voltage is lower than the programmed amplitude then the V Source increases the voltage until the sensed voltage is the same as the programmed amplitude This com pensates for IR drop in the OUTPUT test leads With remote sensing disabled the output voltage is sensed at the output connectors Measuring voltage With remote sensing enabled voltage measure ments are made at DUT This eliminates any voltage drops that may be in the test leads between the SourceMeter and the DUT With remote sensing disabled voltage measurements are performed at the output connectors of the instrument
588. selected measurement speed For example if speed is set at 0 01 PLC power line cycles the measure time would be 167psec for 60Hz opera tion 0 01 60 Figure 6 2 Simplified trigger model Source Delay Measure See Section 11 for trigger model details 6 12 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep waveforms There are four basic sweep types to select from linear staircase logarithmic staircase custom and source memory Three of the sweeps are shown in Figure 6 3 The linear stair case sweep goes from the start level to the stop level in equal linear steps The logarithmic staircase sweep is similar except it is done on a log scale with a specified number of steps per decade The custom sweep lets you construct your own sweep by specifying the num ber of measure points and the source level at each point For a source memory sweep up to 100 setup configurations can be saved in memory When the sweep is performed the setup at each memory point is recalled See Section 10 for more details on sweep operation An SDM cycle is performed on each step or point of the sweep Thus one measurement will be performed at each step level The time spent at each step level depends on how the SDM cycle is configured i e source delay measure speed and the trigger delay if used NOTE When using the Pulse Mode of the Model 2430 to perform sweeps source delay is not used Pulse Mode operation i
589. sensing enable local sensing SYST RSEN OFF 2 12 Connections 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Guard selection Cable guard is used for high impedance guarding for cables i e coax and triax and test fixtures Ohms guard provides a high current guard output which allows in circuit guarded ohms measurements On power up cable guard is selected NOTE For 6 wire ohms measurements use the guard output off mode See Section 13 Front panel output configuration for details on the various output off states and how to select the guard output off state See also Section 4 6 wire ohms measurements Front panel guard selection Perform the following steps to check or change the guard selection 1 Press CONFIG and then SOURCE V SOURCE I or Q Changing guard in one configuration menu changes it in all of the others 2 Using the lt and gt keys place the cursor flashing menu item on GUARD and press ENTER NOTE Cursor position indicates the present guard selection OHMS or CABLE To retain the present selection use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure and skip the next two steps 3 To change the guard selection place the cursor on the alternate selection and press ENTER 4 Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure NOTE Do not use ohms guard with coaxial cabling or oscillations may occur Ohms guard cannot be selected on the IA or higher range source or measure Remote command
590. seseorosrosussssesesiseostsassts 8 5 Voltage coefficient oo eee eseeeeeseceeeseeeseeseeeaeeeees 8 5 Percent deviation eee eecesecseceseseeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeseeseee 8 6 Front panel math operations 0 00 0 eeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeees 8 6 Remote math operations 0 0 ese eeeeseeseeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeeens 8 7 Math commands 0 eee eeeseeeeseceseeseeeseeeeeeseeseeeaeeeees 8 7 Math programming example cee eeeeseceeeereeeeees 8 8 User defined math functions 200 eile eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaes 8 9 Commands for user defined math functions 8 9 User defined math function programming example 8 10 Data Store Data store OVETVIEW cvie cce csseesieeacectese cuteseensecbeaedbesecitaccuepeveds esis 9 2 Front panel data Store c 2csecsssseassesgassasievaceconsitoauetacsvagassnaaeesaatebes 9 2 Stofing readings wecccccsciesesecesoassecaeesssvees dese sdeipenneesssereveecuss 9 2 Recalling readings co cc csessihssssecdeseusansleccescenddseosedsaaoaratesaatenes 9 2 Buffer location number eee eeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseees 9 2 Timestaiip cucsecesoasesesias sutangeaen na ER ER 9 3 Displaying other buffer readings s es 9 3 Minimum and maximum cee eeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 9 3 Peak to peak ac clesecicscve sees otidacnesttestasresievesnseacesgeenstbes 9 3 PSVOTA RS E E T 9 4 Standard deviation eee ee eeeeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeeeeeas 9 4 Timestamp LOTMAL ss ssazessestenesverasesuestesanehsvssac
591. set the source delay See next command AUTO lt b gt SOURce 1 DELay AUTO lt b gt Enable disable auto delay for source Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable auto delay 1 or ON Enable auto delay Query AUTO Query state of auto delay Description This command is used to enable or disable auto delay When enabled the instrument will automatically select a delay period that is appropri ate for the present source measure setup configuration Table 3 3 RST and SYST PRES default is ON 18 84 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Configure voltage and current sweeps There are two methods to configure the start and stop levels of a sweep You can use either the STARt and STOP commands or you can use the CENTer and SPAN commands NOTE Inorder to run a sweep the selected source must be in the sweep sourcing mode and the trigger count should be the same as the number of source measure points in the sweep Use the FUNCtion MODE command to select the current or voltage source function See Select function modes page 18 73 Use the CURRent MODE or VOLTage MODE command to select the SWEep sourcing mode See Select sourcing mode page 18 74 The trigger count is set using the TRIGger COUNt command See TRIGger subsystem page 18 120 RANGing lt name gt SOURCce 1 SWEep RANGing lt name gt Select source ranging mode Parameters lt name gt BEST Use the best fixed mode A
592. ss the ON OFF OUTPUT key to turn the output on OUTPUT indicator turns on The SourceMeter will output the programmed bias level Step 5 Run sweep To run the sweep press the SWEEP key After the sweep is completed turn the output off by pressing the ON OFF OUTPUT key Step 6 Read buffer Use the RECALL key to access the source measure readings stored in the buffer Use the TOGGLE to display statistical information 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 21 Performing a source memory sweep Step 1 Store setups in source memory Store instrument setups in source memory as follows 1 3 Configure the SourceMeter for various desired operating modes such as source measure delay and or math expression operation See Table 10 2 for settings that can be stored in each source memory location Press MENU to display the MAIN MENU e Select SAVESETUP e Select SOURCE MEMORY e Select SAVE Use the A and Y keys and the cursor keys to display the desired memory loca tion and press ENTER e Use the EXIT key to back out of the menu structure Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all points in the sweep Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows a ai a Te Press CONFIG then SWEEP Select TYPE then press ENTER Select SRC MEMORY then press ENTER Use the menu selections to enter the desired START memory location and POINTS for the source memory sweep From the CONFIGURE SWEEPS me
593. ssecsiccrrireescescsessseesicsessrersesies 18 104 LEVEN reran 18 104 Program event enable registers seeesseeseseeerereererrsreresrs 18 104 ENABle lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Lessseeeerersrrrrrrserreere 18 104 Read condition registers 0 eee eeseeesceeeeeeeseeseeeseeeees 18 104 CONDON oo ceiceeeceesceeeccsesccatesseelsweeeiaueicseereeses 18 104 Select default conditions oo lees eeeeeeeeeetteteeeeeees 18 105 PRESET cesoie aaa 18 105 Error Queue scsi deiecip hh aetiienis nie cdidieieateeens 18 105 ENEXTI ereraa e A E AERE 18 105 CLEA inantea a 18 105 ENABle lt list gt ooien snenia enerne antaa 18 105 DISabl lt list gt sc ee eee eee 18 106 SYS Tem Subsystem lt islssstncivocesdeinssiesteeeierastovsasesaceoasersapevvarees 18 106 Default conditions 0 0 eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeesees 18 106 PRESET ssscssetenciessshereiietsilfectessocueaideagacuseaensinptenas 18 106 POSCUP i disse dns cane ead ice 18 106 Control remote sensing ee eeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeseneeeteeeeees 18 107 RSENS lt B gt secs sesccdenecscccidsctyeceeganenesitisventcedieents 18 107 Select guard MOde ooo eee eee eeeeeeeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeneeeaeees 18 108 GUARG lt name gt cc sccsccises essed anes cecteeciaeiceeeeeneeees 18 108 Initialize MEMOTY 20 0 eeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeecsaeeeseeesaes 18 108 INI Vali ZE asisiyan asan elec eee 18 108 Control DeCPer iicci cccpcslecessahesiisesersecenaiseacecdessenaveiees eeaaeas 18 109
594. ssssececeeesssseeeeceessseeeees 18 29 Define math expression eceeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeneeeeeeneeaes 18 30 EXPRession lt form gt or DEFine lt form gt 18 30 Enable and read math expression result eee 18 33 STATE lt b gt n earannan oes a E 18 33 DATA narn dag sa a eee 18 33 SLATES ov caecs senasvaes iante eaa aar ria aaa tare 18 34 CALCU ate ica eaten dh eee 18 34 Select inp t Path i sc cscesesseeeadisscessecssciocasseoasicoassdeasshyensezes 18 34 FEED lt name gt wicks aniline 18 34 Null feed reading ii ccciccsesccissevensvsgasen cased ssceasetonsecbeavtnaneeacs 18 35 OFFSet lt i gt 51 c5iic 0aassct eee bata seen 18 35 AC QUIT C s 535cccdeisteichadhdl eeciensaceiaidciseceseediedelpsieneias 18 35 STATO lt b gt oriniai eee ele eee 18 35 Read CAT C2 i ve ccxditcceivars steers tecees aie tendsbeesiGivennestegiaras 18 35 DATA iieiaeie a i oeeie ii 18 35 LATEST scx tecrieiidie ids alin bins lis 18 36 Configure and control limit tests eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 18 36 COMPliance FAIL lt name gt 0 ee eeeceeeeeeseeeeeeees 18 36 DATA lt 0 gt re inira anea ii 18 36 SOURce2 lt NRf gt KNDN gt ssseesseeeeeerrrerrersrsrereree 18 37 PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt I NDN neseeeeereerre 18 39 STATE SDS hooodne grean ea aian 18 39 BAUS neniani aiei iia 18 40 Composite testing cee eseeeeseeseeneeeeeeseceeeeseeneesseseneeaes 18 40 PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt I NDN neeese 18 40 FAIL SOURce2 lt NRf gt
595. st gt numlist where numlist is a specified list of messages that you wish to disable for the Error Queue Query DISable Query list of disabled messages Description On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue This command is used to specify which messages you want disabled Disabled messages are prevented from going into the Error Queue SYSTem subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains miscellaneous commands that are summarized in Table 18 9 SYSTem command summary Default conditions PRESet SYSTem PRESet Return to SYSTem PRESet defaults Description This command returns the instrument to states optimized for front panel operation SYSTem PRESet defaults are listed in the SCPI tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 POSetup SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Program power on defaults Parameters lt name gt RST Power up to RST defaults PRESet Power up to SYSTem PRESet defaults SAVO Power up to setup stored at memory location 0 SAV1 Power up to setup stored at memory location 1 SAV2 Power up to setup stored at memory location 2 SAV3 Power up to setup stored at memory location 3 SAV4 Power up to setup stored at memory location 4 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 107 Query POSetup Query power on setup Description This command is used to select the power on defaults With RST
596. stallation Category I and Installation Category II as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 60664 Most measurement control and data T O signals are Installation Category I and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high tran sient over voltages Installation Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often associated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category I sourc es unless otherwise marked or described in the Manual Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts no conductive part of the
597. stop level For a log sweep the source measure points are equally spaced on a logarith mic scale Note that the start and stop levels are source measure points Step size for a linear sweep can be calculated as follows Step Size Stop Start Points 1 Step Size Span Points 1 Step size for a logarithmic sweep can be calculated as follows log 10 Stop log10 Start Log Step Size ae aa Points 1 An alternate way to set the source measure points in a sweep is to spec ify the step size using the STEP command Note that the POINts and STEP commands are coupled Changing the number of source measure points also changes the step size Conversely changing the step size changes the number of source measure points 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 91 DIRection lt name gt SOURce 1 SWEep DIRection lt name gt Set direction of sweep Parameters lt name gt UP Run sweep from start to stop DOWn Run sweep from stop to start Query DIRection Query direction of sweep Description Normally a sweep is run from the start level to the stop level The STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN commands are used to set these levels This command lets you change the execution direction of the sweep With DOWn selected the sweep will begin at the stop level and end at the start level Selecting UP restores sweep operation to the normal start to stop direction Configure list CUR
598. sults of the new MATH function are stored in the buffer If you started with REL and or LIMITS enabled the buffer will stop storing read ings if you select a MATH function Storage will continue if you return to the orig inal configuration See Section 8 for more information on MATH Changing REL or LIMITS If you started with only a basic measurement function selected you can enable REL and or LIMITS but only the voltage current or resistance component of the operation will be stored in the buffer The results of REL and or LIMITS are not stored If you started with a MATH function enabled only the result of the MATH calcula tion will be stored in the buffer if REL and or LIMITS is enabled If you started with REL and or LIMITS enabled you can change REL and or LIMITS The results of new REL and or LIMITS are stored in the buffer 6 44 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 7 Range Digits Speed and Filters e Range and digits Discusses maximum readings ranging limitations manual and autoranging and display resolution e Speed Discusses speed settings which are used to control the integration period of the A D converter e Filters Provides information on the two types of digital filtering that can be used to reduce reading noise 7 2 Range Digits Speed and Filters 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range and digits Range The selected measurement range affect
599. surement is completed the output turns off and the reference and zero measurements are performed With Auto Zero disabled the reference and zero measurements are not performed This allows a faster pulse train by shortening the output off time Note however that zero drift will eventually result in inaccurate readings For the DC Mode the filtering process is part of the Measure Action In the Pulse Mode filtering is not used 11 34 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Output triggers All three output triggers are available in the trigger layer for the Pulse Mode If enabled the output triggers occur where indicated in the trigger model Invalid trigger settings Front panel operation For front panel operation most trigger settings are done from the CONFIGURE TRIG GER menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG For Pulse Mode operation the following settings for the TRIG LAYER are ignored DELAY Trigger delay is not used Therefore the trigger DELAY setting is ignored TRIGGER IN EVENTS The source and delay event detectors are not used in the Pulse Mode Therefore the SOURCE and DELAY settings on off are ignored TRIGGER OUT EVENTS For the DC Mode source delay is set from the source con figuration menu which is accessed by pressing CONFIG and then SOURCE V or I When the Pulse Mode is selected the source delay menu items DELAY and AUTO DELAY are replaced by the
600. t SOURce SWEep SPACing lt name gt SOURce SWEep POINts lt n gt SOURce SWEep DIREction lt name gt Select current source sweep mode Specify sweep start current n current Specify sweep stop current n current Specify sweep step current n current Specify sweep center current n current Specify sweep span current n current Select voltage source sweep mode Specify sweep start voltage n voltage Specify sweep stop voltage n voltage Specify sweep step voltage n voltage Specify sweep center voltage n voltage Specify sweep span voltage n voltage Select source ranging name BEST AUTO or FIXed Select sweep scale name LINear or LOGarithmic Set number of sweep points n points Set sweep direction Name UP sweep start to stop or DOWn sweep stop to start Staircase sweep programming example As an example of linear staircase sweep operation assume the SourceMeter is to be used to generate the I V characteristics of a diode Many diode tests such as breakdown voltage and leakage current require only single point measurements Some such as quality assurance analysis of marginal parts involve performing a complete I V sweep for detailed analysis 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 23 For the purposes of this test assume the following basic sweep parameters Source Function current Sense Function volts Source Mode
601. t Table 3 4 The delay option is used to manually set the delay from 000 00000 seconds to 9999 99900 seconds Manually setting the delay disables auto delay 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 13 Table 3 4 Auto source delay 2400 2410 2420 2425 2430 2440 Auto delay Auto delay I range I range I range I range I range Source V Source I 1pA 1pA 10nA 10nA 10uA 3msec 3msec 10uA 10nA 100pA 100pA 100pA 2msec lmsec 100pA 100pA ImA ImA ImA lmsec Imsec ImA ImA 10mA 10mA 10mA Imsec Imsec 10mA 20mA 100mA 100mA 100mA Imsec Imsec 100mA 100mA 1A 1A 1A Imsec Imsec 1A 1A 3A 3A 10A 5A lmsec 2msec 10A range only on Model 2430 Front panel source delay To set the manual source delay from the front panel 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V 2 Select DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Enter the desired DELAY value then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display To set the auto source delay state from the front panel 1 Press CONFIG then SOURCE V 2 Select AUTO DELAY from the displayed choices then press ENTER 3 Select ENABLE or DISABLE as desired then press ENTER 4 Press EXIT to return to normal display Remote command source delay Use the SOURce DELay or SOURce DELay AUTO commands to program the source delay via remote See Section 18 Set delay for details For example the following command sets the source del
602. t It will simply continue and perform the appropriate action NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode the DELAY and MEASURE events are not used Therefore the settings for those events are ignored TRIGGER OUT Use to configure the trigger layer output trigger LINE Select the Trigger Link line for the output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 EVENTS Enable ON or disable OFF output triggers that occur after the source delay and measure actions 11 10 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode an output trigger can only occur after the mea sure action Therefore the output trigger settings for the source and delay actions are ignored DELAY Specify the time delay in seconds for the trigger delay NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode trigger delay is not used Therefore the trigger delay setting is ignored COUNT Specify the trigger count HALT Use to return the SourceMeter to the idle state HALT does not turn off the output The programmed source level will still be available at the OUTPUT ter minals The following actions will take the SourceMeter out of idle Turn the output off and then on again Re select the arm or trigger event Exit from the menu structure and then re enter it by pressing CONFIG and then TRIG Figure 11 2 Trigger configuration menu tree CONFIG TRIG ig 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Ma
603. t line SOT is used by the handler to start limit testing With the SSTEST arm event selected Section 11 Configuring triggering the handler must pulse SOT low in order to provide event detection which starts the testing process With the TSTEST arm event selected the handler must pulse SOT high in order to provide event detection which starts the testing process With T STEST selected either a high or low SOT pulse starts the testing process Interlock line The interlock line is intended for use with a safety interlock on a device handler or test fix ture See Safety interlock page 13 5 for more details 5V output The Digital I O Port provides a 5V output that can be used to drive external logic cir cuitry Maximum current output for this line is 300mA This line is protected by a self resetting fuse one hour recovery time Digital output configuration There are two basic methods to connect external components to the digital output lines sink operation and source operation Sink operation Figure 13 2 shows the basic output configuration for sink operation Note that the external relay coil is connected between the digital output line pins 1 to 4 and 5V pin 7 With this configuration the digital output line must be set LO to energize the relay and the maximum sink current is 5 00mA Figure 13 2 Sink operation SourceMeter External lian ee rile ll al Pin 7 Relay 5Vo To other Circuits Maxi
604. t of remote 11 14 Triggering 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual TLINk Event detection occurs when an input trigger via the Trigger Link input line is received See Trigger link page 11 19 for more information With TLINk selected you can loop around the Arm Event Detector by setting the event detector bypass ARM DIRection to SOURce NSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 Limit Testing and Section 13 Digital I O port PSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed high This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 Limit Testing and Section 13 Digital I O port BSTest Event detection occurs when the start of test SOT line of the Digital I O port is pulsed either high or low This pulse is received from the handler to start limit testing See Section 12 and Section 13 NOTE NSTest PSTest and BSTest can be used only at the beginning of a sweep and should not be used to trigger each point in a sweep Trigger layer The Trigger Layer uses three event detectors one for each action Source Delay and Measure Event detector bypass As shown in Figure 11 3 there is a bypass TRIGger DIRection for the Source Event Detector This bypass is in ef
605. t one of the other modes while in Pulse Mode For remote operation the OUTPut 1 SMODe lt name gt command which is used to select the output off state causes error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode See Section 13 Output off states for details 5 20 Pulse Mode Operation Model 2430 only 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Turning source on For remote Pulse Mode operation an INITiate command is used to start the pulse output process The READ command will send INITiate to start the pulse process and it will also acquire the pulse readings The INITiate command by itself will start the pulse pro cess but it will not acquire any pulse readings If you use INITiate to start the pulse pro cess you should then use FETCh to acquire readings The pulse process can be stopped at any time by sending the ABORt command Sending OUTPut 1 STATe ON will also send INITiate to start the pulse process Note however that you cannot use OUTPut 1 STATe OFF to abort the pulse output process SCPI signal oriented measurement commands The CONFigure lt function gt and MEASure lt function gt commands are invalid and cause error 831 Invalid in Pulse Mode These commands are documented in Section 17 Source Measure Concepts e Compliance limit Discusses compliance limit including real and range compli ances maximum compliance values and how to determine compliance limit Overheating protection Pro
606. t to 60V 80 Set limit to 80V 100 Set limit to 100V 120 Set limit to 120V 160 Set limit to 160V 161 to 210 Set limit to NONE NONE Set limit to 210V DEFault Set limit to 210V NONE MINimum Set limit to 20V MAXimum Set limit to 210V NONE 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 81 2410 lt n gt 1100 to 1100 Specify V Source limit 20 Set limit to 20V 40 Set limit to 40V 100 Set limit to 100V 200 Set limit to 200V 300 Set limit to 300V 400 Set limit to 400V 500 Set limit to 500V 501 to 1100 Set limit to NONE NONE Set limit to 1100V DEFault Set limit to 1100V NONE MINimum Set limit to 20V MAXimum Set limit to 1100V NONE 2420 lt n gt 63 to 63 Specify V Source limit 6 Set limit to 6V 12 Set limit to 12V 18 Set limit to 18V 24 Set limit to 24V 30 Set limit to 30V 36 Set limit to 36V 48 Set limit to 48V 49 to 63 Set limit to NONE NONE Set limit to 63V DEFault Set limit to 63V NONE MINimum Set limit to 6V MAXimum Set limit to 63V NONE 2425 and 2430 lt n gt 105 to 105 Specify V Source limit 10 Set limit to 10V 20 Set limit to 20V 30 Set limit to 30V 40 Set limit to 40V 50 Set limit to 50V 60 Set limit to 60V 80 Set limit to 80V 81 to 105 Set limit to NONE NONE Set limit to 105V DEFault Set limit to 105V NONE MINimum Set limit to 10V MAXimum Set limit to 105V NONE 18 82 SCPI Command Reference Query Description 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 2440 lt
607. tance Query contact check threshold resistance Description This command sets the contact threshold resistance value Factory default 50Q The contact check function will indicate a failure when the DUT resistance is greater than the programmed value Configure and control contact check limit test STATe lt b gt CALCulate2 LIMit4 STATe lt b gt Control LIMIT 4 test Parameters lt b gt 1 or ON Enable Limit 4 test 0 or OFF Disable Limit 4 test Query STATe Query state of Limit 4 test Description This command enables or disables the LIMIT 4 contact check test When the limit test is enabled the Digital I O port bit pattern can be controlled by the results of the test See SOURce2 lt NRf gt KNDN gt page F 18 F 18 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual FAIL CALCulate2 LIMit4 FAIL Read LIMIT 4 test result Description This command is used to read the results of the LIMIT 4 test 0 Limit 4 test passed 1 Limit 4 test failed Reading the results of the limit test does not clear the fail indication of the test A failure can be cleared by sending a SYSTem CLEar command SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt CALCulate2 LIMit4 SOURce2 lt NRf gt I lt NDN gt Specify pattern LIMIT 4 failure Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt Oto b111 bit Binary value O to b1111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0
608. tate For details on the GUARD output off state see Section 13 Output off states 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 39 Figure 6 20 In circuit ohms measurements using guard sense Test lead resistance SourceMeter GUARD Ohms mode IN OUT HI IN OUT LO A Local Guard Sense SourceMeter GUARD Ohms mode IN OUT HI IN OUT LO B Remote Guard Sense 6 40 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data flow Data flow for front panel operation is summarized by the block diagrams provided in Fig ure 6 21 Note that if REL is enabled the result of the rel operation is sent to the other blocks NOTE See Appendix C for remote operation data flow information With Math FCTN and Limit Tests LIMITS disabled see Figure 6 21A the SourceMeter displays the measurement readings If the data store is used these readings are also stored in the buffer for later recall Statistical data for these readings is also available upon recall Figure 6 21B shows data flow when Math or Limit Tests is enabled If Math is enabled the result of the math operation is displayed If Limit Tests is enabled the raw reading along with the results of the tests pass or fail is displayed As in the previous case these readings can also be stored in the data store Figure 6 21C shows data flow when both Math and Limit Tests are enabled The Math operation is pe
609. tate gt Enable disable auto volts range state ON or OFF SENSe RESistance RANGe lt n gt Select manual ohms range n range SENSe RESistance RANGe AUTO lt state gt Enable disable auto ohms range state ON or OFF DISPlay DIGits lt n gt Set display digits n 4 5 6 or 7 Note For the Model 2430 the AUTO range commands are not valid while in the Pulse Mode Range and digits programming example Table 7 2 shows a programming example for controlling range and digits The SourceMeter is set up as follows e Source function volts e Source level 10V e Measure function amps Amps range 10UA e Display digits 51 2 Table 7 2 Range and digits programming example Command Description RST Restore GPIB defaults SOUR FUNC VOLT Volts source function SOUR VOLT 10 Output 10V SENS FUNC CURR Amps measure function SENS CURR RANG 10E 6 10uA range DISP DIG 5 5 display digits OUTP ON Turn on output READ Trigger and acquire reading OUTP OFF Turn off output 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 7 Speed The Speed Accuracy menu is used to set the integration time of the A D converter period of time the input signal is measured The integration time affects the usable digits the amount of reading noise and the ultimate reading rate of the instrument The integration time is specified in parameters based on the number of power
610. te order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 The header and terminator are sent only once for each READ During binary transfers never un talk the SourceMeter until after the data is read input to the computer Also to avoid erratic operation the readings of the data string and terminator should be acquired in one piece The header 0 can be read separately before the rest of the string The number of bytes to be transferred can be calculated as follows Bytes 2 Rdgs x 4 1 where 2 is the number of bytes for the header 0 Rdgs is the product of the number of selected data elements arm count and trigger count 4 is the number of bytes for each reading 1 is the byte for the terminator For example assume the SourceMeter is configured to perform 10 source measure operations and send the 10 current measurements to the computer using the binary format Bytes 2 10x4 1 43 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 51 Data elements ELEMents lt item list gt FORMat ELEMents SENSe 1 lt item list gt Specify data elements for data string Parameters lt item list gt VOLTage Includes voltage reading CURRent Includes current reading RESistance Includes resistance reading TIME Includes timestamp STATus Includes status information NOTE Each item in the list must be separated by a comma i e ELEMents VOLTage CURRent RES
611. ted source range Source Measure range limitations 2400 With the 200V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 100mA With the 1A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2410 With the 1kV V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 20mA With the 1A or 100mA I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2420 With the 60V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 1A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 60V With the 3A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Range Digits Speed and Filters 7 3 2425 and 2430 Range limitations are source mode dependent 2425 and 2430 DC Mode With the 100V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A With the 20V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 3A With the 1A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 100V With the 3A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 20V 2430 Pulse Mode With the 100V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 10A With the 10A I Source range selected the highest voltage measurement range is 100V 2440 With the 40V V Source range selected the highest current measurement range is 1A Wit
612. ter User s Manual Table 18 11 TRIGger command summary Default Command Description parameter SCPI INITiate IMMediate Initiate source measure cycle s v ABORt Reset trigger system Goes to idle state Jv ARM Path to program Arm Layer v SEQuence 1 v LAYer 1 v COUNt lt n gt Specify arm count 1 to 2500 or INFinite 1 v COUNt Query arm count INFinite 9 9e37 v SOURce lt name gt Specify control source IMMediate TIMer IMMediate v MANual BUS TLINk NSTest PSTest or BSTest SOURce Query control source v TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval in seconds 0 001 to 0 1 y 99999 99 TIMer Query timer interval v TCONfigure v DIRection lt name gt Enable SOURce or disable ACCeptor ACCeptor v bypass DIRection Query state of bypass v AS YNchronous Configure output triggers v ILINe lt n gt Select input trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 1 ILINe Query input trigger line OLINe lt n gt Select output trigger line 1 2 3 or 4 2 OLINe Query output trigger line OUTPut lt name gt Output trigger TENTer TEXit or NONE NONE OUTPut Query arm output trigger status TRIGger Path to program Trigger Layer v CLEar Clear any pending input triggers immediately v SEQuence 1 v COUNt lt n gt Specify trigger count 1 to 2500 1 v COUNt Query trigger count v DELay lt n gt Specify trigger delay 0 to 999 9999 sec 0 Jv DELay Query source delay Jv SOURce lt name
613. test The following assumes the digital output of the SourceMeter is connected to a component handler for DUT binning See Binning systems page 12 11 With the limit tests properly configured turn the SourceMeter output on and press the LIMIT key The testing process will start when the component handler sends the start of test SOT strobe pulse to the SourceMeter Note that if a handler is not used testing will start when LIMIT is pressed Pressing LIMIT a second time terminates the testing process As shown in the flowchart limit tests are performed after a measurement conversion For Limit 1 test compliance a failure will display the FAIL message and terminate the testing process for that DUT For the pass condition operation will proceed to the next enabled limit test If however there are no software limit tests Limit 2 3 5 12 enabled the testing process will terminate and the PASS message will be displayed Assuming Limit passes each enabled software limit test will be performed until one of them passes When a test passes the PASS message is displayed and any pending limit tests for that DUT are cancelled If all the limit tests fail the FAIL message will be displayed Binning For the sorting mode only immediate binning can be performed After the testing process is finished FAIL or PASS displayed the appropriate output bit pattern will be sent to the component handler which will place the DUT in the assign
614. the results of the CALC1 calculation or CALC2 readings The TRACe FEED command in the TRACe Subsystem is used to select the type of readings to store 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 45 Acquire statistic DATA CALCulate3 DATA Description Read CALC3 result This query command is used to perform the selected statistic operation and read the result s The result s is always returned in ASCII format If the buffer is configured to store raw measured readings TRACe FEED SENSe1 and multiple functions were measured the selected statistic operation will be performed on all the measured read ings For example if voltage and current measurements were stored in the buffer then the selected statistic operation will be performed on both readings Statistics for multiple measurement functions are returned in the following order voltage statistic current statistic resistance statistic Statistic operations are not performed on TIME and STATus data ele ments that are stored in the buffer If the buffer is configured to store the result of CALC1 or CALC2 TRACe FEED CALC1 or CALC2 only one result will be returned by this query command Notes 1 If there is no data in the buffer error 230 Data corrupt or stale will be generated 2 If there are a lot of readings stored in the buffer some statistic oper ations may take too long and cause a bus time out error To avoid
615. the operating limits of the SourceMeter for this quadrant of operation The operating point can be anywhere inside or on these limit lines The limit line boundaries for the other quadrants are similar Figure 6 10 l Source limit lines Voltage Compliance Limit Line V Measure Current Source Limit Line Source 6 24 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Voltage compliance boundaries Where within the boundaries the SourceMeter operates depends on the load DUT that is connected to its output Figure 6 11 shows operation examples for resistive loads that are 200Q and 800Q respectively For these examples the SourceMeter is programmed to source 100mA and limit 40V See Section 3 Basic source measure procedure In Figure 6 11A the SourceMeter is sourcing 100mA to the 200Q load and subsequently measures 20V As shown the load line for 200Q intersects the 100mA current source line at 20V Figure 6 11B shows what happens if the resistance of the load is increased to 8009 The DUT load line for 800Q intersects the voltage compliance limit line placing the SourceMeter in compliance In compliance the SourceMeter will not be able to source its programmed current 100mA For the 800Q DUT the SourceMeter will only output 50mA at the 40V limit Notice that as resistance increases the slope of the DUT load line increases As resistance approaches infinity open output the SourceMeter will source
616. this send the CALA3 DATA command and then wait for the MAV message available bit in the Status Byte Register to set before addressing the SourceMeter to talk See Section 15 Status Structure 3 See Appendix C Data Flow for a detailed explanation on how data flows through the various operation blocks of the SourceMeter It clarifies the types of readings that are acquired by the various commands to read data 18 46 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual DISPlay subsystem The display subsystem controls the display of the SourceMeter and is summarized in Table 18 2 Control display DIGits lt n gt DISPlay DIGits lt n gt Set display resolution Parameters lt n gt 4 3 5 digit resolution 5 4 5 digit resolution 6 5 5 digit resolution 7 6 5 digit resolution DEFault 5 5 digit resolution MINimum 3 5 digit resolution MAXimum 6 5 digit resolution Query DIGits Query display resolution DIGits DEFault Query RST default resolution DIGits MINimum Query lowest allowable display resolution DIGits MAXimum Query largest allowable display resolution Description This command is used to set the display resolution Note that you can instead use rational numbers For example to select 4 5 digit resolution you can send a parameter value of 4 5 instead of 5 The SourceMeter rounds the rational number to an integer ENABle lt b gt DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Control display circuitry P
617. this relatively low impedance output off state the SourceMeter will be able to quickly dissipate sink current caused by high input capacitance i e cable capacitance or an external source This results in fast settling time If you instead used the NORMAL output off state for this application current would dissipate very slowly slow settling time resulting in distorted pulses WARNING Hazardous voltages 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when generating quick pulsed waveforms using the ZERO AUTO OFF output state To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO terminal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground con nection can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground GUARD With this output off state the current source is selected and set to 0A Voltage compliance is set to 0 5 full scale of the present voltage range This output off state should be used when performing 6 wire guarded ohms measurements or for any other load that uses an active source 13 10 Digital O Port Safety Interlock and Output Configuration 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NOTE When changing the output off state with the output off the selected output off state will be entered immediately On power up the SourceMeter will momentarily be in the HI
618. ting mode contact check limit testing 00 eee F 9 GPIB 488 1 Protocol TEEE 488 handshake sequence ccceesccesceeeeeeeseeeeseeeneeeaes G 4 List of Tables 1 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 3 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 4 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 5 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 6 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Getting Started Line frequency remote commands eseeeseceseeeeeeeneeeeees 1 12 Power ine fuse sssini neip ani e erse 1 13 Basic display commands eeseeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeeeeseeeaeens 1 15 Factory default settings cece eecessceceneceteeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesees 1 17 Main MENU sesei iiinis dirsa e stoureesense 1 20 Measurement configuration Menus ssssssssssesessssessessseseese 1 27 Source and range configuration Menus ssssssesessesessesseeee 1 28 Rel filter and limit configuration menus sssssseesesesessese 1 29 Trigger configuration Menu esssssessssesreresesrestreresreerrsesrrsrese 1 31 Sweep digits speed and data store configuration menus 1 32 Output and display configuration Menus 0 0 0 eee 1 33 Sweep digits speed and output configuration menus 1 34 Basic Source Measure Operation Source measure capabilities oo eee eee eeeceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Compliance
619. to 10 PLC NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode speed can be set from 0 004 to 0 100 PLC 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 71 Configure and control filter NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode filtering is not used Therefore the following filter commands are not valid for the Model 2430 Pulse Mode TCONtrol lt name gt SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type Parameters lt name gt REPeat Repeating filter MOVing Moving filter Query TCONtrol Query filter type Description This command is used to select the type of averaging filter REPeat or MOVing These filter types are explained in Section 7 Filters The number of readings that are averaged by the filter is set with the AVERage COUNt command The AVERage STATe command is used to enable or disable the filter NOTE For the Model 2430 Pulse Mode this command is ignored COUNt lt n gt SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count Parameters lt n gt to 100 Specify filter count DEFault 10 MINimum 1 MAXimum 100 Query COUNt Query filter count COUNt DEFault Query the RST default filter count COUNt MINimum Query the lowest allowable filter count COUNt MAXimum Query the largest allowable filter count Description These commands are used to specify the filter count In general the fil ter count is the number of readings that are acquired and stored in the filter buffer for the averagi
620. to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although sev eral devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen com mand These talk and listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address The primary address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set by rear panel DIP switches or programmed from the front panel of the instrument The actual lis ten address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with H20 For example if the primary address is H16 the actual listen address is H36 H36 H16 H20 In a similar manner the talk address is obtained by ORing the pri mary address with H40 With the present example the talk address derived from a pri mary address of 16 decimal would be H56 H56 H16 H40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary address ing Secondary addresses lie in the range of H60 H7F Note however that many devices including the SourceMeter do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example if the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one
621. to save the present instrument setup in a memory location Up to 100 setups can be saved The following settings are saved in each source memory location SENSe 1 CURRent NPLCycles SENSe 1 RESistance NPLCycles SENSe 1 VOLTage NPLCycles SENSe 1 FUNCtion CONCurrent SENSe 1 FUNCtion ON SENSe 1 FUNCtion OFF SENSe 1 RESistance MODE SENSe 1 RESistance OCOMpensated SENSe 1 AVERage STATe SENSe 1 AVERage TCONtrol SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt SOURce 1 FUNCtion SHAPe Model 2430 only SOURce 1 FUNCtion MODE SOURce 1 DELay Model 2430 in DC Mode SOURce 1 DELay AUTO Model 2430 in DC Mode SOURce 1 X TRIGgered SFACtor secre X TRIGgered SFACtor STATe where CURRent or VOLTage based on source mode SOURce 1 PULSe WIDTh Model 2430 Pulse Mode only SOURce 1 PULSe DELay Model 2430 Pulse Mode only Source Value Range Auto Range Sense Protection Range Auto Range SYSTem AZERo STATe SYSTem RSENse 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 95 ROUTe TERMinals CALCulate1 STATe CALCulate1 MATH EXPRession NAME CALCulate2 FEED CALCulate2 NULL OFFSet CALCulate2 NULL STATe CALCulate2 LIMit 1 STATe CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance FAIL CALCulate2 LIMit 1 COMPliance SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX STATe CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX UPPer SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer DATA CALCulate2 LIMitX LOWer SOURce2 CALCulate2 LIMitX PASS SOURce2 where
622. to set the timestamp format 1 While in the normal display mode press CONFIG and then STORE to display the timestamp choices 2 Place the cursor on ABSOLUTE or DELTA and press ENTER 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Data Store 9 5 Timestamp accuracy Because of internal timing methods the timestamp value is only approximate The method in which the timestamp is implemented limits its use in time critical applications If accu rate test timing is crucial it is recommended that an external timer be used in conjunction with the SourceMeter The timestamp is based on an oscillator with a frequency of approximately 8kHz This oscillator is used as the system clock and is divided by eight to generate system ticks every millisecond Therefore the timestamp should provide Ims resolution for test timing However since the actual oscillator frequency is 8 192kHz a system tick occurs every 8 192kHz 8 or 1 024 times a second which results in a system tick every 0 9765625ms In firmware revision C17 and before the reported timestamp value is off by 24ms every sec ond Thus to obtain more accurate timestamp values simply multiply the timestamp dis played on the front panel or returned via remote by a factor of 0 9765625 This correction should not be necessary if the unit firmware revision is C18 or higher as the timestamp correction has already been made internally Buffer considerations From the front panel 2500 source m
623. ts are always performed in the order shown in the drawing Figure 12 1 Limit tests Limit 1 Test Compliance Pass or Fail on Compliance Limit 2 Test Coarse Limits Limit 3 5 12 Tests Fine Limits 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 3 Pass fail information Pass fail information for limit tests can be obtained as follows e A PASS or FAIL indication on the front panel display By programming the unit to output specific pass fail bit patterns on the Digital I O port which can be used to control other equipment such as a device handler for binning operations See Binning systems page 12 11 and Section 13 Digital I O port for more information e With the CALCulate2 LIMit lt n gt FAIL query via remote where lt n gt is the limit test number Section 18 CALCulate2 By reading various status bits Section 15 Status Structure and Section 18 FORMat subsystem e By noting a P or F preceding buffer location numbers Section 9 Recalling readings Data flow All limit tests are part of the CALC2 data block See Appendix C for an overview on how limit testing fits into the overall data flow through the SourceMeter Limit 1 test compliance This hardware H W test checks the compliance state of the SourceMeter It uses the pro grammed compliance as the test limit At or above the programmed limit the instrument is in c
624. turn off after the measurement is completed If auto output off is disabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO OFF then the output will remain on after the measurement is completed WARNING With auto output off disabled the output will remain on after the one shot source measure operation is performed Beware of hazardous voltage that may be present on the output terminals 17 6 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual 18 SCPI Command Reference Reference tables Summarizes each SCPI command subsystem SCPI subsystems Provides detailed information on all commands in each SCPI subsystem 18 2 SCPI Command Reference 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Reference tables Table 18 1 through Table 18 11 summarize the commands for each SCPI subsystem The following list includes the SCPI subsystem table number where each command is summa rized and the page number where detailed reference information begins Summary table Subsystem Reference page Table 18 1 CALCulate page 18 24 Table 18 2 DISPlay page 18 46 Table 18 3 FORMat page 18 49 Table 18 4 OUTPut page 18 57 Table 18 5 ROUTe page 18 59 Table 18 6 SENSe page 18 60 Table 18 7 SOURce page 18 72 Table 18 8 STATus page 18 104 Table 18 9 SYSTem page 18 106 Table 18 10 TRACe page 18 117 Table 18 11 TRIGger page 18 120 General notes Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional ch
625. tus byte programming example eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 10 Table 15 5 Condition register commands 00 eee eeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeees 15 16 Table 15 6 Event register COMMANAS 00 0 elec eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeees 15 16 Table 15 7 Event enable registers commands eseeeeseeeeeseeeseeeee 15 17 Table 15 8 Program and read register programming example 15 18 Table 15 9 Error queue commands oe eee eseeseeereeseeeaeeeeeeneeseeaes 15 20 16 Common Commands Table 16 1 TEEE 488 2 common commands and queries sceeeee 16 2 Table 16 2 OPC programming example 0 eee eeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesee 16 4 Table 16 3 SAV RCL programming example sses 16 5 Table 16 4 TRG programming example eee eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 16 6 17 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Table 17 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary 17 2 18 SCPI Command Reference Table 18 1 CALCulate command summary 0 0 cesceesceeseeceseeeeeeeeneeeeees 18 3 Table 18 2 DISPlay command summary 20 0 ce eeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeereeeeeees 18 8 Table 18 3 FORMat command summary cseeeseesesseceneeeeeeeeneeeeees 18 9 Table 18 4 OUTPut command summary cee eesceesceeeeeceeeeeseeeeneeeeees 18 9 Table 18 5 ROUTe command summary 0 0 eeeccesceeeseeeteeeteeeeeeeeeees 18 10 Table 18 6 SENSe command summary ccceseesceeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 18 10 Table 18 7 SOURce command Summary ceeeesceesteeeseeeeeeeet
626. ue 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Relative and Math 8 7 For Percent Deviation you will be prompted to set the reference value The following methods are available e User specified reference value Enter the desired reference value and press ENTER e Acquire reference value With the output on press the AUTO range key The SourceMeter will perform a measurement and display that reading as the reference Press ENTER to select that reference value 3 Turn on the output by pressing the ON OFF key 4 Press the FCTN key to enable the selected math function The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the math expression will be displayed Note that with FCTN enabled the sweep for a 2 point math expression runs continuously Each sweep updates the reading The source value cannot be changed while the 2 point sweep is running However the range keys remain active Figure 8 1 Math configuration menu tree CONFIG OFF COMP OHMS Remote math operations VOLT COEFF VAR ALPHA Math commands Table 8 3 summarizes commands to control the built in math functions See Section 18 Calculate subsystems for more detailed information on these and other math commands Table 8 3 Math commands Command Description CALCulate MATH NAME lt name gt _ Select match expression name POWER OFFCOMPOHM VOLTCOEF VARALPHA CALCulate STATe lt state gt Enable disable mat
627. ulse Mode Vpls or Ipls displayed you can select the DC Mode by pressing CONFIG V or I selecting the SHAPE menu item and then selecting DC Pulse Mode operation is covered in Section 5 There are two methods to measure ohms auto ohms and manual ohms When using auto ohms the SourceMeter operates as a conventional constant current source ohmmeter or DMM To use this method simply select an ohms measurement range or use autorange and take the reading from the display When using auto ohms the default test current var ies with the ohms range as summarized in Table 4 1 NOTE You cannot change the test current in the auto ohms mode If you attempt to change the source current in auto ohms the SourceMeter will display an error message With the manual ohms mode you can select either source V or source I to make ohms measurements and the unit will automatically compute the resistance reading using the V I measurement method After configuring the desired source and selecting a voltage or current measuring range select the Q measurement method to display the calculated V I ohms reading NOTE To achieve optimum accuracy the SourceMeter measures both V and I and uses these values in ohms calculations with source readback enabled The mea sured source value is more accurate than the programmed source value For remote operation the user specifies the functions to measure See the resistance measurement accuracy specifications
628. urn on output INIT Start measurements OPC Send OPC to query Output Queue Additional code required to test for 1 in Output Queue SAV lt NRf gt save Save present setup in memory RCL lt NRf gt recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters 0 Memory location 0 1 Memory location 1 2 Memory location 2 3 Memory location 3 4 Memory location 4 Use the SAV command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command The RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Five setup configurations can be saved and recalled The SourceMeter ships from the factory with SYSTem PRESet defaults loaded into the available setup memory If a recall error occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Common Commands 16 5 SAV RCL programming example Table 16 3 summarizes the basic command sequence for saving and recalling a setup The present setup is stored in memory location 2 GPIB defaults are restored and the memory location 2 setup is recalled Table 16 3 SAV RCL programming example Command Description SAV 2 Save present setup in memory location 2 RST Restore GPIB defaults RCL 2 Recall location 2 setup RST reset Return SourceMeter to GPIB defaults When the RST command is se
629. us Byte summary bits are reset SPE SPD serial polling The SPE SPD General Bus Command sequence is used to serial poll the SourceMeter Serial polling obtains the serial poll byte status byte Typically serial polling is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line 15 10 Status Structure 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status byte and service request commands The commands to program and read the Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register are listed in Table 15 3 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 15 5 and Reading registers page 15 6 NOTE To reset the bits of the Service Request Enable Register to 0 use 0 as the param eter value for the SRE command i e SRE 0 Table 15 3 Status Byte and Service Request Enable Register commands Command Description Default STB Read Status Byte Register SRE lt NDN gt or lt NRf gt Program the Service Request Enable Register Note lt NDN gt Bxx x Binary format each x 1 or 0 Hx Hexadecimal format x 0 to FF Qx Octal format x 0 to 377 lt NRf gt 0to 255 Decimal format SRE Read the Service Request Enable Register Note CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect on the Service Request Enable Register Programming example set MSS B6 when error occurs The first command of sequence i
630. us management lines help to ensure proper interface control and management These lines are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN line is one of the more important management lines The state of this line determines how information on the data bus is to be interpreted IFC Interface Clear As the name implies the IFC line controls clearing of instru ments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to place the instrument on the bus in the remote mode EOI End or Identify The EOI is usually used to mark the end of a multi byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request This line is used by devices when they require service from the controller Handshake lines The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending informa tion while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or lis teners receiving the information The three handshake lines are DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid D 6 IEFEE 488 Bus Overview 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual NRED Not Ready For
631. us messages See Appendix B The SourceMeter status model Figure 15 1 shows how the two queues are structured with the other registers Output queue The output queue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instrument For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the Output Queue When data is placed in the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register sets A data message is cleared from the Output Queue when it is read The Output Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Output Queue clears the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register A message is read from the Output Queue by addressing the SourceMeter to talk after the appropriate query is sent 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 19 Error queue The Error Queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the Error Queue When a message is placed in the Error Queue the Error Available EAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set An error status message is cleared from the Error Queue when it is read The Error Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Error Queue clears the EAV bit in the Status Byte Register The Error Queue holds up to 10 error status messages The commands to read the Error Queue are listed in Table 15 9 When you read a single message in the Error Queue
632. ut will remain on after all programmed source measure operations are completed Beware of hazardous voltage 30VDC 42 4 peak to peak that may be present on the output terminals With auto output off enabled an initiation will start operation immedi ately The source output will automatically turn on at the beginning of each SDM source delay measure cycle and turn off after each mea surement is completed Abort source measure cycle ABORt Abort operation Description When this action command is sent the SourceMeter aborts operation and returns to the idle state A faster way to return to idle is to use the DCL or SDC command With auto output off enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON the output will remain on if operation is terminated before the output has a chance to automatically turn off Program trigger model COUNt lt n gt ARM SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt n gt Set arm count TRIGger SEQuence 1 COUNt lt n gt Set trigger count Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify count see NOTE DEFault Sets count to MINimum Sets count to 1 MAXimum See NOTE INFinite ARM COUNt only NOTE The product of arm count and trigger count cannot exceed 2500 Query Description COUNt Queries programmed count COUNt DEFault Queries RST default count COUNt MINimum Queries lowest allowable count COUNt MAXimum Queries largest allowable count This command is used to specify how many times an operation is per formed in
633. utcome of the test FAIL or PASS condition Note that branch on FAIL is available only via remote See Section 10 Source memory sweep for more information NOTE CALC2 CLIM FAIL SML and CALC2 CLIM PASS SML are mutually exclusive and cannot be used simultaneously 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 43 BCONtrol lt name gt CALCulate2 CLIMits BCONtrol lt name gt Control Digital I O port pass fail update Parameters lt name gt IMMediate Update output when first failure occurs END Update output after sweep is completed Query BCONtrol Query when digital output will update Description This command is used to control when the digital output will update to the pass or fail bit pattern The pass or fail bit pattern tells the handler to stop the testing process and place the DUT in the appropriate bin With IMMediate selected the digital output will update immediately to the bit pattern for the first failure in the testing process If all the tests pass the output will update to the pass bit pattern With END selected the digital output will not update to the pass or fail bit pattern until the SourceMeter completes the sweep or list operation This allows multiple test cycles to be performed on DUT With the use of a scanner card multi element devices i e resistor network can be tested If for example you did not use END and the first element in the device package passed the pass bit patt
634. value 1 8 Getting Started 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Operation keys EDIT Select source or compliance reading for editing TOGGLE Toggle display positions of source and measure readings or display V and measurements LOCAL Cancel remote operation REL Enable disable relative reading on present function FILTER Display digital filter status for present function and toggle filter on off LIMIT Perform configured limit tests TRIG Trigger a measurement from the front panel SWEEP Start configured sweep lt and p gt Move through parameter values or selections within functions and operations DIGITS Change number of digits of display resolution SPEED Change measurement speed by selecting accuracy or specifying NPLC STORE Set buffer size and enable reading storage RECALL Display stored readings and timestamp CONFIG Press CONFIG and then appropriate key to configure function or operation MENU Access and configure Main Menu selections When entering numeric data use to clear reading to minimum absolute value EXIT Cancels selection Use to back out of menu structures ENTER Accepts selection RANGE keys A Moves to next higher range increments digit moves to next selection v Moves to next lower range decrements digit moves to previous selection AUTO Enables or disables measurement auto range Annunciators EDIT Instrument in edit mode ERR Questionable reading invalid cal step REM Instrument in GPIB remote mode
635. vel and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur Command path rules Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional e g SENSe If the root is optional simply treat a command word on the next level as the root For fastest operation do not send optional data The colon at the beginning of a program message is optional and need not be used However eliminating the first colon will result in fastest operation Example e stat pres stat pres When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next command level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which is used to sep arate commands within the program message see next rule e When the path pointer detects a colon that immediately follows a semicolon it resets to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Executing a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Using common and SCPI commands in the same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same message as long as they are separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any com mand level and will not affect the path pointer Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program message terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line f
636. vides information on preventing SourceMeter over heating including power equations e Source delay measure cycle Describes the various phases of the source delay measure cycle as well as sweep waveforms Operating boundaries Covers voltage and current operating boundaries for source and sink operation I source and V source and source measure modes e Basic circuit configurations Covers basic circuit configurations for source I source V and measure only operating modes e Guard Covers cable guard ohms guard and guard sense Data flow Describes measurement readings math rel and limits operation and how data is stored in the buffer 6 2 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Compliance limit When sourcing voltage the SourceMeter can be set to limit current Conversely when sourcing current the SourceMeter can be set to limit voltage The SourceMeter output will not exceed the compliance limit 2400 Current limit can be set from 1nA to 1 05A and the voltage limit can be set from 200nV to 210V 2410 Current limit can be set from 1nA to 1 05A and the voltage limit can be set from 200nV to 1 1kV 2420 Current limit can be set from 10nA to 3 15A and the voltage limit can be set from 200pV to 63V 2425 and 2430 DC Mode Current limit can be set from 10nA to 3 15A and the voltage limit can be set from 200nV to 105V 2430 Pulse Mode Current limit ca
637. virtually OmA at 40V Conversely as resistance decreases the slope of the DUT load line decreases At zero resistance shorted output the SourceMeter will source 100mA at virtually OV Regardless of the load voltage will never exceed the programmed compliance of 40V 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Source Measure Concepts 6 25 Figure 6 11 I Source operating examples Voltage Limit Load Line Operating Point Current Source Load Line I Source I lt 100mA Vu ls R 100mA 200 20V A Normal I Source Operation Voltage Limit Load Line Operating Point 40V Current Source Load Line 50mA 100mA I Source Is l Vy R 40V 800Q 50mA B I Source In Compliance 6 26 Source Measure Concepts 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual V Source operating boundaries Figure 6 12 and Figure 6 13 show the operating boundaries for the V Source Only the first quadrant of operation is covered Operation in the other three quadrants is similar 2400 Figure 6 12A shows the output characteristics for the Model 2400 V Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 21V at 1 05A or 210V at 105mA Note that when sourcing more than 21V current is limited to 105mA 2410 Figure 6 12B shows the output characteristics for the Model 2410 V Source As shown the SourceMeter can output up to 21V at 1 05A or 1100V at 21mA Note that when sourcing more than 21V current is limited to 21mA 2420
638. voltage spikes may appear on the terminals of the SourceMeter These voltage spikes could be at hazardous levels 42 4V peak and could damage sensitive DUTs Never touch external cir cuitry or the test leads when powering up the SourceMeter It is good practice to always disconnect DUTs from the SourceMeter before pow ering up the SourceMeter Hazardous voltage may be present on the output and guard terminals To prevent electrical shock that could cause injury or death NEVER make or break connections to the SourceMeter while the output is on OUTPUT indicator light on If on press the ON OFF key to turn the output off OFF message displayed Hazardous voltages may be present on the output and guard terminals To prevent electrical shock that could cause injury or death NEVER make or break connections to the SourceMeter while the unit is on Power off the equipment from the front panel or disconnect the main power cord from the rear of the SourceMeter before handling cables connected to the outputs Putting the equipment into standby mode does not guarantee the outputs are not powered if a hardware or soft ware fault occurs Front rear terminals selection The OUTPUT HI and LO and SENSE HI and LO terminals are accessible from both the front and rear panels The GUARD GUARD SENSE and EARTH chassis ground terminals are only accessible from the rear panel Front panel terminals selection The FRONT REAR TERMINALS key is used to
639. will flow into the SourceMeter NOTE The sink operating limits are shown in Section 6 Operating boundaries Battery charging discharging WARNING WARNING To prevent personal injury or damage to the SourceMeter do not attempt to charge non rechargeable batteries Some of the common batteries than can be charged with a SourceMeter are Nickel Cadmium Ni Cd Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH Lithium Ion Li ion Rechargeable Alkaline Lead Acid If you are working with a battery type that is not listed here please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Applica tions Engineers at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only to obtain technical assistance Always follow the battery manufacturers requirements for charging or discharging batteries using a SourceMeter Failure to properly charge or discharge batteries may cause them to leak or explode resulting in personal injury and property damage Over voltage and current pro tection should be provided in the charge circuit external to the SourceMeter when charging batteries without build in protection 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Basic Source Measure Operation 3 23 Do not attempt to charge or discharge batteries exceeding the current or voltage requirements listed below Model 2400 21V 1 05A or 210V 105mA Model 2410 21V 1 05A or 1100V 21mA Model 2420 21V 3 15A or 63V 1 05A Model 2425 21V 3 15A or 105V 1 05A Model 24
640. x 2 3 5 12 Description These commands are used to read the results of LIMIT 1 LIMIT 2 LIMIT 3 and LIMIT 5 to LIMIT 12 tests 0 Limit test passed 1 Limit test failed The response message 0 or 1 only tells you if a limit test has passed or failed For Limit 2 Limit 3 and Limit 5 12 it does not tell you which limit upper or lower has failed To determine which limit has failed you will have to read the Measurement Event Register See STATus subsystem page 18 104 Reading the results of a limit test does not clear the fail indication of the test A failure can be cleared by using a CLEar command Composite testing PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt NDN CALCulate2 CLIMits PASS SOURce2 lt NRf gt lt NDN gt Specify composite pass pattern Parameters lt NRf gt 0 to 7 3 bit Decimal value 0 to 15 4 bit Decimal value lt NDN gt Oto b111 3 bit Binary value Oto b1111 4 bit Binary value 0 to q7 3 bit Octal value 0 to q17 4 bit Octal value 0 to h7 3 bit Hexadecimal value 0 to hF 4 bit Hexadecimal value Query SOURce2 Query programmed source value 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 41 Description This command is used to define the 3 bit or 4 bit output pattern for the Digital I O Port when there are no failures Note that the output value can be specified in binary octal decimal or hexadecimal format Use the table provided in the Description for the
641. xam ple for a binary value of 100101 bits B5 B2 and BO are set The returned value can be in the binary decimal hexadecimal or octal format The FORMat SREGister command is used to select the data format for the returned value Table 15 2 For non decimal formats one of the following headers will accompany the returned value to indicate which format is selected B Header for binary values H Header for hexadecimal values Q Header for octal values Table 15 2 Data format commands for reading status registers Command Description Default FORMat SREGister lt name gt Select data format for reading status registers ASCii lt name gt ASCii Decimal format HEXadecimal Hexadecimal format OCTal Octal format BINary Binary format 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Status Structure 15 7 Status byte and service request SRQ Service request is controlled by two 8 bit registers the Status Byte Register and the Ser vice Request Enable Register Figure 15 3 shows the structure of these registers Figure 15 3 Status byte and service request SRQ Status Summary Message lt Read by Serial Poll Service Request Generation Serial Poll lt Read by STB Service OSB ESB MAVIQSB EAV MSB Request B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Enable Register OSB Operation Summary Bit MSS Master Summary Status RQS Request for Service ESB
642. y Any Failures Displ Pauly Output First Fail Pattern Test Another Device 2 Output Pass Pattern Yes No Press LIMIT key 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Contact Check Function Figure F 6 Sorting mode contact check limit testing Start Turn Output ON and press LIMIT key Wait for SOT pulse from handler Perform Contact Check Perform Source Measure action Perform Limit 4 Test 2 Output Limit 4 Fail Pattern Yes Output Pass Pattern Perform No Limit 1 Test 2 Output Limit 1 Fail Pattern Yes Output Pass Pattern Yes Output Limit 2 3 5 12 Pass Pattern 1 Another Device No Press LIMIT F 9 F 10 Contact Check Function 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Binning failure indications grading mode As previously discussed it is possible to place a fail pattern on the Digital I O Port when contact check fails It is important to note that depending on whether source auto clear is enabled and when the bin control is done certain issues arise when running a test with a normal voltage or current sweep and a source memory sweep Four possible effects on sweep operation may occur when using the digital output and contact check Refer to Binning systems page 12 11 for a description of binning and to Front panel output configuration page 13 7 for details on source auto off functionality When perfo
643. y Disable display immediately Never disable display Turn display off during sweep Turn display off during buffer store 1 34 Getting Started Table 1 12 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep digits speed and output configuration menus Configuration menu item Description CONFIG SWEEP CONFIGURE SWEEPS TYPE STAIR LOG CUSTOM POINTS ADJUST POINTS INIT SRC MEMORY START POINTS SWEEP COUNT FINITE INFINITE SOURCE RANGING BEST FIXED AUTO RANGE FIXED CONFIG DIGITS DISPLAY DIGITS CONFIG SPEED SPEED ACCURACY MENU FAST MED NORMAL HI ACCURACY OTHER CONFIG STORE STORE TIMESTAMP ABSOLUTE DELTA Configure sweeps Select sweep type Staircase sweep program START STOP STEP Log sweep program START STOP POINTS Custom sweep program parameters Program number of sweep points Set individual point values Set first point value Source memory sweep set parameters Set first point value Set number of points Set sweep count Program sweep count value Never ending sweep Set sweep ranging mode Best fixed range based on maximum value Auto range during sweep Set fixed source range Set display number of digits Select 3 5 4 5 5 5 or 6 5 Set measurement speed Fast speed Medium speed Normal Maximum accuracy Program NPLCs number power line cycles Configure data store timestamp Absolute timestamp Delta timestamp
644. y DATA Query the defined text message Description These commands define text messages for the display A message can be as long as 20 characters for the top display and up to 32 characters for the bottom display A space is counted as a character Excess message characters result in an error An indefinite block message must be the only command in the program message or the last command in the program message If you include a command after an indefinite block message on the same line it will be treated as part of the message and is displayed instead of executed STATe lt b gt DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control message top display DISPlay WINDow 2 TEXT STATe lt b gt Control message bottom display Parameters lt b gt 0 or OFF Disable text message for specified display 1 or ON Enable text message for specified display Query STATe Query state of message mode for specified display Description These commands enable and disable the text message modes When enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display GPIB Operation A user defined text message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing the LOCAL key or sending LOCAL 27 cancels the message and disables the text message mode RS 232 Operation A user defined test message can be cancelled by sending the S YSTem LOCal command or pressing the L
645. y assuming that END binning control is selected After the sweep is completed the SourceMeter sends the out put pattern stored in memory This is the output pattern for the first test failure The com ponent handler places the DUT package into the bin assigned to that particular failure The handler selects the next resistor network and the testing process is repeated 12 16 Limit Testing 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Figure 12 8 Binning system multiple element devices Switching Mainframe Handler Trigger Link Scanner Card rc Multi Element Device Package HI Trigger Link SourceMeter Trigger layer configured to output trigger pulse after each measurement 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 17 Digital output clear pattem After every binning operation the digital output needs to be reset to a clear pattern which serves as a no action condition for the component handler The SourceMeter can be programmed to automatically clear the digital output after the pass or fail pattern is sent With auto clear enabled you can specify the required pulse width delay for the pass or fail pattern The default auto clear pulse width is 10us When not using auto clear you must return the digital output to its clear pattern from the DIGOUT AUTO CLEAR option of the CONFIG LIMIT menu This option also sets the pass fail pattern and pulse width Enabling auto clear To enable auto
646. y are available and the second value indi cates how many bytes are reserved to store readings POINts lt n gt TRACe POINts lt n gt Specify buffer size Parameters lt n gt 1 to 2500 Specify buffer size MINimum 1 MAXimum 2500 DEFault 100 Query POINts Query buffer size POINts MINimum Query smallest allowable buffer size POINts MAXimum Query largest allowable buffer size POINts DEFault Query RST default buffer size Description This command is used to specify the size of the buffer ACTual TRACe POINts ACTual Query number of stored readings Description This query command is used to determine how many stored readings are in the buffer After sending this command and addressing the unit to talk the number of readings stored in the buffer will be sent to the computer 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual SCPI Command Reference 18 119 FEED lt name gt TRACe FEED lt name gt Specify readings source Parameters lt name gt SENSe 1 Put raw readings in buffer CALCulate 1 Put Calcl readings in buffer CALCulate2 Put Calc2 readings in buffer Query FEED Query buffer feed Description This command is used to select the source of readings to be placed in the buffer With SENSe 1 selected raw readings are placed in the buffer when storage is performed With CALCulate 1 selected math expression results Calc1 are placed in the buffer With CALCulate2 selected Calc2 readings are placed in the buffer
647. y connected to the DUT as explained in Section 2 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Sweep Operation 10 17 WARNING Hazardous voltages gt 30V rms can appear on the selected INPUT OUTPUT LO terminal when performing fast pulse sweep operations To eliminate this shock hazard connect the LO terminal to earth ground If using the front panel terminals ground the front panel LO terminal If using the rear panel terminals ground the rear panel LO terminal The ground connection can be made at the chassis ground screw on the rear panel or to a known safety earth ground Performing a linear staircase sweep Step 1 Configure source measure functions Configure the SourceMeter for the desired source measure operations as follows Select the desired source function by pressing SOURCE V or SOURCE I 2 Set the source level and compliance limit to the desired values 3 Press MEAS V or MEAS I to select the desired measurement function then choose the desired measurement range See Section 3 Basic Source Measure Operation for more information The source level you set becomes the bias level for the sweep When turned on the output will maintain this bias level until the sweep is started Typically OV or OA is used as the bias level If using a fixed measurement range make sure it can accommodate every measurement point in the sweep Otherwise use autoranging Step 2 Configure sweep Configure the sweep as follows Pr
648. y identify the last byte in a multi byte transfer sequence thus allowing data words of various lengths to be transmitted easily IFC Interface Clear IFC is used to clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and listener idle states ATN Attention The controller sends ATN while transmitting addresses or multiline commands SRQ Service Request SRQ is asserted by a device when it requires service from a controller Universal multiline commands Universal commands are those multiline commands that require no addressing All devices equipped to implement such commands will do so simultaneously when the commands are transmitted As with all multiline commands these commands are transmitted with ATN true LLO Local Lockout LLO is sent to the instrument to lock out the LOCAL key and thus all the front panel controls DCL Device Clear DCL is used to return instruments to some default state Usually instruments return to the power up conditions SPE Serial Poll Enable SPE is the first step in the serial polling sequence which is used to determine which device has requested service SPD Serial Poll Disable SPD is used by the controller to remove all devices on the bus from the serial poll mode and is generally the last command in the serial polling sequence 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview D 9 Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multi
649. y specifies the pulse width of line 4 The pulse width of lines 1 2 and 3 is actually 20usec longer Line 4 is skewed because it is used as the end of test EOT strobe by category register component han dlers Lines 1 2 and 3 establish the bit pattern and then 10usec later the SOT strobe tells the handler to read the bit pattern and perform the binning operation This 10sec offset is used to make sure the correct bit pattern is read by the handler After the pass fail is read by the handler the digital output returns to the clear pattern with auto clear enabled 2400 Series SourceMeter User s Manual Limit Testing 12 19 Configuring and performing limit tests Configuring limit tests Press CONFIG and then LIMIT to display the CONFIG LIMITS MENU The limits con figuration menu is structured shown below and in Figure 12 10 Note that bullets indicate the primary items of the limit menu and dashes indicate the options of each menu or sub menu item Refer to Section 1 Rules to navigate menus to configure the limit tests e DIGOUT Use this menu item to control the following Digital I O aspects SIZE Use to select 3 BIT or 4 BIT Digital I O bit size In the 3 BIT mode Digital I O line 4 becomes the EOT EOT BUSY or BUSY signal depending on the selected END OF TEST mode In the 4 BIT mode Digital I O line 4 is controlled manually if the END OF TEST mode is set to EOT MODE Use to select GRADING or SORTING mode

Model 2400 Series SourceMeter User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents